2008-2009 Ssang Yong Rexton Y285 Owner Manual

General 0 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 0-2

5
6
Dimensions ................................................... 0-3
7
Specifications .............................................. 0-4
8
Vehicle Identification .................................. 0-8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
0 Descriptions Capacity Specifications

Engine Oil D27DTP 8.5 Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
1 D27DT 8.5 (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 or 229.3 or 229.31 for DSL/GSL
ENG without CDPF)
2 G32D 9.0
(Approved by MB Sheet 229.31 for DSL ENG with CDPF)
3 Viscosity: MB sheet No. 224.1
4 Engine Coolant D27DTP 11.0 ~ 11.5 Ssangyong genuine coolant

D27DT 11.0 ~ 11.5 Anti-Freeze:SYC-1025
5 G32D 11.5 ~ 12.0 Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
Automatic Transmission Fluid 8.0 Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell ATF 134 or Fuchs ATF 134)
6
Manual Transmission Fluid 2WD 3.4 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II)
7 4WD 3.6
Transfer Case Fluid AWD 1.1 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
8
TOD 1.4
9 Part Time 1.4
Axle Oil Front Non IOP 1.4 , 1.5 Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
10 Ssangyong genuine oil
IOP 0.78
11 (Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
Rear Rigid 2.0 Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
IRS 1.5
(Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
13 Brake / Clutch Fluid As required Ssangyong genuine oil (DOT4)
14 Power Steering Fluid 1.0 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
15 WARNING D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up

• Use only Ssangyong recommended fluids and lubricants. D27DT: Diesel 2.7, G32D: Gasoline
16 • Keep the specified levels when adding or replacing the fluids.
• Do not mix any different types or brands of oils or fluids. This may cause damages.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-2
DIMENSIONS Unit: mm
Top View Front View 0

1
2
3
1,870
4
5
1,550 6
7
8
Side View Rear View
9
10
11
1,760 12
(1,830)
13
14
2,820 15
1,540
4,720
16
* ( ) : Optional
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-3
* ( ): Optional, [ ]: 2WD, < >: DPF
SPECIFICATIONS (I) D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up, D27DT: Diesel 2.7, G32D: Gasoline
0 Descriptions D27DTP D27DT G32D

1 General Overall length (mm) 4,720 ← ←
2 Overall width (mm) 1,870 ← ←
Overall height (mm) 1,760 (1,830) ← ←
3 Gross vehicle weight (kg) 2,760 ← ←
4 Curb vehicle A/T 2,099 2,101 2,088
weight (kg) M/T _ 2,088 _
5
Fuel Diesel ← Gasoline
6 Fuel tank capacity ( ) 78 ← ←
7 Minimum turning radius 5.7m ← ←
Engine Numbers of cylinders/
8 5 / 17.5:1 5 / 18:1 (EURO IV 17.5:1) 6 / 10:1
Compression ratio
9 Total displacement (cc) 2,696 ← 3,199
Camshaft arrangement DOHC ← ←
10 Max. power A/T 186 PS / 4,000 rpm 165 PS / 4,000 rpm
220 ps / 6,100 rpm
11 <180 PS / 4,000 rpm> <161 PS / 4,000 rpm>
M/T _ 165 PS / 4,000 rpm _
12 Max. torque A/T 402 Nm / 1,600 ~ 3,000 rpm 340 Nm / 1,800 ~ 3,250 rpm 312 Nm / 4,600 rpm
13 M/T _ 340 Nm / 1,800 ~ 3,250 rpm _
Idle speed 750 ± 20 rpm ← 700 ± 50 rpm

14
Cooling system Water- cooled /
← ←
15 forced circulation
Coolant capacity ( ) 11.0 ~ 11.5 ← 11.5 ~ 12.0
16
Lubrication type Gear pump,
← ←
forced circulation
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-4
SPECIFICATIONS (II)
Descriptions D27DTP D27DT G32D 0

Engine Max. oil capacity ( ) 1
9.2 ← 9.8
(when shipping) 2
Turbocharger and Turbocharger, _
← 3
cooling type air-cooled
Manual Operating type _ Semi- Remote control, _ 4
Transmission floor change type
Gear ratio 1st _ 4.315 _ 5
_ 2.475 _
2nd 6
3rd _ 1.536 _
4th _ 1.000 _ 7
5th _ 0.807 _ 8
Reverse _ 3.919 _
9
Automatic Model Electronic,
← ←
Transmission 5-speed 10
Operating type Floor change type ← ←
11
Gear ratio 1st 3.595 ← 3.951
2nd 2.186 ← 2.423 12
3rd 1.405 ← 1.486 13
4th 1.000 ← 1.000
5th 0.831 ← 0.833
14
Reverse 1st 3.167 ← 3.147 15
Reverse 2nd 1.926 ← 1.930
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-5
SPECIFICATIONS (III) * ( ) Optional

1 Transfer Case Model AWD Part-time (TOD) Part-time (AWD)
2 Type Planetary gear type ← ←
Gear ratio High (4H) _ ←
1.000 : 1
3 Low (4L) _ ← (AWD: _)
2.483 : 1
4 Clutch (M/T) Operating type _ Hydraulic type _
Disc type _ Dry single diaphragm type _

5
Power Type Rack and pinion ← ←
6 Steering Steering Inner 35.72° ← ←
angle 32.11° ← ←
7 Outer
Front Axle Drive shaft type Ball joint type ← ←
8 Axle housing type IOP type Build-up type Build-up type (IOP type)
9 Rear Axle Drive shaft type Semi-floating type
Semi-floating type
Semi-floating type
(Ball joint type) (ball joint type)
10 Axle housing type Build-up type (IRS type) Build-up type Build-up type (IRS type)
11 Brake Master cylinder type Tandem type ← ←
Booster type Vacuum assisted
12 booster type
← ←
13 Brake typ Front wheels Disc type ← ←

Rear wheels Disc type ← ←
14
Parking brake Cable type (EPB) ← ←
15 Suspension Front suspension Wishbone + coil spring ← ←
16 Rear suspension 5-link + coil spring 5-link + coil spring
(Multi-link + Coil spring) 5-link + coil spring (Multi-link + Coil spring)
(EAS) (EAS)
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-6

Air Conditioner Refrigerant (capacity) R - 134a / 720 ± 30g
(R - 134a / 1120 ± 30g)
← ← 1
Electrical Battery type / Capacity (V-AH) MF / 12 - 90 ← ← 2
Starter capacity (V-kW) 12 - 2.2 ← 12 - 1.8
3
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12 - 140 (12 - 120) ← 12 - 120
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-7
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
0 1. Engine Number 2. Chassis Number
1
2
3
4
5
6 Gasoline Engine: The engine num- The chassis number is stamped on
7 ber is stamped on the lower area of the frame behind the front right tire.
cylinder block in exhaust manifold
8 side.
9
10 3. Certification Label
11
12
13
14
15 D27DTP D27DT
16 Diesel Engine (D27DTP, D27DT): The engine number is stamped The certification label is located on
on the lower area of cylinder block behind the Intake manifold. the driver’s door sill.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-8
Safety Precautions 1 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Checks before Starting a Journey .............. 1-2

5
6
Starting the Engine and Driving Off the
Vehicle ......................................................... 1-5 7
Safety Precautions ...................................... 1-7 8
Direct Injection Type Diesel Engine ......... 1-13 9
Precautions Regarding Unauthorized 10
Modification & Alteration .......................... 1-16 11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY
0 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY (I)

1
2 DAILY CHECK CHECK THE VEHICLE INSIDE
• Check the engine oil, brake fluid and washer fluid level. 1. Make sure that all doors including the tailgate are prop-
3 • Check the drive belts for wear and looseness. erly closed.
4 • Check the fluid leaks underbody.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat for comfortable driving.
Perform daily check everyday before starting a journey.
5 3. Adjust the outside and inside rear view mirrors.
6 4. Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occu-
pants have fastened theirs properly.
7 CHECK THE VEHICLE OUTSIDE
5. Check operation of the parking brake.
8 1. Check the tire inflation and wear.
6. Check that all appropriate warning lights are operat-
9 2. Check the engine oil and other fluid/oil levels in the ing when turning the ignition key to the “ON” position.
engine compartment.
10 7. Check the operations of the clutch pedal, accelerator
3. Clean the windshield and rear glasses, side mirrors, pedal, and brake pedal.
11 and room mirrors.
8. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the danger
12 4. Make sure that the engine hood and tailgate are prop- area around the vehicle.
13 erly closed.

14 area around the vehicle.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
1-2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY (II) 0
1
CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT • Check all warning lights, indicators and gauges (fuel,
vehicle speed, tachometer etc.) with the ignition switch 2
• Make sure that the doors, sunroof, tailgate and fuel filler “ON”.
door are completely closed before driving.
3
• Check the pedal (brake, accelerator, clutch) operations.
• Adjust the driver’s seat, head restraint and rearview mir- • Make sure that there are not any obstacles around the 4
rors for comfortable driving. veh icle.
• Put away things that interfere with driving. 5
CAUTION 6
• Do not place any objects such as can under the driver’s feet 7
as it might interfere with applying your brake, clutch or ac-
celerator pedals.
8
• Make sure that the floor mat is firmly fixed and has proper
thickness. Otherwise, it might interfere with your pedal 9
operation.
10
• Adjust the outside and inside rearview mirrors to the
desired position.
11
CAUTION
12
Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, rearview mirrors, or 13
steering wheel while driving. Adjustments should be done be-
fore driving. 14
• Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat
15
belts.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1-3
0 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY (III)
1
FUEL RECOMMENDATION Do not Use Methanol
2 Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be
Commercially available high-quality fuels are suitable. used in your Rexton. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
3 Fuel quality has a decisive influence on the power output, performance and damage components of the fuel system.
driveability and life of the engine. The additives contained
4 in the fuel play an important role in this connection. You NOTE
5 should therefore use only high-quality fuels. The warranty policy will not cover damage of the fuel system
and any performance problems that are caused by the use of
Diesel Engine
6 methanol or fuel containing methanol.
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher.
7 Operation in Foreign Countries
Gasoline Engine
If you are going to drive your Rexton in another country,
8 Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-igni- be sure to:
tion (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for
9 resultant damage.
• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Check that a suitable fuel is available.
10 CAUTION
Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage Containers
11 For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer. For safety reasons (particularly when using noncommer-
12 cial fueling systems) fuel containers, pumps and hoses
CAUTION must be properly earthed.
13 Engine and exhaust system will be damaged. Static electricity build up can occur under certain atmo-
• Do not use leaded fuel to the vehicle for unleaded fuel.
spheric and fuel flow conditions if unearthed hoses, par-
14 ticularly plastic, are fitted to the fuel dispensing pump.
• Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Num-
15 ber recommended for your country by Ssangyong. It is therefore recommended that earthed pumps with integrally
It is not covered by warranty. earthed hoses be used, and that storage containers be prop-
16 erly earthed during all noncommercial fueling operations.
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE AND DRIVING OFF THE VEHICLE
M/T A/T 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1. Apply the parking brake. 3. • Automatic transmission equipped vehicle
2. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the
9
Move the selector lever to the “P” position and depress
danger area around the vehicle. the brake pedal. 10
• Manual transmission equipped vehicle
CAUTION
Move the gearshift lever to the Neutral position and fully
11
The engine in an automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be
depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal. 12
started only when the selector lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle can be started
only when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. WARNING 13
Do not turn the ignition key to the “START” position while the Depress the brake pedal when the selector lever is at the “P” 14
engine is running. It could result in serious start motor damage. position. Never depress the accelerator pedal.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
6. Warm up the engine in idling speed (below -15°C: approx
0 3 minutes).
1 7. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the
danger area around the vehicle.
2 8. Release the parking brake.
3 9. • Automatic transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D”
4 position. Make sure that the position indicator of “D”
comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin
5 moving.
6 Keep the brake pedal and clutch pedal depressed and
7 A/T shift into the “1” position. Release the brake pedal and
gradually depress the accelerator while slowly releasing
8 the clutch to begin moving.
4. • Diesel engine equipped vehicle:
9 Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to
10 the “ON” position without depressing the accelerator ENGINE STOP
pedal. As soon as the glow indicator ( ) goes out, turn 1. Keep the brake pedal depressed even after the vehicle
11 the key to the “START” position to start the engine. has been stopped.
12 • Gasoline engine equipped vehicle: 2. Automatic transmission equipped vehicle: Place the gear
Turn the ignition key to “ON” position and check the ap- selector lever to “P” position.
13 propriate warning lights are operating. Manual transmission equipped vehicle: Place the gear
5. Release the key when the engine starts. If your vehicle is shift lever to neutral position
14 3. Apply the parking brake.
equipped with a manual transmission and is engaged
15 at neutral (N), it is ok to release the clutch pedal when 4. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder.
the engine runs.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (I) 0

Ignition Key/Remote Control Key Air Bag 1
1. Never use any duplicated key not provided by 1. Never impact the air bag installations by hands or tools. 2
Ssangyong. It may cause a fire due to an overload in 2. The air bag system serves as a supplement to the
the electric circuit. seat belt. Make sure that you and your passengers 3
2. If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key always fasten the seat belts properly even if the air
set to prevent from theft. bags are installed in the vehicle. 4
3. Avoid shock to the transmitter in the remote control key 3. Do not place any objects on the air bag inflation location. 5
and do not get it wet. You may be injured by those objects during deployment.
4. Only use the batteries with the same specifications to re- 4. The air bag system should be inspected 10 years af- 6
place the discharged battery. Do not reverse the polarity. ter installation regardless of its appearance and other
conditions. 7
Turbocharger System (Diesel Engine 5. Repairs to the air bag system should be done only
Equipped Vehicle) by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser- 8
If the oil supply for the bearing assembly of the fast rotat- vice Center.
9
ing turbo charger stops, the stop will cause the turbo- 6. Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not
charger to seize. Therefore, the following cares are nec- attempt to modify any air bag components including the 10
essary to prevent the seizure. steering wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness.
1. After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes 7. Never install a child restraint in the front seat. The chil- 11
at idle speed (Avoid acceleration or driving off the dren on the restraint could be seriously injured by the
vehicle). air bag in a collision. 12
2. After changing the engine oil and oil filter, start the en- 8. The deployed air bag unit should be removed from 13
gine and let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle speed the vehicle and replaced with a new one.
(Avoid acceleration or driving off the vehicle). 9. When the air bag is deployed, the relevant compo- 14
3. Do not stop the engine immediately after coming back nents will be very hot, so do not touch them until they
from high load driving (such as high speed driving or have cooled down. 15
driving on long slope). Let the engine run for approx. 2 10. A person who is smaller than 140 cm should sit in
minutes at idle speed to cool it down. the rear. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (II)
1 Hazardous Materials Power Window
2 Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters 1. When you operate the rear windows from the driver’s
in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they seat while a child sits in the rear, make sure that no
3 can explode and cause a fire. body part of the child is between the window and the
window frame.
4 Genuine Parts 2. When carrying children in the rear seat, press the rear
Always use only Ssangyong genuine parts for replacement. door window lock switch to make the rear door
5 switches inoperative.
Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused by the
3. Make sure that all passengers have their body parts
6 use of non-Ssangyong genuine parts and accessories.
such as hands inside the vehicle.
7 Tire 4. When closing the windows, be aware of safety condi-
tions before operation.
1. Be sure to use the same size and type of tires from the
8 same manufacturer on all wheels. Otherwise, damage Glass Care
can be caused to the powertrain.
9 2. Keep the specified tire inflation pressure.
1. Be careful not to damage the rear heated when clean-
ing the rear glass.
10 3. Make sure that the spare tire is ready for use at any
2. The rain and automatic light sensors are installed on
time. After installing the spare tire on a wheel, do not
the upper middle front of the windshield (if equipped).
11 drive for a long distance. Instead, visit a nearby dealer
If these sensors are contaminated or covered with vari-
or tire shop to replace the spare tire with a regular tire
ous coating sprays, the automatic rain sensing wipers
12 for driving.
and lights may not work properly.
4. Always check the tire surface for damage and uneven
13 wear before driving and replace it if needed.
5. Using tires of different specifications may cause high
14 fuel consumption, long stopping distance, vehicle body
vibration, heavy steering operation, and poor ABS
15 operation.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (III) 0
Child Restraint 1
WARNING
When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate • Children who have outgrown child restraint systems should 2
child restraint system should always be used. The child re- sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the seat belt. If child’s
straint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight seating position has a shoulder belt which is on or very close 3
and height and properly fit the car’s seat. Accident statistics to the face or neck, move the child close to the center of the
indicate that children are safer when properly restrained in vehicle, slightly inboard of the shoulder belt, or move the child 4
to a position without a shoulder belt if possible.
the rear seat rather than in the front seat.
• Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a 5
WARNING person who is taller than 140 cm.
• Infants and small children should always be restrained in an
6
infant or child restraint.
Warming Up the Engine 7
• NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THE
1. It is recommended to drive off after warming up the
FRONT SEAT WITH FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG.
engine. Driving immediately after starting the engine 8
• A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat
may decrease the engine’s life expectancy. Warm up
can be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates.
the engine before moving your vehicle. 9
Secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
• A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear 2. Do not warm up the engine excessively. Warm up the 10
seat whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger engine just until the coolant temperature gauge begins
seat, adjust the seat as far back as it will go. to move. 11
• When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions 3. Excessive engine warming increases the fuel con-
provided by the manufacturer. sumption and air pollution. An optimized warming up 12
• When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured time is approx. 2 minutes.
with a seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
13
Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up
• Do not hold a child while riding in a vehicle. period. 14
• Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat.
• Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (IV)
1 Driving the Automatic Transmission Equipped 3. While driving, do not depress the brake pedal when the
Vehicle accelerator pedal is depressed. Otherwise, the re-
2 sponse from the accelerator pedal may be delayed.
1. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift the gear se-
3 This symptom is the safety function to protect the
lection lever into the “D” position. Make sure that the vehicle’s drive system. This symptom can be elimi-
4 “D” light is on the instrument cluster. nated if you depress and release the accelerator pedal
Drive off the vehicle by releasing the brake pedal slowly. once when the brake pedal is not depressed.
5 2. To avoid any possible damage to the automatic 4. Do not operate the steering wheel abruptly. This will
transmission, do not abruptly drive off or accelerate the cause unstable driving situations and can end with an
6 vehicle after shifting the gear selection lever into the unexpected accident.
“D” position. Especially on a hill, move the lever to
7 the “D” position with the brake pedal depressed and Stopping and Parking the Vehicle
8 wait for a couple of seconds until the position indicator 1. Never leave infants and children unattended in the ve-
of “D” is on the instrument cluster. hicle with the doors locked. They can move the vehicle
9 3. Your vehicle may move backward on a steep hill even unexpectedly. They can be suffocated in especially hot
if the shift lever is engaged into the “D” position. weather.
10 Therefore, always depress the brake pedal when you 2. When parking the vehicle on a hilly road, apply the park-
need to stop on such a hill. ing brake and chock the blocks under the wheels.
11
Place the gear selector lever to the “P” position
Cautions While Driving
12 (automatic transmission equipped vehicle).
1. Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. 3. If possible, do not stop and park the vehicle on the steep
13 The power steering function and the brake assist func- road.
tion will be deactivated.
14 2. Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, rear view
4. Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags,
oil, or other easily inflammable materials are kept. While
mirrors, or steering wheel while driving. Adjustments
15 should be done before driving.
driving or after immediately driving, the muffler and ex-
haust pipe are hot; inflammable materials near the ve-
16 hicle might cause a fire.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (V) 0
Extinguisher Precautions for Power Window 1
Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to • When closing the front passenger's and rear windows 2
use it. For more information, read the label on the sur- from driver's seat, be aware of safety conditions before
face of the fire extinguisher. operation. Parts of the body can be trapped by the 3
window.
Precautions for Children or Elderly Car • When carrying children in the rear seat, press the win-
4
Passengers dow lock switch to make the rear window switches 5
• Do not leave infants, children or old people alone in the inoperative.
vehicle. An accident can take place if they misuse some • Do not stick any part of body out of window. 6
devices in the vehicle. In addition, the temperature inside
the car can rise when doors or windows are closed dur- 7
ing summer, placing passengers at risk for suffocation. When Sleeping in Your Vehicle
• Do not let children, infants, old people, or a pregnant
8
• Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In
woman sit in the front passenger seat with the airbag. 9
particular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine
The degree of shock of the airbag’s expansion can be
running and the air-conditioner or heater turned on, you
fatal or inflict serious injuries to such passengers.
can suffocate to death. 10
• Keep devices such as the ignition key out of children’s reach
• Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts 11
to avoid damaging the vehicle or prevent accidents.
you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts.
Do Not Stick Any Part of Your Body Out of • While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift 12
the Window lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident.
• While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you
13
Do not stick any part of your body out of the window and
may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby over- 14
sunroof while the car is running or while you are maneuver-
heating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire.
ing to park. You might be hurt by the passing vehicles or other
unseen obstacles. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (VI)
1 No Alchohol and Drugs! Take A Rest! Check for any Passing Vehicle when Getting
2 • Avoid driving for an extended period of time. Driving con- Off
tinuously without rest makes you prone to dozing off and When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for
3 thus causes an accident. For your safety, take a rest ev- passing vehicles or pedestrians. Vehicles or motorcycles
ery 2 hours. coming from the rear, if unchecked, might stumble on you
4 • Driving under the influence of alchohol or drugs is when you open the door.
5 prohibited. It impairs judgment, making driving highly
risky. Drunk driving is also a legal offense. When Loading On Vehicle with 7-Seaters
6 If the third row seats are occupied by passengers, evenly
Do not drive with Tail Gate or Doors Open distribute the luggage in the vehicle inside.
7 • Do not drive with the tail gate open. Otherwise, you can
be suffocated by the exhaust gas. Use Only Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
8 Authorized Service Operation
• If you drive your vehicle with the tail gate open, loose
9 objects inside the vehicle may cause an accident. Have your vehicle checked up or repaired at Ssangyong
• Driving the vehicle with the doors open puts the pas- Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. Repair-
10 senger at risk of being thrown out, which can cause se- ing your vehicle by other service stations will not be covered
rious injury. under the terms of our warranty. And the warranty is also not
11 liable for the problems caused by such repair.
• Always drive the vehicle with the doors and tailgate
12 closed. Doors can be accidentally opened and doors
are opened by children touching knobs. Those may
13 cause a serious accident.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (I) 0

Direct Injection (DI) Type Diesel Engine Warning for Using Low Quality Fuel or Bio Fuel 1
Compared to Indirect Injection (IDI) Type Diesel Engine The fuel system in a DI engine equipped vehicle has many 2
that uses a mechanical fuel injection system, a Direct In- precisely machined components. Using low quality fuel
jection (DI) Type Diesel Engine controls the amount of in- could result in serious damage to the engine due to the 3
jected fuel and the fuel injection timing electronically. This water or impurities in the fuel.
advanced engine enhances the output power and reduces Never use the low quality fuel.
4
the noxious exhaust gas (CO, HC, NOx....). Because the
Direct Injection Diesel Engine is operated by high pres- Diesel Engine
5
sure (1,600 bars), any removal, modification or service of
the engine may contaminate the inside of the system and
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher. 6
cause the system to malfunction. In that case, the mal- Gasoline Engine 7
function and any related systems are not under warranty Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-igni-
of this company. tion (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for re- 8
sultant damage.
9
CAUTION
10
For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer. 11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (II)
1 System Safety Mode
2 When the vehicle has a system error, the vehicle oper- In an initial operating stage, the fuel pump generates the
ates in safety mode to maintain minimum driving condi- operating sound and the FFH heater produces white
3 tions and to prevent the system from being damaged. In smoke. These are normal states to fill the fuel into the
this mode, the engine driving force may be decreased or FFH fuel line.
4 the engine may stall. When this happens, have the sys-
tem checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- Engine Check Indicator
5 thorized Service Center.
The engine check indicator
6 Supplementary Heating Device on the instrument cluster
comes on when the fuel or
7 - FFH (Fuel Fired Heater)
major electronic systems of
This supplementary heater is a fuel burning type and im- the engine are not working
8 proves the heating effect by increasing the engine cool- properly. As a result, the
ant temperature. engine’s power output may
9
- PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) decrease or the engine may
10 This supplementary heater is an electrical air heating type stall. If this happens, please visit the nearest Ssangyong
and installed on the heater outlet port. This device im- dealer or authorized service operator.
11 proves the heating effect by increasing the temperature of When flashing (for vehicles equipped with CDPF)
flowing air into the passenger room.
12 When a particular amount of particulates is collected in
FFH Operation the Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF), these par-
13 ticulates are automatically combusted (regeneration
The FFH system operates up to more than 2 minutes to
process). However, this regeneration may not be per-
14 burn the residual fuel inside the system when stopping
formed due to several operating conditions. And in this
the engine during its operation.
15 case, the engine CHECK indicator flashes. This flashing
Therefore, a certain period of FFH operation after stopping function is to inform the driver to take action for the proper
16 the engine is not a malfunction. regeneration of the filter.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (III) 0
1
Water Separator Warning Light Priming Pump Operating
If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, Conditions 2
drive the vehicle at over 50 km/h for 15 Can be performed when 3
~ 20 minutes to regenerate the CDPF. engine oil is changed
When the amount of particulates is 4
lowered down to a certain limit, the en-
gine CHECK indicator goes off. 5
Catalyst diesel particulate filter When the water level inside of the wa- 6
(CDPF) ter drain in the fuel filter exceeds a cer-
The CDPF is a compound word for tain level, this warning light and an
7
Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) and alarming sound are activated. In Priming Pump
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which
8
addition, the driving force of the vehicle
are exhaust gas after-treatment decreases. If this happens, immediately 9
devices. drain the water from the fuel filter.
Please refer to Chapter 5 “How to drain 10
the water from the fuel filter” in this 1. When completely consumed the
manual. fuel 11
2. After draining the water from the
fuel filter 12
WARNING 3. After replacing the fuel filter 13
• When engine check warning light comes on, immediately stop driving and have the en-
gine system checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. - If this happens, pump fuel until the 14
• Drain the water from fuel filter & water separator immediately after the water separator priming pump is fully filled. Then,
warning light comes on. start the engine. 15
• The fuel system in the engine may get seriously damaged if you keep driving while the
warning light is on. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION
0 PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION (I)

1
Do not modify this vehicle.
2 In particular, modifying your vehicle into the LPG vehicle
If unauthorized modification is made on the vehicle, the
3 company is not liable for repairing the modified parts might bring serious damage to the vehicle's perfor-
even during the term of warranty. Other part problems mance and durability. Not only the engine but also the
4 caused by modification are also not covered. transmission and wheel alignment are excluded from
the warranty.
The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number
5 of precision parts that have passed through countless ex- If you install a wheel dust cover on the tires to enhance
periments and tests. These parts are deeply and system- the beauty of tire parts, the heat caused by friction in brak-
6 ing might bring serious problems in performance, caus-
atically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or al-
7 tered without authorization, said parts may be damaged ing Vapor Lock and Fade phenomena.
from the decrease in performance or overloading, which
8 can then cause critical damage to the vehicle and human Do not modify the car’s audio system and install other
life. additional electronic devices such as wireless commu-
9 nication equipment, rear view camera, LCD TV, and re-
Do not modify without authorization the driving gear mote starting device.
10 system, including the engine, just to upgrade the This vehicle’s electronic system contains electronic cir-
vehicle’s performance and beauty. cuits and fuses for the installation of standard electric and
11 electronic devices. If you add new devices or circuits us-
• Prohibition of using unauthorized modification of the en-
12 gine or parts for the exhaust ing the several existing devices and circuits at a time, elec-
tric and electronic devices can be damaged from overload-
Changing without authorization the preset value in the fuel
13 supply system and inlet, exhaust and electric systems, and
ing and may ignite. In addition, when you do drilling work
in installing devices such as an antenna may expose the
changing or adding unauthorized parts is illegal and may
14 cause serious problem with the vehicle’s durability.
vehicle to rusting.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION (II) 0
1
Do not use the nonstandard tires, wheels, and other re- Do not equip the vehicle with bumper guards sold in the
lated parts. market. 2
Installing nonstandard tires such as tires with greater Installing bumper guard or other guard bars that are be- 3
width than prescribed can wear out the power delivery sys- ing sold in the market may cause problems in parking and
tem or friction-damage related parts. In addition, other stopping due to the extended length of vehicle, and in- 4
problems such as increase of fuel consumption and brak- crease in fuel cost due to additional vehicle weight, and
ing distance, vehicle's shudder, and decrease of steering rusting may occur in the holes for equipping the guards. 5
power can all degrade the vehicle’s performance. The And because of the absence of shock absorber in the
speedometer and odometer can also become inaccurate. bumper guard, even accidents during low-speed driving 6
The vehicle with automatic transmission may have the will be much serious compared with the damage that un-
shock in changing the speed. modified cars might sustain. 7
Do not use duplicate key Do not modify or replace the vehicle flooring or the seats
8
A duplicate key might cause malfunction to the ignition key at your discretion. 9
cylinder and deter the ignition motor to return to the origi- • When replacing the interior flooring of vehicle with lami-
nal state. If so, electronic circuitry can be damaged and nated paper 10
may ignite from the ignition motor’s continuing rotation. To improve the comfort of cushion and to facilitate the
cleaning of the vehicle, some drivers replace the flooring
11
Do not equip the sunroof or color glasses at your with laminated paper after removing the seats. However,
discretion.
12
this may cause damage to the various electronic system
If you install a sunroof by cutting the vehicle’s roof, rust control units and wiring. This also may hinder the func- 13
and leakage may occur in the cut part. Installing color tion of the seat rail that enables for the seat to move for-
glasses to block ultraviolet rays and better appearance ward and backward. In this case, the locking system to fix 14
may cause leakage and other many problems. the location of seats may malfunction, which might lead
to a serious accident if the loose seats tilt forward or back- 15
ward during an uphill climb or downhill descent.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION (III)
1
• When exchanging the seats with new ones or equip- Do not install products that may decrease the driving
2 ping separate seat covers. resistance such as sticker, molding, air dam, or wind-
There are several types of seat covers according to role proofing products.
3
and function although with the same vehicle type. Replac- The sticker’s adhesives may damage the coated surface
4 ing the seats with new ones may alter the wiring system of the vehicle. If parts of the car are drilled to attach mold-
or over-use the wires because a seat has various electric ing and other functional parts, the area near the holes will
5 connections and wiring diagram. As mentioned earlier, this rust and other unfamiliar sound may occur while driving.
may damage the wiring and related equipment or cause Especially if the attached parts are not fixed well, it may
6 fire due to the overloading on the rated capacity. damage the vehicle or even cause a fatal accident.
In addition, replacing the seat cover may damage the elec-
7 tronic equipment caused by cut or pressured wire. Such In using audio in the vehicle, do not use illegally copied
a situation may also cause ventilation problems, fire, or CD and DVD, which violates relevant laws. Such discs
8 can also cause malfunction of the audio head unit and
noise.
9 changer. In addition, such discs may also not play
Do not equip with a separate accessory or assistant de- properly.
10 vice on the vehicle operational device. When installing the vehicle with unauthorized parts or
Making the selection lever longer or equipping with an ac- modifying it in ways including the cases mentioned
11 celerator pedal and brake pedal pad may make the driver previously, please keep in mind that the changed parts
prone to make a mistake while driving. and related problems with changed auto parts shall not
12 be covered by warranty.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ignition Key, Remote Control Key 2 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Remote Control Key* and Ignition Key ...... 2-2

5
6
Immobilizer System* ................................... 2-5
7
Key Functions .............................................. 2-7
8
Opening and Closing the Doors with
Ignition Key .................................................. 2-9 9
Theft Deterrent System ............................. 2-10 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOTE CONTROL KEY* AND IGNITION KEY
0 Door Lock Button
1 Lock (briefly press)

• If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are locked
2 and the theft deterrent mode is activated.
3 • When the theft deterrent mode is activated, the hazard warning

flashers blink twice.
4
5
6
7
8
9 Door Unlock/Panic Button
10 1. Unlock (briefly press)

• If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tail gate are
11 unlocked and the theft deterrent mode is deactivated.
12 • When the deterrent mode is deactivated, hazard warning

flashers blink once.
13 2. Panic function (press and hold)
• If you are in your vehicle and feel threatened while the igni-
PANIC BUTTON
14 tion key is inserted into the key switch, you may activate the (operative only when the ignition key is
15 alarm to call attention. If you press this button, the warning inserted)
siren will sound for approx. 27 seconds.
16 • The panic function will stop when any of the buttons on the
remote control key is pressed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
2-2 IGNITION KEY, REMOTE CONTROL KEY
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS OF FUNCTIONS OF IMMOBILIZER 0
ROOM LAMPS Immobilizer Function 1
The front and center room lamps come on for 30 seconds The immobilizer is designed to prevent the possibility of ve-
when the unlock button on the remote control is pressed. hicle theft by allowing only authorized keys to start the engine. 2
This function is available only when all doors are closed. The same code is encrypted in the transponder inside of
The lamps immediately go off when the remote lock button the key and in the Engine Control Unit (ECU). When the key 3
is pressed. is inserted and turned to the “ON” position, the ECU checks
the code from the key and allows the engine to start only
4
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING when the two codes are matched. 5
If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking CAUTION 6
the door with the remote control key, all the doors will be • The key and the immobilizer antenna coil should be avoided from
locked automatically. any electronic or magnetic equipment which may interfere with 7
the transponder. This may cause malfunctions of the immobilizer
CAUTION function of the key. 8
• Make sure that the doors and tailgate are completely locked af-
ter locking them by using the remote control key. If any of them 9
is not locked, you may lose your vehicle and personal property.
• The doors cannot be locked by remote control if they are not
10
closed.
11
• If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key set
to prevent from theft. 12
• Electronic system of remote control key is vulnerable to mois-
ture and heat. Do not put it in places where moisture and tem- 13
perature is high to avoid any defect.
14
NOTE 15
Standard key does not have the remote control function.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
IGNITION KEY, REMOTE CONTROL KEY 2-3
0 WHEN A REMOTE CONTROL KEY IS LOST
1 When one of the remote control keys is lost and a new re- Battery Replacement
mote control key is purchased, bring the other old remote
2 control key (dual REKES type) to the nearest Ssangyong 1. Unscrew two screws from the rear cover.
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have it
3 recoded. Otherwise, the old key will not work.
4
BATTERY REPLACEMENT (For Model
5 with REKES)
6 When the operational distance noticeably decreases or the
remote control does not work occasionally, replace the bat-
7 tery with a new one.
8 Battery Specifications
9
Model CR 2032 2. Pry off the cover by using a small flat screwdriver.
10 Amount One
11 Model: CR2032
12
CAUTION
13 • Use only the specified battery.
• Make sure that the battery is installed in correct direction.
14
15
16 3. Remove the battery and insert a new one.
GETtheMANUALS.org
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM*
The Immobilizer System provides an additional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which it is installed and prevents it from being
started by unauthorized persons. The transponder integrated in the key and the engine control unit have the same code.
0
When the ignition key with the integrated transponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the 1
crypto code of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle to start the engine.
Immobilizer Indicator
2
This indicator comes on when the ig-

3
nition key is communicating with the 4
engine control unit (during engine
starting) and goes out after starting the 5
engine. If this indicator blinks, it may in-
dicate that there is something wrong in 6
the immobilizer system. Have the sys-
tem checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or 7
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
8
NOTE 9
The time needed for communication between the immobilizer key
and ECU can vary. When the time is very short, the immobilizer
10
indicator does not come on.
11
Transponder (Diesel) 12
Transponder (Gasoline)
13
Immobilizer Key Battery
When the ignition key with the integrated tran- 14
sponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU
(Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code 15
of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle Key plate
to start the engine.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 • When the Transponder is Damaged
In the following cases, you may be unable to start the
When the transponder is damaged, you must replace it
1 vehicle with the immobilizer.
with a new one and register a new code on the engine
control unit at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- X When two or more immobilizer keys come into con-
2 rized Service Center. Otherwise, the engine cannot be tact with (each) other(s).
started.
3 X When the key is close to any device sending or re-
• When Your Key is Lost ceiving electromagnetic fields or waves.
4
When your key is lost, the encrypted code should be re- X When the key is close to any electronic or electric
5 moved from the Engine Control Unit to avoid any vehicle devices such as lighting equipment, security keys
theft. Please contact a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong or security cards.
6 Authorized Service Center. X When the key is close to a magnetic or metal ob-
7 ject or a battery.
WARNING
8 • In any case, the immobilizer system cannot be removed from
the vehicle. If you attempt to remove and damage the system,
9 it is impossible to start the engine. So never attempt to remove, CAUTION
damage or modify it. • If the indicator remains blinking, have the immobilizer system
10 • In addition, any remote engine starter cannot be installed to the checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
vehicle equipped with the immobilizer system. So never install vice Center.
11 any remote engine starter. • Avoid impact to the transponder inside of the key. The tran-
sponder can be damaged.
12 • With a damaged transponder, the engine cannot be started.
CAUTION
13 When you modify your vehicle and install a remote engine starter,
• The immobilizer system should be inspected, replaced,
serviced, or coded by only qualified service personnel in a
you may have some problems starting the engine or some fatal Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
14 accidents.
• When an old code should be replaced or another key is added,
15 please observe the process personally.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
KEY FUNCTIONS
ACC Position 0
• Allows operation of some electrical accessories with
ON Position 1
the engine off.
• The engine runs and all electri-
• Unlock the steering wheel.
cal accessories can be used. 2
• The ignition key cannot be removed.
• The steering wheel is unlocked.
3
LOCK Position
• The ignition key can only 4
be inserted or withdrawn.
START Position 5
• The steering wheel can be
• Engages the starter. After the
locked.
engine starts, release the key 6
and it will automatically return
to the “ON” position.
7
Unlocking the Steering Wheel
8
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the
key and gently turn it to the ACC or ON
Key Hole Illumination
9
position while slightly moving the steer-
ing wheel right and left. 10
Key Hole Illumination* 11
The illumination lamp comes on when 12
opening the door. This lamp goes out
about 10 seconds after closing the door. 13
From ACC to LOCK Position:
Key Reminder Turn the key to LOCK position from 14
The buzzer will sound if the driver’s door ACC position while pressing the key.
is opened while the key is left in the ig-
15
nition switch on the condition that the ig- 16
nition key is in the ACC or ON position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE
1
• To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and gently • A warning buzzer sounds when opening the driver’s door
2 turn it to the “ACC” position while slightly moving the with the key positioned at the “ACC” or “LOCK”
steering wheel right and left. position.
3
• The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle • Do not leave the key at the “ACC” or “ON” position
4 can only be started when the clutch pedal is fully when engine is not running. Otherwise, the battery could
depressed. run down.
5
• Diesel engine equipped vehicle: Turn the ignition key • Never press down the accelerator pedal while starting.
6 to the “ON” position and wait until the glow indicator
• Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at
goes out. After then, turn the ignition key to the
7 “START” position and hold it until the engine starts.
a time. (The starter motor may be damaged.)
But do not hold the ignition key at the “START” posi- • To prevent any damage to the starter, restart the en-
8
tion for more than 10 seconds. gine from the “LOCK” position after waiting at least
9 • The engine in an automatic transmission equipped ve-
10 seconds.
10 hicle can be started only when the selector lever is at • Never turn the key to the “LOCK” position or with-
the “P” or “N” position. draw the ignition key from the ignition switch while
11 driving. The steering wheel will be locked and you may
• Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the end up with serious injuries.
12 engine.
• Never use any duplicated key not provided from
• If the engine fails to start, even if the engine does not
13 Ssangyong.
start, turn the key back to the “LOCK” position and
14 wait for 10 seconds. Then try again, before any attempt The duplicated key might not turn back to the “ON”
to start the engine. position. It may cause a fire due to an overload in the
15 • After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes
electric circuit. In addition, the engine with the immobi-
lizer system cannot be started with the duplicated key.
at idle speed. Do not accelerate the engine during the
16 warming up period.
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS WITH IGNITION KEY
0
1
2
3
4
5
Unlocking the door and the tailgate 6
Locking the door and the tailgate
7
8
9
10
To Lock the Door: AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING
Turn the key to the lock position (toward rear of the vehicle) 11
All doors will be automatically unlocked when the engine
from driver’s door or passenger’s door. All doors and the tail-
is switched off. 12
gate will be locked.
13
To Unlock the Door:
Turn the key to the unlock position (toward front of the vehicle) 14
gate will be unlocked. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
0 ARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM ALARM

The theft deterrent system will be armed under the follow- STAGE
1 ing conditions: • The engine hood or the tailgate is opened from the out-
2 • When all doors are locked with the remote control key, the side while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will
theft deterrent mode will be activated. If the “UNLOCK” be activated.
3 button on the remote control key is pressed and no door • When the alarm is activated, warning sound and the emer-
is opened within approximately 30 seconds, all doors are gency hazard lights will be on and off every second for 27
4 automatically locked again and the theft deterrent mode seconds.
5 will be activated.
• When the theft deterrent system is armed, the emergency
6 hazard lights blink twice.
DISARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT
7 CAUTION SYSTEM
• To arm the theft deterrent system, the ignition key should be re-
8 moved from the ignition switch, all doors including the tailgate • Unlock the door by using the remote control key.
and the hood should be closed completely. • To deactivate the theft deterrent mode at the alarming
9 • Activation of the theft deterrent system can be confirmed by the stage, unlock the door by using the remote control key.
hazard light (blink twice).
10 • When the deterrent system is disarmed, the emergency
hazard lights blink once.
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Opening and Closing 3 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Opening and Closing Devices .................... 3-2

5
6
Doors ............................................................ 3-4
7
Windows ....................................................... 3-6
8
Sunroof* ....................................................... 3-8
9
Engine Hood .............................................. 3-10
10
Fuel Filler Door ........................................... 3-11
11
Roof Rack* .................................................. 3-12
12
Tailgate and Tailgate Window ................. 3-13
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING DEVICES
0 Sunroof Switch Fuel Filler Door
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 Engine Hood Safety
Latch Lever Door Opening Lever
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
3-2 OPENING AND CLOSING
Driver’s Door Windows Switch, Tailgate/Window Opening Lever 0
Door Opening Lever
1
Tailgate
opening lever 2
3
Tailgate window 4
opening lever
5
Door Lock/Unlock Knob 6
7
8
9
10
Fuel Filler Door
Release Lever, Engine 11
Hood Opening Lever Child Safety Door Lock 12
Fuel filler door Rear Door
release lever 13
14
Lock
15
Engine hood Unlock 16
opening lever
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING 3-3
DOORS
0
1 Door Lock/Unlock
Knob
Unlock
2 All doors will be locked/un-
locked when moving the
3 knob to the respective lock/
Lock unlock direction (only avail-
4
able at driver’s and front
5 passenger’s door).
6 NOTE
• The passenger’s door lock/unlock knob and lever have the same
7 functions with those of the driver’s door.
• The door lock/unlock knob on the rear right or rear left door can
8 only lock or unlock its respective door.
9 • The door is unlocked again even when locking the door with the
door lock/unlock knob while the door is open.
Child Safety Door Lock
10
Child safety door lock helps
11 prevent from an accidental
Lock door open, especially when
12 children are in the vehicle.
When the child-safe lever is in
13 the “LOCK” position, the
Unlock
rear door can be opened only
14 from the outside.
15
WARNING
16 Children in rear seats can open rear doors. Move the child-safe lever
to the “LOCK” position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver’s side Passenger’s side Door Lock/Unlock Switch 0
When the door lock/unlock switch is
Door opening lever 1
pressed while all doors including the
tailgate are locked, all doors will be
unlocked. When the switch is pressed 2
again, all doors will be locked.
3
This switch is not available when any of
doors are not fully closed and the ve- 4
hicle is in theft deterrent mode.
Door lock/
Door lock/
unlock switch
5
unlock switch Door Opening Lever
Pull the door opening lever to open the door.
6
7
Automatic Door Unlocking Automatic Door Locking
When the airbag deploys while all doors are automatically All doors will be automatically locked when you drive over 8
locked by the Automatic Door Locking System, the doors will 50 km/h while the doors are unlocked.
9
automatically be unlocked.
CAUTION
10
When you drive at 50 km/h or a higher speed and try to unlock all
WARNING
When a door or body frame is damaged by an impact from an
doors with the door lock/unlock knob or switch, all doors are auto- 11
matically locked again.
accident, the automatic door unlocking system may not work.
12
Room Lamp Synchronized Operation
13
NOTE The room lamps are synchronized with the room lamp
When any door is open, all doors can not be locked by using the door switch. The front room lamp comes on when opening a front 14
lock knob, the door lock/unlock switch, or the remote control. door. The center room lamp comes on when opening a rear
door. The rear room lamp comes on when opening the 15
tailgate. The front room lamp dims down and goes out when
closing the front door. The center (rear) room lamp goes 16
out immediately when closing the door (tailgate).
GETtheMANUALS.org
WINDOWS
0 DRIVER’S DOOR WINDOW SWITCH

1 X When opening the window
• When the front of the switch is lightly pressed, the window will be lowered while
2 the switch is pressed.
3 • When pressed to its end, the window will open automatically until it is fully open.
If you want to stop the window while automatic lowering, lightly press the switch
4 again or pull the switch up. Passenger’s Door
Window Switch
5 X When closing the window
• When you lightly pull the switch up, the window will move up only while the switch
6 is being operated.
7 • When pulling the switch up to its end, the window will be fully closed
(auto-up operation (If equipped)). If you want to stop the
8 auto-up function, pull up or gently press the switch again. Rear Left
9 Window
Central Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Switch
10
11 Rear Right
WINDOW LOCK SWITCH
12 Window Switch
If the window lock switch is pressed down, only driver’s
13 window is operative. Passenger’s and rear windows can-
not be operated by their switches.
14
WARNING CAUTION
15 When carrying children in the rear seat, press the window lock When closing the passenger’s and rear windows from driver’s seat,
switch to make the rear window switches inoperative. Do not al- be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body
16 low children to play with the power window switch and rear door can be trapped by the window.
window switches.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ANTI-TRAP SYSTEM FOR DRIVER’S WINDOW Passenger’s and Rear Window Switch 0
The anti-trap system enables the driver’s window to auto-
matically reverse when something is caught in the window
Passenger’s seat 1
as it is closing. When the sensor detects an obstacle, the 2
window will be lowered immediately.
Door Lock/ 3
CAUTION Unlock Switch
• The anti-trap system is operated only when the driver’s win- 4
dow is moving up automatically by the “AUTO” switch.
• The anti-trap system does not operate where the space between
5
the top of the glass and window frame is very close.
6
Window switch
7
TIME LAG OPERATION OF WINDOW
8
The power window can be operated for 30 seconds even To move windows up or
after the ignition key is turned to another position. However, Rear seat 9
down, pull up or press the
this function stops immediately when a front door is opened. corresponding switch for
the window. 10
11
12
13
WARNING
• Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing 14
can be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers) in the window.
• Make sure that passengers do not stick out their hands or heads
15
from the vehicle while driving.
16
• Do now allow children to play with any switch, door lever or
the gear shift lever.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUNROOF* * For your safety, never operate the sunroof when the vehicle is moving.
0 SUNROOF SLIDING OPERATION

1 X Open: 2-Step Opening
The sunroof automatically opens if the sunroof open/close
2 switch is pushed shortly. However, this operation has two
steps; if you push the switch to its first stop, the sunroof
3 opens up to 5 cm ahead of end frame. If you push it again, Sliding Open/
the sunroof opens completely. When the switch is operated Tilt Down
4 while the sunroof is moving, the sunroof stops sliding.
5 (Manual sliding open: The sunroof is opened only while the
sunroof switch is pressed)
6
X Close
7 The sunroof automatically closes completely if the sunroof
open/close switch is pulled down shortly when the sunroof Sliding Close/Tilt Up
8 is open. To stop it during its operation, operate the switch
to any direction. (Manual sliding close: The sunroof is closed
9 only while the sunroof switch is pressed)
CAUTION
10
• Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is
11 SUNROOF TILTING OPERATION in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof
repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery.
12 Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.
X Tilt Up • When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch.
13 The sunroof is tilted up if the sunroof open/close switch is If you keep the switch operating, it could cause a malfunction.
pulled down when the sunroof is closed. Especially in the winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas
14 are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
X Tilt Down • When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close
15 the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or,
The sunroof is tilted down if the sunroof open/close switch the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
16 is pushed when the sunroof is tiled up.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION BATTERY DISCHARGE OR POWER 0
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the auto- FAILURE WHILE OPERATING SUNROOF
closing sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens
1
If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery
the sunroof when an object is trapped. or power failure, you need to re-calibrate the starting point of 2
the sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the re-
CAUTION
calibration. 3
• This safety function is available for the sliding sunroof close. • The sunroof does not completely close or open by oper-
• The Anti-Pinch Function is deactivated just before the sunroof ating the switch once.
4
closes. • The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does 5
not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof.
• The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding 6
WARNING open or tilt up.
• When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions be- • Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or 7
fore operation. Parts of the body can be trapped. work properly.
• Do not stick any part of your body out of the sunroof. 8
RE-CALIBRATING THE SUNROOF 9
WIND BUFFETING STARTING POINT
10
When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open • Close the sunroof completely by using the sunroof open/
at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your close switch (sliding close). 11
ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. • When the sunroof stops while the sunroof is partially
opened, completely tilt it up using the sunroof open/close 12
This happens because of an influx in air through the win-
switch.
dow or sunroof and its resonance effect. If this happens, 13
adjust by opening the window or sunroof. NOTE
When the sunroof is completely opened with the sunroof switch
14
and the switch is operated to the “OPEN” direction for more than 5
seconds, the sunroof cannot completely be either closed or opened
15
by operating the switch once. The sunroof will be moving only when
the switch is being operated. When this happens, re-calibrate the be- 16
ginning point of the sunroof to reactivate the one touch button.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE HOOD
0
1. To open the engine hood, pull the release knob located
1 on the lower left side of the steering wheel to unlatch the
2 engine hood.
2. Slightly lift up the engine
3 hood and raise up the
safety latch lever with
4 your fingers. Then, com-
pletely lift up the engine
5 hood.
6
7
8
9
WARNING
10
• When you open the hood while the engine is running, extra cau-
11 tion is needed to avoid any injuries by the moving parts in the
engine compartment.
12 • Before driving, try to pull up the front edge of the hood to check
that the hood is securely latched.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILLER DOOR
1. Open the fuel filler door ( ) by pulling the release lever
0
( ) located on the lower left side of the steering wheel.
1
2. Open the fuel filler cap
( ) by turning it OPEN 2
counterclockwise.
3. After refueling, tighten 3
the fuel filler cap by
turning it clockwise until
CLOSE 4
you hear clicking 5
sounds. Then close the
fuel filler lid ( ) properly 6
until it latches.
7
WARNING CAUTION 8
• Always stop the engine when refueling. Use only the designated • Fuel damages paintwork. If fuel spills onto paintwork, immedi- 9
fuel and low sulfur diesel. ately wash the affected area with cold water.
• The fuel filler door may not open in cold weather. Gently tap the
• When refueling, • No smoking.
fuel filler door to open.
10
• No naked flame. • No sparking material. • Gasoline damages paintwork.
• If you use inappropriate grade fuel or put improper fuel additives 11
• If gasoline spills onto paintwork wash with cold water immediately.
into the fuel tank, the engine and catalytic converter may seri-
ously be damaged. • For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex. 12
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer.
• Gasoline vapor is highly flammable.
• Engine and exhaust system will be damaged. 13
• It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries.
• When refueling, 14
• Switch off engine.
• No smoking.
ber recommended for your country by Ssangyong. 15
It is not covered by warranty.
• No naked flame. 16
• No sparking material.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ROOF RACK*
0
1 CAUTION
• In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads
2 that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.
• The following specification is maximum weight when loading
3 cargo or luggage.
ROOF RACK: 45 kg (100 lbs.) EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
4
• Loading cargo or luggage above specification on the roof rack
5 may damage your vehicle.
When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
6 or the sides of your vehicle.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check
7 frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
8 • Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
9 • Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack
may damage stability of your vehicle.
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load things on top of
10 your vehicle.
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE AND TAILGATE WINDOW
Unlock 0
1
2
Tailgate window 3
opening lever Lock
4
5
Tailgate 6
opening lever
7
WARNING 8
Exhaust gases are poisonous. Do not run the engine with
the tailgate or tailgate window open to avoid exhaust gas 9
in the cabin. Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while
the vehicle is in motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. 10
Do not travel with the tailgate or tailgate window open.
11
Opening the Tailgate Opening the Tailgate Window 12
To open the tailgate, unlock To unlock the tailgate
the tailgate and pull the window, unlock the tailgate
13
tailgate opening lever up. and pull the left lever up. 14
To close the tailgate, lower Open the tailgate window
it by holding the inside by pulling up the outer win- 15
handle to a certain level dow grip.
first, then close it. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 CAUTIONS WHEN OPENING/CLOSING DOORS
2
• Do not allow children to play with any switch, door lever and the gear shift.
3 • Before operating the power windows, doors, tailgate and fuel filler door, make sure that nothing can
4 be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers).
• Make sure that the doors, tailgate and fuel filler door are completely closed before driving.
5
• When a child is on rear seat, use the child safety functions to avoid any unwanted and dangerous
6 opening of doors.
7 • Parts of the human body can be trapped in the window or sunroof and can be struck by passing objects.
Do not stick hands, heads or anything else out of the openings.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior Switches 4 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Interior Switches ......................................... 4-2 Heated Glass Switch ................................. 4-24

5
Light Switch ................................................. 4-4 Hazard Warning Flasher Switch .............. 4-25
6
Wiper and Washer Switch .......................... 4-8 HDC (Hill Descent Control) Switch* .......... 4-26 7
Rain Sensing Wiper* ................................... 4-9 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Switch 8
Wiper and Washer Switch ........................ 4-10 and ESP System* ....................................... 4-28 9
Cruise Control Switch* .............................. 4-12 Remote Audio Controls & Gear Shift Button 10
(A/T) On Steering Wheel ........................... 4-30
Switch Panel on Driver’s Door Trim ......... 4-16 11
Switches in Center Console ..................... 4-31
Outside Rearview Mirror Control Switch . 4-17 12
4-Wheel Drive System ............................... 4-32
Multi-Station* ............................................. 4-18 13
Switches in Overhead Console,
Time and Date Display .............................. 4-19 14
Room Lamp Switch ................................... 4-35
Audio Play Using the USB Flash Drive .... 4-20 15
Listening To Music with External Audio 16
Device ......................................................... 4-23
GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERIOR SWITCHES
0
Room lamp switch
1
Sunroof switch
2
3
Remote control switch on steering wheel
4 Wiper and washer switch
5
6 Stereo jack
Light switch
7 USB jack
8
9 Center switch panel
Rear fog light
10 switch
Door lock/
11 unlock switch
Driver seat heating switch
12 HLLD Passenger seat heating switch
13 4-wheel drive switch Auto cruise*
14 Seat position Aux jack
memory switch
15 Window control switches
16 Door lock/unlock switch
Winter mode switch
4-2 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

0
Time, date mode setting button/mp3 file search button HDC switch
1
Time, date change/mp3 file play button (next music)
ESP OFF switch
2
Windshield heated glass switch
3
Tailgate and outside rearview mirror
heated glass switch
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Hazard switch
11
Time, date change/mp3 file play button (previous music)
12
Time, date item change/mp3 file play and stop
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-3

LIGHT SWITCH
0 Automatic Light &

1 Light Switch Rain Sensor*
2
3
4
5
6
This senses the ambient illumina-
7 You can turn the lights on and tion intensity to determine the timing
off (headlamps, tail lamps, li- for turning the headlamps and tail
8 cense plate lamp, turn signal lamps on or off automatically when
lamps, fog lights) with this the light switch is set to “AUTO”
9 switch. (including rain sensing function).
10 Headlamp
high beam High mounted stop lamp
11
License plate lamp
Headlamp low beam
12
Tail lamp/Stop lamp
13 Tail lamp
Turn signal lamp Turn signal lamp
14
Stop lamp or
15 Front fog light
rear fog light*
16
Back-up lamp

AUTOMATIC LIGHT* 0
AUTO 1
2
3
4
5
The auto light and rain sensor senses the ambient illumi- 6
nation intensity to determine the timing for turning the
headlamps and tail lamps on or off automatically when the 7
light switch is set to “AUTO”.
8
CAUTION
• Do not clean the area where the auto-light and rain sensor in 9
installed with detergent or wax.
• On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual 10
mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending
on the climate, season, or circumstances. 11
• Any aftermarket tanning film or spray may cause the lighting sys- Automatic Light & Rain Sensor*
tem to malfunction.
This senses the ambient illumination intensity to determine
12
• Ssangyong recommends you to use this device restrictively
the timing for turning the headlamps and tail lamps on or
around only a sunrise or sunset. 13
• Usually turn the headlamps or tail lights on or off manually. off automatically when the light switch is set to “AUTO”
• Turn on the headlamps manually when passing through a dark (integrated with rain sensor). 14
area such as a tunnel.
• On a gloomy day, do not rely on this automatic function. But turn CAUTION 15
the head or tail lights on or off manually.
• Do not shake and impact the sensor. It may not work properly.
• When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and
• The automatic light function may not operate properly when the
16
head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phe-
nomenon recognizing the automatic setting. vehicle is driving on the rugged road due to the vibration.

0 Battery Saver (Automatically turns off the lights) Headlight Leveling Switch
• To avoid discharging the battery, if the tail lamps are on after the ignition key
1 is removed, a buzzer will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is
opened. The tail lamps will automatically turn off when the door is closed. (With
2 the light switch on, if the ignition key is removed and all doors are closed, the
tail lamps are off due to the battery saver function. However, if you open a door
3 and turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then to the “ON” position,
4 the tail lamps will stay on after the door is closed.)
• To turn the tail lamps on again, insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.
5 Or, turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then to the “ON” position.
With the low beam switched on, ad-
6 just the aiming angle of headlights to
suit the vehicle load.
7 • To lower the aiming angle, rotate the
switch downward.
8 • To raise the aiming angle, rotate the
9 switch upward.
NOTE
10
According to load condition, adjust the
Light Switch aiming angle of headlights.
11
12 (Headlamps ON) AUTO (Automatic light ON)
Head-, side-marker, tail, license plate, Head- and tail lamps automatically turn
13 on or off based upon the intensity of the
front fog (with front fog light switch ON),
14 and instrument cluster lamps come on. sunlight analyzed by the automatic light
sensor.
15 (Tail lamps ON)
OFF (Lights OFF)
16 Side-marker, tail, license plate, front fog
(with front fog light switch ON), and in- All lights are off.
strument cluster lamps come on.
Headlamp High Beam Right Turn Signal Switch 0
To turn on the headlamp high
NOTE
beam, push the lever towards the 1
While the turn signal lamp is turned on, the turn signal
instrument cluster with the
headlamp low beam on. The
indicator in the instrument cluster blinks. 2
headlamp high beam indicator Front Fog Light Switch
( ) in the instrument cluster
3
comes on when the headlamp To turn on the fog lights, turn this switch to ON position
while the tail lamps or headlamps are turned on. 4
high beam is turned on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL): 5
DRL Regulation Region Only 6
For vehicles equipped with the DRL, the tail
lights automatically turn ON when turning the 7
starter key from ACC to ON.
8
The headlights turn on as the engine starts.
Passing Left Turn Signal Switch With the headlights automatically ON, turning 9
the light switch from OFF to on turns off the
Regardless of the position of the light
headlights but keeps the tail lights on. 10
switch, if you hold the lever toward the
(Turning the light switch immediately deacti-
steering wheel, the headlights are on
vates the DRL function.)
11
high beam during the hold. The high
beam indicator also illuminates on the Rear Fog Light Switch* 12
instrument cluster during the hold.
To turn on the rear fog light, push the rear fog light 13
WARNING switch while the front fog light switch is turned on.
Driving with high beam headlamps disturbs
To turn it off, push the switch again. The rear fog 14
the approaching vehicle’s visibility for safe lights are automatically turned off when turning off
driving. Use the high beam headlamp only the light switch or the front fog light switch. 15
during very dark situations when it is very Therefore, to turn on the rear fog lights, push the
hard to see the road. rear fog light switch again after turning on the light 16
switch and the front fog light switch.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
0 Rear Wiper
1 Front Wiper Wiper and Washer Switch
2
3
Washer Nozzle
4
5
6
7
8
9
Washer Fluid Reservoir Wiper Blade
10 Frequently check the washer fluid level and If the windshield cannot be cleaned
add the specified product as needed.
11 properly due to worn wiper blades,
In winter, use only the specified washer liq- replace them with new ones. Refer to
12 uid for winter season. “Service and Maintenance” section in
this manual.
13 CAUTION
• If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will
14 freeze during the winter and damage the
washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use only
15 the specified washer fluid.
• Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the en-
gine or body paint of your vehicle during re-
16 plenishment

RAIN SENSING WIPER*
When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, this sensor detects the 0
amount of rain, turns on the wiper, and controls the intermittent wiper intervals.
1
Rain and Auto Light Sensor Wiper AUTO Position
2
AUTO
3
4
5
6
It controls the wiping speed by detect- 7
ing the amount of rain drops.
8
CAUTION NOTE 9
• When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, the wiper will operate once if • When the light switche is in the “AUTO” position,
the initial engine start is made. This may wear the wiper blades prematurely head lights come on if the rain sensor detects any 10
(especially in winter). Therefore, other than rainy days, set the switch to the rain.
“OFF” position. In winter, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen and are • The speed of the wipers becomes a little faster 11
not stuck to the windshield. Otherwise, this may cause some damage to the when it is dark enough to turn on the automatic lights.
wiper motor. 12
• If you use only the wipers when the glass is dry, this could scratch the glass and wear • When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the
the wiper blades prematurely. Use the wiper with the washer when the glass is dry. wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper
• Turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position before any car wash to avoid un- switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” 13
wanted operation of the wipers. position. But the wiper will not operate again to
• When it does not rain, turn the wiper switch into the “OFF” position. prevent any damage to the window even though 14
the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” position
WARNING to the “AUTO” position. 15
When you clean the windshield over the sensor with damp clothes, the wiper may 16
operate suddenly. It could cause serious injury. Make sure to place the wiper switch
and ignition switch to the “OFF” position when not in use.

0
1 Front Wiper Switch
2 MIST
3 The windshield wipers can be operated only
when you hold the switch to the “MIST” position.
4 The lever will return to the “OFF” position when
released.
5
6 OFF
7 Stop the operation.
8
9 AUTO
10 Operates automatically according to

the vehicle speed or amount of rain.
11
12 LO
Front Automatic Wiping Speed Control
13 Continuous wipe, slow operation
Switch
14 The interval of wiper swings can be adjusted by
HI twisting the control knob upward or downward when
15 the windshield wiper switch is in the AUTO position.
Continuous wipe, fast operation Fast: Fast interval
16
Slow: Slow interval

0
Rear Wiper Switch Front Auto Washer Switch
When the front wiper switch is off and this switch 1
is pressed, washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will automatically operate 4 times. Then, the 2
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid will be sprayed again and the wiper will au-
fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window tomatically operate 3 times.
3
glass and the wiper will also operate. 4
When the switch is released, it will stop
in the Rear Wiper Operation mode and 5
only the wiper will keep operating.
6
7
Rear wiper operation 8
OFF 9
Rear wiper stops 10
11
12
When the switch is fully turned, washer
fluid will be sprayed onto the rear win- Wiper and Washer Coupled Operation 13
dow glass and the wiper will also Pull the lever briefly (for less than 0.6 seconds):
operate. When the switch is released, it One wiping cycle with washer spray 14
will return to the “OFF” position and turn Pull and hold the lever for more than 0.6 seconds:
off the wiper and washer. Three wiping cycles with washer spray
15
While being held down, the wiper and washer will 16
keep working.

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH*
0 CRUISE CONTROL Setting a Desired Speed
1 TYPE A TYPE A
2
3
4
5 TYPE B
6
7
8 TYPE B
9
The cruise control is an automatic speed control system that main- 1. To operate the cruise control, accelerate to the de-
10 tains a desired driving speed without using the accelerator pedal. sired speed, which must be more than 36 km/h
The vehicle speed must be greater than 36 km/h to engage the (23 MPH) and less than 150 km/h (90 MPH).
11
cruise control. This feature is especially useful for motorway driving. 2. When the desired speed is reached, push up the
12 CAUTION
ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever or push
down the DECEL switch for 1 second per one
13 Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous. switching and then release the accelerator pedal
• Do not use on winding roads. slowly.
14 • Do not use in heavy traffic.
3. Now, the vehicle is cruised by this system with
• Do not use on slippery, wet roads.
the set speed.
15 This could result in a loss of control, collision, and/or personal injuries.
4. And you can set to other vehicle speeds again
16 NOTE with above steps after an accelerator pedal in-
The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road conditions.
tervention during the cruise control running.

Accelerating with the Cruise Control System Decelerating with the Cruise Control System 0
• While the cruise control system is running • While the cruise control system is running 1
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever and 1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever 2
hold it until the desired speed is reached without an ac- and hold it until the desired speed is reached without a
celerator pedal intervention. brake pedal intervention. But the cruise control system 3
2. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. cannot maintain the cruise function at less than 34 km/h.
2. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. 4
• While the cruise control system is not running
• When the cruise control system is not running 5
1. Accelerate using the accelerator pedal over 36 km/h.
2. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever and 1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever 6
hold it. and hold it.
7
3. And then release the accelerator pedal slowly. 2. And then release the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. 3. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. 8
But the cruise control system cannot maintain the cruise
• Tap-up while the cruise control system is running function at less than 34 km/h. 9
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever less • Tap-down while the cruise control system is running 10
than 0.5 second per one switching while the cruise con-
trol system is running. This is a tap-up switching. 1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control lever 11
less than 0.5 second per one switching while the cruise
2. When you operate a tap-up switching, the vehicle is ac-
control system is running. This is a tap-down switching. 12
celerated for 1.3 km/h over the previous set speed.
2. When you operate a tap-down switching, the vehicle is 13
3. If you want to accelerate for 13 km/h, operate the tap-up
decelerated for 1 km/h below the previous set speed.
switching ten times without accelerating with the cruise
control system. 3. If you want to decelerate for 10 km/h, operate the tap-down 14
switching ten times without the brake pedal intervention.
15
16

0 Recovery of Set Speed Normal Cancellation of the Cruise Control
1 TYPE A TYPE A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TYPE B TYPE B
9
Even if the cruise control is cancelled, the previous set The cruise control system will be canceled when one or
10 cruise speed can be recovered by pushing (Type A) or pull- more items of the following conditions are applied;
ing (Type B) toward the cruise control lever when the cur- 1. When the brake pedal is depressed.
11 rent vehicle speed is over 36 km/h without an acceleration 2. When the cruising speed is downed less than 34 km/h.
intervention. But if you turn off the ignition switch, the memo- 3. When the OFF switch is operated by pulling the cruise
12 rized set speed is cleared and you cannot recover the pre- control lever (Type A) or by pushing the ON-OFF switch of
13 vious set speed. the cruise control lever (Type B).
4. When ESP is activated.
14 CAUTION 5. When applying the parking brake when driving.
The resume position should only be used if the driver is fully aware 6. When using the clutch in order to shift (M/T only).
15 of this speed and wishes to resume this particular speed. And the cruise control system can be operated again in driving state.
CAUTION
16
Keep the main cruise control switch in the neutral position when
not using the cruise control.

Abnormal Cancellation of the Cruise Control Using the Cruise Control on Hills 0
1. When the rapid deceleration is applied without braking. How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the 1
2. When the rapid acceleration is applied without accelera- speed, load, and the steepness of the hill.
tion pedal intervention. 2
When going up steep hills, you may have to press the ac-
3. When the cruise control lever is failed. celerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going 3
4. When the brake switch and the brake light switch input downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
signal are implausible. keep your speed down. 4
And the cruise control system cannot be operated again in driv- Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control. 5
ing state. In this case, you should stop the vehicle, and turn off
the ignition switch and then turn it on again. After you do that, 6
you can use the cruise control system again. But if the cruise
control system isn’t recovered, you should contact a Ssangyong 7
Dealer for diagnosis of the cruise control system.
8
CAUTION 9
Abnormal changes of the selector lever can damage the engine.
Do not move the shift lever to Neural while driving at the set speed. 10
Automatic transmission damage may result.
11
CAUTION 12
• The speed that has been set may not be maintained on uphill or 13
downhill slopes.
• The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill 14
grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain
that speed. 15
• The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off 16
the cruise control.

SWITCH PANEL ON DRIVER’S DOOR TRIM
0 Easy Access Button (Driver’s Seat)*

This system is designed to provide a driver sufficient
1 space to access and exit (driver’s door moves
rearward automatically).
2
Position Memory Setting Button (SET)*
Position Memory
3 Button (1, 2, 3)*
Position Memory Cancellation Button (STOP)*
4
5
6
7
8
Central Door Lock/Unlock Switch
9
10 pressed while all doors including the Outside Rearview Mirror
tailgate are locked, all doors will be Folding Switch
11 unlocked. When the switch is
To fold the outside rearview
pressed again, all doors will be mirrors, press the switch.
12 locked. To unfold the mirrors, press
again
13 Window Switch
Outside Rearview Mirror Control Switch
14 Window Lock Switch Adjust the outside rearview mirror position
by pushing the appropriate edge of this
15 If the window lock switch is pressed down, only switch after selecting the desired outside
dirver’s window is operative. Passenger’s and rear mirror.
16 windows cannot be operated by their switches.

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Outside Rearview Mirror Control 0

1. Select the driver side mirror (L) or the passenger side mir-
ror (R) with the mirror selection switch.
1
2. Adjust the outside rearview mirror by pushing the appro- 2
priate edge of the switch.
3
Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Switch 4
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, press the switch.
To unfold the mirrors, press again. 5
6
Mirror Selection Switch

7
“L”: Driver side mirror 8
“R”: Passenger side mirror
9
WARNING 10
Do not put any tinting film on the door glasses of the front seats.
Otherwise, your visibility will decrease. 11
12
CAUTION
• You can fold and unfold the mirrors within 30 seconds after the 13
ignition is turned to OFF. However, this function is overridden
when any of front doors is opened with the ignition switch OFF. 14
• Do not fold or unfold the outside rearview mirrors manually. It Aiming Switch
may cause a malfunction of the mirror folding system.
Adjust the selected mirror up, down, left,
15
• If you directly spray high-pressured water to the electric remote- or right by pressing the corresponding
controlled outside mirrors, this may cause some malfunctions in 16
edges of the switch to get a desired view.
the mirror system.

MULTI-STATION*
0 USB flash drive port

USB Flash Drive Port*
Multi-station display You can connect the external USB flash drive to this port to
1 play the music files (MP3, OGG, WMA).
2 Stereo jack Stereo Jack*

You can hear the music through the speakers on your ve-
3 hicle by connecting the external audio device (MP3 player,
CD player etc.) to this jack.
4 Storage bin for portable
electronic device Multi-Station Display
5 Multi-station switch This display shows time/date or music file play screen accord-
ing to the current mode.
6
CAUTION
7 • Use only smooth cloth to clean this display window. Otherwise,
the display window could be scratched.
8 Music File Play Mode • When the room temperature is high or low, this display window
Searching the music file may be dimmed or discolored.
9 • Some USB flash drive may not be compatible with the multi-sta-
Time/Date Display Mode tion audio file play system.
10 Selecting the time/date adjustment mode
CAUTION
11 Cautions for Storage Bin (for Portable Electronic Device)
Music File Play
12 Mode
Playing the previous/next
13 music file, Forwarding
14 and Reversing
You can put your portable electronic device such as a cellular
Music File Play Mode Time/Date Display
15 phone or MP3 player into the storage bin. This location is conve-
Playing and stopping the music file Mode nient place to connect the electronic devices with the stereo jack
16 Time/Date Display Mode
Adjusting the time/date in the multi-station. However, some devices cannot put into the stor-
age bin due to the size or shape. Be careful not to damage the
Selecting the time or date surface of the device when you use this storage bin.

TIME AND DATE DISPLAY
The time and date are displayed in the multi-station display window.
0
Hour Minute
1
AM or PM DA
AM: Before noon
PM: After midday
%&.%&
&$$-#$%#&)GIB
2
3
4
Year Month Date Day
5
Adjusting the Time and Date Time Setting Using the Preset Function 6
1. Press and hold ( ) button on the multi-station switch 1. Press and hold ( ) button on the multi-station switch 7
panel with the time and date displayed. It is switched to panel with the time and date displayed.
the time and date adjustment mode and the selected item 8
2. Press ( ) button to move to the minutes section
is blinking.
(Minute section start to blink). 9
2. Press ( ) button to move to the desired position (hour,
minutes, month, date or year).
3. Press and hold any of ( ) and ( ) buttons. 10
4. If the minutes section displays 00~29, it is reset to “00”.
3. Press ( ) button or ( ) button to change the time
If the minutes section displays 30~59, the hour is in-
11
and date. creased by 1 and the minute is reset to “00”. 12
4. Press ( ) button after adjustment to finish the adjust- 5. The clock starts to run immediately after releasing the
ment mode. Now, the display shows the changed time/ button. 13
date. 6. Press ( ) button after adjustment to finish the adjust- 14
NOTE ment mode. Now, the display shows the changed time/
The display resumes Time/Date display mode if you do not press
date. 15
any button within few seconds in Time/Date adjustment mode.
16

AUDIO PLAY USING THE USB FLASH DRIVE
The multi-station can detect and play the music files (MP3, OGG, WMA) in the
0 USB flash drive when connecting it into the USB flash drive port.
1 USB flash drive
2 MULTI-STATION DISPLAY WINDOW

Current folder name Current play mode
3
4
5 Current file name
6
7
Time and date display Play time of current file
8
Current file number
9
CAUTION
10 USB Flash Drive
• Only MP3, WMA and OGG file formats can be played in the multi-
No Playing File Connected station audio file play system.
11 • The system may not recognize some audio files due to the infor-
mation error even though the file format is playable.
12 • If the message “INSERT MEMORY” is displayed even while the
USB flash drive is connected to the USB flash drive port, re-
13 move the USB flash drive and then connect it again.
This message is displayed This message is displayed in • Some USB flash drive may not be compatible with the multi-sta-
14 when there is no accessible the multi-station display win- tion audio file play system.
15 audio file in the USB flash dow when pressing ( ) • This system does not recognize the hard disc type USB flash
drive. drive.
button while the USB flash
16 drive is not connected to the
• The vehicle with AV system has a different operating instruc-
tions for playing the music file through the USB flash drive. Please
USB flash drive port. refer to the separate AV operating manual for detailed information.

0
Search the audio files (briefly press) 1
Play the next music (briefly press)
Set the playing sequence and repeat
function (press and hold) Go to the previous file (press and hold) 2
Play the previous music or go to the be- 3
Play/Stop the audio file
ginning of the current file (briefly press)
Move to other folder (file search mode) 4
Go to the next file (press and hold)
5
Playing Audio Files 6
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB flash drive port. 3. The multi-station display shows the message of USB 7
flash drive reading as below. (It takes longer time if the
memory capacity is big.) 8
9
10
11
2. Press the AUX button of the audio system to display “AUX 4. The system starts to play the audio file after reading the
IN” in the audio display window. USB flash drive. 12
5. The next file is played when pressing ( ) button briefly. 13
AUX button The current file is played from the beginning again or the
previous file is played when pressing ( ) button briefly. 14
AUX IN
6. While a file is played, press and hold the ( ) button 15
(fast forward) or ( ) button (fast back) to fast forward
16
or back to the desired file.

0
1 Selecting Audio File Setting Playing Sequence and Repeat Function
1. To go to file search mode while playing a music in USB 1. When you press and hold ( ) button while a file is
2 flash drive, press ( ) button briefly. The multi-station played, the system is switched to the playing sequence
display window is switched as below. and repeat setting mode.
3
4 Play mode Search mode
5
6 2. In the playing sequence and repeat setting mode, press
7 ( ) button or ( ) button to select the desired play-
ing sequence or repeat function.
2. Select the desired file by pressing ( ) button or ( )
8
button in the file search mode.
9 3. To move to the desired folder, press ( ) button when
10 the folder is highlighted. It moves to the parent folder if
you press and hold ( ) button.
4. Select a file and press ( ) button to play it. ( ) button or ( ) button to select the desired play-
12 ing sequence or repeat function.
13 NORMAL (displayed “NOR”): Sequential play
RANDOM (displayed “RND”): Random play
14 REPEAT (displayed “RPT”): Repeat the currently played file
15 4. After selecting the desired playing sequence or repeat
function, press ( or ) button to apply the changed
16 setting.

LISTENING TO MUSIC WITH EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE
MODE CHANGE 0
1. Connect the external audio device to the stereo jack (AUX Press ( ) button to change the mode when the USB flash
jack).
1
drive or the external audio device is connected to the USB
flash drive port or to the stereo jack. 2
However, it cannot be switched to the external audio device
play mode while the audio file in the USB flash drive is be-
3
ing played. 4
It can be switched to the external audio device mode only
after stopping the operation of USB flash drive. 5
2. When you press AUX button on the audio system, “AUX
IN” is displayed on the audio display window and multi- 6
station display window. By Pressing ( ) Button, the Mode Is Changed 7
As Below
AUX button 8
Searching the files in
the USB flash drive 9
AUX IN
10
11
“AUX IN” in multi-station Playing the music
display window through the external 12
audio device.
13
3. When you operate the external audio device, you can hear
the music through the speakers on your vehicle. 14
DA
Clock display
%&.%&
&$$-#$%#&)GIB
15
16

HEATED GLASS SWITCH
Indicator Indicator
0
1
2
3
4
5 Windshield Heated Glass Switch Tailgate and Outside Rearview Mirror Heated Glass Switch
6 • Press this switch to turn on the windshield • Press this switch to turn on the tailgate and outside rearview mirror
heated glass. It will operate for about 12 heated glasses. It will operate for about 12 minutes.
7 minutes. • Press the switch again to stop the operation.
• Press the switch again to stop the operation. • This switch is designed to defrost or defog the tailgate glass and out-
8
• Use this to prevent the windshield wiper side rearview mirrors.
9 blades from being frozen. • The heated glass will operate for about 6 minutes when the switch is
• The indicator in the switch comes on when pressed again within 12 minutes after completion of its first operation cycle.
10 in use. • The indicator in the switch comes on when in use.
11 Windshield
heated glass Tailgate Outside rearview
12 heated glass mirror heated glass
13
14
15
16

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
0
1
2
3
4
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch

5
WARNING
• To turn on the hazard warning flashers, push the hazard Do not leave the flashers on for an extended period of time. Bat- 6
warning flasher switch. tery could be discharged.
• Use the hazard warning flasher to warn other drivers when
7
you stop or park under emergency conditions. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

HDC (HILL DESCENT CONTROL) SWITCH*
HDC? HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low
0 speed without any depression of the brake pedal. This convenient function is for only driving down steep grades.
1 Therefore do not use this function for anything other than driving down steep hills.
2 HDC Switch
When this button is pressed once,
3 HDC is ready for use. The green HDC
4 indicator on the instrument cluster
comes on. When the button is pressed
5 again, HDC is deactivated and the in-
dicator goes off.
6
7
8
The HDC Indicator
9
Green light on: HDC is ready for use
10 (by pressing the HDC switch).
Green light blinking: HDC is being
11 applied.
12 Red light on: the HDC system is overheated or malfunctioning. Depressing the Accelerator or Brake Pedal
while HDC is Being Applied
13 When HDC is applied, the green HDC indicator blinks. If you depress the accelerator or brake pedal, the HDC func-
tion immediately stops and there will be more driving or brak-
14 When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC system is over-
ing force accordingly.
heated or malfunctioning.
15 When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC function does WARNING
not work.
16 When driving down an extremely dangerous steep grade, HDC will
still work even if the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed.

HDC Operational Conditions Operation of HDC 0
1. The HDC switch should be on (The green indicator on When all operational conditions are met, HDC is applied
the instrument cluster comes on). and the green HDC indicator blinks. HDC automatically de- 1
2. A certain steep grade. creases the vehicle speed to 7 km/h in the 2 wheel (2H) or
4 wheel high speed mode (4H) position. HDC automatically 2
3. Driving for about 7 ~ 50 km/h in the 2 wheel (2H) or 4
stops at speeds less than 7 km/h or when the slope de-
wheel high (4H) speed position. Or driving for about 3 ~
scends slowly. It is normal to have strong vibrations and
3
25 km/h in the 4 wheel low position.
noise from the brake system when HDC is applied. 4
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in the “D” or “R” or “N”
position. In case of the manual transmission, the gear
shift is in the forwarding “1” or “Reverse” or “Neutral”
WARNING 5
• HDC is designed for driving on off-road steep grades.
position. 6
• Unnecessary usage of HDC can cause malfunctions in the brake
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is not depressed. system or ESP. Do not use HDC when driving on normal roads.
6. ESP (Electronic Stability Program, including BAS) is not • If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC
7
activated. may be applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed
bump. Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal
8
roads.
Deactivation Conditions of HDC 9
• If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or
1. The HDC switch is off (The green indicator on the instru- malfunctioning. If the indicator is on even after the system has 10
ment cluster is off too). cooled down enough, have the nearest authorized dealer or
service center check the system. 11
2. Less than required steep grade.
• It is normal to have strong vibrations and noise from the brake
3. Vehicle’s speed is out of the operational ranges. system when HDC is applied. 12
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in or passes through • In case of a manual transmission vehicle, the gear shift is in
the “N” position. Or the manual transmission shift lever the forwarding “1” or “Reverse” position. If HDC is attempted in 13
is engaged in or passes through the neutral position. the “2” position, the engine may turn off.
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is depressed. 14
6. ESP (including BAS) is applied. 15
7. Because of extended operation of HDC, the system is
overheated (The red HDC indicator illuminates). 16

ESP (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM) SWITCH AND ESP SYSTEM*
0 ESP Warning Lamp
1
2 Blinking: When ESP is activated.
3 ON: When ESP is deactivated (by pressing the ESP OFF
switch).
4 When ESP system is defective.
When ESP is activated, the indicator light is blinking and
5
a warning buzzer sounds. If this indicator illuminates in
6 spite of an activated ESP, this means a malfunction of the
ESP system.
7
8 Stopping ESP Function With ESPOFF Switch
9 If the driving wheels are slipping on snowy or icy roads,
ESPOFF Switch the engine rpm may not increase even when you depress
10 the accelerator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be
If you press the ESPOFF switch,
able to move your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP func-
11 the ESP function stops and the
indicator lamp in the instru- tion by pressing the ESPOFF switch. When the ESPOFF switch
12 ment cluster comes on. is pressed, the ESP function stops and the vehicle is
driven independently from the sensor outputs.
Press this switch again to re-
13 sume the ESP function. At this
time, the indicator lamp goes
Resuming ESP Function With ESPOFF Switch
14
out. If you push the ESPOFF switch again when the ESP function
15 is deactivated (the ESP warning lamp is turned on), the sys-
tem will be resumed and the ESP warning lamp on the in-
16 strument cluster goes out by resuming the ESP system.

0
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) System CAUTION 1
The Electronic Vehicle Stability Control Program (ESP) is a • If the ESP warning light comes on, the ESP related system is
supplementary driving safety system when your vehicle is un- defective. Make sure to check the vehicle at the nearest 2
stably moving in a certain situation, such as during a sharp Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
corner. The ESP applies brakes on a certain wheel(s) or con- • The ESP system does not operate during reverse driving. 3
trols the engine torque to compensate vehicle stability. These • The ESP system activates when the vehicle is unstable to cor-
actions help your vehicle avoid dangerous situations. The ESP rect the vehicle stability. When the ESP warning lamp and the
4
functions automatically, working only in very unstable warning alarm turn on, reduce the speed and pay extra atten-
tion to the road.
5
conditions; it does not operate under normal driving conditions.
If the ESP is engaged, the ESP warning light will flicker on the • The ESP system is only a supplementary device for the vehicle. 6
instrument cluster and a warning alarm will sound. When the vehicle exceeds its physical limits, it cannot be
controlled. Do not rely on the system. Keep driving safely. 7
BAS (Brake Assist System) Function • When ESP is applied, you may feel some noise or vibration from
A certain driver such as a female driver, aged driver, or a
the brake pedal or other relevant systems. They are caused by 8
pressure changes in the relevant systems.
driver with a disability is unable to depress the brake pedal
as hard as necessary. When the ESP system recognizes
• Do not drive off immediately after starting the engine. If you drive 9
off your vehicle within 2 minutes after turning the ignition switch
any emergency situations requiring hard braking, it automati- to “ON” position, the ESP self-diagnosis function does not operate. 10
cally delivers an extra high braking pressure to the wheels. In this case, the abnormal symptoms such as blinking of ESP warn-
ing lamp, alarming the buzzer, or braking the wheels may appear. 11
ARP (Active Rollover Protection) Function
This function is a part of the ESP system. When your ve- Driving Impression when ESP is Working 12
hicle moves in an extremely unstable manner, this function
helps the vehicle maintain normal stability.
When ESP is applied in a certain situation (the indicator blinks 13
and a warning buzzer sounds), such as during a sharp turn,
CAUTION you may feel that ESP controls each wheel and different lev- 14
els of needed braking force are applied to wheels. You may
The ARP system more powerfully controls the engine and each 15
wheel than the ESP function. When the ARP is applied, a sudden hear some noise or feel some vibrations from the brake pedal
decrease of vehicle speed or powerful braking force can make or other systems. They are caused by pressure changes in
steering your vehicle a little difficult. relevant system. You may also notice the engine output de- 16
creases even when the accelerator pedal is being depressed.

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS & GEAR SHIFT BUTTON (A/T) ON STEERING WHEEL
0
D- D+
1
VOL Gear shift button Gear shift button
2 (Down-shift) (Up-shift)
VOL
3 MODE
Increases/decreases volume
4 Audio mode changes when
the button is pressed.
5
POWER
6
The Power ON/ MUTE
7 OFF switch of
audio system is Stops audio output from the
8 located at left audio system. To resume
side of the steering wheel. the audio output, press the
9 To turn on the audio system, button again.
press this switch. To turn it
10 off, press this switch again.
11
12 SEEK
13 SEEK
14 • In CD (DVD) player/Cassette tape mode

- Press: Replay the next/previous track.
15 • In radio mode
16 - Press briefly: Manual searching for a station. Move to a stored station.
- Press and hold: Automatic searching for a station.

SWITCHES IN CENTER CONSOLE
Passenger’s Seat Heating Switch* 0

AV Outlet* Rotate the seat heating switch from ‘0’ (OFF) to
the desired position (1~5).
1
External audio and
video device can be 2
connected to the AV Cigarette Lighter
system in vehicle To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all the 3
through this outlet. way down. When it becomes heated, it automati-
cally pops out and is ready for use.
4
5
Gear Shift Button (Tip Switch)
You can manually shift up or down by pushing 6
or pulling this button at M position.
7
8
Driver’s Seat Heating Switch* 9
Rotate the seat heating switch from 10
‘0’ (OFF) to the desired position (1~5).
11
Transmission Mode Switch
12
You can select ‘Winter’ or ‘Standard’ mode 13
with this switch.
14
15
16

4-WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
0 4-Wheel Drive System DRIVING MODE

1 Transfer case which allows you, in the case of part-time 2H : 2-Wheel Drive
four wheel drive, to switch between two-wheel drive and This is rear wheel drive with
2 four-wheel drive. Compared with two-wheel drive high speed. Use this position
vehicles, this system provides more stable driving for normal driving. This posi-
3 conditions. This system ensures a more stable drive tion gives greater fuel
on wet or slippery roads. In case the greater traction is economy, quieter ride and
4 needed, you can shift into 4 Wheel Drive Low (4L). least drive train wear.
5
Types of Four-Wheel Drive System
6 All-Wheel Drive (AWD)* 4H : 4-Wheel Drive, High
7 AWD stands for the full-time 4WD system. Use this position on wet or
AWD reduces wheel slipage and provides greater slippery roads such as sandy,
8 driver control over the vehicle. AWD automatically splits muddy or snow covered
the torque between the front (40%) and rear (60%) roads.
9 wheels. This system controls the vehicle traction force
along with the ESP system.
10 Torque On-Demand (TOD) *
11 TOD, which is based on the Four-Wheel Drive, enables
the control unit to adjust the proportion of the torque
between the front and rear wheels according to driv- 4L : 4-Wheel Drive, Low
12
ing conditions. In case the greater traction is needed, Use this position for maxi-
13 you can shift into 4 Wheel Drive Low (4L). mum traction.
Part-Time 4-Wheel Drive
14 Normally, the vehicle is driving in 2WD mode. But if
needed, it can be changed into 4WD High (4H), and 4WD
15 Low (4L) by pressing the switch. This is equipped with the
control unit that supports the mode transfer. In 4WD mode,
16 the system splits the torque between the front (50%)
and rear (50%) wheels.

4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH Driving Mode Change 0
Select a proper
Part-Time driving mode
1
2H 4H
according to the 2
road conditions. It is recommended to shift under a speed of 70 km while
the vehicle is being driven. 3
• When shifting the driving mode to “4H”, 4
this indicator comes on.
• This indicator blinks during the mode 5
TOD
change from “4L” to “4H”. After completion
of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
6
comes on. 7
2H, 4H 4L 8
• Automatic Transmission Equipped Vehicle
9
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the gear 10
selector lever into the “N” position. Turn the switch to
the desired position while depressing the brake pedal. 11
• Manual Transmission Equipped Vehicle 12
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the shift
lever into the “Neutral” position. Turn the switch to the 13
desired position while depressing the clutch pedal.
NOTE 14
• The vehicle equipped with TOD system does not have the 2H • When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this
(2-wheel drive) function because it automatically controls the indicator blinks until the shifting operation
15
driving force at front and rear wheels. is completed. After completion of the mode
• The vehicle with AWD system does not have the 4WD switch
16
change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
because it is driven in full-time 4WD mode.

0 WARNING LIGHTS/INDICATORS AND CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
1 4WD HIGH Indicator Tight Cornering
• When shifting the driving Cornering a curve in 4WD mode (4L or 4H) may shake up the ve-
2 mode from “2H” to “4H”, this hicle or cause skidding. Such phenomena indicate that the four-
indicator comes on. wheel drive is operated normally, because they can be caused by
3
• When shifting the driving the resistance of the internal power system according to the differ-
4 mode from “4L” to “4H”, this ence of rotation between the front and rear wheels. Please avoid
indicator blinks until the shift- excessive and tight cornering in four-wheel drive mode to prevent
5 ing operation is completed. the power train from being damaged.
After completion of the mode
6 change to 4H, the indicator
comes on.
CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
7
• There could be mechanical noises and shocks during mode changes.
8 However, these are normal conditions due to the mode changing operations.
4WD LOW Indicator • Use only the 2H mode on a normal paved surface. Do not drive your ve-
9 hicle in the “4H” or “4L” position on paved road surfaces. Doing so will
When shifting the driving mode result in damages to the drive train.
• Driving in a 4 wheel mode on a normal paved surface will cause unwanted
10 to “4L”, this indicator blinks un-
noises, premature wear of tires, or increased fuel consumption.
til the shifting operation is • To shift from “4L” into another mode or vice versa, stop the vehicle and
11 completed. After completion of depress the brake pedal before any shift.
the mode change to 4L, the in- • If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system checked
12 dicator comes on. by the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
• When cornering a curved road in a 4-wheel drive mode (4L or 4H), there
13 could be some mechanical shocks and resistances in vehicle’s drive train.
These are normal conditions due to internal resistance in the drive train
14 4WD CHECK Warning Indicator when the 4-wheel drive mode is properly working. To avoid damages to
the drive train, do not drive your vehicle at an excessively high speed on
If this warning light comes on
15 while driving, have the 4WD
a sharply curved road.
• This helps to make the mode changes easily.
system checked by Ssangyong • In case of TOD, cornering a curve in 4L mode may cause shock. It is oper-
16 Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- ated normally, because it is caused by non-allowable speed difference
rized Service Center. between front and rear wheels to achieve maximum traction in 4L mode.

SWITCHES IN OVERHEAD CONSOLE, ROOM LAMP SWITCH
Spot Lamp Switch (Passenger’s) 0

The front room lamp (passenger’s) turns 1
on when pressing in this switch.
2
Sunroof Switch
Front Door Coupled Room The sunroof is opened/closed 3
Lamp Switch by pulling up/down the sunroof
If you open a door when this switch open/close switch. For details, 4
is pressed the room lamp comes refer to “Sunroof” section in
this manual.
5
on. When you close the door, the
room lamp is dimmed out. 6
7
Spot Lamp Switch 8
(Driver’s)
The front room lamp (driver’s) turns 9
on when pressing in this switch.
10
Center and Rear Room Lamp Switch

11
OFF position: The lamp does not come on. CAUTION 12
ON position: The lamp stays on. If your vehicle is left unattended while the spot
ON or center room lamp switch is turned on, the bat-
13
DOOR position ( ): The lamp comes on
DOOR tery may be discharged.
when the door is opened. The lamp goes 14
out when closing the opened door. If a door is opened for an extended period of
OFF time when the door switch is pressed in, the bat- 15
tery may be discharged.
16

Instrument Cluster 5 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Instrument Cluster .......................................... 5-2 Seat Belt Reminder, Engine Oil Pressure
5
Instrument Cluster (G32D) ............................. 5-4 Warning Light, Air Bag Warning Light, 6
Battery Charge Warning Light ................... 5-15
Tachometer, Speedometer .......................... 5-6 7
Door Ajar Warning Light,
Fuel Gauge, Coolant Temperature Gauge ... 5-7 8
ABS Warning Light ...................................... 5-16
Display .............................................................. 5-8
EBD Warning Light, HDC Indicator, 9
Adjusting the Instrument Cluster Illumination
Engine Check Warning Light, 10
(Black-Face Type) ........................................... 5-9
Front Fog Light Indicator ............................ 5-17
Water Separator Warning Light 11
High Beam Indicator, Turn Signal/Hazard
(DI Engine Only) ............................................ 5-10
Warning Indicator, 4WD Indicators ........... 5-18 12
ESP Warning Light, Immobilizer Indicator,
Brake Warning Light, Cruise Control 13
Winter Mode Indicator, SSPS Warning
Indicator*, Engine Overheat Warning Light, 14
Light ................................................................ 5-14
Low Fuel Level Warning Light .................. 5-19
15
Glow Indicator (For Diesel Engine) ........... 5-20
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (DIESEL)
0 BLACK FACE TYPE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. ESP warning light 15. Engine check warning light 29. TPMS warning light
10 2. Left turn signal indicator 16. Engine oil pressure warning light 30. Global warning
3. Right turn signal indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 31. Low fuel level warning light
11 4. High beam indicator 18. SSPS warning light 32. Trip switch
12 5. Front fog light indicator 19. EAS level change indicator 33. Tire inflation pressure indicator
6. Winter mode indicator 20. EAS warning light 34. 4WD LOW indicator
13 7. Tachometer 21. EPB warning light 35. 4WD HIGH indicator
8. Speedometer 22. Automatic parking brake setting indicator 36. 4WD CHECK warning light
14 9. Fuel gauge 23. Brake warning light 37. Water separator warning light
15 10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 24. Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat) 38. Glow indicator
11. Immobilizer indicator 25. Air bag warning light 39. Engine overheat warning light
16 12. ABS warning light 26. Door ajar warning light 40. Hazard indicator
13. EBD warning light 27. Auto shift indicator 41. Auto cruise indicator
14. HDC indicator 28. Odometer/ Trip odometer
GETtheMANUALS.org
5-2 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
STANDARD TYPE 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. ESP warning light 13. EBD warning light 24. Odometer/ Trip odometer
2. Left turn signal indicator 14. HDC indicator 25. Low fuel level warning light 10
3. Right turn signal indicator 15. Engine check warning light 26. Trip switch
4. High beam indicator 16. Engine oil pressure warning light 27. 4WD LOW indicator
11
5. Front fog light indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 28. 4WD HIGH indicator 12
6. Winter mode indicator 18. SSPS warning light 29. 4WD CHECK warning light
7. Tachometer 19. Brake warning light 30. Water separator warning light 13
8. Speedometer 20. Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat) 31. Glow indicator
9. Fuel gauge 21. Air bag warning light 32. Engine overheat warning light 14
10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 22. Door ajar warning light 33. Hazard indicator 15
11. Immobilizer indicator 23. Auto shift indicator 34. Auto cruise indicator
12. ABS warning light 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 5-3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (G32D)
0 BLACK FACE TYPE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. ESP warning light 14. HDC indicator 27. Auto shift indicator
10 2. Left turn signal indicator 15. Engine check warning light 28. Odometer/ Trip odometer
3. Right turn signal indicator 16. Engine oil pressure warning light 29. TPMS warning light
11 4. High beam indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 30. Global warning
12 5. Front fog light indicator 18. SSPS warning light 31. Low fuel level warning light
6. Winter mode indicator 19. EAS level change indicator 32. Trip switch
13 7. Tachometer 20. EAS warning light 33. Tire inflation pressure indicator
8. Speedometer 21. EPB warning light 34. 4WD LOW indicator
14 9. Fuel gauge 22. Automatic parking brake setting indicator 35. 4WD HIGH indicator
15 10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 23. Brake warning light 36. 4WD CHECK warning light
11. Immobilizer indicator 24. Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat) 37. Engine overheat warning light
16 12. ABS warning light 25. Air bag warning light 38. Hazard indicator
13. EBD warning light 26. Door ajar warning light 39. Auto cruise indicator
GETtheMANUALS.org
STANDARD TYPE 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2. Left turn signal indicator 15. Engine check warning light 28. Odometer/ Trip odometer 10
4. High beam indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 30. Global warning
11
5. Front fog light indicator 18. SSPS warning light 31. Low fuel level warning light 12
7. Tachometer 20. EAS warning light 33. Tire inflation pressure indicator 13
9. Fuel gauge 22. Automatic parking brake setting indicator 35. 4WD HIGH indicator 14
10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 23. Brake warning light 36. 4WD CHECK warning light 15
12. ABS warning light 25. Air bag warning light 38. Hazard indicator 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
1 Diesel Gasoline
RED ZONE RED ZONE
2
3
RED ZONE
4 (GCC ONLY)
5
6
7
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in kilometers
8 minute. Multiply 1,000 to the current number, then it will be per hour (km/h) or mile per hour (mph).
the current number of engine revolutions.
9 WARNING
WARNING Excessive speed can damage engine. Do not let engine reach ex-
10 cessive speed, indicated by pointer being in red zone.
Do not let engine reach excessive speed, indicated by the pointer
11 being in the red zone.
12 NOTE
13
14
15
16
Speedometer-KPH (MPH) Speedometer-MPH (KPH)
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL GAUGE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
This gauge indicates the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The temperature gauge indicates the temperature of the en-
Fill up the fuel tank before the needle reaches “E”. gine coolant. 10
CAUTION 11
The engine can overheat. 12
• If the pointer reaches the red zone, stop the vehicle.
• Allow engine to cool. 13
If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine. 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 DISPLAY
1 Auto Shift Indicator
This indicator shows the gear selector lever position and
2 currently selected gear.
3
4
5
6
7 Trip Switch
Gear selector lever position
8 (P, R, N, D, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1)
9
Odometer and Trip Odometer Display
10
Each time the TRIP/RESET switch on the center panel is pressed lightly, the
11 indicators are changed. To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.
12
13
14
15 Trip Trip A Trip B Illumination control
Unit: 0~999999km Unit: 0.0~999.9km Unit: 0.0~999.9km mode
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0
ILLUMINATION (BLACK-FACE TYPE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Trip Switch 7
8
9
When ILL appears in the trip display by pressing the trip
switch (Adjustment Mode for Instrument Cluster 10
Illumination), keep pressing the trip switch, then the instru-
ment cluster illumination will be adjusted while ILL 6, ILL5, 11
ILL4, ILL3, ILL2 and ILL1 appear in the display. Stop press-
ing the switch when the proper illumination is achieved.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR WARNING LIGHT (DI ENGINE ONLY)
0
Water Separator Warning Light (Without additional water separator)
1 When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level,
this warning light comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force of the vehicle
2 decreases. If these conditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter.
3 For the draining procedures, please refer to “How to drain the water from the fuel filter
(Without additional water separate)” on the next page.
4 This warning light goes off when the draining is completed.
5 Water Separator Warning Light (With additional water separator)

6 When the water level inside the water separator exceeds a certain level, this warning light
comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force of the vehicle decreases. If these con-
7 ditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter & water separator.
For the draining procedures, refer to “How to drain the water from the fuel filter (With additional
8 water separator)” on page 5-12.
10
11 CAUTIONS
12 • The fuel system in the engine may get serious damage if • When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel
you keep driving while the warning light is on. Prompt cor- filter exceeds a certain level, this warning light comes on
13 rection should be necessary. and a buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force of the ve-
• Using low quality fuel could result in serious damage hicle decreases. If these conditions occur, immediately
14 drain the water from fuel filter. If the above conditions still
to the engine due to the water or impurities in fuel. Never
15 use low quality fuel. exist after draining the water, have the system checked
by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
• After removing any water in the fuel filter, pump fuel until
16 the priming pump is fully filled before starting the engine.
Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DIESEL ENGINE
How to Drain the Water from the Fuel Filter (Without Additional Water Separator) 0
1. Locate the fuel filter in the engine compartment and place 4. Wait until a certain amount of fuel gets out from the port,
a water container under it. then turn the drain plug to the closing direction to tighten it.
1
2. Disconnect the connector under the drain plug of the water 5. Engage the connector under the drain plug and press the 2
separator. priming pump until it becomes rigid.
3. Turn the drain plug to the opening direction to drain the 6. Close the engine hood and start the engine. 3
water.
4
5
6
7
Priming pump
8
9
Fuel filter 10
11
WARNING 12
If the priming pump is not properly operated, air may get into the fuel
Closing line. It may cause a starting problem or fuel system problem. Make 13
Opening
sure to perform the job in step 5.
14
Drain plug
Connector CAUTION 15
Be careful not to be injured by surrounding equipment during the work-
ing procedures. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DIESEL ENGINE
0 How to Drain the Water from the Fuel Filter (With Additional Water Separator)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CAUTION
12 Drain the water from the fuel filter & water separator immediately
after the warning light comes on. If you cannot do that by yourself,
13 visit the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser- 3
vice Center.
14 2
1
15 WARNING
The fuel system in the engine may get serious damage if you keep
16 driving while the warning light is on. Prompt correction should be 1. Priming pump 3. Water separator
necessary. 2. Fuel filter
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1. Locate the fuel filter ( ) & water separator ( ) in the en-
gine compartment.
1
2. Place the water container under the fuel filter & water 2
separator.
3. Disconnect the connector under the drain plug ( ) of the
3
water separator. 4
4. Turn two drain plugs to the “ ” direction to drain the water.
5. Press the priming pump until all water is drained. After 5
draining, turn the drain plug until the gasket contact to the
6
Fuel filter Water separator threaded plug hole, then tighten (“ ” direction) it 1/2 turns
by hand. 7
CAUTION 8
ing procedures. 9
10
6. Engage the connector under the drain plug and press the
priming pump ( ) until it becomes rigid. 11
7. Close the engine hood and start the engine.
12
WARNING
13
line. It may cause a starting problem or a fuel system problem. Make 14
1. Fuel filter 3. Water separator 15
2. Priming pump 4. Drain plug
A. Opening direction of drain plug 5. Connector 16
B. Closing direction of drain plug A. Opening direction of drain plug
B. Closing direction of drain plug
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 ESP WARNING LIGHT WINTER MODE INDICATOR
If you press the ESPOFF switch, the The indicator comes on when the
1 ESP function stops and the indicator Winter mode (W) switch near the
2 lamp in the instrument cluster comes gear selector lever is pressed.
on. If the ESP function operates, the Use this mode to drive off smoothly
3 indicator lamp flickers. on an icy and slippery road.
If the ESP warning light is on without
4 any deactivation of the system, there are some malfunctions
in the system. Take the vehicle to an authorized dealer or
5 service operation. SSPS WARNING LIGHT
6 For more information about ESP (Electronic Stability
This warning light comes on when the
Program), refer to Chapter 4.
SSPS system is defective. When this
7 warning light comes on, the steerability
8 becomes heavier.
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR
9
This indicator comes on when the igni-
10 tion key is communicating with the en- What is SSPS?
gine control unit (during engine starting) Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS) is the device that pro-
11 for 0.5 seconds. vides good driving condition and steering stability by making
The time needed for communication the steerability heavier in high-speed driving, and lighter in stop
12 between the immobilizer key and or low-speed driving.
13 ECU can vary. When the time is very short, the immobilizer
CAUTION
14 If the SSPS warning light comes on or when you feel the steering
CAUTION wheel heavy, have the SSPS system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
15 If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that there is something wrong
in the immobilizer system. Have the system checked by a
16 Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT REMINDER AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT 0
When the ignition switch is turned to When the ignition is switched on, this
the “ON” position and the driver’s warning light illuminates and then
1
seat belt is not fastened, the re- should go off, to confirm that the air 2
minder light will come on and the bag is operational.
seat belt warning chime will sound If it does not come on, or if it does 3
for 6 seconds. This reminding opera- not go off, or if it flashes or illumi-
tion stops when the driver fastens the nates continuously while driving, it means that there is a 4
seat belt even during its operation malfunction in the system. Have the air bag system checked
period. without delay by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- 5
rized Service Center.
6
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT NOTE 7
This warning light comes on when the For more detailed information, refer to the “Seat Belt and Air Bag”
ignition is switched on and should go section. 8
out when the engine is started.
9
BATTERY CHARGE WARNING LIGHT 10
CAUTION This warning light comes on when 11
If this light does not go off after engine starting or comes on while the ignition switch is turned on and it
driving, it means there is a malfunction in the system. Running the goes off when the engine is started. 12
engine with the oil pressure warning light on can cause serious dam- If this light doesn’t go off after engine
age to the engine. Have the lubricating system checked by a starting or comes on while driving, it 13
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. means there is a malfunction in the
system. Have the charging system checked by a Ssangyong
14
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 DOOR AJAR WARNING LIGHT ABS WARNING LIGHT
This light comes on when a door or the When the ignition switch is turned
1 tailgate is either opened or not closed “ON”, this warning light comes on and
2 completely. goes out if the system is normal.
3
4 WARNING
WARNING
5 • If this light doesn’t come on when the ignition is switched to “ON”
Driving with the door open can cause injury to people inside and out- or if this light doesn’t go out, contact your nearest Ssangyong Dealer
side the vehicle. or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. If this light illuminates
6 while driving, a malfunction of ABS is indicated. In this case the
• Before driving off, close all doors.
brake system performs its regular function but without the anti-lock-
7 • Check whether or not the light is off.
ing capability. Have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible if
8 this condition occurs.
9 • ABS is a device that prevents wheels from locking during braking
to allow steering. However, the ABS system does not shorten the
stopping distance.
10
11
CAUTION
12 When the engine starts and the vehicle starts to move, ABS performs
self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pressure to the braking units.
13 This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ABS is prop-
erly functioning.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD WARNING LIGHT ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT 0
When the ignition switch is turned to If the light stays on or comes on while
“ON”, this warning light comes on and driving, some of the engine control com-
1
goes out if the system is normal. If the ponents including sensors and devices 2
EBD system is abnormal, the EBD are defective.
warning light stays on. 3
WARNING WARNING 4
If the EBD warning light stays on, have the system checked by a If the engine halts due to a completely empty fuel tank and the en- 5
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. gine check light comes on even after refueling, the engine’s power
output may decrease within a certain driving distance (about 30 km).
6
CAUTION 7
HDC INDICATOR When this warning light comes on, the vehicle operates in safety
mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and to prevent the sys- 8
When the HDC switch is pressed tem from being damaged. In this mode, the engine driving force
once, HDC is ready for use. The may be decreased or the engine may stall. When this happens, 9
green HDC indicator in the instru- have the system checked at the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or
ment cluster comes on. When the Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. 10
button is pressed again, HDC is de-
activated and the indicator goes off. 11
When HDC is applied, the green HDC indicator blinks. 12
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC system is over-
heated or malfunctioning. For more information, refer to When the tail or head lights are on, 13
Chapter 4, HDC Switch. the fog lights come on if the fog light
switch is turned to the “ON” position. 14
CAUTION Then, the fog light indicator in the in-
strument cluster comes on. 15
If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or
malfunctioning. If the indicator is on even after the system has 16
cooled down enough, have the nearest authorized dealer or ser-
vice center check the system.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 HIGH BEAM INDICATOR 4WD INDICATORS
This indicator illuminates when the high The vehicle with AWD (All Wheel Drive) system doesn’t have
1 beam headlamp is switched on. the 4WD indicators and 4WD switch.
2 4WD Low Indicator
3 When shifting the driving mode to “4L”,
this indicator blinks until the shifting
4 WARNING
operation is completed. After comple-
tion of the mode change to 4L, the in-
5 Driving with high beam headlamp disturbs the approaching vehicle’s
dicator comes on.
visibility. For safe driving, use the high beam headlamp only when it
is very hard to see the road.
6 4WD High Indicator
When shifting the driving mode from
7 “4L” to “4H”, this indicator blinks until
8 the shifting operation is completed. Af-
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD WARNING INDICATOR ter completion of the mode change to
9 Turn Signal Indicator 4H, the indicator comes on.
This indicator blinks when the turn
10 signal switch is turned on.
4WD Check Warning Light
11 Both indicators blink when the hazard ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
warning switch is turned on. should go out if the system is normal.
12 If the “4WD CHECK” warning light
Hazard Warning Indicator stays on, have the 4WD system
13
This indicator blinks when the hazard checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
14 warning switch is turned on. vice Center.
15 CAUTION
• If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
16 checked.
• Do not drive your vehicle over 80 km/h in 4H mode.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ENGINE OVERHEAT WARNING LIGHT 0
This warning light comes on when the When the engine coolant temperate is
parking brake is applied and/or the abnormally hot, the engine overheat
1
brake fluid level is lower than a speci- warning light blinks and a warning 2
fied level. buzzer sounds. When this happens,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and let 3
the engine cool down. For more
CAUTION information, refer to Chapter 12 “When the engine is 4
overheating.”
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds (over 10 km/h) while 5
the parking brake is applied, the parking brake warning light comes
CAUTION
on and a warning buzzer sounds. If it occurs, immediately stop
the vehicle and release the parking brake. If you keep driving the vehicle with the warning light and buzzer 6
on, the engine can be damaged. After completely cooling down
the engine have an authorized dealer or service center check the 7
WARNING vehicle.
Driving the vehicle with the brake fluid warning light on is dangerous.
8
If the parking brake light stays on, you must immediately have your 9
vehicle checked and serviced by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center. LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT 10
This warning light indicates that the fuel
will soon be exhausted. The time it
11
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR* takes to turn on, however, varies ac- 12
cording to the vehicle operation or road
This indicator comes on when the cruise conditions. Do not wait until this light is 13
control is switched on. on to refuel the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that fuel should be added as soon as this light comes on. 14
CAUTION 15
While driving on steep hills or rough roads, this warning light may
come on if the remaining fuel level is low. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 GLOW INDICATOR (FOR DIESEL ENGINE)
When the ignition switch is turned to
1 “ON”, this indicator comes on and
2 stays for a short time or may go off right
away. When the glow plugs are suffi-
3 ciently heated, the light will go out. In
the vehicle equipped with a direct in-
4 jection type engine, this indicator may come on very shortly or
may not even come on.
5
CAUTION
6 When the glow indicator comes on while driving or the engine cannot
be started properly, have the glow plug system checked by a
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Transmission and Brake System 6 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Manual Transmission .................................. 6-2

5
6
Gear Selector Lever in Automatic
Transmission ................................................ 6-4 7
Driving Tips For Automatic Transmission .. 6-6 8
Gear Selector Lever Positions ................... 6-7 9
Winter (W) / Standard Mode (S) ............... 6-13 10
Safety Mode (Automatic Transmission) .... 6-14
11
Parking Aid System* .................................. 6-15

12
13
3.5° Aiming Down Of Outside Rearview
Mirror During Reverse Driving .................. 6-17 14
Brake System ............................................. 6-18 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The manual transmission in your vehicle has 5 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal.
0 Then, move the gearshift lever into a desire gear. After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
1
5th Gear
2
Position for very high speed driving on a
3 highway
3rd Gear Be careful to avoid any unwanted shift from
4 For low- or mid-speed driving. Be careful to the 5th gear into the 2nd gear, rather than
avoid any unwanted shift from the 2nd gear the 4th gear.
5
into the 5th gear, rather than the 3rd gear.
6
5th
7 3rd
8 1st Gear 1st Reverse Gear

Position for driving off and high traction Position for reverse driving
9 force Reverse
10 Depress the clutch pedal to its deepest 4th
point and move the shift lever to “1”. Neutral 4th Gear
2nd
11 Then, slowly release the clutch pedal
Position for normal and high speed
while gently depressing the accelerator
12 driving
pedal to drive off.
13 Neutral Position
14 Position for engine start, vehicle stop, 2nd Gear
and parking
Position for low speed driving
15
16
6-2 TRANSMISSION ANDGETtheMANUALS.org

BRAKE SYSTEM
GEAR SHIFTING IN MANUAL TRANSMISSION 0
Starting CAUTION 1
The engine can be started only when the clutch pedal is • If the clutch pedal is frequently half-depressed, the clutch disk
depressed. will be easily worn out. Use only as needed. 2
• Do not put your foot on the clutch pedal if not shifting gears.
Driving Off • While your vehicle is moving, do not put your hand on the shift
3
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal. Then, move lever except to shift gears. Otherwise, the gear may be disen-
gaged from the transmission and the internal transmission com-
4
the gear selector lever into a desire gear (1st gear or reverse
ponents may be damaged.
gear). After shifting, release the clutch slowly. 5
Reversing WARNING 6
You should stop your vehicle and fully depress the clutch pedal • When shifting from a high gear into a lower gear, ensure that
before you shift into the reverse position. the RPM gauge pointer does not go into the red zone on the 7
gauge. Especially, when shifting from the 5th to the 4th gear,
moving the gear shift lever to the left too much may result in 8
NOTE shifting into the 2nd gear. This will cause a sudden increase of
• When the temperature of the transmission oil is very low on a
the engine speed and may damage the engine and the 9
transmission.
cold day, you may have some difficulty for shifting gears. This
is a normal phenomenon. • Do not shift into the second next higher gear from a lower gear. 10
Also, while the engine is rotating fast, do not shift into a lower
• When you have difficulty for shifting into the 1st or reserve gear,
gear. 11
put the gear shift lever into the neural position and release the
clutch pedal. Then, depress the pedal again and shift into the 12
intended gear.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
TRANSMISSION AND BRAKE SYSTEM 6-3
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER IN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
0
Gear Position Tip Switch in “M” Position
1 • P : Parking (Manual Gear Shift)
The shiftable gear can be adjusted by moving
2 • R : Reverse this switch to forward and rearward when the
3 • N : Neutral gear selector lever is in “M” position.
4 • D : Driving
5
6
7
8
9
Mode Switch Shift Lock Release Button when
10 Locked in the “P” Position
• W : Winter mode
If you cannot move the selector lever from the
11 • S : Standard mode “P” or “N” position, try to move the lever while
12 Use the standard mode in normal pushing down here with a sharp object such
driving conditions. as a ballpoint pen. For your safety, turn off
13 the engine and depress the brake pedal be-
fore the attempt.
14 Selection of Manual /
Automatic Shift Function To shift into any other positions from the “P”
15 or “N” position after stopping the vehicle,
• D : Automatic shift according to the driving condition you have to depress the brake pedal with
16 the ignition switch “ON”
• M : Manual shift

BRAKE SYSTEM
Starting and Driving Off 0
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”
and the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid
CAUTION 1
• Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after shift-
starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so. ing into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Especially, 2
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal op- when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the “D”
erating range (below 1,000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal de- shift indicator comes on for several seconds with the brake pedal 3
depressed.
pressed and shift into “D” or “R”.
• When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If 4
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engage-
move the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a ment can damage the driving train. 5
while several seconds before driving off with the brake pedal • HDC is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is
depressed. applied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated. 6
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress • Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in
the accelerator pedal gradually. both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with
7
the selector lever in “P”.
8
WARNING • As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved
• For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving into the “P” or “R” position when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h. 9
the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped. • Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
• Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selec- 10
tor lever.
• If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal securely. 11
• When starting the engine with the accelerator depressed, your ve- 12
hicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
• When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at 13
a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
the engine speed becomes stable. 14
• To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
“P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion. 15
• When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a
higher to a lower gear can severely damage the vehicle. In addition, 16
your vehicle may lose its stability and be at a high risk.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING TIPS FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
0 Creep Phenomenon Engine Brake

Without any depression of the accelerator pedal, your ve- When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is
1 hicle can move slowly if the selector lever is in any position in motion, the engine speed decreases. This decreased en-
other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You gine speed creates an extra braking force. On a down hill,
2 engaging a lower gear can generate a slower engine speed
can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the
3 brake in heavy traffic or narrow areas. and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using this
engine brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed with-
4 CAUTION
out excessively using the brake system. The lower gear,
the more braking force.
5 • On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite
direction of the intended direction in spite of the creep effect. When
stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal. CAUTION
6
• Never move the selector lever to the “N” position while driving. By • Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long
7 doing so, the engine brake cannot be applied. This may result in hill. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or the
unwanted accidents. fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force.
8 • Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear se-
lector lever is in the “N” position.
9 Kickdown Function • Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires may
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator slip.
10
pedal completely to the floor. Then, a one- or two-lever gear
11 will automatically be engaged. This is called the Kickdown
function.
12
13 CAUTION
• Do not use the kickdown operation while driving on slippery or
14 sharply curved roads.
• If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability and
15 fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse.
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS
P: PARK POSITION 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P: Park position Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or 9
R: Reverse position stay in a location for an extended length of time.
N: Neutral position To shift into any other position, depress the brake pedal. 10
D: Drive position WARNING 11
M: Manual shift • Never shift into “P” when the vehicle is moving, or the transmis- 12
sion will be damaged.
• Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”. 13
• To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch 14
must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed.
Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without 15
the two procedures may damage the selector lever.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 R: REVERSE POSITION N: NEUTRAL POSITION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 • Use this position to reverse the vehicle. At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the
To shift into “R” from “P” or “N”, completely stop the wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However,
10 for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
vehicle and depress the brake pedal. When the shift lever
To shift into “D” or “R” position from “N” position after stop-
is in “R” , and parking aid system will be activated ping the vehicle, you have to depress the brake pedal with
11 (optional (If equipped)). the ignition switch “ON”.
12 WARNING
WARNING
13 • Warm up the engine for approx.3 minutes when the ambient tem-
• Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
perature is below -15°C. Otherwise, the gear selector lever may
• Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when the not be moved smoothly (N→R). It is designed for protecting the
14 selector lever is at “R”. vehicle and is not a fault.
• Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when
15 CAUTION the vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged.
• If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral
As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved into
16 “P” or “R” when the vehicle speed is about 8 km/h.
position, depress the brake pedal firmly.
• Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the
vehicle is in motion.

BRAKE SYSTEM
D: DRIVE POSITION 0
WARNING 1
ing into “D”, or the transmission will be damaged. Especially, when 2
you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle, wait for
a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake 3
pedal depressed.
• Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill 4
according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake pedal.
5
CAUTION 6
Please note that the vehicle may slowly move forward on level ground
when the selector lever is in “D”.
7
8
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmis- WARNING
9
sion is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 5th gears ac- • If you touch the selector lever unexpectedly while driving, the shift-
cording to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal. able gear may be changed. It can make the vehicle unstable. Be 10
careful not to touch the selector lever while driving (especially dur-
ing the winter season).
11
• Do not downshift abruptly (3, 2, or 1) when the vehicle speed is
high (D or 4). You could lose control and hit people or objects 12
(especially on a slippery road).
• If low-range maximum speeds are exceeded when the selector le- 13
ver is in low gears, the transmission can be damaged.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE
1 Shift Lock Function
2 This system locks the gear selector lever in the automatic
transmission according to the driving status and condi-
3 tions to prevent driver from making operational mistakes,
to protect the system, and to provide good driving stability.
4
5 Shift Lever Lock in “P” or “N” Position
6 To shift from “P”, the ignition switch must be turned to
ON and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Shift lever lock
7 If you cannot shift out of “P”, check the followings: release
- The ignition key is in “ON”.
8
- The brake pedal is d epressed.
9
Prohibition of Gear Shift from “N” to “R” If you cannot shift out of “P” with the ignition switch in
10 ON ,and the brake pedal depressed:
While Driving
11 1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off.
To maintain the vehicle stability and protect the drive train of
the vehicle, the gear shifting from “N” to “R” is not available 2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock re-
12 when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h. lease lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the lever
to other position.
13
WARNING
14 If this happens, have your vehicle repaired by the nearest Ssangyong
dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible.
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
MANUAL GEAR SHIFT BY TIP SWITCH 0
Adjustment for the Shiftable Gear Tip Switch on Steering Wheel 1
Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the tip switch af-
ter moving the gear selector lever from “D” to “M” position. 2
Selecting “M”: 3
Manual gear shift Shift Shift up 4
down
5
6
7
If the gear selector level is moved to “M” position while driving, 8
the gear is shifted down to the next lower gear.
9
NOTE Tip Switch in Gear Selector Lever
To prevent shift shock and to protect the system, in some cases, the 10
current gear may not be shifted to the lower gear even if the gear
selector lever is moved to “M” position. 11
Shift up
Use of Engine Brake 12
To use the engine brake, change into the manual gear shift mode
first, then operate the tip switch to next lower shiftable gear. Shift down 13
CAUTION 14
• Operate the tip switch only once. If you keep pressing the button,
the gear may be shifted through several steps in a series.
15
• Abruptly using the engine brake may make driving unstable. Do 16
not use the engine brake abruptly especially when driving on
roads covered with snow or ice.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 GEAR POSITION DISPLAY ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• In this position, you can only use the 1st gear Manual Gear Shift Position
1 in the transmission. Use this position on long
2 mountainous terrains, steep hills, and rough off-
road. This also provides the engine brake ef-
3 fect on steep downhills.
4 • The drive position prevents the transmission

from shifting into the third or fourth gear. Se-
5 lect drive range 2 for more power when climb-
ing hills, for the engine braking effects when
6 driving down steep hills.
7 • At this position, the transmission is automati-

cally shifted from the 1st gear up to the 3rd gear
8 according to the vehicle speed. You can get the
engine brake effect when using this position
9 during downhill driving.
CAUTION
10 • Select this position for normal forward driving on
• When pushing and holding the manual gear shift switch, the gear
paved roads. In this position, the transmission
11 is automatically shifted from the 1st gear up to
may be shifted through several steps in series. Make sure to shift
one step at a time.
12 the 4th gear according to the vehicle speed. • Please note that the gear may be upshifted if you fully depress the
accelerator pedal while driving with 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear.
13 • In this position, the transmission is automati- • If you apply excessive force when moving the manual gear shift
switch, the gear may not be shifted into other gears. Soft and smooth
14 cally shifted from the 1st gear up to the 5th gear
operation is recommended.
according to the vehicle speed. Select this po-
15 sition for normal forward driving on paved roads.
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
WINTER (W) / STANDARD MODE (S)
0
Mode Switch 1
Winter Mode
In this mode, the vehicle can start off from the 2nd gear 2
(forward and reverse). Use this mode in the event of start-
ing-off on slippery roads. 3
Winter Mode (W) 4
• To select the winter mode, press “W” on the mode switch. The 5
“WINTER” indicator in the instrument cluster comes on. Use the standard mode in 6
• In this mode, the vehicle can start from the 2nd gear (forward normal driving conditions
and reverse). Use this mode in the event of starting-off on and use the winter mode on 7
slippery roads. slippery roads.
8
Standard Mode (S)
• Use the standard mode in normal driving conditions.
9
10
How to Start Off the Vehicle with 2nd
Forward/Reverse Gear
11
1. Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to select the 12
winter mode.
2. Place the selector lever to “D” and check if the shift lever
13
indicator shows “D”. 14
3. You can now start off the vehicle with the 2nd forward gear.
4. Place the selector lever to the “R” position to start off the
CAUTION 15
• Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill
vehicle with the 2nd reverse gear. according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake pedal. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY MODE (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
0 SYMPTOMS RESETTING THE SAFETY MODE WHEN

When the transmission has an electrical or mechanical fault, THE GEAR IS FIXED
1 the transmission operates in the safety mode to maintain mini-
2 mum driving conditions and to prevent the transmission from How to Reset the Safety Mode
being damaged.
1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to “P”.
3 When the transmission is defective, the symptoms that can
occur are as follows: 2. Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 seconds.
4 • Heavy shock when moving the selector lever 3. Start the engine.
5 • Decreased driving force while driving at high speed Symptoms After Resetting the Safety Mode
• Fixed gear position during driving (cannot accelerate the • If the vehicle operates normally after resetting, the problems
6 vehicle) are corrected.
7 • If gear is fixed at the 2nd forward gear in the “D” position
CAUTION
8 • If you find any symptoms caused by mechanical or electrical de- or the 2nd reverse gear in “R”. Have the system checked
fects in the transmission, stop the vehicle immediately and reset by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
9 the safety mode. Center.
• If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd for-
10 ward gear in “D” or 2nd reverse gear in “R”) still exists, have
the system checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Au-
11 thorized Service Center.
12 • If the mechanical or electrical problem still exists, have the sys-
tem checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
13
14
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING AID SYSTEM*
When the gear selector lever is shifted into “R”, the parking aid system is
0
Distance Alarm interval
activated and the sensors in the rear bumper detect the distance to any 1
obstacle. You can figure out the distance from the obstacle to your vehicle over 1.2 m no alarm
by the alarming sound. The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle 2
approaches the object.
90 cm ~ 1.2 m approx. 2.6 sec 3
4
60 cm ~ 90 cm approx. 0.7 sec
5
25 cm ~ 60 cm alarm stays on 6
7
CAUTION 8
• The alarm does not sound if the distance
between sensor and obstacle is less than 9
25 cm. However, if the sensor detects
the obvious obstacle, the alarm may 10
sound.
• Do not rely on the parking aid system 11
while gear selector lever is in “R” position.
Drive backward while checking the rear 12
side of your vehicle.
Obstacle Detecting Sensor
• If the buzzer sounds abnormally or 13
When you move the gear selector sounds for over 3 seconds when plac-
lever to “R”, the alarm sounds ac- ing the gear selector lever to “R” position, 14
cording to the distance from obstacle the parking aid system is defective. Have
to vehicle. the system checked at Ssangyong Dealer 15
or Ssangyong Authorized Service center.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CAUTION
1 You should continue to utilize the mirrors or turning your The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle ap-
2 head. When reversing, adhere to the common proaches the obstacle.
precautions.
3 • The parking aid system is a supplementary system to help X Certain obstacles that sensors cannot detect
your parking. It is not intended to replace the driver’s • Thin and narrow objects, such as wires, ropes, or chains
4 attentiveness. • Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that absorb ultrasonic
5 • Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a waves.
high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could • Obstacles lower than the bumper: Drainage or puddle
6 be damaged.
• Normally, when you select the “R” position with the igni- X Sensor Cannot Detect
7 tion “ON”, the alarm sounds “beep” once. • When the sensing portion is frozen.
8 • When the sensing portion is covered by rain, water drops,
In the parking lot as shown in the snow or mud.
9 figure, the upper portion of the ve-
hicle can be hit before the sensor X Weak Sensing Scopes
10 operation, so check with the out-
• When they are partially covered by snow or mud.
side rearview mirrors or by turn-
11 ing your head during parking. • When the ambient temperature is too high or too low.
12 X Not Defective But Improperly Working

• When driving on rough roads, gravel roads, hills, or grass.
13
• When the bumper height is changed due to a heavy load.
14 • When receiving other ultrasonic signals (metal sounds or
air braking noises from heavy commercial vehicles).
15
• When a high-power radio is turned on.
16 • When the sensor is hindered by improperly fitted accessories.

BRAKE SYSTEM
3.5° AIMING DOWN OF OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR DURING REVERSE DRIVING
0
1. Select left (L) or right (R)
side mirror with the mirror
1
select switch. 2
3
4
5
2. The selected mirror aims
down 3.5° when the gear 6
selector lever is moved to
R
“R” position. 7
8
3. The outside rearview mir-
ror returns to the original 9
position when shifting out
from “R” position 10
3.5° Aiming Down
11
CAUTION
12
• This function does not operate when the mirror selection switch is
at center position. 13
• This is a supplementary system to help your driving. It is not in-
tended to replace the driver’s attentiveness. 14
• If you need to operate the windows, complete it before shifting to
“R” position. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE SYSTEM
0 Warning Light & Indicator

1 Brake ABS EBD HDC ESP
warning light warning light warning light indicator warning light
2
3
4
5
6
7 HDC switch* ESPOFF switch*
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 Parking brake
lever
15 Brake pedal
(foot brake)
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE PEDAL (FOOT BRAKE) BRAKE WARNING LIGHT 0
The brake pedal (foot brake) is designed to decrease the ve-
hicle speed and stop the vehicle. Do not excessively apply
1
the brake pedal while going down a long hill. The brake sys- 2
tem will overheat causing the vapor lock or fade phenom-
enon thus losing braking force. Use the foot brake along with
Illuminating 3
the engine braking effects by selecting lower gears.
This warning light comes on when the parking brake is ap- 4
CAUTION plied and/or the brake fluid level is lower than a specified level.
Avoid abrupt engine braking on slippery roads or the tires may slip.
5
Flashing
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds (at a speed of 10
6
Fade? km/h or higher) while the parking brake is applied, the parking 7
brake warning light flickers and the warning buzzer sounds. If
Reduction or loss in braking force due to loss of friction be-
tween brake pads and disc.
it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and release the park- 8
ing brake.
Vapor Lock? 9
Brake Pads/Discs
When the brake system is overheated, the fluid in the brake 10
lines will boil and form bubbles. Only the bubbles will be Check the brake pads/discs for wear at every 10,000 km of
compressed when the brake pedal is depressed. So the driving and replace if necessary. 11
brakes cannot work properly due to loss of braking force. If a brake pad/disc squeaks, replace it with new one
immediately. 12
Engine Brake?
It indicates that they should be replaced. 13
A system that allows for the slowing of a vehicle that is
independent of the conventional braking systems. A driver
would normally down-shift to slow the driver’s descent of
CAUTION 14
The service interval is subject to driving style.
a hill, using engine compression. The engine brake in- 15
creases the effectiveness of this regarding force.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 ESP (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)*
1 ESP SYSTEM? ESPOFF Switch (Cancellation/Resume of ESP
The ESP system is an electronic vehicle stability control and
Function)
2 safe driving system and driving safety supplementary sys- If the driving wheels slip on snowy or icy roads, the engine
tem that helps to avoid dangerous situations by controlling rpm may not be increased even when you depress the accel-
3 erator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be able to move
the brakes on the wheels or the engine torque to compen-
4 sate vehicle stability when it is extremely unstable under con- your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP function by pressing
ditions such as sharp cornering. the ESPOFF switch. When the ESPOFF switch is pressed, the
5 ESP function stops and the vehicle is driven independently
ESP Warning Light from the sensor outputs.
6
Turning on of ESP Warning Lamp
7 If you press the ESPOFF switch, the ESP
function stops and the indicator lamp in the
8 instrument cluster comes on. Press this
switch again to resume the ESP function. At
9 this time, the indicator lamp goes out.
10 ESP Warning Lamp Flickering
11 If the ESP function operates while driving,
the indicator lamp flickers and the alarm
12 sounds.
13 WARNING
14 If the ESP warning light comes on, the ESP related system is
defective. Make sure to check the vehicle at the nearest Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM)* EBD (ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE 0
DISTRIBUTION)*
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)? 1
When braking suddenly or braking on slippery roads, the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)?
vehicle keeps moving forward but the wheels are locking
2
and not rotating. If these happen, your vehicle may lose When the brake pedal is applied, it controls the braking
pressure electronically to effectively distribute the braking 3
stability or rotate resulting in an accident. ABS helps to main-
tain directional stability and control of the vehicle. forces to the front wheels and rear wheels. EBD operates
when the speed differences between the most fast front 4
wheel and the rear wheel are over 1 km/h. If ABS is engaged,
ABS Warning Light it does not operate.
5
When the ignition switch is turned “ON”, this 6
warning light comes on and goes out if the sys-
tem is normal. EBD Warning Light 7
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”,
this warning light comes on and goes out if 8
WARNING
the system is normal.
• If this light doesn’t come on when the ignition is switched on or if 9
this light doesn’t go out, contact your nearest Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. If this light illuminates while CAUTION 10
driving, a malfunction of ABS is indicated. If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or malfunctioning.
• ABS is a device that prevents wheels from locking during braking If the indicator is on even after the system has cooled down enough,
11
to allow steering. However, the ABS system does not shorten the have the nearest authorized dealer or service center check the system.
stopping distance.
12
• According to the road conditions, the stopping distance of the ve- 13
hicle with ABS may be longer or shorter than that of the vehicle
without ABS. 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 HDC (HILL DESCENT CONTROL)*
1 HDC (Hill Descent Control)? HDC Operation
HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down When this button is pressed once, HDC is ready for use.
2 steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low speed When all operational conditions are met, HDC is applied and
without depressing the brake pedal. This convenient function the green HDC indicator blinks. HDC automatically decreases
3 is only for driving down steep grades. Therefore do not use the vehicle speed to 7 km/h in the 2 wheel (2H) or 4 wheel
this function for anything other than driving down steep hills. high speed mode (4H) position or to 3 km/h in the 4 wheel
4 low speed position. HDC automatically stops at speeds less
5 than 7 km/h or 3 km/h. When the button is pressed again,
HDC Indicator HDC is deactivated and the indicator goes off.
6 Green light on: HDC is ready for use (by
pressing the HDC switch).
7
Green light blinking: HDC is being applied.
8 Red light on: the HDC system is overheated
or malfunctioning.
9
CAUTION
10
If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may be
11 applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump.
Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
12
13
14
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
HAND OPERATED PARKING BRAKE 0
Warning Light and Warning Sound When Driv- 1
ing While the Parking Brake is Engaged
Parking Brake Operation
2
If you drive the vehicle without releasing the
parking brake, the brake warning light blinks 3
and the buzzer sounds to warn the driver
when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h for 4
more than 2 seconds. When this happens,
stop the vehicle immediately and release the 5
Parking Brake parking brake.
Release Button 6
7
Parking Brake Release 8
9
Parking Brake Operation CAUTION
10
Park your vehicle at a safe place and pull up the parking brake • Before driving off, be sure to check that the brake warning light is
lever. Then, the parking brake warning light ( ) comes on.
turned off. 11
• Driving with the parking brake applied could damage the rear brake
system. Before driving, fully release the parking brake. 12
Parking Brake Release • If the brake warning light ( ) doesn’t go out after releasing the
Press the parking brake release button at the end of the lever parking brake, have the brake system checked by a Ssangyong 13
and lower the parking brake lever. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Seats 7 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Devices Related To Seat ............................. 7-2

5
6
Driver’s Seat ................................................ 7-4
7
Passenger’s Seat ......................................... 7-9
8
Second Row Seat ...................................... 7-10
9
Third Row Seat .......................................... 7-12
10
Seat Heating System* ............................... 7-14
11
Warning and Caution ................................ 7-15
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEVICES RELATED TO SEAT
0 Easy Access Switch &

Head Restraint Height Driver Seat Memory Setting Switch
1 Adjust Knob
Lumbar Support
2 Lever
3 Driver Seat
4 Rear Seat Control Switch
Armrest
Driver Seat
5 Heating Switch
6 Head Restraint Height
Adjust Knob
7
8
9
Passenger Seat
10 Heating Switch
11
12
13
14
Seat Folding Lever (Rear Seat)
15 Seatback Reclining
Lever (Rear Seat) Passenger Seat
16 Control Switch
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-2 SEATS
WARNING AND CAUTION 0
1
WARNING CAUTION
• All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before • Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
2
any driving. turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery
discharge, operate your seats when the engine is running.
3
• Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjusting.
• Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort while • Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultaneously. 4
vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when the pas- It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric seat
senger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is button one by one. 5
reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt • When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents such
and getting injured are increased. as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will cause dis- 6
• Never press the driver’s seat & outside rearview mirror posi- coloration and dull the surface of the seats.
tion switch while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat 7
• Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on comes in contact with other object and cannot be adjusted
the seat. anymore. 8
• Front seats and rear seats are equipped with heated lines. If • If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
the following types of persons sit on the heated seats, they checked and fixed before any driving. 9
might receive minor burns. Extra caution is needed for them:
children, elderly persons, ill persons, persons with sensitive
10
skin, excessively fatigued persons, persons under the influ-
ence of alcohol or sleep-inducing medication such as cold medi- 11
cine or sleeping pills.
• Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a
12
blanket, cushion or seat cover.
13
• Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in
serious head and neck injuries in case if a collision. Make sure 14
that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org SEATS 7-3

DRIVER’S SEAT
0 POWER SEAT*
1 Height Adjustment and Tilt Operation of Head
Restraint
2 To raise the head restraint, pull it
3 up without pressing the release
button. To lower the head restraint,
4 press the release button on top
of the seatback and push the head
5 1 restraint down.
Seat Heater*
6 By operating the seat WARNING
7 heater switch, you can Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in seri-
heat the seat cushion ous head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
8 and seatback.
9
10 Lumbar Support (Driver’s Seat)
11 Seat Position Control Switches
12
13 WARNING
14 Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the vehicle is
moving. Control of the vehicle can be lost.
15 Turn the lever forward to increase the amount of lumbar
support. To decrease it, turn the lever backward.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-4 SEATS
Seat Slide Adjustment Seatback Reclining Adjustment 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Seat Height Adjustment Seat Tilt Adjustment 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0 EASY ACCESS SYSTEM (DRIVER’S SEAT)*
This system is designed to provide the driver sufficient space to access and exit.
1
Easy Access Button
2
3
4
5
6
To operate
7
To use this function, press the Easy Access button located at
8 driver’s window switch panel.
To exit: The seat moves rearward and downward when removing
9 CAUTION
the ignition key only while the parking brake warning light in the in-
• The moving distance of the seat is based on when the strument cluster is ON or the gear selector lever is in “P” position
10 seat is located at its front end. It varies according to the
before turning off the ignition switch. However, the gear position re-
initial position.
quirement is not applied to the manual transmission equipped ve-
11 • There could be some differences when the seat moves
hicle since it does not have the “P” position. Therefore, manual trans-
back to its original position. The differences of the pas-
12 senger weights and electrical loads can cause the dif- mission equipped vehicle is only applied parking brake.
ferences in its distance, and this is normal, not defective. To access : The seat moves back to its original position when turn-
13 • Operation of easy access while the parking brake is not ing the ignition key to “ON” position while the gear selector lever is
securely applied may cause an accident. Make sure that in “P” position or the parking brake is applied. However, the gear
14 the gear selector lever is in “P” position and the parking position requirement is not applied to the manual transmission
brake is securely applied. equipped vehicle since it does not have the “P” position. Therefore,
15 • The easy access system may not operate properly when manual transmission equipped vehicle is only applied parking brake.
operating the seat memory switch or any other switches
16 during the easy access operation. To release
To release this function, press the Easy Access button again.
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-6 SEATS
POSITION MEMORY SETTING* 0
The position memory is available for up to three drivers. Each driver can set his/ her own driver’s seat and outside rearview
mirror positions. The information will individually be stored in the integrated computer. If somebody has moved the seat, the
1
memory positions can be recalled automatically by pressing the position button. 2
SET button 3
STOP button 4
5
Position button 6
(1, 2, 3)
7
CAUTION 8
• The automatic positioning operation stops when operating any seat
adjusting switch or the outside rearview mirror adjusting switch dur- 9
ing its operation. To erase the memorized seat and outside rear-
To Store the Memory Settings view mirror positions, press the “STOP” button. 10
• If you do not press any position button within 5 seconds after press-
1. Position the transmission shift lever to “P” with the igni- ing “SET” switch, the memory setting is cancelled.
11
tion switch “ON” (for your safety, do not start the engine).
In case of a manual transmission vehicle, you must ap-
12
To Recall the Memory Settings
ply the parking brake too. 13
1. Press and hold one of the position buttons ( ), ( ), ( )
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirrors to
you want until the buzzer sounds.
the desired positions. 14
2. The driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors start to move to
3. Press the (SET) switch. The indicator on the switch comes on. the stored positions. If you drive off during this recalling process, 15
4. Within 5 seconds, press and hold one of the position but- this automatic memory setting stops operating.
tons ( ), ( ), ( ) you want to set. When the 3. Wait until they stop moving. 16
memory setting is completed, a buzzer sounds twice. 4. When the process is completed, a buzzer sounds twice.

0 DRIVER’S SEAT (MANUAL SEAT)
1 Seatback Reclining Adjustment
Height Adjustment and Tilt
2 Operation of Head Restraint
Same as that of the power seat
3
4 Seat Heater*
Same as that of the power seat
5
Lumbar Support
6 Same as that of the
power seat To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly and raise
7 the lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release
the lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to
8 its original position and the seatback is locked.
9
Seat Slide Adjustment Seat Height Adjustment
10
11
12
13
14
15
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat You can adjust the angle and height of the front or rear sec-
16 slide lever up and move the seat as desired. Then, release tion of the seat cushion by rotating the adjustment knob on
the lever. the side of the seat clockwise or counterclockwise.
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-8 SEATS
PASSENGER’S SEAT
Power Seat* Manual Seat 0
1
Head Restraint 2
Head Restraint
Same as that of driver’s seat
Same as that of 3
driver’s seat Seat Heater*
4
Seat Heater*
5
6
7
8
9
Seatback Reclining Seat Slide Seatback Reclining Seat Slide
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

SECOND ROW SEAT
0 Head Restraint Adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up with-
1 out pressing the release button. To lower
the head restraint, press the release but-
2 1 ton ( ) on top of seatback and push the
3 head restraint down.
4 WARNING
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in serious
5 head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
6
Seatback Reclining Adjustment
7 Pull up the lever and adjust the seatback angle to the desired
8 position. After adjustment, release the lever and make sure that
the lever is returned to its original position and the setback is
9 securely locked.
Armrest Seat Backboard
10
The middle of the second Release the backboard lock
11 row seat is equipped with after folding the second and
an armrest. third row seats. Then let the
Backboard
12 backboard tilt toward the third
row seat. The second and Lock Lever
13 third row seats will be flat.
14
15 Seat Folding Lever
To access to the third row seats easily, make the second row
16 seat upright. Raise the second row seat while pulling up the
seat folding lever with the second row seatback folded down.
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-10 SEATS
FOLDING THE SECOND ROW SEAT (WHEN ACCESSING TO THIRD ROW SEAT) 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Position the headrest to the lowest level. 3. Press the upper portion of the seatback 4. Pull up the seat folding lever and make
2. Pull up the seatback reclining lever and until it is engaged with seat cushion. the seat upright. 8
fold down the seatback. 9
5. Fix the folded seat to the front seat with 6. Unfold the seat in 10
a fixing strap from the case under the the reverse order of
floor. folding. Make sure 11
that the seat is se-
CAUTION curely locked. If the 12
• If the headrest is not adjusted to the lowest seat is not locked,
level, the seat can be reached to the front the seat may be 13
seat while making it upright. folded forward.
14
• After folding the seatback, ensure to press
the upper seatback to set the seat upright. WARNING 15
If the seat is made upright without fixing the When returning the second row seat to its
seat, the seat can be damaged by conflict-
ing with the front seat.
original position, be careful not to hit the feet 16
and leg of the passenger in third row seat.

THIRD ROW SEAT

2 ton ( ) on top of seatback and push the
3
4 WARNING
6
Folding Lever
7
Pull up the folding lever to fold down the third row seat.
8 SEAT FOLDING
9 (MAKING A LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT)
10 1. Position the headrest to the lowest level.
3. Fold the seatback of the third row seat to make the lug-
2. Pull up the folding loop of the third row seat, and fold the
11 seatback forward.
gage compartment.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-12 SEATS
MAKING A BED 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Fold down the third row seats. (refer to “Folding the third WARNING
row seat” section) 10
• When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that
2. Fold down the second row seats. (refer to “Folding the sec- the luggage is placed firm enough to avoid being shaken while 11
ond row seat” section) driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver
3. Lock the seatback of second row seats by pressing the up- or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not ob- 12
struct the field of the rearview.
per portion of it.
4. Release the locks on backboard of the second row seat.
• Do not sit on the folded seat because the seatbelt and other safety 13
devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious
5. Make a bed by unfolding the backboard. injury in case of accident. 14
15
16

SEAT HEATING SYSTEM*
0 Front Seat Heating Switch

1 Heated cushions and seatbacks create a pleasant driving
environment by expelling chilliness on the surface of the seats.
2
3
4 Driver side
Passenger
5 side
6
To operate seat heater
7
1. Start the engine.
8 2. Turn the seat heating switch from 0 (OFF) to the
desired position (1 ~ 5).
9
3. The seat cushion and seatback will be warmed up.
10 The seat heater indicator on the switch comes on
during its operation.
11
Second row heating switch (for both sides) NOTE
12 The heating switches for
The seat heater is turned off when you turn the ignition
switch off while the seat heater is operating. If you want
13 the rear seats are located to other the seat heater again, turn the seat heating switch to
on the rear door trims. other position and then select the desired position.
14 During heating the seats,
the seat heater indicator
15 comes on.
16 Second row seat
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-14 SEATS
WARNING AND CAUTION

1
WARNING WARNING
• Do not operate the seat heater for a long time when the passen- • Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a 2
ger is an infant, child, old or handicapped person, person with blanket, cushion or seat cover.
sensitive skin, person under the influence of alcohol, or exces- • Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in
3
sively fatigued person. They might receive minor burns. serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make sure
• If your skin is in contact with the heated seat for a long time, you that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving. 4
might get low temperature burns. Be careful. • Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort while
• Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective when the
5
blanket, cushion or seat cover. passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback
is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt
6
• If the temperature continues to rise, turn the switch off and have
and getting injured are increased.
the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- 7
thorized Service Center.
• In the case of the driver’s seat, an excessive usage of the heated CAUTION 8
seat might make you sleepy and could negatively affect your safety. • Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
• Do not place anything sharp on the seat. This may cause dam- turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery 9
age to the seat heater. discharge, operate your seats when the engine is running.
• All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before • Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultaneously. 10
any driving. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric seat
button one by one. 11
• When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents such
• Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will cause dis- 12
the seat. coloration and dull the surface of the seats.
• Front seats are equipped with heated lines. If the following types • Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat
13
of persons sit on the heated seats, they might receive minor comes in contact with other object and cannot be adjusted
burns. Extra caution is needed for them: children, elderly persons, anymore.
14
ill persons, persons with sensitive skin, excessively fatigued
persons, persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep-induc- • If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be 15
ing medication such as cold medicine or sleeping pills. checked and fixed before any driving.
16

Seat Belt and Air Bag 8 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Seat Belt and Air Bag ................................. 8-2

5
6
Seat Belt ....................................................... 8-4
7
How to Fasten the Three Point Seat Belt .. 8-5
8
How To Fasten the Seat Belts in
Second Row Seat ........................................ 8-6 9
Child Restraints and Pregnant Woman ..... 8-8 10
Warnings for Seat Belt .............................. 8-10
11
Air Bag ....................................................... 8-12

12
13
Airbag Non-inflation Conditions ............... 8-16
14
Warnings for Air Bag ................................. 8-20
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT AND AIR BAG
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used
0 by all occupants inside of your vehicle.
1
Front air bag Air Bag Warning Light
2 Three point seat belt
Three point (Driver’s)
seat belt
3
4 Side air bag
5 (Driver’s)
Three point
6 seat belt
Front air bag Seat Belt Reminder
7 Lap belt or (Passenger’s)
Three point
8 seat belt
Three point Three point
9 seat belt seat belt
10
Three point seat belt Side air bag
11 (Passenger’s)
12
Fastening the Seat Belt
13 The Restraint Systems Include:
When seat belts are not used or improperly worn, they may
• Air bags
14 not work and can cause serious injury. In addition, air bags
• Seat belts can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their
15 • Seat belt pretensioners (For front seat) seat belts. Air bags may cause injuries to occupants if they
As independent systems, their protective functions do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
16 complement one another.
8-2 SEAT BELT AND AIR GETtheMANUALS.org

BAG
AIR BAG 0
WARNING 1
Front air bag • Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If
(Driver’s) not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sud- 2
den maneuvering of the vehicle.
Side air bag • Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time. 3
(Driver’s)
• Seat belts and air bags can significantly minimize possible injury
to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from
4
Front air bag fatal collisions or injury.
(Passenger’s) 5
• Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems
could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat 6
belts should be checked and repaired by only a Ssangyong
Side air bag
(Passenger’s) • An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant
or child restraint. 8
9
When a strong frontal impact occurs, the front air bags are
inflated. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT AND AIR BAG 8-3
SEAT BELT
0 SEAT BELT IN FRONT SEATS

1 Seat Belt Height Adjustment
2
3
4
5
6 • To raise the seat belt, slide the seat
belt height adjuster up.
7 • To lower the seat belt, press the
button ( ) and slide it down.
8
WARNING
9
• Adjust the seat belt height before
10 driving.
• Shoulder belt should be positioned mid-
11 way over the shoulder, never across
the neck.
12
13
14
15 • Insert the metal latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
16 • To unfasten the seat belt, press the
button on the buckle.

BAG
HOW TO FASTEN THE THREE POINT SEAT BELT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Pull out the latch plate from the 2. Position the shoulder belt across the 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
retractor. If the seat belt is locked body and the lap belt as low as pos- is securely locked. A slack belt will
7
when being pulled out, rewind it com- sible across the hips. Insert the greatly reduce the protection af- 8
pletely in the retractor, then pull it out latch plate into the buckle until it forded to the wearer.
to the desired length. clicks. 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the 9
3. Adjust the seat belt height as red button on the buckle.
needed. 10
WARNING
CAUTION 11
Improperly worn seat belts could cause
Sit back in the seat with the seatback in serious injury or death. 12
an upright position and wear the seat belt. • Put the lap belt as low as possible
across the hips. Do not put it across the 13
waist. In an accident, the belt may apply
WARNING pressure to your abdomen. This may 14
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is cause internal injuries.
not twisted. • The shoulder belt should be positioned 15
midway over the shoulder, never across
the neck. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE SEAT BELTS IN SECOND ROW SEAT
1. Pull out the latch plate at the bight of the seat.
0
WARNING
1
Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it across waist. In
2 an accident, the belt may apply pressure to your abdomen. This may cause seri-
ous internal injuries.
3
To lengthen, hold the metal latch
4 plate at a right angle to the belt
and pull the belt. To shorten, pull
5 the free end of the belt away from
the latch plate, then pull the belt
6 clip to take up the slack.
7
8
9 2. Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position
the belt as low as possible across your hips, not across your
10 abdomen.
11 3. If the belt is too tight or slack on your
hips, readjust the belt.
12
4. To unfasten the seat belt, press the red
13 button on the buckle.
14
15
16

BAG
REAR CENTER SEAT BELT (3-POINT TYPE)* 0
1. Pull out the smaller latch plate (B) from up-
per retractor (1).
1
2. Insert it into the black buckle (2) until it clicks. 2
3. Pull out the bigger latch plate (A) and posi-
tion the seat belt across your shoulder, chest 3
and hips.
4
4. Insert it into the buckle (3) until it clicks.
5
WARNING
• Make sure to fasten the seat belt according to the 6
order as described so that it functions properly.
• To prevent the seat belt from bumping against the
7
rear glass, unfasten the seat belt while holding it.
8
• This seat belt is designed only for a passenger
who sits on the center seat in the rear seat. 9
• Tug on the seat belt to make sure that the latch
plate is securely locked. 10
• Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
• Improper wearing of seat belts increases the
11
chance of injury or death in case of a collision.
12
• Position the seat belt away from your neck and
abdomen. 13
CAUTION 14
Stow the seat belt into the console when it is not in use. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHILD RESTRAINTS AND PREGNANT WOMAN
0 PREGNANT WOMEN CHILD RESTRAINTS

We recommend that pregnant women When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate child restraint
1 use the seat belts throughout their system should always be used. The child restraint system should be ap-
2 pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is propriate for your child’s weight and height and properly fit the car’s seat.
the best way to keep the baby safe. Accident statistics indicate that children are safer when properly restrained
3 in the rear seat rather than in the front seat.
WARNING
4 WARNING
• Pregnant women should wear the lap
5 part of the belt across the thighs and • Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint.
as sung across the hips as possible. • NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THE FRONT SEAT WITH
6 • Keep the belt low so that it does not FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG.
come across the abdomen. That way • A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can be seriously
7 the strong bones of the hips will take injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
the force if there is a collision. in the rear seat.
8 • A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat whenever possible.
If installed in the front passenger seat, adjust the seat as far back as it will go.
9 • When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer.
10
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
11 or remove it from the vehicle.
• In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a missile inside
12 the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
13 • Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center
14 of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
15 • Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a person who is taller
than 140 cm.
16

BAG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
TYPE A TYPE B
7
Rear-facing child seat Forward-facing child seat Booster seat
8
Rear Rear 9
Front
Mass Group Restraint Device Figure center side Mounting Method of Vehicle
seat
seat seat
10
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 month) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing 11
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 year) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing 12
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 month ~ 4 year) Forward facing child seat UF UF U 2-or 3-point belt
13
II & III ~ 15 to 36 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat UF UF U 2-or 3-point
14
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
15
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories. 16
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT
0 WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT

1 • Always put on your shoulder belt over the shoulder and • Periodically check that the seat belt and its components
2 across the chest. Do not put the shoulder belt across work properly. A damaged seat belt can cause serious
your neck. injuries. Repair or replace the damaged seat belt im-
3 • Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do mediately at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
not put it across the waist. In an accident, the belt may rized Service Center.
4 apply pressure to your abdomen. • The warning light comes on whenever the ignition is
• Do not wear the shoulder belt under the arm. It increases switched on. The light goes out when the driver’s seat
5 the danger of sliding out of the belt and can cause seri- belt is securely fastened. If the light does not go off af-
ous injury or even death. The belt may also tighten the ter fastening the seat belt, it means that there is a mal-
6 function in the system. Have the seat belt system
chest which is not as strong as the shoulders. This may
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
7 also result in serious internal injuries.
• Do not lock the seat belt with a clip or a clamp. If the
8 seat belt is too loose, it may not protect your body from • Additional devices or accessories on the seat belt may
injury or death in an accident. result in improper operation. Do not add any adjusting
9 devices which restrict the seat belt operation.
• Before driving, all occupants should wear the seat belts.
Otherwise, occupants could be seriously injured in col- • Periodically inspect all parts of the belt and have the
10 damaged parts replaced. The belt that has been over-
lisions or sudden maneuvers. In many countries, there
11 are regulations regarding the use of the seat belts. stretched in an accident must be replaced with a new
Please observe local laws and regulations. one. Ssangyong recommends replacing all component
12 parts of the seat belt after a collision. No replacement
• Do not buck up two or more persons with one seat belt.
is required after a minor collision if a Ssangyong Dealer
13 • Do not wear the seat belt over any hard or breakable or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center finds that no
objects in pockets or on clothes. damage has occurred and everything is in proper work-
14 • An infant and tiny child must be restrained in a child re- ing order. The seat belt components that were not used
straint system. Note that the three point seat belt is de- during a collision must also be inspected and replaced
15 signed for a person who is taller than 140 cm. if they show signs of damage or faulty operation.
• Replace the entire seat belt assembly after a severe im-
16 pact even if the damage is not obvious.

BAG
WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT 0
• Never modify the seat belt. • Keep the buckle clean.

1
• Always keep the seat belts clean and dry. Care should • Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony struc- 2
be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with ture of the body, and should be worn low across the front
polishes, oil and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. of the pelvis or the hips, chest and shoulders, as 3
Use mild soap and water for cleaning. The seat belt applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across
must be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contami- the abdominal area must be avoided. 4
nated or damaged. • Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, con- 5
• Adjust the seat properly before wearing the seat belt. sistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which
• Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an upright posi- they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce 6
tion and wear the seat belt. If the seat belt is positioned the protection afforded to the wearer.
too high or fastened too loose, it may not protect your body • Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the web- 7
from an injury or death in the event of a collision. bing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly
battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using
8
• Do not recline the seatback more than needed for com-
fort while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effec- mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if 9
tive when the passenger sits back and straight up in webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
the seat. If the seatback is reclined too much, then the • It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has 10
risks of sliding under the lap belt and getting injured are been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the as-
increased. sembly is not obvious. 11
• If the latch plate is inserted into a wrong buckle, the belt • Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. 12
may exert pressure on your abdomen instead of your • Each belt assembly must only be used by one
pelvis. This may cause serious internal injury. occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child 13
• If the seat belt is twisted, there will not be enough con- being carried on the occupant’s lap.
tact of the belt to spread the impact pressure. • No modifications or additions should be made by the
14
• Make sure that the latch plate is securely locked. user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting de- 15
• When pregnant women use the seat belt, consult with vices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat
a doctor for specific recommendations. belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
The air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) can provide additional protection for the driver
AIR BAG and passenger in the event of a collision.
0 Driver’s Air Bag Air Bag Warning Light

When a severe frontal impact If this lamp does
1 occurs, sensors will cause the not go out after
airbag to be deployed so that engine starting or
2 driver’s and front passenger’s comes on while driving, it
head and chest will be pillowed means that there is a mal-
3 by the air bag instead of hit- function in the system. Have
4 ting the steering wheel or the air bag system checked
dashboard. immediately by a Ssangyong
5 Driver’s Side Air Bag Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
6 The side air bags are inte-
grated into the side wall
7 (window side) of both front Front Air Bag
seats. The side air bag is de- (Passenger’s)
8 signed to inflate only in cer-
tain side collision and protect
9 occupants’ head and chest. Side Air Bag
10 (Passenger’s)
11 Seat Belt Pretensioner

12 (for front seats)
When a severe frontal impact Operation of Operation of load
13 occurs, seat belt pretensioners pretensioner limiter
rewind the seat belts immediately When a severe frontal After frontal collision, the
14 to restrain the occupants to their impact occurs, seat belt load limiters releases
seats. It helps the effective opera- pretensioners rewind the seat belt to prevent
15 the seat belts immedi- the occupant from being
tion of the seat belts and air bags.
16 The load limiter is integrated into ately to restrain the oc- injured due to belt force.
each seat belt pretensioner. cupants to their seats.

BAG
SRS AIR BAG Locations of Air Bag Warning Labels 0
The Supplemental Restraint System air bag is designed
to supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and
1
front passenger with protection against head, chest, and 2
other injuries in the event of a collision. For maximum
protection, seat belts should always be worn by all 3
occupants.
4
WARNING 5
• The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. 6
Make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts
properly, even if air bags are installed in the vehicle.
7
• Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the air bag
may not deploy. 8
• The driver’s and front passenger’s air bags simultaneously
Locations of
deploy.
Locations of side air bag
9
side air bag warning labels
warning labels 10
CAUTION
If you see “SRS” on a certain area, the air bag is contained un- 11
derneath it. Therefore, do not apply any impact upon it and never
place any accessories or objects on the area. And avoid any WARNING STATEMENT 12
direct contact with the area.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
13
14
WARNING
As a reminder of possible dangers of the air bag, air bag warning
15
labels are affixed on the driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 FRONT AIR BAGS
1 Air Bag Operation
X The air bag inflates when:
2
• In response to a severe frontal impact, the driver’s and
3 front passenger’s air bags deploy at the same time to
supplement the seat belts to prevent or reduce any per-
4 sonal injuries.
X The air bag can inflate when:
5 • Underbody impact from the road surface; impact against
6 the curb at a very high speed; dropping impact onto the
road surface with a large angle
7 X The air bag does not inflate when:
8 • Rollover, side impact or rear impact
Driver’s Air Bag Passenger’s Air Bag* • If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant.
9 X The air bag seldom inflates when:
The driver’s air bag is The front passenger’s air
10 located at center of the bag is located on the • Oblique impact, rollover
steering wheel. dashboard. • Weak impact in which the sensor is unable to detect (under
11 the inflation requirements)
Pretensioner (for Front Seat) • Impact against narrow objects such as a utility pole or a tree
12
When front air bags deploy, the seat belt pretensioners si- • The vehicle falls into a drainage or a puddle
13 multaneously work too. • The front of the vehicle crashes into a high impact point
1st operation: When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat vehicle such as a truck
14 belt pretensioners rewind the seat belts immediately to re- • Impact on the hood by falling stones
strain the occupants to their seats. • The air bag warning lamp is on
15
2nd operation: After frontal collision, the load limiters re- • Moderate or severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
16 leases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being in- body’s side structure. In that case, only the side air bags
jured due to belt force. deploy.

BAG
SIDE AIR BAG* 0
Side Air Bag Operation 1
Driver’s seat Passenger’s seat
X The air bag inflates when: 2
• A moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
body’s side structure. 3
X The air bag can inflate when: 4
Side air Side air • Vehicle rolls onto its side and causes a severe side
bag bag impact. 5
X The air bag does not inflate when: 6
• Frontal collision while vehicle stops or is moving at a low
speed. 7
Impact sensor Impact sensor • Rear end collision 8
• If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant.
9
X The air bag seldom inflates when:
WARNING
• Oblique impact (diagonal direction) 10
• Do not apply any impact on the installation area of impact sensor.
• Frontal impact or rear impact
The air bag might deploy. 11
• Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the side air • Rollover but without a severe impact
bag may not deploy. • The air bag warning lamp is on 12
• Do not bang the door. The side air bag might deploy.
• Driver's and passenger's air bags are inflated simultaneously.
13
At the same time, the pretentioners for seatbelts are also
AIR BAG INSPECTION
activated. The side air bags, however, are inflated individually in
14
The air bag system should be inspected 10 years from
case of side impact. its installation regardless of its appearance and other 15
conditions.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
AIRBAG NON-INFLATION CONDITIONS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• In collisions, the vehicle safety belts are sufficient to pro- • Airbags may not inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
10 tect the vehicle occupants and the airbags may not deploy. pants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In
In some cases, deploying airbags in low-speed collisions this case, the airbags do not provide proper protection.
11 can cause a secondary impact to the occupants (light
abrasions, cuts, burns, etc.), or loss of vehicle control.
12
13
14
15
16

BAG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Front airbags may not inflate in side impact collision, be- • In a slant impact or collision, the force delivered will be
cause occupants move to the direction of the collision, and relatively weaker than that of frontal collision. So, the 10
thus front airbag deployment does not provide proper airbags may not inflate.
protection. 11
However, side or curtain airbags(if equipped) may inflate 12
depending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact. 13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• At the moment of an accident, drivers brake heavily with • Airbags may not inflate in rollover accidents because
10 reflex. In such heavy braking, the front portion of the ve- airbag deployment would not provide proper protection to
hicle is lowered by the force of the braking and the ve- the occupants.
11 hicle can go under a vehicle with a higher ground However, side airbags may inflate when the vehicle is
clearance. Airbags may not inflate in this situation because
12 impacts may not be delivered or may be delivered with
rolled over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is
equipped with side airbags and/or curtain airbags.
13 less intensity.
14
15
16

BAG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects
such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is 10
concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact
is not delivered to the sensors. 11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG
0 WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (I)

1 • Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not • Do not move your seat too close to the steering wheel
2 attempt to modify any air bag components including the or dashboard. If you lower your head, the air bag can hit
steering wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness. your head during inflation and can cause severe injury
3 • Incorrect air bag inspection can be dangerous and or even death.
cause injuries. The air bag system must be disposed • Do not impact any air bag components including the
4 only by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized steering wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness by
Service Center. hand or tools. You may get injured by sudden deployment.
5
• Replace the steering wheel with only Ssangyong genu- • The air bag contains explosive materials, so contact a
6 ine parts. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
• When the engine starts, the air bag warning lamp Center when trashing or replacing it.
7 comes on for a system check. It goes out after 6 sec- • The air bag components will be very hot after
onds when the system is normal. If this warning lamp deployment. Do not touch them.
8 stays on then the system may be defective. Have the air • Once the air bag system is triggered, the triggered air
9 bag system checked immediately by a Ssangyong bag assembly should be removed from the vehicle and
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. replaced with a new one.
10 • Never let small children or infants sit in the front pas- • Do not attach any objects such as a sticker, scent bottle,
senger seat or be held in your arms. When the front air or phone holder on the steering wheel pad and to the
11 bags deploy, they could be seriously injured or killed. dashboard.
12 • The child restraint system should be installed in the • Do not lean against the window or door or do not stretch
rear seat. your arm through the window frame. If the side air bag
13 • The child restraint system must not be placed on the deploys, you will be at great risk.
front seat. The infant or child can severely be injured • Do not place any objects between the side air bags and
14 by an air bag inflation in case of an accident. occupants. The object may prevent the air bag from de-
15 • The seat belt and air bags are the most effective when ploying or can be shot at you.
you sit well back and upright in the seat.
16

BAG
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (II) 0
• Do not bang the door. The side air bags might deploy. • When any repairs are needed for the steering wheel, or
1
• Hold only the outer rim of the steering so that the air when an accident occurred without the air bag 2
bag can inflate without any hindrance. deployment, have the air bag system checked by a
• Do not hold and operate the steering wheel by cross-
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service 3
Center.
ing your arms. You could get seriously injured when the
air bag deploys. • You could suffer secondary injuries caused by an in- 4
flated air bag such as an abrasion, a burn or injuries by
• Do not place your face or chest near the steering wheel
broken glass. Non-toxic gas will come out when the air
5
and dashboard. Also, do not allow anyone to place their
bag is inflated. 6
hands, leg or face on the dashboard. The air bag can-
not work properly. • If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant
• When the air bag inflates, it makes a loud noise and
and the seat belts are enough to protect occupants, the 7
air bags do not deploy to prevent any secondary inju-
smoke. However, the smoke is a non-toxic nitrogen gas. 8
ries such as cuts, abrasions, or burns.
• When the air bag deploys, non-toxic gas will come out.
This gas may cause skin, eyes or nose irritation. Wash 9
it out with cold and clean water and consult your doctor
if irritation continues. 10
• The windshield glass may be broken when the 11
passenger’s air bag deploys.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ventilation, Heating, Air Conditioning
and Air Purification System 9 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Heater/Air Conditioner System ................... 9-2

5
6
Warnings and Cautions ............................... 9-4
7
Supplementary Heating Device ................. 9-5
8
Automatic Heater / Air Conditioner ............ 9-6
9
Rear Air Conditioner* (Dual A/C) .............. 9-12
10
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 9-13
11
Replacing Air Conditioner Filter .............. 9-14
12
AQS (Air Quality System) .......................... 9-16
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
0
1 Sun Sensor
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Rear Air Conditioner Switch/Vent* Heater/AC Control Panel
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
9-2 VENTILATION, HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM
Front Center Vent Front Side Vent 0
1
2
Flow Direction
Control Lever 3
4
Flow Volume
Control Dial 5
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving 6
the knob horizontally or vertically. the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet.
You can adjust the volume of airflow by moving the air-
7
flow volume control dial. 8
Rear Vents in Center Console (Upper) Rear Vents in Center Console (Lower) 9
Flow Direction 10
Control Lever
11
12
13
Flow Volume 14
Control Dial
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving The airglow is delivered through the vents when oper- 15
the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet. ating A/C and heater.
16
flow volume control dial.
VENTILATION, HEATING, AIRGETtheMANUALS.org

CONDITIONING AND AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 9-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
0 Refrigerant Specification & Capacity
1 Item CAUTION
• If your vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight, open all windows to ex-
2 Specification R134a tract heat before turning on the air conditioning (A/C).
Capacity Single A/C 720 ± 30g • Operating the air conditioning (A/C) for a long time while the vehicle is parked
3 may cause the engine to overheat.
Dual A/C 1,120 ± 30g • When driving up a long hill for an extended period of time, turn on and off
4 the air conditioner every 3 to 5 minutes.
5 WARNING • To prevent battery discharge, do not run the fan for an extended period of
• If you sleep while the air conditioner or heater is on, time when the engine is not running.
6 with all windows closed, you may suffocate to death. • To maintain the system at its optimum state and to keep the lubrication of
• Continued operation in the recirculation mode may cause the air conditioner compressor and related components, run the air condi-
7 the interior to become stuffy and windows to fog. Do not tioner at low speed once a week even during the season than summer.
use the recirculation mode for a long period of time. • Do not stop the engine when the air conditioner is operating. It may pro-
8 • If exhaust gas comes in, there is danger of carbon mon- duce an unpleasant odor trapped in the duct. Turn the A/C off and wait for
oxide poisoning. Be sure to switch back to fresh air mode a few minutes in the fresh air mode before stopping the engine.
9 after passing through an area of smoke or fumes. • If you start the engine with the air conditioner on, the engine may not start
• Never leave a child or a handicapped person alone in the easily and the engine idling can be unstable causing the vehicle to vibrate.
10 Be sure to turn off electrical systems such as the fan.
vehicle with the air conditioner or heater on in hot or cold
weather. The child or handicapped person can be in seri- • When the air conditioner is not used in periods, odors will come out. Run
11 ous danger by the heat and lack of oxygen. the air conditioner for 20 ~ 30 minutes with the windows opened and you
could remove the odors.
12
• During the winter when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run the air
13 conditioner once or twice every month for 5 ~ 10 minutes.
• If the air conditioner is not used regularly, the lubricant in the A/C compres-
14 sor will not circulate causing the A/C to malfunction. Be sure to turn the air
conditioner at low speed.
15 • When sharply accelerating the vehicle while the air conditioner is operating,
you may hear a “click” sound from the magnetic clutch in compressor. This
16 is a normal operation to protect the air conditioner system (by lowering the
excessively high refrigerant pressure).
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUPPLEMENTARY HEATING DEVICE
• The vehicle equiped with the DI engine has the supplementary heating
devices to increase the heating effect before the engine coolant fully
0
warms up. The supplementary heating devices are as follows: 1
- FFH* (Fuel Fired Heater)
2
- PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
3
FFH* PTC
4
This supplementary heater is a fuel burning type and This supplementary heater is an electrical air heating
improves the heating effect by increasing the engine type and installed on the heater outlet port. This device 5
coolant temperature. improves the heating effect by increasing the tempera-
ture of flowing air into the passenger room.
6
Compared to PTC, FFH cannot be operated or stopped
by the driver. The FFH is automatically operated, de- This device is operational/non-operational when the en- 7
pending on conditions of the coolant temperature and gine control unit supplies/cuts off the voltage to the PTC
the ambient temperature. according to the coolant temperature and the ambient 8
temperature.
9
X FFH Operation X Operational Condition
• The FFH system operates up to more than 2 minutes This device is activated when the blower switch is at
10
to burn the residual fuel inside the system when stop- any position other than the “OFF” position and the cool- 11
ping the engine during its operation. Therefore, a cer- ant temperature and the ambient temperature is within
tain period of FFH operation after stopping the engine a specified range. 12
is not a malfunction.
X Non-operational Condition 13
• In initial operating stage, the fuel pump generates the
operating sound and the FFH heater produces white • The blower switch is at the “OFF” position
smoke. These are normal states to fill the fuel into • Defective air intake temperature sensor 14
the FFH fuel line. • During engine cranking 15
• Battery voltage is too low
• During pre-glowing process ( indicator ON) 16

AUTOMATIC HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER
If the Auto button is pressed, the temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set
0 temperature. By operating the relevant switch of the automatic air conditioner, you may also manually control the air condi-
1 tioner operation, air flow direction, fan speed and air source. To turn off the air conditioner and heater, press the “OFF” button.
The desired room temperate can be set up by turning the temperature control switch.
2
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
3
1. Temperature display (ambient
1 4
4 2
temperature, set temperature)
2. Defroster indicator
5 3 5 3. Air flow indicator
6 7
6 4. A/C ON indicator
5. Fan speed indicator
7
6. Ambient temperature display
8 7. Auto mode indicator
9
Air conditioner switch Air source selection switch / AQS switch
10 Mode switch Defroster switch
11
12
13 Rear air conditioner
AUTO switch
14 switch*
Temperature Fan speed control button
15 control button
16 OFF switch Ambient temperature
display button
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO OPERATION MODE (AUTO INDICA- MANUAL OPERATION MODE (AUTO 0
TOR ON) INDICATOR OFF)
1
1. Press the AUTO button. When you use the fan speed control switch, air conditioner
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the VFD. switch, recirculation switch or mode switch during the auto 2
operation mode, the “AUTO” indicator on the VFD goes out
and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually. 3
In manual mode, the “AUTO” indicator on display does not 4
come on and you have to adjust the airflow direction, air-
AUTO switch flow volume, and temperature you want. 5
NOTE 6
AUTO indicator ON To resume the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
7
8
3. Set the desired room temperature with the temperature
control button. 9
4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is auto- 10
matically maintained according to the set temperature.
11
12
Temperature 13
control button
14
Set temperature
15
16

0 Auto Switch Fan Speed Control Button
When you press the Auto Switch, the “AUTO” indicator is To control the fan speed, press the switch as needed. When
1 displayed on the VFD and the temperature of the passenger pressing the switch in the Auto mode, the “AUTO” indicator
compartment is automatically maintained according to the goes out and the system is changed to the manual mode.
2
set temperature. When you press the Auto Switch during CAUTION
3 manual operation mode, the system is changed to the auto If the air conditioner switch is turned off, the air conditioner does not
operation mode. work even when the fan is running. However, the air flows due to
4 fan operation.
5
6
7
8 Rear Air Conditioner
9 Switch*
To operate the rear air conditioner,
10 this switch should be pressed
before turning the rear air flow
11 control dial.
12
Temperature Control Button OFF Switch Ambient Temperature Display Button
13 To adjust the temperature and fan To stop the air conditioner / When you press this button, the “AMB” indicator
speed, press the switch as needed. heater operation, press this appears and the ambient temperature is dis-
14 switch. played on the VFD for about 5 seconds.
15
CAUTION
16 The actual ambient temperature may not be displayed
correctly due to engine heat or ground heat.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Conditioner Switch Air Source Selection Switch / AQS Switch 0
When you press this switch, the A/C indicator ( ) To switch over the air conditioner mode to a specific mode
comes on and the air conditioner starts to operate. When
(air recirculation, fresh air intake, AQS ON or OFF), use this 1
switch. For detailed information of switch functions and AQS
you press the switch again, the air conditioner stops 2
system, refer to AQS system in this section.
operation and the indicator goes out.
CAUTION 3
To change the air source selection mode in auto operation mode, 4
press the air source selection switch after changing to the manual
operation mode.
5
Air conditioner
indicator 6
7
8
9
10
11
Air Source Selection and AQS Operation 12
AQS 13
AQS automatically adjusts from the
fresh air intake mode to the recircu- 14
lation mode when polluted air is de-
tected by the AQS sensor. 15
- AQS ON - AQS ON - AQS OFF - AQS OFF
- Fresh air intake - Air recirculation - Air recirculation - Fresh air intake
16

0
1 Defroster Switch
Use this switch for quick defrosting.
2
When you press this switch, the airflow direction will be
3 changed to the windshield and door glasses, the air con-
ditioner operates automatically, and outside air comes in.
4 If you press the switch again during its operation, the indi-
cator AUTO goes off. When the defrosting is complete,
5 press the switch to return to normal operations.
6
7 A/C ON indicator
8 Defroster indicator
9
Automatic Selection of the Fresh or Air Recircu-
10 lation Mode
11 1. When the defroster switch ( ) is pressed, outside air
automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again,
12 the previous mode will be restored.
13 2. If the AQS system is operating (AQS indicator ON), AQS
automatically adjusts from the fresh air mode to the recir-
14 culation mode when polluted air is detected by the AQS
sensor.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Switch 0
When you press this switch each time, the air flow mode will be changed to another mode and
displayed as shown in the figure. 1
When you press this switch in the auto air conditioner operation (“AUTO” indicator ON), the system
is changed to the manual air conditioner mode (“AUTO” indicator OFF).
2
3
4
5
6
Vent Defroster and
Floor 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Bi-level Floor
14
15
16

REAR AIR CONDITIONER* (DUAL A/C)
0 Operation of Rear Air Conditioner
1
2
Air Flow
3 Direction
4 Control Lever
Rear Air Flow (B)
5 Rear A/C switch
Control Dial (A)
6
7 1. Press the rear air conditioner switch.
2. Turn the rear air flow control dial (A) to any position (1 ~ 3)
8 from “0” position.
9 3. Adjust the air flow direction with the flow direction control
lever (B).
10
11 CAUTION
• If the rear air conditioner switch in front control panel is turned
12 off, the rear air conditioner does not work even when the rear
air flow control dial is operated. However, the air flows due to
13 fan operation.
14 • The rear air conditioner is only for air cooling. It does not include
the air heating function.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEFOGGING AND DEFROSTING
Inside of the Windshield Automatic Heater & Air Conditioner 0
1. Press the defroster switch.
2. Adjust the fan speed with the fan speed control. 1
3. To quickly remove the moisture on the glass, set the fan 2
speed button at a high speed position.
4. To prevent fog from forming on the glass, setting the air 3
source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode is
recommended. 4
Defroster switch 5
Outside of the Windshield 6
7
2. Adjust the fan speed with the fan speed control.
3. To quickly remove the frost on the glass, set the fan speed 8
button at a high speed position.
4. Set the temperature control switch to a hot position.
9
10
WARNING CAUTION
• When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the wind- • An extended air conditioner operation in the bi-level mode or
11
shield and windows. The fog will block your view through all defrost mode may cause the outside glass to fog due to the
windows and can create a dangerous situation. To prevent any high temperature difference between the inside and the out-
12
fog on the glass, setting the air source selection switch to the side of the vehicle. In this case, change the air flow to the
fresh air intake mode is recommended. fresh air intake mode and set the fan at a low speed. 13
• Especially in winter or summer, to avoid glass fogging, remove 14
NOTE any obstacles such as snow or leaves on the air inlets.
• When you press this defrost switch, the air conditioner turns on 15
automatically and the system selects the fresh air intake mode.
16

REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
0 Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When

• Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period.
1 • Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
2
CAUTION CAUTION
3 • Do not apply excessive force to the holders when removing • Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10,000 km of driving.
the glove box. It may cause a deformation of holders and re- However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions,
4 sults in a loose installation. such as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air condi-
• Replace both air conditioner filters at the same time while pay- tioner or heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.
5 ing attention to the installing direction. • When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or
heating capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.
6
7
Replacement of A/C Filter
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 1. Open the glove box. 2. Remove the glove box from the dash 3. Unscrew the bolts and remove the
panel by moving the glove box hold- air conditioner filter cover.
16 ers at both sides in the direction of
the arrow.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4. Pull out the first filter. 5. Lift up the second filter and remove 6. Install new filter while the protruding
it. section (arrow) of the filter faces 8
upward.
9
10
A/C filter
11
12
13
14
15
16
2 filters as a set

AQS (AIR QUALITY SYSTEM)
0 AQS System?
1 AQS automatically adjusts from the fresh air intake mode
to the recirculation mode when polluted air is detected
2 by the AQS sensor. The air source selection returns back
to the fresh air intake mode if a certain time passes or
3 the polluted air has disappeared.
4
In Auto Mode (AUTO indicator ON)
5 Whenever you press the AQS switch, the AQS switches over
between ON and OFF. When the AQS is turned on, the air
6
AQS Sensor Air Source Selection Switch/ source selection is changed to air recirculation mode
7 AQS Switch automatically. It cannot be changed to the fresh air intake
mode manually.
8
In Manual Mode (AUTO indicator OFF)
9 Whenever you press the Air source selection switch / AQS
switch, the system is switched to fresh air intake, air
10 recirculation, and AQS ON mode in order.
11 Indications of AQS Switch
12 CAUTION
To change the air source selection mode
13 in auto operation mode, press the air
source selection switch after changing
14 to the manual operation mode.
15 - AQS ON - AQS ON - AQS OFF - AQS OFF
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Turbocharger System 10 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Cautions in Using the Turbocharger ........ 10-2

5
6
Preventive Maintenance ........................... 10-3
7
Turbocharger Inspection ........................... 10-4
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN USING THE TURBOCHARGER
0 WHAT IS THE TURBOCHARGER?

Turbochargers are based on the gas turbine
1 engine technology, but operate under consid-
2 erably greater pressure. The turbocharger
consists of two turbo elements, a turbine and
3 a compressor, both of which are driven from
the main center shaft. The turbine rotates be-
4 tween 50,000 ~ 160,000 spins per minute
and uses the energy of the exhaust gas to
5 drive the compressor. The compressor, in
turn, draws in fresh air which it supplies to
6 the cylinders in the form of compressed air.
As more fuel is drawn into the engine, out-
7 put performance is boosted between 15 ~
8 30% in comparison to a non-turbocharged
engine.
9
Advantages of a turbocharger
10
Turbocharger helps the engine operate more
11 smoothly and with greater efficiency.
• Increase specific power
12
• Compensate for power loss at high altitude
13 • Reduce emissions
14 What is the intercooler?

15 The intercooler cools down the compressed
air temperature to increase the engine power
16 by increasing the air density.
GETtheMANUALS.org
10-2 TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
0
The vehicle owner should be encouraged to observe the
following precautions to ensure maximum turbocharger ser-
CAUTION 1
• At low ambient temperature, or when ever the vehicle has
vice life. not been used for a long period, normal engine oil pressure 2
and flow is affected. Under these conditions the engine should
CAUTION be started and allowed to idle for a few minutes before oper- 3
ating at higher rpm.
• Operate the engine over the idling speed only after normal en-
gine oil pressure has been established. Forcing the turbocharger • Avoid long periods of engine idling. The combination of low- 4
to operate before the bearings are adequately lubricated cre- pressures in the turbine and compressor may allow oil to
ates unnecessary friction. seep past the seal into the turbine or the compressor. 5
• Take steps to reduce temperature and speeds from their maxi- • The turbocharger may need to be pre-oiled after oil change
mum before shutting down the engine. or any service that involves oil draining. Crank the engine a 6
few times before allowing start, then start the engine and al-
The engine equipped with turbocharger develops much more
low it to idle for a period to establish full oil circulation and 7
heats than a normal engine, so when the engine is stopped
pressure before operating at higher rpm.
abruptly, the oil in the bearings may evaporate due to heats and 8
can be stuck.
• Use only the specified engine oil and observe inspection and 9
replacement intervals.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM 10-3
TURBOCHARGER INSPECTION
0
Good maintenance practices should be observed, particu-
1 larly regarding air filtration, oil quality and filtration.
WARNING
Operating the turbocharger system without the intake and exhaust
2 These areas are important because of a turbocharger’s op- manifold mounting can result in severe engine damage.
erating speed. The turbocharger should be operated when every device is nor-
3 Proper operating procedures and preventive maintenance mally installed.
practices enhance good turbocharger’s service life and
4 performance.
5 The contaminated air cleaner can damage the turbo- NOTE
charger seriously, so frequently check the air cleaner and The most defectives in turbocharger are turbine blade damages or
6 observe the replacement intervals. compressor bearing sticks due to lack of oil supply, contaminated
engine oil or external materials.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Convenience Devices 11 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Storage Boxes and Convenience Device Seatback Pocket/Map Pocket .................. 11-12
5
..................................................................... 11-2 Sun Visors ................................................. 11-13 6
Tiltable Steering Wheel and Horn ............ 11-4
Front Room Lamps/Sunglasses Storage 7
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................... 11-5 ................................................................... 11-14 8
Storage Bin for Portable Electronic Center and Rear Room Lamps/ 9
Device/Ticket Holder/AV Jack .................... 11-6 Assist Grip ................................................. 11-15
10
Front Cup Holder/Cigarette Lighter .......... 11-7 Storage Box in Luggage Compartment/
Center Console ........................................... 11-8 Luggage Net ............................................. 11-16
11
Power Outlet ............................................... 11-9 Rear Heated Glass / Removable Ashtray 12
Glove Box / Courtesy Lamp ..................... 11-10 ................................................................... 11-18 13
Rear Cup Holder/Jack Storage/DVD AV* & Navigation System* ........................ 11-19 14
Changer*/Navigation Unit* Storage ........ 11-11 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BOXES AND CONVENIENCE DEVICE
0
1 Sunglasses box
2 Driver’s sun visor Passenger’s sun visor

3
Inside rearview mirror
4 (ECM*)
5 Digital clock
6
7
8
9
10 Horn
11
Cigarette lighter Glove box
12
13
Center console
14 Power outlet
Driver’s door map pocket Passenger’s door
15 map pocket
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
11-2 CONVENIENCE DEVICES
WARNING 0
• Driving with any storage box open can cause injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop. Keep all the storage boxes closed while driving.
• Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire. 1
• When vehicle is in motion, liquid may spill out. Spilled liquid can damage the vehicle and cause burns if it is hot. Do not use the cup holder
while vehicle is in motion. Therefore, do not put any cup with hot liquid into the cup holder.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Seatback Seatback 10
pocket pocket
11
Center console 12
AV components* Rear cup holder
13
14
Rear power outlet
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CONVENIENCE DEVICES 11-3
TILTABLE STEERING WHEEL AND HORN
0
1 Tiltable Steering Wheel Horn
Press the horn pad on the steer-
2 ing wheel to sound the horn.
3 CAUTION
4 The sound of the horn can startle

pedestrians. Use only when needed.
5
6
7
8 To adjust the steering wheel, push the con-
trol lever to right, adjust the wheel up or
9 down to the proper position, release the
control lever to lock the wheel in place.
10 After adjustment, make sure that the steer-
ing wheel is securely fixed.
11
12
13
14
15 WARNING
• Do not adjust the steering wheel while your vehicle is moving.
16 Otherwise, control of your vehicle can be lost.
• Before driving, make sure that the steering wheel is locked.
GETtheMANUALS.org
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side ways
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR to obtain the best rear view.
ECM (ANTI-GLARE AUTO ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION)* MANUAL TYPE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR 0
1
2
Anti-glare auto adjustment switch
3
Brightness 4
Indicator detecting
sensor 5
6
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be au- Manual Day/Night Adjustment 7
tomatically adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle be- You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or
hind you by pressing the anti-glare auto adjustment switch. 8
pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to
While pressing the switch, its corresponding indicator
comes on. Pressing the switch once more turns off the in- other vehicles behind you.
9
dicator and deactivates the function.
CAUTION
CAUTION When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night,
10
Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function may adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing
not operate properly. or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear
11
• When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to the view.
inside rearview mirror’s sensor. 12
• When the rear window has a dark tinted glass.
WARNING
• When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic anti- 13
glare function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview. For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
• For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. 14
WARNING 15
• The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not
allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in 16
your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor.
• For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BIN FOR PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE/TICKET HOLDER/AV JACK
0 STORAGE BIN FOR PORTABLE ELEC-

TRONIC DEVICE TICKET HOLDER/AV JACK*
1
2
3
4 Ticket Holder
5
AV Jack
6
7
8
9
10
The storage bin for portable electronic device is located on Ticket Holder
11 the center instrument cluster. Keep your cellular phone or
Tickets and cards can be stored.
MP3 player in the storage bin as shown in figure. Some mod-
12 els may not be inserted into the storage bin due to the size. AV Jack
13 CAUTION External audio and video device (camcorder, digital camera
Make sure that any button on the electronic device is not pressed etc.) can be connected to the AV system in vehicle through
14 in the holder. Also, be careful not to damage the surface of the this jack.
electronic device.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT CUP HOLDER/CIGARETTE LIGHTER
FRONT CUP HOLDER CIGARETTE LIGHTER 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Front cup holders are installed at the front side of center To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all the way down.
console. When it becomes heated, it automatically pops out and is 10
ready for use.
CAUTION 11
• When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, liquid may spill. WARNING
• Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup holder. • When the cigarette lighter does not automatically pop up after 30 seconds, 12
there is a danger of overheating. If this happens, pull it out and have the
problem corrected by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. 13
• Inserting your finger into the cigarette lighter outlet can cause burns or
To hold a smaller cup and can,
use the additional pad (A) as
electric shock. 14
• The barrel of the cigarette lighter becomes very hot when it is fully charged.
shown in figure. When touched by or dropped on bare skin, this may cause burns. Drop-
ping the hot lighter can cause damage to a car seat or even start a fire.
15
CAUTION 16
Do not tap the cigarette lighter strongly to clean up. That may damage the coil.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER CONSOLE
0 CUP HOLDER STORAGE BIN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To use the cup holder, push the outer surface. Push the button and lift the cover lid to open in order to store
10 Push it in when not in use. small items.
11 CAUTION CAUTION
12 • When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, liquid may spill. Do not store any flammables including disposable lighters in the
• Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup holder. console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode
and cause a fire.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER OUTLET
FRONT POWER OUTLET REAR POWER OUTLET 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The front power outlet is installed at the left side of The rear power outlet is installed at the right side of stor-
passenger’s footwall. age box in luggage compartment. 10
11
An auxiliary power outlet for extra electrical devices is WARNING
installed. This power outlet supplies power when the igni- 12
• For the extra electrical devices, you must use this power outlet.
tion key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. If you alter the vehicle's wire lines and leave the wires to 13
hang freely, it could cause an accident like a fire.
CAUTION • Abide by the nominal capacity of 120W. 14
Keep the power outlet cover closed if not in use. Electrical de- • Do not put a finger into the outlet. It may cause an electric
fects can occur if objects other than power outlet plugs or wa- shock. 15
ter gets in. This will prevent the socket from becoming clogged
• The battery can be discharged if the power outlet is used
or short circuiting.
excessively when the engine is not running. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOVE BOX/COURTESY LAMP
0 GLOVE BOX COURTESY LAMP

1
2
3
Courtesy lamp
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pull up on the lever to open the glove box. Items can be The courtesy lamp comes on when opening the door and
10 stored. goes out when closing it.
11 When the tail lights are on and the glove box is open, the
glove box inner lamp comes on.
12
CAUTION
13 • Driving with the glove box lid open can cause injury in case
of an accident or a sudden stop. Keep glove box lid closed
14 when driving.
• Do not store any flammables including a disposable lighter in
15 the console box or glove box. In hot weather, it may explode
and cause a fire.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR CUP HOLDER/JACK STORAGE/DVD CHANGER*/NAVIGATION UNIT* STORAGE
DVD CHANGER*/NAVIGATION UNIT* 0
REAR CUP HOLDER STORAGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DVD changer/
Navigation unit 8
storage
9
The rear cup holder is located at the rear side of center The jack storage and the navigation unit/DVD changer stor-
10
console. age are located at the left side of luggage compartment. 11
To use it, pull the cover down while pulling down the lever.
Close it when not in use. 12
CAUTION 13
• When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, the liquid may spill. 14
• Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup holder.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEATBACK POCKET/MAP POCKET
0 SEATBACK POCKET MAP POCKET

1
2
3
4 Map pocket
5
6
7
8
9
Storage pocket is installed at the rear side of front seat. Use The map pocket is located on each front door. Maps,
10 it to put personal belongings. magazines, newspapers, and other items can be stored.
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS TICKET HOLDER/VANITY MIRROR AND LAMP 0
Ticket holder 1
(only for driver’s)
2
Ticket holder 3
4
5
6
7
Vanity mirror Lamp
8
9
Sun visors are installed on the roof trim above the driver’s The driver’s sun visor has a ticket holder on its back side.
and passenger’s seat. Swing the sun visor down or to the Swing the sun visor down and open the cover to reveal the
10
left (right), if necessary. mirror. 11
The vanity mirror comes on only when opening the cover.
12
CAUTION
Do not operate the sun visor, vanity mirror or ticket holder while
13
driving. It may cause an unexpected accident.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ROOM LAMPS/SUNGLASSES STORAGE
0 FRONT ROOM LAMP SUNGLASSES STORAGE

1
2
3 Room lamp switch
(passenger side)
4
5
6
7
Room lamp switch
8 (driver side)
9
When the switch is pressed, the appropriate front room Sunglasses storage is located in the overhead console.
10 lamp is turned on. When pressed it again, the lamp goes Press the top side of the cover to open it. To close it, push
out. the cover up until you hear the “click” sound.
11
12 CAUTION CAUTION
Do not turn on the room lamp for a long period of time with the • If glasses falls down, it may be damaged. Fix it firmly.
13 engine stopped. Otherwise, the battery may be discharged. • The unclosed console can block your rearview. Also, the con-
sole can injure you in an accident or a sudden stop. Therefore,
14 close the console before driving off your vehicle.
• Do not store any item that can be deformed in a hot temperature.
15 • Do not store any heavy items inside the console. When it falls
out of the console, occupants may get injuries.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS/ASSIST GRIP
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS ASSIST GRIP 0
1
OFF 2
3
Door
4
5
ON
Coat hook 6
7
8
9
The room lamps are operated by room lamp switch. Your vehicle has assist grips above the front passenger’s
If the center room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the cen- door and the rear doors. The coat hook is installed only on 10
ter room lamp is turned on when opening a rear door. It the grip above rear left door.
11
goes out when closing the door.
If the rear room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the rear 12
room lamp is turned on when opening the tailgate. It goes
out when closing the tailgate. 13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/LUGGAGE NET
0 STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LUGGAGE NET

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To use the storage box in luggage compartment, release the Any possibly moving objects during driving can be stored in
10 lock on the cover and open the cover. the luggage net.
11 Hook the net up to the luggage compartment.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE COVER (EXCEPT FOR 7-SEATER) 0
NOTE 1
Store the luggage cover separately to use the luggage room of the
vehicle wide. 2
3
CAUTION
Don’t put anything on the luggage cover. 4
5
6
7
8
9
When Unrolling the Luggage Cover
10
Pull the handle of the luggage cover at the center, and fix it
into the grooves at left and right sides of quarter trim inner 11
panels.
12
When Rolling the Luggage Cover
Take the luggage cover out of the grooves by pulling the
13
handle and let go the grasp slightly to roll the luggage cover. 14
When Removing the Luggage Cover 15
After tearing off the edge of luggage cover at the back of rear
seat, remove the luggage cover assembly by raising up it 16
from the fixing holder’s grooves.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR HEATED GLASS / REMOVABLE ASHTRAY
0 REAR DEFOGGER REMOVABLE ASHTRAY

1 Heating grids
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 General Ashtray
9
The heating grids are installed on the tailgate glass. If you open the lid at night or in a dark area, the ashtray light
10 Be careful not to damage the heating grids while cleaning will light up inside the ashtray.
the inside of the window. On the other hand, the general removable ashtray’s battery
11 should be replaced with a new one when the battery’s
power is used up.
12 CAUTION
Battery type: CR2032
Do not coat the tailgate window and side windows with any af-
13 termarket products, especially a metal anti-glare film or a two-tone WARNING
film. When it is used on the windows, the sensitivity of the heating
14 grids can be deteriorated.
To avoid danger of fire, do not accumulate inflammable materials,
such as garbage or cigarette butts, in your ashtray and make sure
the cigarettes are full extinguished.
15
CAUTION
16
The LED illuminator inside of the ashtray has an electronic circuit and
is not water-proof. Any impact on it or water will damage the unit.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AV* & NAVIGATION SYSTEM*
AUDIO OUTLET AND ANTENNA 0
You can hear the music
AV monitor* through the speakers on your
1
(touch panel type)* vehicle by connecting the exter- 2
nal audio device (MP3 player,
CD player etc.) to this jack. 3
Stereo jack
4
You can use the digital camera, 5
AV outlet* camcorder, or external audio
device by connecting them to 6
the AV outlet (only for the ve-
Audio switch in hicle with AV system). 7
steering wheel
8
9
Navigation, TV and radio antenna*
10
11
12
13
CAUTION 14
If any transmitter or receiver is close to the antenna, it can inter- 15
fere with the communication of the antenna, causing operating or
receiving errors in the navigation system, TV and radio.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CHANGER* / NAVIGATION UNIT*
1
2 Changer
3
4
5
6
7 Navigation Unit
8
9
Changer and navigation unit is installed in the left bottom CAUTION
10 on the rear of the vehicle. To access the changer and navi-
Insert only the MAP DVD to operate the navigation system.
gation unit, open the storage cover and unlock the two lock-
11 ing devices. The navigation unit can be used by inserting Inserting other types of discs such as music CD, MP3 CD, or other
DVD may cause defects to the navigation unit.
the MAP disc.
12
For further detailed information, refer to the navigation op-
13 erating manual.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN USING AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 0
1
• An illegal copy of a CD/DVD may cause a malfunction
Usable Discs
in the audio/video head unit and abnormal replay. Use 2
only original CD/DVDs.
Navigation Unit* 3
• Incompatible discs may cause a malfunction in the
system. Use only compatible discs. • Navigation map DVD
4
• The back of the front monitor is very hot. Do not touch Head Unit
the back when opening the monitor.
• DVD player*: DVD/VCD/Audio CD/MP3 CD
5
• Do not use the audio/video/navigation system for a long
time when the engine is not running. The battery could • CD player: Audio CD 6
discharge.
Changer 7
• Be careful not to spill water on the unit or to let any for-
• DVD/VCD/Audio CD/ MP3 CD
eign objects into the system through the opened 8
monitor.
• Do not apply excessive force to adjust, open, and close 9
the monitor. Do not impede the automatic movement Please refer to a separately provided operating manual
of the unit. It may cause a malfunction.
10
to check disk compatibility.
• Do not apply any impacts and pressure to the monitor 11
screen. The LCD panel or touch screen panel can be
damaged. 12
• When cleaning the touch screen, turn off the system 13
and clean the surface with a dry and soft cloth. Never
use a coarse cloth, hard cloth, chemical agent, or vola- 14
tile cleaning solvent (alcohol, benzene, thinner) for
cleaning the touch screen. The screen surface can be 15
damaged and discolored.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
In Case of Emergency 12 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Starting the Engine with Jumper Cables . 12-2 Shift Lever Lock Release and
5
Safety Mode Reset ................................... 12-17 6
Cautions When a Tire Is Flat .................... 12-4
Towing a Disabled Vehicle ...................... 12-18 7
Warning Triangle* ..................................... 12-5
Emergency Towing ................................... 12-19 8
OVM Tools .................................................. 12-6
Trailer Towing ........................................... 12-21 9
Removing the Spare Tire ......................... 12-7
Accident or Fire ........................................ 12-26 10
Changing a Spare Tire .............................. 12-8
Emission reduction device ....................... 12-27
11
Cautions When Changing the Tire .......... 12-13
12
When the Engine Is Overheating ............ 12-14
13
Water Separator Warning Light and
14
Engine Check Warning Light ................... 12-16
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE WITH JUMPER CABLES
If the batter is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6 The positive (+) cable to the positive
Booster battery (+) terminal.
7 The minus (–) cable to the minus (–)
terminal.
8
9
Discharged battery
10
11
12 1. Prepare a set of jumper cables.
2. Place another vehicle that has the same 12 V of power
13 Connecting Order: near to the discharged vehicle.
(1) The + terminal of the discharged battery 3. Switch off all electrical accessories for the discharged
14
(2) The + terminal of the booster battery vehicle.
15 (3) The - terminal of the booster battery 4. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission to the
(4) Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the body P position (automatic transmission) or neutral (N) posi-
16 of the discharged vehicle, such as the engine block or tion (manual transmission).
a front towing hook. 5. Connect the jumper cables.
GETtheMANUALS.org
12-2 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
0
WARNING 1
• Connecting the jumper cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery
could result in arcing and possibly a battery explosion. Serious personal injury or 2
vehicle damage can result.
• Make sure that the jumper leads are securely connected. Otherwise, an abrupt dis- 3
connection due to vibration during engine starting may cause an electrical short re-
sulting in severe damage to electric components. 4
• A battery generates the gas which is flammable and explosive. This gas could be
exploded due to the spark when connecting the jump cables. Make sure that the
5
booster battery has the same voltage rate with the discharged battery.
6
• While connecting the jumper cables, make sure that the negative (–) and positive
(+) cables never touch each other. Otherwise sparks might cause an explosion 7
of the battery.
• Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact 8
eyes, skin, or painted surfaces. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and contact your doctor. 9
• While being transported in an ambulance, gently wipe out the contacted area
with a water-wet cloth or sponge. 10
11
CAUTION
• When starting your vehicle with jumper cable, turn off the engine of the boost
12
vehicle and connect the jumper cables
13
• Ensure that the jumper cables are clear away fan blades before starting the engine.
14
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, and let the
engine idle for a few minutes. 15
7. Attempt to start the engine with the discharged battery.
16
8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the jumper cables in the
reverse sequence of connection.
GETtheMANUALS.org
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 12-3
CAUTIONS WHEN A TIRE IS FLAT
0
If one of the tires becomes flat while driving, grab the steer-
1 ing wheel firmly and remove your foot from the accelerator
2 pedal. Gradually slow down and park your vehicle in a safe
place. Replace the flat tire with a spare tire. For the process,
3 refer to sections about the spare tire.
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING WARNING
10
• Don’t panic! Improper operation of the steering wheel or abrupt • Stop the engine and set up the warning triangle behind your ve-
11 braking may cause a consequential accident on the road. Stop hicle (daytime: 100 m, night time: 200 m - on express way).
your vehicle in a safe place and turn on the hazard flasher and • Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
12 then apply the parking brake. wheel being changed.
• Do not drive with a flat tire for even a very short distance. In • Have all passengers get out of vehicle and move in a safe place.
13 addition to damages to the rim of the tire, abnormal driving con-
ditions can cause a very danger situation.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING TRIANGLE*
0
When the vehicle has a serious problem dur- 1
ing driving
1. Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of 2
traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind
your vehicle (days: 100 m, nights: 200 m) to warn other
3
vehicles. 4
2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away
from the traffic. When your safety is secured, contact your 5
Ssangyong dealer for your emergency service.
6
7
8
9
When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe CAUTION
place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. 10
• Set up a warning triangle on a place where it can be very visible
(Daytime: 100 meters behind, Night: 200 meters behind) while paying attention to traffic conditions. 11
• On a highway or vehicle-designated road, evacuate yourself to
a safe place after pulling over your vehicle. 12
• At night time, set up a blinking emergency triangle behind your
vehicle (over 200 meters) to warn others. 13
• On a curved road, provide a emergency hand signal with a warn-
ing light to others at the point over 200 meters behind your vehicle.
14
• If your vehicle is operational or the problem is fixed, resume driving 15
paying extra attention to traffic conditions.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM TOOLS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 OVM tools box
1. Jack 4. Screwdriver (+ and -)
10 Close
2. Jack connection 5. Spanner
11 Open 3. Wheel nut wrench
12
13 CAUTION
• Put out the OVM tools after fixing the upright seat with a strap.
14 Do not put out the tools without fixing the seat using a strap. In
that case, the second row seat may fall and cause injury.
15 You can find a jack, jack extension, wheel nut wrench, and • After using the OVM tools, return them to the original locations.
other OVM tools under the second row seat behind driver’s
16 seat.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
0
WARNING 1
The emergency spare tire is only for emergency situations.
Never use it for normal driving. After installing the spare tire 2
on a wheel, take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized ser-
vice center or a tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new 3
regular tire.
4
CAUTION 5
• When reinstalling the spare tire to the carrier, be sure to se-
curely lock it to the carrier holder. 6
• While your vehicle is being raised up with the jack, avoid any
impact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured. 7
8
9
1. Insert the connection rod in the hole located in the upper
center of the bumper after opening the tailgate, and then 10
connect the wheel nut wrench to it.
11
2. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-clockwise to lower the
spare tire. 12
3. When the spare tire is on the ground, remove the tire by
prying off the lift plate. 13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHANGING A SPARE TIRE
0
2. Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns by turning them
1 counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
2
WARNING
3 • Do not remove the nuts yet from the wheel. If they are removed,
the wheel could slip off from the vehicle. Then, the body of the
4 vehicle will fall down on you and you may get seriously injured.
• Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns.
5
6
7
8
9
1. Install the chocks under the front side and rear side of
10 the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being
replaced.
11
WARNING
12 • The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
When Replacing a Front Tire When Replacing a Rear Tire 0
Front jack up point Rear jack up point 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3. Place the jack directly under the jack-up points so that the
top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. 10
WARNING 11
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is set up at the
jack up point. Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Make 12
sure that the jack securely contacts the jacking point of the ve-
hicle and the ground. Otherwise, there could be a personal injury 13
or damage to your vehicle.
14
CAUTION
Do not set the jack at any other position on the vehicle other than
15
those specified. If the jack is set at the wrong position, the body of
the vehicle could be dented or damaged. The top of the jack should
16
<Jack up points>
contact the jacking point.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4. Combine the jack, jack extension and the wheel nut 6. Take the wheel off and place the wheel under the vehicle
10 wrench as shown in the figure. Raise up the vehicle by body. This helps to minimize any danger if the jack slip
rotating the combined wrench clockwise until the tire is off position.
11 off from the ground about 3 cm.
12 5. Remove the wheel nuts by hands while the vehicle is
stationary. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
13
WARNING
14 Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is in the proper
position, and secure both to the vehicle and the ground. It may
15 cause a personal injury or vehicle damage.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the combined wrench
Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with counter-clockwise until the tire touches the ground. Re-
1
the sequence as shown in the figure. move the jack. 2
WARNING 3
While the jack is supporting your vehicle, do not use too much force
to tighten the nuts. Otherwise, the vehicle may slip off and you 4
may get injured.
5
9. Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with the sequence 6
as shown in the figure.
7
10. When done with mounting the spare tire, place the flat
tire in the luggage room. Store the jack and other emer- 8
gency tools in their storages.
9
7. Then mount the spare tire and temporarily tighten the
wheel nuts until the spare tire wheel is no longer loose. 10
WARNING 11
By tightening up the spare tire until it is not loose any more, you 12
can avoid any tilting of the tire on the wheel hub when the tire
touches the ground.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 WARNING
• With the emergency spare tire, do not drive any faster than
2 60 km/h.
• The temporary spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
3 use it for normal driving. After installing the spare tire on a wheel,
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or
4 a tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
• Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
5 loose and even come off or any malfunctioning in the steering
and braking system.
6
• This could lead to an accident. Be sure to tighten the wheel nuts
7 as specified. If the wheel comes off due to a loose wheel nut,
you may have a fatal accident.
8 • Using different tires could cause you to lose control while driving.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires from the same manu-
9 facturer on all wheels.
If over tightened, the wheel nuts could be damaged. Do not
10 overtighten the wheel nuts by pressing the wheel nut wrench
by foot or using an assist pipe. CAUTION
11 After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 1000 km, re-
tighten the wheel nuts.
12 - Wheel nut tightening torque: 120 ~ 140 Nm
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN CHANGING THE TIRE
CAUTIONS WHEN CHANGING THE TIRE 0

1
X Before Changing the Tire 2
• Turn on hazard flashers and move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park on a firm and level
ground. 3
• Set up the jack at the specified position. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. While 4
the vehicle is on the jack, never start or run the engine or push the vehicle.
5
• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay in a place away from traffic.
6
X During Changing the Tire
7
• Do not completely tighten the wheel nuts at a time. Tighten the wheel nuts in the diagonal sequence in 2 or 3
steps. 8
• Never apply oil or grease to either wheel studs or nuts as it will cause them to overtighten.
9
X After Changing the Tire 10
• Check, repair, and retighten the replaced tire at the nearest Ssangyong Authorized Service Center or a quali-
fied tire shop after an emergency change.
11
• Securely fix the tire in its carrier. Check to see if the spare tire is securely locked into the carrier without any 12
looseness. Otherwise, it may make some abnormal noises or fall out from the carrier on the road while the
vehicle is moving. This may cause an accident or hit a pedestrian. 13
• If this happens, the fallen tire can be a great danger to other vehicles or people. Check the tightness of the 14
wheel nuts and tire pressure before driving.
• The spare tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do not exceed 60 km/h speed when the spare tire
15
is installed on the vehicle. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE IS OVERHEATING
0
1
2 Coolant temperature gauge
3
4
Engine overheat warning lamp
5
6
7
When the engine overheats, steam or spray may come
8 out the engine compartment. Or, the coolant temperature
gauge is closed to “H”. If this happens, the engine over-
9 heat warning lamp comes on and a buzzer will sound.
Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe place.
10
11 Symptoms:
12 • The engine overheat warning lamp blinks (Buzzer
sounds)
13 • The gauge indicates over the normal range (or in the
red zone),
14 • Steam or spray from the engine compartment.
15 • Reduced engine output.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE OVERHEATS 0
1. Move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park
on a firm and level ground. Apply the parking brake and
CAUTION 1
• When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level,
shift the transmission to the P position (automatic immediately turn off the engine and let it cool down. 2
transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission). • Opening the reserve tank cap should be performed when the
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the engine is off and has cooled down. 3
engine hood to ventilate the engine compartment. • Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pressure,
which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant re-
4
3. If you see steam under the hood, stop the engine
serve tank cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
immediately. 5
• The engine may be damaged if you add cold water abruptly when
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine the engine is still hot.
running in idling speed. 6
• Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal 7
• If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
range even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If it is too low, 8
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections.
9
6. Add coolant into the reserve tank if necessary.
7. If necessary, cover the tank cap with a cloth and turn the 10
cap a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing
the pressure, remove the cap and fill up the tank. Then, 11
put the cap back on the tank.
12
8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized 13
Service Center.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR WARNING LIGHT AND ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6 Engine Check Warning Light Water Separator Warning Light
7 If the light stays on or comes on while When the water level inside the water sepa-
driving, some of the engine control compo- rator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level,
8 nents including sensors and other devices this warning light comes on and a buzzer
are defective. Have the system checked by sounds. If these conditions occur, immedi-
9 a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- ately drain the water from the fuel filter & the
rized Service Center. water separator. For the draining procedures, please refer to
10 “How to drain the water from fuel filter” section in this manual.
WARNING
11 • The fuel system in the engine may get serious damages if you CAUTION
keep driving while the warning light is on. Prompt correction When this warning light comes on, the engine driving force may
12 should be necessary. be decreased or the engine may stall.
13 • Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of the
priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel pump with
14 fuel.
CAUTION
15
When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this warning light comes on and a buzzer sounds.
16 Also, the driving force of the vehicle decreases. If these conditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter & the water separator.
If the above conditions are still existing after draining the water, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE AND SAFETY MODE RESET
HOW TO RELEASE THE SHIFT LEVER LOCK 0
Symptoms after Resetting of the Safety Mode 1
• Heavy shock when moving the selector lever
2
• Decreased driving force while driving at a high speed
• Fixed gear position during driving 3
• If the safety mode is activated, the shift indicator dis- 4
plays “D”.
If one of these symptoms happens, reset the automatic 5
transmission safe mode.
6
How to Reset the Safety Mode
7
1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to the “P”
position. 8
2. Stop the engine and wait for over 10 seconds.
9
1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock
10
release lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the WARNING
If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd forward
11
lever to other position.
gear in the “D” position or the 2nd reverse gear in the “R” position) 12
3. Start the engine, release the parking brake, and place the
still exists, have the system check by a Ssangyong Dealer or
selector lever to the “D” position. Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. 13
WARNING
• If the automatic gear selector does not move out of “P”, take the
14
steps mentioned above and take the vehicle to a Ssangyong
dealer or authorized service center. Have the vehicle checked 15
and repaired.
• The brake pedal must be depressed when you try to move the
16
selector.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Flat-bed equipment is the best method of moving a disabled If not available to use a car carrier, tow the vehicle as
10 vehicle to avoid any damages. illustrated.
11 The vehicle equipped with the full-time four wheel drive Choose an appropriate towing method based upon vehicle
(TOD, AWD) system should be towed by this way. damage.
12
WARNING WARNING
13 • If you tow the vehicle equipped with the full-time four wheel drive • The propeller shaft for the grounded wheels should be discon-
(TOD, AWD) system while front or rear tires are rolling on the nected before towing.
14 road, the drive system in the vehicle should be severely • Because their oil pumps are off during towing, towing the ve-
damaged. hicle with the propeller shaft connected can cause internal damage
15 or burning of the transmission or the transfer casing.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY TOWING
0
• When towing your vehicle with the towing rope:
1
1. Securely tie up the towing rope to the towing hooks. Se-
cure the rope to both of the towing hooks under the front 2
of the vehicle as tight as possible.
2. To make the rope conspicuously visible, bind a white col- 3
ored cloth on the center of the rope.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position and re-
4
lease the parking brake. 5
4. Switch on the hazard warning flashers of both vehicles.
Within 5 m 5. Maintain the towing distance. Apply more force to depress 6
the brake pedal of the vehicle that will be towed.
6. Set the ignition in the ON position. 7
7. Total length of the towing and towed vehicle and the tow- 8
ing rope should be less than 25 meters. And tow the ve-
hicle within 25 km with 5 km/h of the towing speed. The 9
length of the rope should be less than 5 m.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 LOCATION OF TOWING HOOKS
1 Front towing hook Rear towing hook CAUTION
• If you cannot use a professional towing service, the driver of
2 the towed vehicle should stay behind the steering wheel. But,
never use this emergency towing when the electrical system,
3 steering system, or brake system is not operative.
• Ensure that only horizontal tension is applied to the front or rear
4 towing hook.
• If there are steep hills or sharp turns in your towing path, do not
5 use this method.
6 • Depress the brake pedal stronger than normal condition when
the engine is not running.
7 • When your electrical systems operate properly, turn on the haz-
ard warning lamps or turn signal lamps according to the towing
8 vehicle’s signals.
• Avoid overloaded towing and do not tow a heavier vehicle than
9 yours.
WARNING • Position the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” so that the steering
10 wheel is not locked.
• The towing hook should be used only for temporary and short-
11 distance recovery or towing in an emergency situation. Avoid
using it all the time. Misusing can have serious consequences.
12 • Special cares should be taken when towing. Avoid an abrupt start-
off or reckless driving because it could over-tighten the towing hook,
13 towing rope or chain with excessive force. To prevent damage, do
not take up slack in the towing rope or chain too quickly.
14 • If the towing hook is required for towing as the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow, mud or sand or it can't get out by itself due to
15 poor traction, make sure no excessive force is applied to the
towing hook. Otherwise, the towing hook, towing rope or chain
16 may be broken, resulting in an injury or damage to the vehicle.
For safe towing, it is recommended to contact Ssangyong au-
thorized serviceshop or a professional towing company.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TRAILER TOWING
TRAILER LOADING 0
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger vehicle To load your trailer properly, you must know how to mea-
therefore handling, braking, durability and economy will be sure gross trailer weight and trailer ball weight. Gross trailer
1
affected by towing a trailer. weight is the weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it. 2
Your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of cor- You can measure gross trailer weight by putting the fully
rect equipment. Also, you should avoid overloading and other loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. 3
abusive use. Trailer ball weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch
The maximum loaded trailer weight you can pull with your by the trailer coupler at its normal towing height. This weight
4
vehicle depends on your intended use and what special can be measured using a bathroom scale. 5
equipment has been installed on it. Before attempting any The weight of your loaded trailer (gross trailer weight)
towing, ensure that the correct equipment is fitted to your should never exceed the specified values. 6
vehicle.
The maximum permissible trailer ball weight is 128 kg.
Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and install towing 7
equipment to suit your requirement. The permissible trailer loads are valid for several gradients
from 6.8% to 12.6% according to engine power applied. 8
When the trailer has been coupled, the permissible rear axle
load for the fully loaded towing vehicle (including occupants)
9
must not be exceeded. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg)
Maximum permissible
Maximum
2 Engine Type
Trailer
static vertical load on
the coupling device
3 with brake 3,200
G32D A T
4 without brake 750
with brake 3,200
5 D27DTP A T
without brake 750 128
6 MT 3,200
with brake
D27DT A T 3,200
7
without brake 750
8
The above dimensions are certified data to meet the follow-
9 ing conditions.
On a 12% of uphill: Capable of 5 starts within 5 minutes
10 (with trailer)
11 On a 18% of uphill: Capable of 5 starts within 5 minutes
(without trailer)
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING TRAILER BRAKES 0
In higher elevations the engine output and gradability may drop so
If the trailer brakes are used, you should follow all instruc-
that it may not be possible for the permissible trailer loads to be
tions provided by the manufacturer. Never modify the brake
1
fully utilized in mountainous territory.
system of your vehicle. 2
So, the permissible trailer loads should be reduced by 10% at
every 1,000 m after reached at 1,000 m of altitude.
TRAILER LIGHTS 3
WARNING Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights which meet 4
Never exceed the maximum load limits of trailer or trailer towing country and local requirements.
equipment and be aware that due to the higher load overheating
Always check for the proper operation of all trailer lights be-
5
might occur in hot days or during continuous uphill driving.
fore you start to tow. 6
WARNING
TIRES 7
Incorrect loading and crosswinds, large trucks passing or road
roughness can cause swaying or trailer separation. When towing trailers, be sure your tires are properly inflated 8
• Adjust ball load by distribution of load in trailer. to the inflation pressure.
• Check by weighing loaded trailer and ball load separately. 9
• Check the relevant state or territory registration authorities for SAFETY CHAINS 10
the legal maximum towing weight capacities.
Always attach safety chains between your vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer 11
so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch. Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
12
mendation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just 13
enough slack to permit full turning. Never allow safety chains
to drag on the road. 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE FLUID • Allow adequate stopping distance.
0
Stopping distance is increased when you tow a trailer.
Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) un-
1 der the following conditions. • Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too
frequently, which will cause the brakes to overheat and
2 - Towing a trailer frequently. result in reduced brake efficiency.
- Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain. • Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when
3
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID • Parking on a steep slope is not recommended.
More frequent maintenance is required if your vehicle tows You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
5 trailer frequently. attached, on a hill.
6 If something goes wrong, such as the trailer/caravan hitch
TOWING TIPS becoming disengaged, people can be injured and both
7 When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently the vehicle and trailer can be damaged.
8 compared with normal driving condition. • If someone removing the blocks stands directly behind the
trailer, he could be injured. If your brakes or the hitch
For safety, observe the following precautions:
9 • Practice turning, stopping, and reversing before you be-
slipped, the trailer could roll backward. Make sure anyone
removing blocks from your wheels stands to one side.
10 gin towing in traffic.
• Take note of trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not tow in traffic until you are confident that you can
11 handle the vehicle and trailer safely.
DRIVING ON HILL
12 • Before driving, make sure that the lighting system of the
trailer works properly. Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
13 • Do not drive faster than 90 km/h. down a long or sleep downgrade. If you don’t shift down,
you might have to use your brakes so much that they would
• Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and
14 avoid sudden maneuvers.
get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed
15 • Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. to a level which minimizes the possibility of engine and trans-
• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. mission overheating.
16 • Always have someone guide you when reversing.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
PARKING ON HILLS WHEN YOU ARE READY TO LEAVE 1
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, AFTER PARKING ON A HILL
on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to
2
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while
move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the you: 3
trailer can be damaged.
• Start your engine
4
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to • Shift into a gear and
do it: • Release the parking brake. 5
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
for automatic transmission yet, or into a gear for a manual
6
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
transmission. 7
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular 8
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
MAINTENANCE WHEN TOWING TRAILER
9
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re tow-
brake, and then shift to PARK (P) for automatic ing a trailer. See the maintenance Schedule for more on 10
transmission, or First or Reverse gear for a manual trans- this. Things that are especially important in trailer opera-
mission. tion are engine oil, brake pads & discs, automatic transmis- 11
sion fluid. Each of these is covered in this manual and the
5. Release the regular brakes.
index will help you find them quickly. If you want to tow a 12
trailer, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you
start your trip. 13
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are 14
tight.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
ACCIDENT OR FIRE
0
1
2
3 If your vehicle catches on fire, don’t panic.
Evacuate any occupants and use the extinguisher.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 ACCIDENT
Turn on the emergency hazard warning switch. If possible, WARNING
11 move your vehicle to a safe place to avoid any secondary
• In an accident, fuel can be released from the vehicle. Therefore,
accidents. If anyone is injured, call an ambulance and con-
12 tact the nearest police station.
stop the engine and avoid any sparks or flames.
• If you have even a minor burn, see your doctor.
13
FIRE
14
Stop immediately in a safe place. Turn off the engine. Use
15 fire extinguishers to put out the fire. If it is impossible to
extinguish the fire, contact the nearest fire or police station.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
EMISSION REDUCTION DEVICE
CAUTION 0
The presence of an excessive amount of particulates in the CDPF
may reduce the engine power. 1
2
DOC DPF When the engine CHECK indicator flashes
Regeneration may not be performed 3
CDPF due to several operating conditions. And
in this case, the engine CHECK indica-
4
tor flashes. This flashing function is to 5
inform the driver to take action for the
This vehicle is equipped with the Diesel Oxidation Cata- proper regeneration of the filter. 6
lyst (DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) for emission If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at
reduction devices. over 50 km/h for 15–20 minutes to regenerate the CDPF. 7
The DOC converts HC and CO2 in the fuel to H2O and re- When the amount of particulates is lowered down to a cer-
moves 80% of the Soluble Organic Fraction (SOF) among tain limit, the engine CHECK indicator goes off.
8
particulate materials, thereby reducing 25% or more of par-
ticulate materials.
9
WARNING
The DPF collects particulate materials to the filter and re- • An excessive amount of accumulated particulates can damage 10
moves them by combustion. This device removes 95% or the CDPF. Therefore, make sure to drive the vehicle at 50 km/h or
more of particulate materials. more for 15–20 minutes if the engine CHECK indicator is flashing. 11
• The regeneration process of the CDPF produces so much heat,
Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF) so never drive or stop the vehicle near flammable materials to 12
The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Cata- avoid causing fire. Also, be sure to stay away from the exhaust
lyst (DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are ex- pipe and the CDPF to avoid getting burned. 13
haust gas after-treatment devices.
CAUTION
14
Regeneration process
“Regeneration” is the process of combusting particulates
When the engine CHECK indicator comes on, it means that a sen- 15
sor related to the engine control or an electric device is
when a certain amount of particulates is collected in the filter.
In this process, the temperature of exhaust gas rises to approx.
malfunctioning. In this case, have your vehicle checked by a 16
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
600°C by fuel control and particulates are effectively incinerated.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Service and Maintenance 13 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Daily Check List ......................................... 13-2 Brake and Clutch Fluid (With M/T) .......... 13-21
5
Locations in Engine Compartment .......... 13-3 Transfercase Fluid .................................... 13-22 6
Engine Oil .................................................. 13-6 Washer Fluid ............................................. 13-23 7
Engine Coolant .......................................... 13-9 Battery ....................................................... 13-24 8
Air Cleaner ................................................ 13-11 Spark Plugs ............................................... 13-26 9
Power Steering Fluid ............................... 13-13 Fuse and Relay Box ................................. 13-27 10
Fuel Filter and Priming Pump ................. 13-14 Tire ............................................................ 13-33 11
Fuel Filter and Water Separator* ............ 13-15 Wiper Blade Replacement ...................... 13-37 12
Fuel Filter .................................................. 13-18 Do-It-Yourself Operation ........................... 13-38 13
Drive Belt (For Gasoline) / Brake Pedal & Scheduled Maintenance Services 14
Clutch Pedal ............................................. 13-19 (Diesel Engine) .......................................... 13-39 15
Parking Brake / Catalytic Converter ....... 13-20 Scheduled Maintenance Services 16
(Gasoline Engine) ..................................... 13-42
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAILY CHECK LIST
0 Exterior Interior
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 1. Check for the steering wheel’s free play and looseness.
9 2. Check the parking brake lever.
The following checks are recommended before driving to 3. Check the operation of the horn, windshield wipers and
10 maintain safe and dependable vehicle operation. turn signals.
4. Check the operation of the instrument cluster and indi-
11 1. Check the tires for inflation pressure and damage. cator warning lights.
2. Check the wheel bolts for looseness. 5. Check the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
12 3. Check the operation of the lights. 6. Check the position of the rearview mirrors.
7. Check the operation of the door and window locking
13 4. Check for any oil, water, fuel and fluid leaks.
mechanism.
8. Check the brake’s and clutch pedal’s free play, height and
14 function.
15 9. Check the seat belts.
CAUTION
16 If in doubt about driving and operating conditions, have your vehicle
checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
13-2 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
LOCATIONS IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION 0
Do not work on the engine compartment while the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, muffler or cata-
lytic converter is hot. Always turn the engine off and allow it to cool before starting the maintenance. 1
Always keep your hands and tools away from the moving parts when the engine is running.
2
DIESEL ENGINE 3
Without Additional Water Separator 4
5
6
Front washer 1 2
Coolant surge tank
fluid reservoir 7
8
Engine oil cap
Engine oil dipstick 9
1. Priming pump
2. Fuel filter 10
Relay and 11
fuse box
Air cleaner 12
Battery 13
14
15
Power steering 16
fluid reservoir
GETtheMANUALS.org
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 13-3
0 DIESEL ENGINE
1 With Additional Water Separator
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
2 (for manual transmission)
Coolant surge tank
3
4
5
Engine oil Engine oil cap
6 dipstick
Relay
7 and
fuse box
8 Air cleaner Power steering
fluid reservoir
9
10 Battery
11
12
13 4
14
15 1. Priming pump 3
2. Fuel filter 2
16 3. Water separator 1
4. Front washer fluid reservoir
GETtheMANUALS.org
G32D GASOLINE ENGINE 0
1
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir 2
(for manual transmission)
3
Coolant surge tank Front washer
fluid reservoir 4
5
Engine oil cap 6
Relay and 8
fuse box
9
Air cleaner
Battery 10
11
12
13
Power steering
fluid reservoir
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
0 Diesel Engine Level Check

Park the vehicle on a level ground and apply the parking
1 brake. Stop the engine and wait more than 5 minutes.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Rein-
2 Engine oil cap sert it all the way.
3 2. Pull out it again and check the oil level.
3. The oil level should be between the maximum (Max) mark
4 and minimum (Min) markson the oil dipstick. Oil should be
replenished before the level goes below the minimum mark.
5 Engine oil
dipstick Replenishment
6
1. If the level gets to the lower point, open the filler cap on
7 top of the cylinder block and add the genuine oil without
exceeding the level of the upper mark.
8 2. Recheck the oil level after 5 minutes.
9 Gasoline Engine
10 SPECIFICATION AND CAPACITY

Specification Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
11 (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 or 229.3 or 229.31
for DSL/GSL ENG without CDPF)
12 (Approved by MB Sheet 229.31 for DSL ENG with CDPF)
13 Viscosity: MB sheet No. 224.1
Capacity D27DT 8.5L
14 Engine oil Engine oil
D27DTP 8.5L
cap dipstick
15 G32D 9.0L
16 WARNING
Use only Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filters. Use of non-rec-
ommended products could cause damage to the engine.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUNCTION OF ENGINE OIL 0
Engine oil’s major function is to lubricate and cool the parts • Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are
inside of the engine, which enables engine to work properly. being used
1
• Repeated driving in short-distance 2
Consumption of Engine Oil
• Driving with the excessive idling
The consumption of engine oil is depending on the viscosity
and quality of the oil, and the driving habit. More oil may be
• High load driving such as trailing 3
required under the following conditions;
CHANGE INTERVAL 4
- When the Vehicle is New
A new engine usually consumes more oil because its pistons, • The engine oil filter element should be changed at the 5
piston ring and cylinder walls are not yet adjusted with an opti- same time with the engine oil.
mal condition. • Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filter. 6
Oil Consumption : Max. 0.8 Liter per 1,000 km
Accordingly, it is necessary for the driver to check frequently Engine oil 7
the oil level and to replenish oil if needed. SYMC recommends Diesel Engine
that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle
8
Service interval
or you drive the long distance until the first 5,000 km. EU Initial check: 5,000 km, and replenish if necessary, 9
- When driving at High Engine Speeds change every 15,000 km or 12 months (But, shorten
As long as you keep the followings with sufficient care in your
the service interval under severe condition) 10
first running the vehicle, it will guarantee you to get excellent GENERAL Initial change: 5,000 km, change every 10,000 km
and comfortable performance for a long with your vehicle. or 12 months (But, shorten the service interval un- 11
der severe conditions)
• Remember to check the engine oil level and shorten the cycle 12
to refuel the engine oil under severe driving conditions. Gasoline Engine
• Avoid subjecting to engine to heavy loads by driving at full Service interval 13
throttle, especially be careful when the outside temperature Initial change: 10,000 km, change every 15,000 km or 12 months
remains below freezing for the first 1,000 km. (But, shorten the service interval under severe condition) 14
• Do not use the trailing in the first 1,000 km driving
Engine Oil Filter
15
* What’s Severe Driving Condition?
• Driving at the high engine speed or at high-speed Item Service interval 16
• Driving for consecutive two hours at high speed
Engine oil filter Same interval with the engine oil
• Driving the rough road, off-road, dirt-laden road, and muddy roads
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS SAE VISCOSITY CLASSES
1 WHEN CHECKING The SAE classes (viscosity) should be selected in accordance with
the average seasonal air temperature.
2 WARNING Applying the SAE classes exactly on the basis of the outside air tem-
• Clean the dipstick with a clean cloth so that any peratures would necessitate frequently changing the engine oil. The
3 foreign materials cannot get into the engine. temperature limits for the SAE classes should therefore be regarded
• Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil. as reference temperatures and the actual air temperature may be
4 higher or lower for a short period of time.
• The oil should not go above the upper mark on
5 the dipstick.
• Operating with insufficient or too much amount Engine
6 of oil can damage the engine. The viscosity should be selected according to outside temperature. Do
not switch to a different viscosity in the event of brief temperature
7 CAUTION fluctuations.
Regularly check the engine oil level and add the

8 Ssangyong genuine engine oil if necessary.
9
10 * How to check engine oil specification
11 Example:
0W, 5W, 10W, 15W, 20W, 25W 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
12
Summer oil viscosity
13 Winter oil viscosity (W: Winter)
14 • The numerical, for example SAE 10W, relates

to viscosity at particular temperature and the
15 alphabet “W” indicates the oil’s suitability for
colder temperature. For summer oil viscosity,
16 higher numbers mean higher viscosities.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COOLANT
Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine 0
1
2
Coolant surge tank 3
Coolant surge tank
4
5
6
7
8
9
Level Check Service Interval
Park the vehicle on level ground and apply the parking brake. • Replacement: Every 5 years or every 200,000 km
10
Stop the engine and wait until it cools. 11
Diesel Engine (D27DT) 11.0 ~ 11.5 Ssangyong genuine coolant
1. The coolant level should be between the MAX and MIN
Diesel Engine (D27DTP) 11.0 ~ 11.5 Anti-Freeze:SYC-1025 12
mark on the coolant surge tank.
Gasoline Engine (G32D) 11.5 ~ 12.0 Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
2. Check the coolant level. If the level is below the “MIN”
mark, immediately add coolant.
13
• Check: Everyday, before driving off
• Replenishment: Replenish as necessary 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 Replenishment WARNING
Use only the 50/50 mixture of soft water and antifreeze as When the coolant level is too low, the engine can overheat. If the
2 specified. coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster goes up
abnormally, immediately check the coolant level. Use only the
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly when the engine
3 is cold. At this time, you can hear a “hissing” sound.
Ssangyong genuine coolant and anti-freeze. If different types of
coolants or unapproved coolants are used to refill, chemical reac-
4 2. When there is no more “hissing” sound, remove the cap tions can be caused and block the flow of the coolant. This may
from the surge tank. cause the engine to overheat or burning inside the engine.
5 3. Add the 50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze to the cool-
ant reservoir tank. WARNING
6
4. If no unusual things happen, tighten the coolant reser- • Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under
7 voir cap. pressure, which could cause serious injury. Never remove the
coolant surge tank cap when the engine and radiator are hot.
8 CAUTION • Use only the SSangyoug genuine coolant and anti-freeze.
• Avoid any direct contact of the coolant to the painted body of
9 the vehicle.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CLEANER
Diesel Engine Cleaning 0
Blow the compressed air through the element in the opposite direction to
normal air flow to clean the element. 1
Diesel EU: Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 15,000 km, replace 2
every 30,000 km (But, shorten the service interval under
severe condition)
3
GENERAL: Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 10,000 km, 4
replace every 30,000 km (But, shorten the service interval
Air cleaner under severe conditions) 5
Gasoline Clean every 15,000 km, replace every 60,000 km (But, shorten 6
the service interval under severe conditions)
Gasoline Engine 7
WARNING 8
• Do not drive your vehicle with an improperly installed air cleaner element or without it. 9
It may damage the engine or may cause a fire.
• Do not let any object enter the housing when cleaning the air cleaner. It may dam-
age the engine or may cause an engine to stall.
10
11
CAUTION
• If you blow the compressed air to normal air flow, the engine will be damaged due 12
Air cleaner to foreign materials entering.
• Be careful with the direction of the compressed air on the air cleaner. 13
14
CAUTION
If vehicle is operated under severe condition 15
• Pollutant area or off-road driving
• Driving in dusty condition or sandy condition 16
frequently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 DI Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
1
2
3
4
5
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, replace more often than at Blow the compressed air through the
6 the usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty, shake the element to remove dust. element in the opposite direction to
7 Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing and cover with a damp cloth. normal air flow to clean the element as
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing compressed air through it in the oppo- shown above.
8 site direction to normal air flow.
9 WARNING
10 Engine can be damaged.

Do not operate the vehicle without air cleaner element.
11
12
Change
13
1. Unscrew the cover bolts and remove the cover.
14 2. Replace the air cleaner element with a new one. Make
sure that the element is correctly installed in the air
15 cleaner housing.
16 3. Close the cover and tighten the bolts.
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER STEERING FLUID
1
2
3
Power steering
fluid reservoir 4
5
Power steering
fluid reservoir 6
7
8
9
Check the fluid level on a level ground with the engine turned
off. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks 10
on the reservoir cap gauge. If it drops to or below the MIN
mark, refill the reservoir with the specified fluid. Only use 11
the specified fluid. The difference between the MIN and MAX
marks shows fluctuations of the steering fluid between when
12
A zone it is hot and when it is cold. 13
B zone
Specification and Capacity 14
Specification ATF DEXRON II or III 15
Capacity (L) Approx. 1.0
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
D27DTP, D27DT
FUEL FILTER AND PRIMING PUMP (Without Additional Water Separator) DIESEL ENGINE
0 • Change the fuel filter at every 30,000 km (EU) or 25,000 km

(General) of driving.
1 Plug opening direction
• Drain water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the engine oil.
Plug closing direction
• After changing the fuel filter, perform the pumping operation of the
2
priming pump until it becomes rigid. Fuel filter
3 CAUTION Water drain plug
• Change the fuel filter according to the specified service interval. Connector
4
• Drain water from the fuel filter whenever changing the engine oil. Priming pump
5 • After changing the fuel filter or draining the water, perform the pumping
operation of priming the pump until it becomes rigid.
6
7
8
9
Fuel filter
10
11
12 Water Separating Function Priming Pump Operating Conditions
If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuel system, it may 1. when completely consumed the fuel
13 cause serious damage to the fuel system. The fuel filter pro- 2. after draining the water from the fuel filter
vides the water separating function to block the inflow of water.
14 When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel
3. after replacing the fuel filter
filter exceeds a certain level, the warning light comes on and Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation
15 of the priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel
the buzzer sounds. If it occurs, immediately drain water from
16 the fuel filter. For draining procedures, refer to “How to drain pump with fuel.
the water from fuel filter” section in this manual.
GETtheMANUALS.org
D27DTP, D27DT
FUEL FILTER AND WATER SEPARATOR* (With Additional Water Separator) DIESEL ENGINE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Priming Pump Operating Conditions
1. If the vehicle has been run out of fuel
12
2. After draining water from the fuel filter.
3 13
3. After replacing the fuel filter
Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation
2 14
1
of the priming pump until it becomes rigid so that the fuel 15
pump fills up with fuel.
1. Priming pump 3. Water separator 16
2. Fuel filter
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 FUEL FILTER
1 1. Fuel filter Water Separating Function
2. Priming pump
If the water in fuel gets into the engine and the fuel system,
2 4. Drain plug
it may cause serious damage in the fuel system. The fuel
A. Opening direction of drain plug
filter offers the water separating function to block the inflow
3 B. Closing direction of drain plug of water.
4
CAUTION
5 • Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintenance
schedule.
6 • Drain the water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the en-
gine oil.
7 • After replacing the fuel filter or draining the water, press the
priming pump until it becomes rigid.
8
9 If particles in fuel get into the engine and fuel-related devices,
it may cause serious damage in affected components. Make
10 sure to replace the fuel filter according to the specified main-
tenance schedule.
11 Make sure that the foreign materials get into the fuel filter
while changing the fuel filter, and clean around it to prevent
12 particles from flowing into the filter.
13 Press the priming pump until it becomes rigid.
14 • Service Interval
15 EU Replace every 30,000 km (Draining water from fuel

filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)
16 General Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from fuel
GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR 0
Draining the Water from Water Separator 1
Drain the water from the water separator whenever replac-
ing the engine oil. 2
After draining the water, press the priming pump until it be-
comes rigid. Do not crank the engine before doing this
3
procedure. For the detailed draining procedures, please re- 4
fer to “How to drain the water from the fuel filter” in the wa-
ter separator warning light section. 5
3. Water separator
4. Drain plug CAUTION 6
5. Connector • Replace the water separator according to the specified main-
A. Opening direction of drain plug tenance schedule. 7
B. Closing direction of drain plug • Drain the water from the water separator whenever replacing
8
the engine oil.
The water separator is used in the fuel supplying system in • After replacing the water separator or draining the water, press 9
order to reduce the water content in the fuel provided to the the priming pump until it becomes rigid.
FIE system. It gives additional water volume storage. A wa- 10
ter sensor is fitted to the water separator in order to warn
the driver that the water separator has to be drained. 11
When the water level in the water separator reaches a cer-
tain point, the water separator warning light in the instru-
12
ment cluster comes on. 13
• Service Interval
Change every 150,000 km or 5 year
14
15
Location:
Behind the fuel filter (between the fuel filter and the dash 16
panel) in the engine compartment (engine intake side)
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER GASOLINE ENGINE
0 FUEL FILTER
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel will be reduced,
1 main components will be damaged due to entering the con-
2 taminated materials and the performance of catalytic con-
verter will be deteriorated.
3 Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintemamce
schedule.
4
5 Service Interval
Replacement Every 100,000 km (if using poor quality
6
of fuel, replace every 30,000 km)
7
8 CAUTION
Replace with a Ssangyong genuine part with specified intervals.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVE BELT (FOR GASOLINE) / BRAKE PEDAL & CLUTCH PEDAL
DRIVE BELT BRAKE PEDAL 0
Gasoline Engine Checking Pedal Free Play 1
Turn off the engine and depress the brake pedal several
times to deplete the vacuum in the brake system. Gently de- 2
press the brake pedal by hand and measure the distance it
moves until slight resistance is felt. If the free play is more 3
or less than specified, have the brakes adjusted by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Opera-
4
tion. 5
Brake pedal free play 1 ~ 4 mm 6
7
CLUTCH PEDAL 8
Checking Pedal Free Play 9
You do not need extra tension adjustment, but check belt
Depress the pedal by hand until clutch resistance is felt; en- 10
for wear or tension by pushing the belt and replace if neces-
sure free play is within specification.
sary.
If the free play is more or less than specified, have the clutch 11
or linkage adjusted by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
Belt Replacement: Gasoline Engine thorized Service Operation. 12
Install a device onto the tension adjuster and rotate clock-
wise to release the tension and take off the belt. Clutch pedal free play 5 ~ 10 mm 13
14
WARNING
The engine could inadvertently start while checking the belt and 15
cause moving parts to crush or cut. Remove key from ignition
switch. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING BRAKE / CATALYTIC CONVERTER
0 PARKING BRAKE
Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the num- Damage to the catalytic converter or the vehicle may re-
1 ber of notch clicks heard while fully applying it from the result if the following points are not observed :
2 leased position. Consult a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the ve- vice Operation as Quickly as possible in the event of misfiring,
3 hicle on a fairly steep grade. If the number of clicks is more irregular engine running following a cold start, a significant
or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions which
4 a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service may indicate a fault in the ignition system.
Operation. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a
5
low speed and with low engine revolutions.
6 Stroke 4 ~ 7 notches at a force of 20 kg
You should therefore avoid :
7 • Frequent repeated cold starts.
• Actuation of the starter for an unnecessarily long time dur-
8 CATALYTIC CONVERTER ing starting (fuel is injected during the starting procedure).
9 The catalytic converter is located between exhaust manifold • Allowing the tank to become empty (an irregular fuel sup-
and center muffler. The catalytic converter consists of mono- ply leads to overheating)
10 liths with honeycomb shaped structure of ceramic material • Starting the engine by pushing or towing (unburned fuel
which are elastically mounted in a wire mesh structure. may enter the catalytic converter) : use jump leads.
11
This precious metal coating on the monoliths accelerate the
Have all maintenance work carried out by a Ssangyong
12 reduction and/or oxidation of toxic components.
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. You can
On vehicles with a catalytic converter for unleaded fuel, lead then be certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical,
13 fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the elec- injection and ignition system will be operating correctly, that
tronic system, thereby rendering them inoperative.
14 your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that
the catalytic converter system will have a long life.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID (WITH M/T)
Diesel Engine Specification and Replacement 0
Specification DOT 4 1
Service interval Every 2 years
2
Level Check and Replenishment 3
• The fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” 4
levels on the reservoir.
• Check the level on a level surface. If it drops to or below 5
the MIN mark, refill the tank with the specified fluid. Only
use the specified fluid. 6
CAUTION 7
• Be careful not to let any foreign materials enter the tank when 8
adding the fluid.
Gasoline Engine • Do not add the fluid above the “MAX” level. 9
• Do not allow the fluid to make contact with the body paintwork.
• After adding the fluid, tighten the cap securely. 10
• If frequent refills are required, have the system checked by a 11
12
WARNING
• Use only the Ssangyong genuine brake fluid. 13
• Do not allow the fluid to make contact with skin or eyes. If con-
tact happens, rinse affected areas immediately with plenty of 14
water. If irritation persists, consult a doctor.
• The fluid gradually decreases according to brake pad wear. A
15
sudden drop of the fluid level may indicate a leak in the system.
In this case, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer
16
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TRANSFERCASE FLUID
0 TRANSFERCASE FLUID
1 Service Interval, Specification and Capacity
2 Inspect every 15,000 km

Service interval Change every 60,000 km
3 (frequent check of oil leak)
4 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)

Specification
5
Part time
6 Direct Injection 1.4 L
Capacity Diesel Engine, Full time (TOD)
7 Gasoline Engine
AWD 1.1 L
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WASHER FLUID
TOP UP WASHER FLUID 0
Diesel Engine Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the speci-
fied product as needed.
1
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter 2
season.
Washer Reservoir 3
WARNING
• The washer fluid includes flammable materials to prevent
4
freezing. It could cause a fire when directly contacted with
flames. When checking the washer fluid, avoid the flames
5
near the washer fluid tank.
6
• If engine oil or antifreeze is used as the washer fluid, it will
decrease your visibility through the windshield and may 7
cause an accident.
8
Gasoline Engine
CAUTION 9
• If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze during the
winter and damage the washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use 10
only the specified washer fluid.
Washer Reservoir • If you operate the washer switch without washer fluid, the mo- 11
tor could be damaged due to overloads. Therefore, if there is no
washer fluid, do not operate the washer motor. 12
• Operating the wipers on a dry surface on the windshield or rear
window without any washer fluid may cause damage to the glass.
13
Operate the wipers after sufficiently spraying the washer fluid.
14
• Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body paint of
your vehicle during replenishment. If washer fluid spills onto your 15
hand or other body part, wash it away under a clean water flow.
• There is no independent washer reservoir for the tailgate window. 16
The front washer reservoir is also for the tailgate window.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY
0
1 Diesel Engine When the battery charge warning light ( ) on the instru-
ment cluster comes on, the battery is not normally charging.
2 If the warning light comes on while driving, turn off all unnec-
essary electrical devices and have the system checked by a
4
Battery Maintenance
5 • Make sure the terminal connections are securely
tightened.
6
• If the terminals are corroded, clean them with a wire
7 brush or sand paper.
• The battery terminal should be disconnected only when
8 the ignition key is removed from the key cylinder. Discon-
necting the terminal with the key in the “ON” or “ACC” po-
9 Gasoline Engine sition may cause a sudden change in voltage and dam-
age various electrical systems.
10
• Check the battery for any cracks, damages or leaks. Re-
11 place it if necessary. To remove any battery fluid on the
battery surface, wear rubber gloves and wipe the fluid out
12 with a wet-soapy cloth.
13 Specification
14 Specification DC 12V
15 Capacity 90AH
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
WARNING CAUTION 1
• The battery has acid that can burn you. And its gas can explode. • If you disconnect the battery terminal when the engine is
You can get serious injuries if you are not careful. Keep naked running, electrical systems could be damaged. 2
flames, sparks and smoking items away from the battery. • To remove the battery cable, disconnect the negative cable
• Loosely connected batter terminals can set up sparks. These first.And be careful on the battery terminal polarity when you 3
sparks can cause a fire with flammable gas. Therefore, tightly connect the cables. The negative and the positive should not
connect the terminals. be confused. 4
• At night, if you need to check the engine room, do not use a • The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for positive
lighter, but only use a battery-powered flashlight. and negative cables, must not be interchanged. Never short-
5
• Because the battery electrolyte is very strong acid, avoid any circuit the battery.
6
direct contact of the battery electrolyte on your skin or • When the ambient temperature is too low, the battery capac-
vehicle’s body. If the acid contacts your skin, thoroughly wash ity will drop and can be frozen. 7
your skin with fresh water and see your doctor. Do the same • Keep the battery electrolyte at its specified level. If the elec-
on your vehicle. trolyte level is higher than the MAX level, it can overflow during 8
• Wear eye protection when working with a battery. If working battery charging and if the electrolyte is overcharged, the bat-
in a closed area, keep good ventilation. tery can explode. 9
• Only use a battery with the approved voltage and capacity.
Otherwise, an incompatible battery can catch fire. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPARK PLUGS GASOLINE ENGINE
0 SPARK PLUGS
1 Service Interval
2 Replacement (G32D) Change every 60,000 km
3 NGK: BKUR5ETZ-10
(G32D)
4 Specification Gap 1 ± 0.1 mm
5
CAUTION
6 • When replacing the spark plugs, disconnect the negative termi-
nal of the battery and turn off all the switches.
7 • It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when chang-
ing the spark plugs (you could burn yourself).
8 • Do not use non-recommended spark plugs.
9 • Do not allow contaminants to enter spark plug hole.

Spark plugs should be inspected periodically for carbon
10 deposits. When carbon accumulates on a spark plug, a WARNING
strong spark may not be produced. Spark plugs may be very hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
11
If necessary, clean the electrodes with a fine wire brush and
12 carefully scrape the carbon off the insulator with a small file.
The spark plugs should then be blown clean with com-
13 pressed air and the upper insulator wiped clean. And ad-
just the spark plug gap.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
If any of the electrical system components do not operate, check its corresponding fuse. If the fuse is blown, replace it with
the same capacity.
0
Interior Fuse Box 1
Interior fuse box 2
3
4
5
Relay box 6
7
Interior fuse box is located at the left side of the instrument
panel and relay box is located on the floor under left instru- 8
ment panel.
9
Engine Room Relay and Fuse Box, PTC Fuse Box CAUTION
10
• When an electrical system does not operate, check its fuse first.
Engine Compartment If a fuse is blown, check its capacity and replace it with the 11
Fuse and Relay Box same capacity.
PTC fuse box • If you remove an electric system’s fuse while the system is 12
operating, the electrical equipment could be damaged. Always
remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and turn off all 13
electric devices.
• Always replace a specified fuse with the same rating. 14
• If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have
the electrical system checked and repaired by a Ssangyong 15
16
Engine room fuse box is located at the right side in engine
compartment and PTC fuse box is installed on the battery.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 HOW TO CHECK AND REPLACE FUSE
1
2
3
4
Higher amperage Specified amperage
5
6
7 Normal Open
8
9
1. Turn off all electrical systems and remove the ignition key WARNING
10 from the key cylinder.
• The use of anything other than the specified fuse could cause
11 2. Open the fuse and relay box cover. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire.
3. Locate the defective fuse. • The use of different types or different rating fuses could cause
12 4. Pull out the relevant fuse by using the fuse puller. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire. Always
replace a fuse with the one with the same rating.
13 5. Visually check whether it is blown or not.
6. If normal, insert it to its original position.
14 7. If blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same
NOTE
The underhood fuse and relay box has some spare fuses. Refill
15 capacity.
the fuses immediately as you use them. The fuse rating is indi-
cated on the upper surface of the fuse.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
30A 10A
ABS /ESP TAIL LP(RH) IGN KEY2
10A 10A 30A START MOTOR
B+
WGV,EGR,HFM TAIL LP(LH) RLY 16
ABS/ESP TAIL LP
30A
**
PWM MOTOR RLY 12
60A
FUSE 15A FRT FOG LP
PULLER FRT FOG LP
RLY 15
10A
SPARE H/LP(RH)
30A ENG MAIN 10A
10A
FRT WIPER(LO)
I.M.V
RLY 4 H/LP(LH)
(5P)
SPARE 10A COMPRESSOR RLY 14
20A 20A
COMPRESSOR RLY 10
DRL UNIT CABIN F/BOX
SPARE (B+ POWER2)
ENG MAIN
15A 40A
30A H/LP(LOW)
***
SPARE RLY 9 10A CABIN F/BOX
C/FAN(LOW) 15A (B+ POWER1)
10A FOLDING MRR
H/LP(HI) 40A
RLY 3 30A
10A H/LP(HI) P/WINDOW(RR)
ENGINE ROOM FUSE BOX LABEL (D27DT)
IGN KEY1
HORN RLY 8 30A 30A
P/WINDOW(FRT)
**
C/FAN(LOW)
30A 20A
*** HORN P/SEAT(DRIVER)
C/FAN(HI) RLY 7 20A 20A
15A
FRT S/WARMER P/SEAT(DRIVER)
RLY 2 DEICER
30A 15A
** DEICER FRT BLOWER HAZARD LP
C/FAN(HI)
140A *(120A)
ALTERNATOR
30A
GETtheMANUALS.org
RLY 6 30A 10A
DEFOGGER HEATED MIRROR
***
SERVICE AND
GGGGG C/FAN P/WINDOW DEFOGGER
ALT RLY 1 RLY 5 RLY 13
- PLEASE USE DESIGNATED FUSE AND RELAY.

CAUTION - CONSULT OWNER'S MANUAL FOR FUSE AND RELAY SERVICE.
MAINTENANCE
- * : FFH, ** : PWM, *** : VISCO

13-29
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
16
15
14
13
12
10
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13-30
30A 10A
B+
ABS/ESP TAIL LP
30A 15A
RLY 12 **
WOOFER AMP
FUSE 15A FRT FOG LP
PULLER FRT FOG LP
*** SW. ENG.MOUNT RLY 15
10A
SPARE 2nd A/Pump RLY 11 H/LP(RH)
30A * 10A
10A
FRT WIPER(LO)
ENG MAIN *I.M.V (5P)
H/LP(LH)
SPARE RLY 4 10A COMPRESSOR RLY 14
20A 20A
COMPRESSOR RLY 10
SW ENG MOUNT DRL UNIT CABIN F/BOX
SPARE ***
2nd A/Pump (B+ POWER2)
15A 50A
*ENG MAIN 40A
30A H/LP(LOW)
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

10A FOLDING MRR
H/LP(HI) 40A
RLY 3 30A
IGN KEY1
HORN RLY 8 30A 30A
P/WINDOW(FRT)
C/FAN(LOW)
30A 20A
HORN P/SEAT(DRIVER)
ENGINE ROOM FUSE BOX LABEL (D27DTP, GSL)

15A
RLY 2 DEICER
30A 15A
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEICER FRT BLOWER HAZARD LP
C/FAN(HI)
D27DTP+PTC=140A
ALTERNATOR
30A RLY 6 30A 10A

D27DTP+FFH/GSL=120A
C/FAN P/WINDOW DEFOGGER


- * : D27DTP, ** : GSL(EU-III), *** : GSL(EU-IV)
INTERIOR RELAY BOX LABEL 0
1
2
- PLEASE USE THE DESIGNATED RELAYS.
- OPTION : *(EXP) , **(GSL)
3
4
HAZARD FRT WIPER(HI) FRT BLOWER 5
6
7
** ** 8
RR SEAT
REAR INJECTOR
WIPER
SENSOR
IGNITION COIL
WARMER FLASHER UNIT 9
(LH)
10
11
* ** * 12
RR RR SEAT
HDC DRL FUEL RR FOG LAMP
BLOWER PUMP
WARMER 13
(RH)
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 INTERIOR FUSE BOX LABEL
1
- "*" DSL OPTION
- PLEASE USE DESIGNATED FUSES.
SEAT UNIT
NO.36 NO.32 NO.24 NO.16 BLOWER MOTOR NO.8 NAVIGATION
2 START MOTOR SPARE MEMORY A/CON EAS, EPB
10A - 7.5A 7.5A DEFOGGER 7.5A FRT SEAT WARMER
3 NO.35 C/LIGHT NO.31 RR SEAT NO.23 DOOR LOCK NO.15 RR WIPER NO.7
CLUSTER
4 20A P/OUTLET(FRT) 15A WARMER 15A RR FOG LAMP 15A RR WASHER 7.5A
ENG PREHEATI’G
5 NO.34 O/SIDE MRR NO.30 NAVIGATION NO.22 IMMOBILIZER NO.14 FRT WIPER NO.6 IMMOBILIZER
TUNER UNIT ALTERNATOR
7.5A M/STATION 15A DVD CHANGER 10A **GSL ECU 15A FRT WASHER 7.5A PTC,STOP LAMP
6 ECM MRR
NO.33 AUDIO TUNER UNIT
NAVIGATION NO.29 NO.21 NO.13 S/ROOF NO.5 B/UP LAMP
7 DSP&AMP RR BLOWER RR WIPER SSPS
10A DVD CHANGER 15A 10A 7.5A STICS 15A T/SIG LAMP
8 DIAGNOSIS
NO.28 BUZZER, C/BELL, SIREN NO.20 **INJECTOR & IGN.COIL NO.12 * HEATING VALVE NO.4
-"**" GSL OPTION
ABS/ESP
9 10A FOLDING (SEAT) UNIT
EAS 20A FFH 15A ** ENG SENSOR 10A
10 NO.27 RR POWER NO.19 NO.11 NO.3 TCU, TGS
PASS SEAT ** FUEL PUMP
11 15A OUTLET 20A 20A 10A TCCU, TOD
NO.26 NO.18 NO.10 NO.2 H/LAMP, DRL
12 STOP LAMP AUDIO STICS R/SNSR & A/LIGHT
15A 15A 7.5A 10A COMP, ENG MOUNT
13 ENG ECU
NO.25 INTERIOR NO.17 NO.9 **FUEL PUMP NO.1
14 SUN ROOF **INJECTOR COIL AIR BAG
10A LAMP 15A 7.5A **ENG SENSOR 10A
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE 0
1
2
3
Under Proper Over 4
inflation inflation inflation
5
6
7
8
9
Tire Inflation Pressure CAUTION
10
• Maintaining the specified tire pressure is essential for comfort-
Tire Inflation
Type
Pressure
Tire Wheel able riding, driving safety, and long tire life. Incorrect inflation 11
pressures will increase tire wear and will impair safety, vehicle
Driving tire 30 psi (2.06 bar) 235/75R 16 7.0J x 16
handling, comfortable driving and fuel economy. Always make 12
sure that the tire inflation pressure is correct.
255/70R 16 7.0J x 16 • Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the spare 13
wheel, prior to any long journey (before the tire is heated up).
255/60R 18 7.5J x 18
• Even the temporarily installed spare tire should be inflated properly. 14
Emergency tire 60 psi (4.13 bar) 175/90R 16 5.5J x 16
15
NOTE
The tires should be checked before they are heated up using an 16
tire pressure gauge.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 TIRE WEAR CHECK TIRE ROTATION
1
2
3
4
5
Tire tread
6
7
Wear limit
8
9
The tires on your vehicle have built-in tread wear indicators To avoid uneven wear of tires and to prolong tire life, inspect
10 that appear between the tread grooves. The tire should be and rotate your tires every 5,000 km.
replaced when the wear indicators appear in two or more
11 adjacent grooves.
12
WARNING WARNING
13 • Driving on worn or damaged tires is very dangerous and may • Be sure to replace and rotate the tires at a Ssangyong Autho-
cause an accident. Also, a damaged tire could burst. rized Service Center or professional tire shops.
14 • Check tires regularly for any damage (foreign objects, punctures, • Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be
cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls) and replace if necessary. sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufac-
15 turer on all wheels.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPARE TIRE WINTER TIRE 0
The temporary spare tire is only for an emergency. Do not Use snow tires when driving on snowy or icy roads.
use it for normal driving. The spare tire should be replaced
1
If winter tires are used, they must be installed to all 4 wheels.
with a regular tire as soon as possible. 2
Check the tire conditions and pressure as needed and al- WARNING
ways keep it available. For replacing procedures, refer to “In • Drive very slowly with extra caution on snowy or icy roads. 3
Case of Emergency” section in this manual. • The snow tire with arrow direction markings on its side wall
should be installed according to the arrow direction.
4
CAUTION
• After replacing the tire, be sure to adjust the pressure to the
• The snow tires cannot guarantee your safety on icy and slip- 5
pery road. Drive with extra caution, avoiding sudden
specified pressure of the tire. Otherwise, the suspension sys- acceleration, braking or movements of the steering wheel.
tem and driving system may be damaged.
6
• When the snow tires are not needed anymore, replace them with
• Keep the vehicle speed below 60 km/h if the spare tire is fitted. ordinary tires. Keep the removed snow tires in a cool and shady 7
place. Be careful not to contact them with any oil, grease, or fuel.
8
9
TIRE CHAIN 10
Chains must be installed on the rear wheels only.
11
CAUTION
• If you have to install the chains on the front wheels, drive cau-
12
tiously and avoid severe turns to prevent the surrounding parts
from being damaged.
13
• In part time transfer case equipped vehicle, do not use 4WD mode 14
when the snow chain is installed only on the rear tire. It may
damage the driving system. If you want to use the 4WD mode, 15
install the snow chains on all tires.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CAUTIONS WHEN CHECKING THE WHEEL AND TIRE
1
• Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. • Be sure to check the tires and wheels before driving. If a
2 Be sure to use the same size and type of tires of the wheel is damaged, the tire inflation pressure can be de-
same manufacturer on all wheels. If you do not use the creased and the tire can be damaged.
3 same tires on the vehicle equipped with the TOD (4 wheel • If a tire has been impacted by a stone or any other ob-
drive), it may cause a serious damage to the vehicle’s
4 drive system.
jects during driving, have it checked by a Ssangyong
5 • Check the inflation pressure, cracks and tearing of tires • The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may
before driving. cause abnormal operation of the steering wheel, in-
6 • Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to creased fuel consumption, damage to the powertrain or
become loose and even come off. This could lead to an the braking system, vibration, or uneven tire wear. Always
7 accident. Be sure to check and tighten the wheel nuts use the specified tires from the same manufacturer.
8 as specified before any long journey.
• Do not use non-genuine wheel and tire. Non-genuine
9 wheel and tire may have inferior performance and func-
tion and dangerous for safe driving. Also, any defects due
10 to using them cannot be covered by warranty.
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Turn the wiper switch to “OFF” 3. Press the safety button ( ). 4. Slide the blade down and remove
position. it from the arm. 7
2. Lift the wiper arm up from the 5. Install a new blade. 8
windshield. 6. Put the wiper arm down.
9
NOTE
CAUTION
The tailgate wiper blade can be replaced 10
in the same manner. • Do not open the hood when the wiper arm is lifted up. The wiper and hood may be damaged.
• Do not operate the wiper when the washer fluid reservoir is empty. 11
• Be certain not to apply any fluid polish containing oil to the windshield of your vehicle
Wiper Blade since this will result in streaks which impair vision. Contamination of either the window or 12
Front Wiper Rear Wiper the wiper blades with foreign materials can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield
wipers. Never clean up the windshield with a waxed or oil-saturated cloth. 13
20" 14"
14
WARNING
15
• Malfunctioning wipers on a raining or snowing day may be detrimental to your driving
safety. Never drive your vehicle with malfunctioning wipers on a raining or snowing day. 16
• Do not touch the running wipers. It may cause a personal injury.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury
0 to yourself or damage to the vehicle.
1
2 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
3 WARNING CAUTION
4 • Be careful not to touch any hot components such as the engine, • Check the level of the engine oil and every fluid including coolant
radiator, exhaust manifold, catalytic converter, or muffler when daily. If you drive while the fluid levels are low, your vehicle can
the engine is just stopped. They may burn you badly. Let the be damaged and such damages will not be covered by warranty.
5 engine cool down before any service. • Use only the genuine Ssangyong oils and fluids.
6 • When working with the battery or fuel related components, • Do not allow oils and coolant to make contact with skin or painted
always stop the engine and do not smoke. Also, remove all surfaces during inspection or refill of them. They can also dam-
7 flames or sparks near the vehicle. age paint finish. If skin contact happens, rinse affected areas
• Do not connect and disconnect the battery terminals when immediately with plenty of water and then consult a doctor.
8 the ignition key is in the “ON” position. • Do not overfill the oil or coolant, otherwise the engine and
• The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for the posi- transmission may be damaged. Maintain the specified level.
9 tive and negative cables, must not be interchanged. • The performance of oils and coolant may be deteriorated when
• The battery cables and wires transfer high voltage and current. they are exposed to dust and moisture. Be careful not to al-
10 Avoid any short circuit. low contact with dust while refilling.
11 • Make sure that the ignition key is “OFF” when performing any • In spite of very limited driving of your vehicle, oils and other
work in an enclosed space such as a garage. fluids can disappear over the time. Therefore, check their lev-
els frequently.
12 • Keep the used oil and coolant out of reach of children. (For a
proper disposal of them, contact a professional service.) • Improperly disposed engine oil and/or other fluids can pollute
13 • When checking your vehicle, you must turn off the engine first. the environment. Dispose used fluids in accordance with lo-
Then, put the shift lever into the “P” (automatic transmission) or cal environmental regulations.
14 "Neutral" (manual transmission) position and apply the parking brake.
• The electrical cooling fan can start to operate unexpectedly even
15 when the engine is stopped. Disconnect the negative battery
cable before you check the radiator, cooling fan or nearby parts.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (DIESEL ENGINE) Ssangyong genuine parts.
Maintenance service and record retention are the owner’s responsibility. You should retain evidence that proper maintenance
has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service chart.
0
* EU Countries: Only countries that belong to EU. (It does not apply to all countries in EU.) 1
MAINTENANCE Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 2
MAINTENANCE x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
3
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 4
Drive belt I I I I I I I I
* Engine oil & filter *1
EU Initial check: 5,000 km, and replenish if necessary, change every 15,000 km or 12 months 5
(1)* (3)* (4)* (But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
General Initial change: 5,000 km, change every 10,000 km or 12 months 6
(But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I 7
Engine coolant (3)* (4)* Change every 200,000 km or 5 years. And, inspect and replenish if necessary.
* Fuel filter Direct Injection EU I R* I R* I R* I R* 8
(Diesel Engine) General Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)
Additional water separator (if equipped) Replace every 150,000 km or 5 years (Drain the water whenever replacing the engine oil) 9
Fuel line & connections I I I I I I I I
Air cleaner (2)* EU Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 15,000 km, replace every 30,000 km 10
General Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 10,000 km, replace every 30,000 km 11
Injection timing (See NOTE 1) I I I I I I I I 12
NOTE 1: Adjust as required; - When excessive smoke is visible (black or white) - Driving in a hilly or mountainous terrain, sandy, or dusty area
Chart Symbols:
- Poor performance/economy - High load driving such as trailer towing
- Taxi, patrol service or delivery service (extended idling and
13
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, excessive driving with low speed)
replenish, adjust or replace. (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty con- 14
*1 Check the engine oil level and leak every 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or dition or sandy condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, fre-
before starting a long trip.
R - Replace or change.
quently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
(3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving
15
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: condition.
Shorten the service interval. (4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”. 16
- Frequent stop-and-go traffic, extended idling, short driving distance below 6 km, * Water separator: When replace the engine oil, also drain the water from
driving distance below 16 km when the outside temperature remains below freezing the fuel filter.
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
Ssangyong genuine parts.
* EU Countries: Only countries that belong to EU. (It does not apply to all countries in EU.)
0 Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
MAINTENANCE
1 MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
2 ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY
3 Exhaust pipes & mountings I I I I I I I I
4 Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* Change every: 2 years (inspect frequently)
Parking brake / EU Periodic check: every 15,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
5 Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
Brake line & connections (including booster) Inspect every 15,000 km or 1 years, adjust or replace if necessary
6 Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I R I I I R
Clutch & brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I
7 Front & Rear Front Non IOP Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
8 differential IOP EU Periodic check: every 15,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
fluid (3)* General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
9 Rear Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
IRS EU Periodic check: every 15,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
10 General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
Transfer case fluid (3)* Inspect every 15,000 km, change every 60,000 km (Frequnt check of oil leak)
11 Automatic transmission fluid (6)* Inspect every 30,000 km or 12 month (But change every 60,000 km under severe condition)
12 Chart Symbols:
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean,
replenish, adjust or replace.
13 R - Replace or change.
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”. (5)* Inspect manual transmission fluid every 15,000 km (Inspect the leak
14 (4)* More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km
any of the following conditions: (6)* Change automatic transmission fluid and every 60,000 km if the
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
15 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
vehicle is mainly driven under severe conditions: Towing a trailer
or off-road driving (Inspect the leak of fluid at any time, occasionlly)
- In hilly or moutainous terrain, or
16 - When doing frequent trailer towing, or
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
0
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 1
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 2
CHASSIS AND BODY
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
3
Tire condition & inflation pressure Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary 4
Wheel alignment (7)* Inspect when abnormal condition is noted
Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I 5
Power steering fluid & lines (3)* I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft boots (8)* I I I I I I I I 6
Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I
Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
7
Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I 8
Propeller shaft grease - Front / Rear (9)* EU I I I I I I I I
General Inspect every 10,000 km 9
Air conditioner filter Change every 10,000 km
(But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions) 10
Chart Symbols:
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace. 11
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”. 12
(6)* After completion of off-road operation, the underbody of the vehicle should be throughly inspected. Examine threaded fasteners for looseness.
(7)* If necessary, rotate and balance wheels.
(8)* After completion of off-road operation, the drive shaft boots should be inspected.
13
(9)* Inspect propeller shaft grease every 5,000 km or 3 months if the vehicle is mainly driven under severe condition.
- In off-road or dusty road, or 14
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
- In hilly or moutainous terrain. 15
Severe Conditions in Air Conditioner Filter
- Pollutant area or off-road driving, extended air conditioner or heater operation
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (GASOLINE ENGINE) Ssangyong genuine parts.
0 has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service chart.
1 * EU Countries: Only countries that belong to EU. (It does not apply to all countries in EU.)
2 INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
3 MAINTENANCE ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
4 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
5 Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)* (3)* (Initial change: 10,000 km) R** R R R R R R R
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I
6 Engine coolant (3)* Change every 200,000 km or 5 years. And, inspect replenish if necessary.
7 Fuel filter (2)* Replace every 100,000 km (if using poor quality of fuel, replace every 30,000 km)
8 Air cleaner (2)* I I I R I I I R
Ignition timing I I I I I I I I
9 Spark plugs - - - R - - - R
Charcoal canister & vapor lines - - I - - I - -
10 Chart Symbols:
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace.
** - In order to secure engine long life and effective break-in, first oil (factory filled) would be recommended to drain with in 10,000 km.
12 (1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short distance driving, (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, pollutant area or off-road
extensive idling or driving in dusty condition, shorten the service driving, driving in dusty condition or sandy condition, frequently inspect
13 interval. the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
0
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 1
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 2
CHASSIS AND BODY
Exhaust pipes & mountings I I I I I I I I
3
Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* Change every: 2 years (inspect frequently) 4
Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary. 5
Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I R I I I R 6
Front & Rear Front Non IOP Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
7
differential IOP EU Periodic check: every 15,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary. 8
Rear Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km 9
General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary. 10
Automatic transmission fluid (6)* Inspect every 30,000 km or 12 month (But change every 60,000 km under severe condition)
11
Chart Symbols:
12
R - Replace or change. 13
(4)* More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km 14
32°C (90°F) or higher, or
15
- When doing frequent trailer towing, or 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
MAINTENANCE
1 MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
2 ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY
3 Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
4 Tire condition & inflation pressure Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
5 Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I
6 Drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I
7 Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
8 Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I
9 General Inspect every 10,000 km
10 (But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Chart Symbols:
11 I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace.
12 (3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”.
13 (7)* If necessary, rotate and balance wheels.
- In off-road or dusty road, or
14 - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
- In hilly or moutainous terrain.
15 Severe Conditions in Air Conditioner Filter
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lamp 14 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Bulb Specifications and

5
Functional Check ....................................... 14-2 6
Location of Exterior Lamps ...................... 14-3 7
Interior Lamp ............................................ 14-10 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BULB SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONAL CHECK
0 BULB SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONAL CHECK

1. Check whether the lamp comes on or off by turning its
1 Description Amount
Specification Specification
switch.
(EU) (General)
2 Exterior Headlamp High beam 2 55W ←
2. Check the corresponding fuse when the lamp doesn’t
come on.
3 lamp Low beam 2 55W ←
3. If the fuse is blown, replace it with a new one.
Turn signal lamp 2 PY21W P21
4 For replacing procedures, refer to the “In Case of Emer-
Position lamp 2 W5W ← gency” section in this manual.
5 Front fog light 2 H27W/2 ← 4. If the fuse is not blown, check the bulb and replace it with
a new one if needed.
6 Side repeater 2 LED LED
← 5. If the bulb is not defective, have the system checked by a
Rear combina- Stop (tail) lamp 6 (EU: 4) P21/5W
7 tion lamp Turn signal lamp 2 PY21W ←
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.
8 Back-up lamp 2 W16W ←
CAUTION
Rear fog light* 2 P21W _
9 • Use only a specified capacity bulb for replacement.
License plate lamp 2 W5W 5W • Disconnect the negative cable on the battery before replacing
10 High mounted stop lamp
_
LED type the bulb. Remove the ignition key.
← • Do not apply excessive force to remove the bulb cover.
11 Front room lamp 2 10W
← • Make sure that the corresponding switch and the ignition switch
Interior Glove box lamp 1 10W
12 are turned off before replacing a bulb.
lamp Center room lamp 1 10W ←
• Do not touch a bulb with bare hands immediately after turning
13 Luggage lamp 1 10W ← off the lamp.
Door courtesy lamp 4 5W ← • Do not touch a bulb with bare hands. Fingerprints, dust, or mois-
14 ture stuck to the bulb may shorten its life or cause it to explode.
If you accidentally touch the bulb, wipe the bulb glass with a
15 soft cloth.
• Never try to adjust the headlamp aiming angle. It should be done
16 by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-2 LAMP
LOCATION OF EXTERIOR LAMPS
High mounted stop lamp 0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Front fog light Side repeater
9
10
Headlamp Rear Combination Lamp 11
12
Tail/Stop lamp 13
Low beam Tail lamp
Turn signal lamp
14
High beam
Stop lamp or 15
rear fog light*
16
Turn signal lamp Back-up lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org LAMP 14-3

0 REMOVING HEADLAMP HOUSING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Turn off the light switch and remove 3. Remove the tire and unscrew the 4. Separate the headlamp housing
8 the ignition key from the key cylinder. mounting nut in the wheelhouse. from the vehicle body and discon-
2. Open the engine hood and remove nect two electric connectors.
9
two mounting bolts.
10
Headlamp low beam
11
WARNING
12 For safe driving, do not adjust the headlamp aiming screw. It should
be done by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Headlamp high beam
13 Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
14
15
16 Turn signal lamp/
position lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-4 LAMP
HEADLAMP TURN SIGNAL LAMP 0
Low beam
1
2
3
4
5
6
High beam 7
8
9
1. Remove the headlamp cover from the removed 1. Turn the turn signal lamp connector to remove it from the
headlamp housing. removed headlamp housing. 10
2. Release the fixing clip. 2. Push down and turn the bulb to remove it. 11
3. Replace the bulb with new one. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 12
13
14
High beam Low beam 15
bulb bulb
16

0 FRONT FOG LIGHT
1. Turn off the light switch and remove
1 the ignition key from the key cylinder.
2
2. Disconnect the connector by releas-
3 ing the locks at both sides.
4
5
6
7 Front fog light
3. Remove the bulb by turning it.
8
9 4. Replace the bulb with new one.
10 5. Install in the reverse order of

11 removal.
12
13
CAUTION
14 The front fog lights can be accessed only
under the vehicle body. Replacing the front
15 fog light bulb should be done by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
16 rized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-6 LAMP
SIDE REPEATER 0
1. Remove the ignition key from the
key cylinder.
1
2
2. Pull the lamp housing out while
pushing it rearward. 3
4
Side repeater
5
6
3. Disconnect the connector. 7
8
4. Replace the bulb with new one.
9
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0 REAR COMBINATION LAMP
1. Remove the ignition key from the key
1 cylinder.
2
2. Remove two mounting bolts on the
3 rear combination lamp housing.
4
5
6
3. Disconnect the main connector and
7 remove the rear combination lamp Rear combination
housing. lamp
8
9
10
11
4. Remove the defective bulb.
12 Tail lamp/Stop lamp, Tail lamp, Turn signal lamp:
13 Push down and turn the bulb to remove it.
Back-up lamp: Pull the bulb out.
14
16 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-8 LAMP
LICENSE PLATE LAMP 0
cylinder.
1
2
2. Remove the license plate lamp as-
sembly by pushing it inward. 3
4
5
6
3. Remove the lamp housing by turn- License plate lamp 7
ing the connector.
8
9
10
11
12
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it. 13
14
15
6. Install in the reverse order of
removal. 16

INTERIOR LAMP
0 FRONT ROOM LAMP

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
10
11 2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
12 CAUTION
13 The cover should be removed from the rear section (arrow).
Otherwise, the cover may be damaged.
14 Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-10 LAMP
CENTER ROOM AND LUGGAGE ROOM DOOR COURTESY LAMP 0
LAMPS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 10
11
2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver.
12
3. Replace the bulb with new one. 3. Replace the bulb with new one. 13
4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
14
15
CAUTION CAUTION
16
Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it. Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.

0 GLOVE BOX LAMP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Push both sides of the lamp cover to separate the glove
10 box lamp assembly.
11 2. Open the glove box.
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp assembly.
12
14 6. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.

15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-12 LAMP
Vehicle Care 15 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Vehicle Care .............................................. 15-2

5
Running-In Period .......................................... 15-2 6
Cleaning Agents ............................................. 15-2 7
Vehicle Washing ............................................. 15-3
Care and Cleaning Of the Interior .................. 15-4 8
Glass Surfaces ............................................... 15-5 9
Care and Cleaning Of the Exterior ................. 15-5
Corrosion Protection ...................................... 15-6 10
Caring For Your Vehicle under 0°C (32°F) 15-8 11
Starting the Engine and Driving in the winter . 15-9 12
Parking In the winter ....................................... 15-9
Other Maintenance Tips ............................... 15-10
13
Important Safety Instructions ................... 15-11 14
Before Driving ................................................ 15-11 15
On The Road ................................................ 15-13
16
Prohibition of Unauthorized Modifications ... 15-18
GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE CARE
0 RUNNING-IN PERIOD CLEANING AGENTS

Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever cleaning agents
1 or other chemicals are used for the inside or the outside of
2 the vehicle. Some cleaners may be poisonous or
flammable, and improper use may cause personal injury
3 or damage. When cleaning the inside or outside of the
vehicle, do not use volatile cleaning solvents such as:
4 acetone, lacquer thinners, enamel reducers, nail polish
removers; or cleaning materials such as laundry soaps,
5 bleaches or reducing agents, except as noted in the fabric
cleaning advice on stain removal. Never use carbon
6 tetrachloride, petrol, benzene, or naphtha for any cleaning
purpose. Open all vehicle doors for ventilation when any
7 cleaning agents or other chemicals are used in the interior.
8 Overexposure to some vapors may result in a health prob-
lem which is more likely to occur in small, unventilated
9 spaces. To avoid possible permanent discoloration of light
There are no particular running-in rules for your new vehicle. colored seats, do not let materials with non-fast colors
10 However, following a few simple precautions for the first come in contact with seat trim materials until these materi-
1,000 km can add to good future performance, fuel economy als are totally dry. This includes certain types of casual
11 and long life of your vehicle. clothing, such as colored denims, corduroys, leathers and
suedes; also, decorative paper, etc.
12 • Allow the engine to warm up after starting.
13 • Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt fast starts, sudden
acceleration and prolonged high speed driving.
14 • Do not race the engine.
15 • Drive at proper speeds, trying not to “strain” the engine.
• Avoid overload when climbing.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-2 VEHICLE CARE
VEHICLE WASHING 0
To avoid corrosion, wash your vehicle as soon as possible Bumper Washing 1
after driving on a coastal road (salted road), on a road 1. Remove the dirt or dust first with water and a sponge.
where the snow removal chemicals (calcium chloride etc.) 2
has been spreaded, in the area where the atmospheric fall- 2. If the bumper is contaminated by engine oil or any
lubricants, wipe it off using mild soapy water.
out/industrial pollutants are exist, or on a muddy or dusty 3
road. Also, immediately wash your vehicle when things such
CAUTION
as tree sap or bird droppings get on the painted surface. 4
Do not use abrasive wax and strong cleaning materials such as
Do not wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade. If your vehicle has been parked
steel wool which will scratch the vehicle body and bumper. 5
under direct sunlight for a long period, let it cool sufficiently 6
before washing.
7
How To Wash:
1. Rinse the vehicle throughly with cool water to remove dust 8
and loose dirt.
9
2. Clean the vehicle throughly using a mild soap or deter-
gent mixed with clean and lukewarm water. Start at the 10
top and work your way down.
3. Check whether the vehicle is smeared with tree sap, coal 11
tar or other foreign materials. Rinse them off while pay-
ing particular attention not to damage the painted surface. 12
4. Remove the moisture using a soft cloth. If you detect any 13
stone chips or scratches in the painted surface, to pre-
vent corrosion, touch them up immediately. 14
CAUTION 15
Be careful not to damage the air spoiler when cleaning the vehicle
in an automatic car wash. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org VEHICLE CARE 15-3

0 CARE AND CLEANING OF THE INTERIOR
1 Seat Belt Care
• Keep belts clean and dry.
2 • Clean seat belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
3 • Do not bleach or dye belts since this may severely weaken
them.
4
5 Interior Care
6 Use a dry cloth for normal cleaning.
• To wash synthetic resin like plastics, use lukewarm wa-
7 ter and soap, then wipe off using a damp cloth that does
not contain soapy water.
8
• Wipe off the moisture using a dry cloth.
9 • To remove the dust on the mats and seats, use a vacuum
With the use of modern trim materials, it is very important cleaner.
10 that you use proper cleaning techniques and cleaners. Fail- • In case the mat is seriously contaminated, use a cloth and
ing to do this on the first cleaning may result in water spots, mild detergent for cleaning.
11 spot rings, or setting of stains or soils. All of which are more
difficult to remove in a second cleaning. CAUTION
12
Dust and loose dirt that are accumulated on interior fabrics • Chemicals may cause the discoloration or deformation of the in-
13 should be frequently removed with a vacuum cleaner or soft terior trim.
bristle brush. Wipe vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean • When cleaning the interior trim, never use chemicals such as
14 damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains can be acetone, enamel or bleaching agent.
cleaned with cleaners.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-4 VEHICLE CARE
GLASS SURFACES CARE AND CLEANING OF THE EXTERIOR 0
Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis. The Exterior Finish
use of a glass cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner
1
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films. 2
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle glass, as they
may cause scratches. If abrasive cleaners are used on the Washing your Vehicle 3
inside of the rear window, any electric demister element may
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it 4
be damaged. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
clean by frequent washing.
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm or cold water. 5
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle under direct
sunlight. Do not use a strong soap or chemical detergent.
6
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield All cleaning agents should be washed promptly from the 7
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or surface and not allowed to dry on the finish.
another material may be on the blade or windshield, clean Ssangyong vehicles are designed to operate under normal 8
the outside of the windshield with cleaning powder or an environmental conditions and to withstand the natural
equivalent non abrasive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if elements. However, unusual conditions, such as high pres-
9
beads do not form when rinsing with water. sure car washers, may cause water to enter the inside of 10
your vehicle.
CAUTION 11
Do not clean the windshield with oily or waxy cloth. It may cause
Polishing and Waxing
noise or vibration while operating the wipers, poor front view, and Periodic polishing and waxing is recommended to remove 12
light reflection at night time. In addition, the windshield may not be surface residue from your paint finish. Approved products
wiped off completely when it rains. are supplied through your Ssangyong Distributor.
13
14
CAUTION
Do not use wax that contains an abrasive agent. The painted sur- 15
face (including the bumper surface) may be damaged.
16

0 Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts CORROSION PROTECTION
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their Your car was designed to resist corrosion. When it was built,
1 luster. special and protective finishes were used on most parts of
Special care should be taken when cleaning the aluminum your car to help maintain a good appearance, strength and
2 trim. To avoid damaging the protective trim, never use au- reliable operation. Some parts which normally are not vis-
3 tomotive or chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean ible (such as certain parts located in the engine compart-
the aluminum trim. A coating of wax is recommended for all ment and the underbody of the vehicle) are such that sur-
4 bright metal parts. face rust will not affect their reliability. Therefore, corrosion
protection is not needed or used on these parts.
5 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels, Alloy Wheels, and
Wheel Covers
6 Sheet Metal Damage
Preserve the original appearance of wheels or wheel cov-
7 ers by keeping them clean and free from build-up of road If your car is damaged and requires body panel repair or
dirt and/or road salt. Wash the parts regularly. Do not use replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies
8 abrasive cleaners or cleaning brushes, as they could dam- proper anticorrosion material to the parts repaired or re-
age the finish. placed so that corrosion protection is restored. (Also refer
9 All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome to “Finish Damage” on the next page).
plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap
10 and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil, se-
11 lect a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring Foreign Material Deposits
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Avoid Calcium chloride and other salts, deicing agents, road oil
12 automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish. chimneys and other foreign materials may damage vehicle
13 Clean the wheels after driving on a coastal road or on a finishes if left on painted surface. Prompt washing may not
road where the snow removal chemicals (calcium chloride completely remove all of these deposits. Other cleaners may
14 etc.) has been spreaded. be needed. When using chemical cleaners, be sure they
15 CAUTION
are safe for use on painted surfaces.
16 Never clean the aluminum wheel or alloy wheel with acidic or alkalic
detergents. Otherwise, wheel’s protective finish could be damaged.
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-6 VEHICLE CARE
Finish Damage CAUTION 0
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish • When the engine is washed, fuel, grease or oil residues are
should be repaired promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly washed off. Therefore you should use only a filling station or 1
and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips a Ssangyong Distributor who has oil separator equipment in
and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials. the car wash bay. 2
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your • Used engine oil, brake fluid, transmission fluid, antifreeze,
Distributor’s body and paint shop. batteries, and tires should be disposed by using the local au- 3
thorized waste disposal facilities, or have them disposed of
by the vendor who is under a statutory obligation to do so 4
when you replace them.
Underbody Maintenance • None of these items should be placed in the household recy- 5
Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and cling bins or poured into the sewage system.
dust control can accumulate on the underbody. If these ma- • Everyone should be concerned about environmental protection.
6
terials are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can • Help by doing your share. 7
occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor
pan, and the exhaust system even though they have been 8
provided with corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush
these materials from the underbody with plain water. Take 9
care to clean any area where mud and other debris can
accumulate. 10
Sediment packed in closed areas of the frame should be
loosened before being flushed. If desired, your Ssangyong
11
Distributor can do this service for you. 12
13
14
15
16

CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE UNDER 0°C (32°F)
0 CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE UNDER

0°C (32°F) Engine Oil
1
During the winter, undesirable road conditions frequently When the vehicle is shipped, the engine is filled with four-
2 happen. Therefore, appropriate preparations for emergen- season engine oil.
cies should occur.
3 Before driving in suburban or rural areas, or on a snowing Tires
4 day, have bags of sand, snow chains, a shovel, gloves, and Snow tires are more desirable on an icy or snow-covered
old clothes in your vehicle. road. Have snow tires installed on your vehicle before driv-
5 Coolant
ing on such a road.
6 Before it gets cold, check the coolant level. CAUTION

The conventional coolant is the 50:50 mixture of water and • When snow tires are installed, drive your vehicle at a lower
7 antifreeze. speed than normal.
• Install snow chains correctly. Otherwise, the chains may dam-
8 If only water has been added into the coolant reservoir, the
age the wheelhouses or the body of your vehicle.
engine and the cooling system of your vehicle may seriously
9 be damaged when the water freezes as it gets below the
freezing point. Air Conditioner
10
CAUTION When the air conditioner has not been used for an extended
11 • When the vehicle is shipped, the cooling system is filled with a period of time, internal packing systems may become hard
four-season coolant. because the lubricating system has not worked for a pro-
12 • Before adding or refilling coolant, ensure that the coolant is a
longed amount of time. As a result, the refrigerant may leak
50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze. or rusting may happen to the system. Malfunction of the air
13 conditioner may result.
• Use only Ssangyong genuine coolant.
14 To maintain its optimal operating condition, it is recom-
Washer Fluid mended that the air conditioner be turned on for approxi-
15 Use a genuine coolant that does not freeze on a cold day.
mately 5 to 10 minutes every week throughout all seasons.
CAUTION
16 When non-recommended washer liquid is used, the liquid
may form an ice. This will damage the wiper motor and Do not remove the refrigerant in the winter, even though you do
not use the air conditioner.
hinder your safe driving.
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-8 VEHICLE CARE
STARTING THE ENGINE AND DRIVING IN PARKING IN THE WINTER 0
THE WINTER When the parking brake is applied in cold weather, ice may
form on the brake system and cause some difficulty mov-
1
Starting the Engine in the Winter ing the vehicle. When parking on a hill, first, apply the park-
During the winter, the engine experiences increased resis-
2
ing brake. Put the shift lever into the “1” or “R” position
tance from the powertrain; the battery and the starter show (Manual Transmission) or into the “P” position (Automatic 3
decreased capacity. Therefore, start the engine in an ap- Transmission). Put a chock behind a tire and release the
propriate way. parking brake. 4
After starting the engine, allow time to warm it up before
driving the vehicle. Warming up the engine will increase its WARNING 5
life expectancy and help you drive safely. When ice forms on the parking brake system, an attempt to move
the vehicle without removing the ice may damage your vehicle.
6
CAUTION Wait until the ice melts away and gently move your vehicle.
7
The glow plugs of the diesel engine should sufficiently be warmed
up before the engine starts. 8
Driving in the Winter

9
Maintain at least twice as long of a normal driving distance 10
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. When
stopping, shift into a lower gear to use the engine brake. 11
Avoid speeding, abrupt acceleration, sudden braking, or 12
drastic maneuvering of the steering wheel.
13
14
15
16

0 OTHER MAINTENANCE TIPS
1 After driving on a calcium chloride (salt) spayed road, wash Diesel Fuel in the Winter
the bottom of your vehicle as soon as possible to avoid any On an extremely cold day, paraffin, one of the chemicals in
2 rust. diesel fuel, may separate from the diesel fuel. This sepa-
When parking on a snow-covered road, the brake system ration makes starting the engine difficult. During the winter
3 may begin to have some ice on it. The ice will decrease season, Kerosene is added to diesel in the domestic mar-
your vehicle’s braking ability. If this happens, drive at a low ket to prevent the paraffin separation and secure stable flow
4 speed and use the brake frequently to remove the ice. After of the fuel through the fuel filter. The amount of added Kero-
regaining the braking ability, drive your vehicle at a normal sene into diesel can vary by location and their average win-
5 speed. ter temperatures. Therefore, to ensure an easy start on a
6 cold day, park your vehicle inside of a garage. If possible,
WARNING fill up the fuel tank after each driving to prevent ice from form-
7 • When there is ice on the wiper blades, turning on the wiper ing inside of the fuel system.
switch may put an extra burden on the wiper motor and dam-
8 age it. Avoid using the wipers when ice is on the blades. CAUTION
• When driving on a snow-covered road, a large amount of snow • Change engine oil and the fuel filter as scheduled. Contaminated
9 may build up under each wheelhouse. This buildup prevents the engine oil will lose its liquidity, clog the fuel filter and oil filter and
steering wheel from moving freely. Therefore, remove the snow cause difficulties starting the engine.
10 buildup frequently. • Do not add any additive other than Kerosene or alcohol into the
fuel tank to improve starting of the engine. The additive may de-
11 crease the lubricating ability of the internal fuel system; the ad-
ditive may have a different flashing point. This will damage the
12 fuel system or produce an excessive exhaust fume.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-10 VEHICLE CARE
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE DRIVING 0
For safe and comfortable driving, check each part of the ve- Checking the Driving Conditions: 1
hicle before driving your vehicle. • Adjustment of the rearview mirror
• Applying the brake and releasing the parking brake 2
CAUTION
To inspect your vehicle effectively, park it on a level surface and
• All warning lights and indicator lights 3
check it in the following order. • All lighting devices
• The adjustment of driver’s seat
4
• Make sure that headlights, tail lights, rear lights, license 5
Checking Problematic Parts plate lights, backup lights, directional signals, and stop
lights work properly. 6
Check those parts that you felt they were problematic to see
if they would be a hindrance on the road.
CAUTION 7
When checking the lights, look for the reflections on walls and in 8
the mirrors, or get someone to help you.
Checking the External Appearance of Your
Vehicle
9
• Check for flat tires and check the air pressure. 10
Checking Engine Compartment
• Check the side mirrors and the license plate for dirt or
damage. Check the following: 11
• Check all lights for damage or dirt. • Engine oil 12
• Check for oil stains under a parked car. • Power steering fluid
• Brake fluid 13
• Cooling system 14
• Drive belt
15
16

0
1 Always Using Seat belt Do Not Leave a Child Alone in the Vehicle
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all When left alone in the car, a child might unintentionally start
2 times. the engine, cause a fire, or cause another accident.
3 WARNING WARNING
4 • Children, pregnant or nursing women who fail to fasten their • During the summer, the temperature in your vehicle rises due to
seat belts properly might suffer from an accident. Always use direct sunlight, and a child who is unable to adjust vehicle de-
seat belts as directed. vices is in danger of suffocation.
5
• Please carefully read the seats, seat belts and air bags • Do not leave a child alone in the car.
6 sections.
7
8 Taking Care of Children
9 Children should sit in the rear seat

To prevent children from interfering with your driving by ac-
10 cidental movements or misusing of devices, children should
sit in the rear seat.
11
Do not allow children to adjust comport and safety
12 devices
13 When a child gets in the vehicle, an adult should take care

of doors, windows, seat belts, or seats making sure not to
14 hurt the child’s hands, feet or neck.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-12 VEHICLE CARE
ON THE ROAD 0
If a Problem Occurs On the Road Parking in a Safe Place 1
• If a warning light comes on, immediately stop the vehicle Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags, oil,
in a safe place and take emergency measures. or other easily inflammable materials are kept. 2
• If your vehicle suffered a serious blow to the bottom, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and check for a CAUTION 3
fuel leak, brake fluid spill, or others and for damages to While driving or after immediately driving, the muffler and ex- 4
the underbody of your vehicle. haust pipe are hot; inflammable materials near the vehicle might
cause a fire.
• If you have a sudden puncture or blowout on the road, 5
keep your composure, grip the steering wheel firmly, brake
gently to reduce your speed, and then stop in a safe place. 6
Turning The Engine Off When Taking A Nap
WARNING 7
You might cause an accident by unconsciously shifting the
If the front axle and tires were severely hit on the road and transmission or stepping on the accelerator pedal, so turn 8
you notice steering problems (steering wheel shakes up and the engine off.
down / right and left / in circular motion), immediately visit the
nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
9
Center to check and repair steering and suspension parts. CAUTION
Continuous application of the accelerator pedal overheats the engine
10
and exhaust pipe and might cause a fire.
11
Avoiding Unnecessary Movements While Driving
12
• While driving, do not turn off the ignition key under any
Turning The Engine Off When Leaving Your Car
circumstances. Brakes and power steering will not work. 13
• Turn the engine off and lock the doors.
• While driving, do not put your hands through the steering
wheel to manipulate various switches. It might interfere • Do not leave valuables inside the car. Do not leave a child 14
with operating the steering wheel and cause an accident. alone in the vehicle.
15
16

0 Moving Your Vehicle Only After Starting the Engine When Parking or Stopping in An Enclosed Place
Move your vehicle only after having started the engine. When parking or stopping in an enclosed place, turn off the
1 engine.
WARNING
2 Driving the vehicle on a downhill using the downgrade slope with- WARNING
out running the engine might cause an accident. Leaving the engine running in an enclosed place, in a garage or
3 indoors or in other areas with no air ventilation, might result in death
from carbon monoxide poisoning.
4
Parking Downhill
5
After firmly applying the park brake, set the gearshift lever in Re-
6 verse for vehicles with the manual transmission or set the gear- Things To Watch For When Reversing
shift lever in P for vehicles with the automatic transmission. When reversing your vehicle, always make sure that there
7 are no children or other obstacles behind the vehicle.
CAUTION
8 Driving in the Rain
Place wheel chocks under the wheels.
9 When it is raining, the road surface becomes slippery and
your tire-to-road traction is reduced, so you should drive
10 Parking Uphill
more carefully than usual.
11 After firmly applying the park brake, set the gearshift lever in first CAUTION
gear for vehicles with the manual transmission or set the gear- If you travel at a high speed on a wet road, your tires might not be in
12 shift lever in P for vehicles with the automatic transmission. constant contact with the road; if your tires float, your vehicle starts
hydroplaning. You might lose control of your steering and brakes.
13
CAUTION
14 Place wheel chocks under the wheels. After driving through a puddle of water, or after a car wash,
apply your brake pedal lightly several times while moving
15 slowly to confirm that your brakes work normally before get-
ting on the road.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-14 VEHICLE CARE
Putting Away Things That Interfere With Driving Being Careful With Accessories 0
Do not attach accessories or other unnecessary things to
WARNING your car’s windows as they might interfere with your driving. 1
• Do not leave inflammable materials, such as disposable lighters or
Attached accessories can work as a convex lens and cause
sprays, inside the vehicle. They might cause a fire or an explosion.
a fire or cause an accident.
2
• Do not place objects under the driver’s feet or cover the car
bottom with a very thick carpet as it might interfere with apply- 3
Being Careful While Checking Your Coolant
ing your brake, clutch or accelerator pedals.
When the engine is hot, never open the cap of the coolant 4
tank.
Using Engine Brakes On Long Downgrades Hot steam or liquid might surge upwards and cause burns
5
If you repeatedly apply the brake pedal, the brakes overheat to your face or body. 6
and the braking effectiveness can deteriorate. When on a
long downgrade, shift to a low gear and apply your brake Always Using Ssangyong Genuine Parts 7
pedal together with the engine brake. • You can maintain the safety and performance of your car
by using only specified parts or Ssangyong genuine parts. 8
NOTE
• You can distinguish specified parts by their part numbers 9
The engine brake slows down your vehicle while the accelerator
pedal is not applied; down-shifting increases the effectiveness of
and seal.
this retarding force. 10
CAUTION
• The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non- 11
Always Putting Out Cigarettes Ssangyong genuine parts.
• Make sure you have put out all cigarettes and matches • You can distinguish an authentic Ssangyong genuine part by its 12
hologram.
completely before throwing them into your ashtray. 13
• Do not put many cigarette butts or materials that easily
catch fire into your ashtray. 14
CAUTION 15
For safer driving, refrain from smoking while on the road.
16

0 Driving on a Snowy or Icy Road Driving on Unpaved and Mountain Roads
• Shift to the lowest possible gear and drive slowly. • Before driving, check road conditions such as if the road
1 • Since your braking distance is longer than usual, allow a suddenly ends, or if there is enough space for a U-turn
longer following distance. in the middle of the road.
2 • It’s easy to slide in a road covered with much sand or
• If you accelerate or brake too fast, your vehicle will slide
3 and you might get in an accident, so drive with caution. with much dry dirt. Keep your speed low and steady.
When braking, use the engine brake; apply your brakes • There is a danger of collapse on the outside of a mountain
4 only after you have slowed down considerably. road.
• When going down a slippery downhill, use the engine • When coasting downhill, do not change gears; go down
5 brake and drive slowly. slowly by applying the engine brake.
6
CAUTION Going Through Water
7 When traveling on a snowy or icy road, use snow tires for safer • If water gets into the electric system or engine, it might
driving. cause irreparable damage to your vehicle. Please refrain
8 from underwater driving.
9 Driving on a Sandy or Muddy Road • If going through water is unavoidable, choose a shallow
• Keep your speed steady as low as possible. spot where the exhaust outlet wouldn’t get submerged in
10 • While driving, be careful not to accelerate or stop too
water and proceed slowly at a steady speed.
quickly because you might get stuck in sand or mud. • Before going through water, get out of your vehicle and
11 check the bottom of the river. Do not go through water if
• If your vehicle gets stuck in sand or mud, insert a rock or a the bottom is sandy or covered with big rocks.
12 piece of wood under the stuck wheel, lightly apply the accel-
erator pedal and gently shift back and forth between the re- • If several vehicles are going through water together, the
13 verse and forward gear to allow inertia to get your vehicle out. first vehicle might burrow into the bottom, so be careful
and cross in a different place if possible.
14 CAUTION
15 • If your vehicle is stuck in snow, sand or mud and you cannot

get out, do not repeatedly depress the accelerator pedal. If
possible, with the aid of other vehicle, rescue your vehicle.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-16 VEHICLE CARE
Important things to remember when going through Driving On Hill Roads
water
0
Position the gearshift lever in accordance with the road
• If the engine stops while you are going through water, do conditions. 1
not try to restart. Get your vehicle towed.
• Be particularly careful not to allow water to enter into the en- WARNING 2
gine through the air cleaner. If you suddenly use the engine brake on an icy or slippery road,
the vehicle might slide and get in an accident. Use the engine brakes
3
• Never change speeds while going through water.
after fully reducing your vehicle speed.
4
WARNING
If water gets into the brake system, the effectiveness of the • On a steep downgrade, shift to the lowest gear to get the 5
brakes decreases. After going through water, move slowly and biggest effect of the engine brake.
gently applying the brakes several times so that frictional heat 6
dries the brake pads and disks. Check if the brakes work prop-
erly before continuing driving. WARNING 7
If you repeatedly apply your brakes on a long downgrade, they
may overheat, their effectiveness decreases and an accident might 8
Checking your vehicle after going through water occur. When on a long downgrade, use the engine brake together
• Check the front, rear, right and left sides, transmission, with your brakes. 9
axle hubs, propeller shaft, oil and fluid levels, and 10
underbody; if you discover problems, get your vehicle
CAUTION
checked immediately.
If you suddenly apply the engine brake while traveling at a high
11
• Check all lamps and other electrical devices. If necessary, speed, the engine may get damaged. Slow down the vehicle speed
replace damaged components and get your vehicle and then downshift the gear.
12
checked.
13
• Check for damages to the vehicle body and underbody; if
you discover problems, get your vehicle checked 14
immediately.
• If the vehicle body is very dirty, wash your car to protect it. 15
16

0 PROHIBITION OF UNAUTHORIZED MODI-
Freeway Driving FICATIONS
1
• Before getting on a freeway, listen to the weather forecast, This vehicle contains various advanced electronic and con-
2 prepare thoroughly and check the fuel level, brake system, trol devices. Do not modify them without authorization.
cooling system, and tires.
3 • Always respect the speed limit and refrain from speeding. Modification of Fuses and Circuits
4 • Allow for a safe following distance, avoid sudden steer- Always use the Ssangyong genuine fuses of the specified
ing movements. capacity and do not alter or modify your vehicle’s circuits. It
5 • When it rains or snows and the whether conditions are
might cause a fire.
adverse, double the distance between your vehicle and
6 the vehicle running in front of you. And reduce your speed
Prohibition of Window Tinting
by half. Modification such as coloring windows might cause leaks.
7 The dark tinted glass may obstruct the driver’s field of vision.
8 CAUTION Thus, it may cause an accident.
Do not idle the engine for a long time; it wastes fuel and causes
9 environmental pollution. Using Non-Specified Tires and Wheels
• Drive at a slow speed for the first 2 km if possible. If using non-specified parts, the steering wheel feels heavier,
10 • Do not load your vehicle with unnecessary stuff. fuel consumption increases, brake performance decreases
and the steering wheel might shake, wearing out tires when
11 • Refrain from quick accelerating and abrupt braking, travel at a
you are traveling at a high speed.
steady speed.
12 • When you park or stop for a long time, turn the engine off.
Performing Regular Checks
• Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
13 • Keep your vehicle in the best possible condition by periodi-
Always check your vehicle as specified in the inspection
schedule, replace parts when necessary and record in your
cally checking it and perform maintenance.
14 vehicle diary which parts were replaced.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-18 VEHICLE CARE
Index 16 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
3.5° aiming down of outside rearview C Do-it-yourself operation .................... 13-38
0 mirror during reverse driving ...... 6-17 Door ajar warning light ....................... 5-16
Care and cleaning of the exterior ...... 15-5
4-wheel drive system ...................... 4-32 Doors .................................................... 3-4
Care and cleaning of the interior ....... 15-4
1 4WD indicators ................................ 5-18
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)
Drive belt (for gasoline) / brake pedal &
clutch pedal .................................. 13-19
15-8
2 A Driver’s seat ......................................... 7-4
Cautions in using the turbocharger
ABS warning light .............................. 5-16 Driving tips for automatic transmission
3 Accident or fire ................................ 12-26
...................................................... 10-2
........................................................ 6-6
Cautions when a tire is flat ............ 12-4
4 Adjusting the instrument cluster Cautions when changing the tire 12-13
illumination (black-face type) ............ 5-9 E
Center and rear room lamps/assist
5 Air bag ............................................... 8-12 grip ................................................ 11-15 EBD warning light ............................... 5-17
Air bag warning light .......................... 5-15 Center console ................................... 11-8 Emergency towing ............................ 12-19
6 Airbag non-inflation conditions ........... 8-16 Changing a spare tire ......................... 12-8 Emission reduction device ................ 12-27
Air cleaner ........................................ 13-11 Checks before starting a journey ........ 1-2 Engine check warning light ................ 5-17
7 AQS (air quality system) .................... 9-16 Child restraints and pregnant woman Engine coolant .................................... 13-9
Audio play using the USB flash drive Engine hood ........................................ 3-10
8 ...................................................... 4-20
........................................................ 8-8
Engine oil pressure warning light ....... 5-15
Cleaning agents .............................. 15-2
9 Automatic heater / air conditioner* .. 9-6 Coolant temperature gauge ............. 5-7 Engine oil ............................................ 13-6
AV* & navigation system* ................ 11-19 Corrosion protection ....................... 15-6 Engine overheat warning light ............ 5-19
10 Cruise control indicator* ..................... 5-19 ESP (electronic stability program)
B Cruise control switch* ........................ 4-12 switch and ESP system* ............ 4-28
11 Battery charge warning light ............. 5-15 ESP warning light ........................... 5-14
Battery .............................................. 13-24 D
12 Before driving ................................... 15-11 F
Daily check list ................................... 13-2
13 Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T) ..... 13-21 Defogging and defrosting ................... 9-13 Front cup holder/cigarette lighter ... 11-7
Brake system ..................................... 6-18 Devices related to seat ........................ 7-2 Front fog light indicator ................... 5-18
14 Brake warning light ............................ 5-19 Dimensions ........................................... 0-3 Front room lamps/
Bulb specifications and Direct injection type diesel engine ...... 1-13 sunglasses storage ...................... 11-14
15 functional check .............................. 14-2 Display .................................................. 5-8 Fuel filler door .................................... 3-11
Fuel filter .......................................... 13-18
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
16-2 INDEX
Fuel filter and priming pump (without Inside rearview mirror ........................ 11-5 P
additional water separator) .......... 13-14 Instrument cluster (G32D) .................... 5-4 0
Parking aid system* ............................ 6-15
Fuel filter and water separator* (with Instrument cluster ................................. 5-2
Parking brake / catalytic converter .. 13-20
additional water separator) ...... 13-15 Interior lamp ...................................... 14-10
Parking in the winter .......................... 15-9 1
Fuel gauge ......................................... 5-7 Interior switches .................................. 4-2
Passenger’s seat .................................. 7-9
Fuse and relay box ....................... 13-27 2
Power outlet ....................................... 11-9
K
G Key functions ....................................... 2-7
Power steering fluid ......................... 13-13 3
Precautions regarding unauthorized
Gear selector lever in automatic modification & alteration ............. 1-16 4
transmission .................................. 6-4 L Preventive maintenance ................. 10-3
Gear selector lever positions ........... 6-7 Light switch .......................................... 4-4 Prohibition of unauthorized 5
Glass surfaces ................................ 15-5 Listening to music with external audio modifications .............................. 15-18
Glove box / Courtesy lamp ............... 11-10 device ............................................ 4-23 6
Glow indicator (for diesel engine) ..... 5-20 Location of exterior lamps ............. 14-3 R
Locations in engine compartment 13-3
7
Rain sensing wiper* ......................... 4-9
H Low fuel level warning light ........... 5-19 Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C) ..... 9-12 8
Hazard warning flasher switch ......... 4-25 Rear cup holder/jack storage/DVD
HDC (hill descent control) switch* ....... 4-26 M changer*/navigation unit* storage 9
HDC indicator ...................................... 5-17 Manual transmission ........................ 6-2 ..................................................... 11-11
Heated glass switch .......................... 4-24 Multi-station* .................................... 4-18 Rear heated glass / removable ashtray 10
Heater/air conditioner system .............. 9-2 ..................................................... 11-18
High beam indicator ............................ 5-18 O 11
Recommended fluids and lubricants
How to fasten the seat belts in second
row seat .......................................... 8-6
On the road .................................... 15-13 ........................................................ 0-2 12
Opening and closing devices .......... 3-2 Remote audio controls & gear shift
How to fasten the three point
Opening and closing the doors with button (A/T) on steering wheel ... 4-30 13
seat belt .......................................... 8-5 Remote control key* and ignition key
ignition key ..................................... 2-9
Other maintenance tips ................ 15-10 ......................................................... 2-2 14
I Removing the spare tire ..................... 12-7
Outside rearview mirror control
Immobilizer indicator ........................... 5-14 Replacing air conditioner filter ............ 9-14 15
switch ............................................. 4-17
Immobilizer system* .............................. 2-5 Running-in period ............................... 15-2
Important safety instructions ............ 15-11
OVM tools .......................................... 12-6 16
GETtheMANUALS.org INDEX 16-3

S Storage boxes and convenience W
0 device ............................................ 11-2
Safety mode Warning and caution .......................... 7-15
Sun visors ........................................ 11-13
(automatic transmission) ............ 6-14 Warning triangle* ................................ 12-5
1 Safety precautions ............................... 1-7
Sunroof* ............................................... 3-8
Warnings and cautions ........................ 9-4
Supplementary heating device ............. 9-5
Scheduled Maintenance Services Warnings for air bag .......................... 8-20
2 Switch panel on driver’s door trim ..... 4-16
(Diesel Engine) .............................. 13-39 Warnings for seat belt ....................... 8-10
Switches in center console ............... 4-31
3 Scheduled Maintenance Services
Switches in overhead console,
Washer fluid ..................................... 13-23
(Gasoline Engine) ......................... 13-42 Water separator warning light
room lamp switch ........................ 4-35
4 Seat belt and air bag ............................ 8-2 (DI engine only) ........................... 5-10
Seat belt reminder .............................. 5-15 Water separator warning light and
5 T
Seat belt ............................................... 8-4 engine check warning light ...... 12-16
Seat heating system* ......................... 7-14 Tachometer ........................................... 5-6 When the engine is overheating . 12-14
6 Seatback pocket/map pocket ............ 11-12 Tailgate and tailgate window ............. 3-13 Windows ............................................ 3-6
Second row seat ............................... 7-10 Theft deterrent system ....................... 2-10 Winter (W) / standard (S) mode ........ 6-13
7 Shift lever lock release and safety Third row seat ................................... 7-12 Winter mode indicator ......................... 5-14
Tiltable steering wheel and horn ........ 11-4
8 mode reset ................................. 12-17
Time and date display ........................ 4-19
Wiper and washer switch ................. 4-10
Spark plugs ................................... 13-26 Wiper and washer switch ................... 4-8
9 Specifications .................................... 0-4 Tire ................................................... 13-33 Wiper blade replacement .................. 13-37
Speedometer ..................................... 5-6 Towing a disabled vehicle ................ 12-18
10 SSPS warning light ......................... 5-14 Trailer towing ................................... 12-20
Starting the engine and driving in the Transfercase Fluid ........................... 13-22
11 winter ............................................ 15-9 Turbocharger inspection .................... 10-4
Starting the engine and driving off the Turn signal/hazard warning indicator
12 vehicle ............................................. 1-5 ...................................................... 5-17
13 Starting the engine with jumper
V
cables ............................................. 12-2
14 Storage bin for portable electronic device/ Vehicle care ....................................... 15-2
ticket holder/AV jack ....................... 11-6 Vehicle identification ............................. 0-8
15 Storage box in luggage compartment/ Vehicle washing ................................. 15-3
luggage net ................................... 11-16
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
16-4 INDEX
No. PART NO. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL NAME REMARKS
1 Y285OM0807E RX1-8OM0E-8G-500A July. 2008 Y285 09 M/Y
REXTON II (LHD)
OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
OVERSEAS A/S TEAM
SSANGYONG MOTOR CO., LTD.
150-3, CHILGOI-DONG, PYUNGTAEK-SI

GYEONGGI-DO, 459-711 KOREA
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE:All rights reserved. Printed in SSANGYONG Motor Co., Ltd.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of Overseas Service Team.
GETtheMANUALS.org
General 0 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 0-2

5
6
Dimensions ................................................... 0-3
7
Specifications .............................................. 0-4
8
Vehicle Identification .................................. 0-8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
0 Descriptions Capacity Specifications

Engine Oil D27DTP 8.5 Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
1 D27DT 8.5 (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 or 229.3 or 229.31 for DSL/GSL
2 ENG without CDPF)
G32D 9.0 (Approved by MB Sheet 229.31 for DSL ENG with CDPF)
3 Viscosity: MB sheet No. 224.
4 Engine Coolant D27DTP 11.0 ~ 11.5 Ssangyong genuine coolant

D27DT 11.0 ~ 11.5 Anti-Freeze:SYC-1025
5 G32D 11.5 ~ 12.0 Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
Automatic Transmission Fluid 8.0 Ssangyong genuine oil (Shell ATF 134 or Fuchs ATF 134)
6
Manual Transmission Fluid 2WD 3.4 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II)
7 4WD 3.6
Transfer Case Fluid AWD 1.1 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
8
TOD 1.4
9 Part Time 1.4
Axle Oil Front Non IOP 1.4 , 1.5 Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
IOP 0.78
11 (Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
Rear Rigid 2.0 Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
IRS 1.5
(Shell synthetic fuel efficient GL 75W/90)
13 Brake / Clutch Fluid As required Ssangyong genuine oil (DOT4)
14 Power Steering Fluid 1.0 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
15 WARNING D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up

• Use only Ssangyong recommended fluids and lubricants. D27DT: Diesel 2.7, G32D: Gasoline
16 • Keep the specified levels when adding or replacing the fluids.
• Do not mix any different types or brands of oils or fluids. This may cause damages.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-2
DIMENSIONS Unit: mm
Top View Front View 0

1
2
3
1,870
1,870
4
5
1,550
1,550 6
7
8
Side View Rear View
9
10
11
1,760
1,760 12
(1,830)
(1,830)
13
14
2,820
2,820 15
1,540
1,540
4,720
4,720 16
* ( ) : Optional
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-3
* ( ): Optional, [ ]: 2WD, < >: DPF
SPECIFICATIONS (I) D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up, D27DT: Diesel 2.7, G32D: Gasoline

General Overall length (mm) 4,720 ← ←
1
Overall width (mm) 1,870 ← ←
2 Overall height (mm) 1,760 (1,830) ← ←
3 Gross vehicle weight (kg) 2,760 ← ←
Curb vehicle A/T 2,099 2,101 2,088
4 weight (kg) M/T _ 2,088 _
5 Fuel Diesel ← Gasoline

Fuel tank capacity ( ) 78 ← ←
6
Minimum Turning Radius 5.7m ← ←
7 Engine Numbers of cylinders/
5 / 17.5:1 5 / 18:1 (EURO IV 17.5:1) 6 / 10:1
Compression ratio
8
Total displacement (cc) 2,696 ← 3,199
9 Camshaft arrangement DOHC ← ←
10 Max. power 186 PS / 4,000 rpm 165 PS / 4,000 rpm 220 PS / 6,100 rpm
<180 PS / 4,000 rpm> <161 PS / 4,000 rpm> _
11 Max. torque 402 Nm / 1,600 ~ 3,000 rpm 340 Nm / 1,800 ~ 3,250 rpm 312 Nm / 4,600 rpm
12 Idle speed 750 ± 20 rpm ← 700 ± 50 rpm
Cooling system Water- cooled /
13 forced circulation
← ←
14 Coolant capacity ( ) 11.0 ~ 11.5 ← 11.5 ~ 12.0

Lubrication type Gear pump, forced circulation ← ←
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-4
SPECIFICATIONS (II)

Engine Max. oil capacity ( )
9.2 ← 9.8 1
(when shipping)
Turbocharger and _
2
Turbocharger, air-cooled ←
cooling type
3
Manual Operating type _ Semi- Remote control, _
Transmission floor change type 4
Gear ratio 1st _ 4.315 _
_ _ 5
2nd 2.475
3rd _ 1.536 _ 6
4th _ 1.000 _
7
5th _ 0.807 _
Reverse _ 3.919 _ 8
Automatic Model Electronic, 5-speed ← ← 9
Transmission Operating type Floor change type ← ←
10
Gear ratio 1st 3.595 ← 3.951
2nd 2.186 ← 2.423 11
3rd 1.405 ← 1.486 12
4th 1.000 ← 1.000
5th 0.831 ← 0.833
13
Reverse 1st 3.167 ← 3.147 14
Reverse 2nd 1.926 ← 1.930
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-5

Transfer Case Model AWD Part-time (TOD) Part-time (AWD)
1
Type Planetary gear type ← ←
2 Gear ratio High (4H) _
1.000 : 1 ←
Low (4L) _ ← (AWD: _)
3 2.483 : 1
Clutch (M/T) Operating type _ Hydraulic type _
4 Disc type _ Dry single diaphragm type _
5 Power Type Rack and pinion ← ←

Steering Steering Inner 35.72° ← ←
6 angle Outer 32.11° ← ←
7 Front Axle Drive shaft type Ball joint type ← ←
8 Axle housing type IOP type Build-up type Build-up type (IOP type)
Rear Axle Drive shaft type Semi-floating type Semi-floating type Semi-floating type
9 (Ball joint type) (ball joint type)
10 Axle housing type Build-up type (IRS type) Build-up type Build-up type (IRS type)
Brake Master cylinder type Tandem type ← ←
11 Booster type Vacuum assisted
← ←
12 booster type
Brake typ Front wheels Disc type ← ←
13 Rear wheels Disc type ← ←
14 Parking brake Cable type (EPB) ← ←
Suspension Front suspension Wishbone + coil spring ← ←
15
Rear suspension 5-link + coil spring 5-link + coil spring 5-link + coil spring
16 (Multi-link + Coil spring) (Multi-link + Coil spring)
(EAS) (EAS)
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-6

Air Conditioner Refrigerant (capacity) R - 134a / 720 ± 30g
(R - 134a / 1120 ± 30g)
← ← 1
Electrical Battery type / Capacity (V-AH) MF / 12 - 90 ← ← 2
Starter capacity (V-kW) 12 - 2.2 ← 12 - 1.8
3
Alternator capacity (V-A) 12 - 140 (12 - 120) ← 12 - 120
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-7
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
0 1. Engine Number 2. Chassis Number
1
2
3
4
5
6 Gasoline Engine: The engine num- The chassis number is stamped on
7 ber is stamped on the lower area of the frame behind the front right tire.
cylinder block in exhaust manifold
8 side.
9
10 3. Certification Label
11
12
13
14
15 D27DTP D27DT
16 Diesel Engine (D27DTP, D27DT): The engine number is stamped The certification label is located on
on the lower area of cylinder block behind the Intake manifold. the passenger’s door sill.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0-8
Safety Precautions 1 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Checks before Starting a Journey .............. 1-2

5
6
Starting the Engine and Driving Off the
Vehicle ......................................................... 1-5 7
Safety Precautions ...................................... 1-7 8
Direct Injection Type Diesel Engine ......... 1-13 9
Precautions Regarding Unauthorized 10
Modification & Alteration .......................... 1-16 11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY
0 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY (I)

1
2 DAILY CHECK CHECK THE VEHICLE INSIDE
• Check the engine oil, brake fluid and washer fluid level. 1. Make sure that all doors including the tailgate are prop-
3 • Check the drive belts for wear and looseness. erly closed.
4 • Check the fluid leaks underbody.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat for comfortable driving.
Perform daily check everyday before starting a journey.
5 3. Adjust the outside and inside rear view mirrors.
6 4. Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occu-
pants have fastened theirs properly.
7 CHECK THE VEHICLE OUTSIDE
5. Check operation of the parking brake.
8 1. Check the tire inflation and wear.
6. Check that all appropriate warning lights are operat-
9 2. Check the engine oil and other fluid/oil levels in the ing when turning the ignition key to the “ON” position.
engine compartment.
10 7. Check the operations of the clutch pedal, accelerator
3. Clean the windshield and rear glasses, side mirrors, pedal, and brake pedal.
11 and room mirrors.
12 4. Make sure that the engine hood and tailgate are prop- area around the vehicle.
13 erly closed.

14 area around the vehicle.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY (II) 0
1
CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT • Check all warning lights, indicators and gauges (fuel,
vehicle speed, tachometer etc.) with the ignition switch 2
• Make sure that the doors, sunroof, tailgate and fuel filler “ON”.
door are completely closed before driving.
3
• Check the pedal (brake, accelerator, clutch) operations.
• Adjust the driver’s seat, head restraint and rearview mir- • Make sure that there are not any obstacles around the 4
rors for comfortable driving. vehicle.
• Put away things that interfere with driving. 5
CAUTION 6
• Do not place any objects such as can under the driver’s feet 7
as it might interfere with applying your brake, clutch or ac-
celerator pedals.
8
• Make sure that the floor mat is firmly fixed and has proper
thickness. Otherwise, it might interfere with your pedal 9
operation.
10
• Adjust the outside and inside rearview mirrors to the
desired position.
11
CAUTION
12
Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, rearview mirrors, or 13
steering wheel while driving. Adjustments should be done be-
fore driving. 14
• Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat
15
belts.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY (III)
1
FUEL RECOMMENDATION Do not Use Methanol
2 Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be
Commercially available high-quality fuels are suitable. used in your Rexton. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
3 Fuel quality has a decisive influence on the power output, performance and damage components of the fuel system.
driveability and life of the engine. The additives contained
4 in the fuel play an important role in this connection. You NOTE
5 should therefore use only high-quality fuels. The warranty policy will not cover damage of the fuel system
and any performance problems that are caused by the use of
Diesel Engine
6 methanol or fuel containing methanol.
7 Operation in Foreign Countries
Gasoline Engine
If you are going to drive your Rexton in another country,
8 Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-igni- be sure to:
tion (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for
9 resultant damage.
• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Check that a suitable fuel is available.
10 CAUTION
Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage Containers
11 For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer. For safety reasons (particularly when using noncommer-
12 cial fueling systems) fuel containers, pumps and hoses
CAUTION must be properly earthed.
13 Engine and exhaust system will be damaged. Static electricity build up can occur under certain atmo-
spheric and fuel flow conditions if unearthed hoses, par-
14 ticularly plastic, are fitted to the fuel dispensing pump.
15 ber recommended for your country by Ssangyong. It is therefore recommended that earthed pumps with integrally
It is not covered by warranty. earthed hoses be used, and that storage containers be prop-
16 erly earthed during all noncommercial fueling operations.
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE AND DRIVING OFF THE VEHICLE
M/T A/T 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1. Apply the parking brake. 3. • Automatic transmission equipped vehicle
2. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the
9
Move the selector lever to the “P” position and depress
danger area around the vehicle. the brake pedal. 10
CAUTION
Move the gearshift lever to the Neutral position and fully
11
The engine in an automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be
depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal. 12
started only when the selector lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle can be started
only when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. WARNING 13
Do not turn the ignition key to the “START” position while the Depress the brake pedal when the selector lever is at the “P” 14
engine is running. It could result in serious start motor damage. position. Never depress the accelerator pedal.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
6. Warm up the engine in idling speed (below -15°C: approx
0 3 minutes).
1 7. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the
danger area around the vehicle.
2 8. Release the parking brake.
3 9. • Automatic transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D”
4 position. Make sure that the position indicator of “D”
comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin
5 moving.
6 Keep the brake pedal and clutch pedal depressed and
7 A/T shift into the “1” position. Release the brake pedal and
gradually depress the accelerator while slowly releasing
8 the clutch to begin moving.
4. • Diesel engine equipped vehicle:
9 Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to
10 the “ON” position without depressing the accelerator ENGINE STOP
pedal. As soon as the glow indicator ( ) goes out, turn 1. Keep the brake pedal depressed even after the vehicle
11 the key to the “START” position to start the engine. has been stopped.
12 • Gasoline engine equipped vehicle: 2. Automatic transmission equipped vehicle: Place the gear
Turn the ignition key to “ON” position and check the ap- selector lever to “P” position.
13 propriate warning lights are operating. Manual transmission equipped vehicle: Place the gear
5. Release the key when the engine starts. If your vehicle is shift lever to neutral position
14 3. Apply the parking brake.
equipped with a manual transmission and is engaged
15 at neutral (N), it is ok to release the clutch pedal when 4. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder.
the engine runs.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (I) 0

Ignition Key/Remote Control Key Air Bag 1
1. Never use any duplicated key not provided by 1. Never impact the air bag installations by hands or tools. 2
Ssangyong. It may cause a fire due to an overload in 2. The air bag system serves as a supplement to the
the electric circuit. seat belt. Make sure that you and your passengers 3
2. If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key always fasten the seat belts properly even if the air
set to prevent from theft. bags are installed in the vehicle. 4
3. Avoid shock to the transmitter in the remote control key 3. Do not place any objects on the air bag inflation location. 5
and do not get it wet. You may be injured by those objects during deployment.
4. Only use the batteries with the same specifications to re- 4. The air bag system should be inspected 10 years af- 6
place the discharged battery. Do not reverse the polarity. ter installation regardless of its appearance and other
conditions. 7
Turbocharger System (Diesel Engine 5. Repairs to the air bag system should be done only
Equipped Vehicle) by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser- 8
If the oil supply for the bearing assembly of the fast rotat- vice Center.
9
ing turbo charger stops, the stop will cause the turbo- 6. Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not
charger to seize. Therefore, the following cares are nec- attempt to modify any air bag components including the 10
essary to prevent the seizure. steering wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness.
1. After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes 7. Never install a child restraint in the front seat. The chil- 11
at idle speed (Avoid acceleration or driving off the dren on the restraint could be seriously injured by the
vehicle). air bag in a collision. 12
2. After changing the engine oil and oil filter, start the en- 8. The deployed air bag unit should be removed from 13
gine and let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle speed the vehicle and replaced with a new one.
(Avoid acceleration or driving off the vehicle). 9. When the air bag is deployed, the relevant compo- 14
3. Do not stop the engine immediately after coming back nents will be very hot, so do not touch them until they
from high load driving (such as high speed driving or have cooled down. 15
driving on long slope). Let the engine run for approx. 2 10. A person who is smaller than 140 cm should sit in
minutes at idle speed to cool it down. the rear. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (II)
1 Hazardous Materials Power Window
2 Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters 1. When you operate the rear windows from the driver’s
in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they seat while a child sits in the rear, make sure that no
3 can explode and cause a fire. body part of the child is between the window and the
window frame.
4 2. When carrying children in the rear seat, press the rear
Genuine Parts
door window lock switch to make the rear door
5 Always use only Ssangyong genuine parts for replacement. switches inoperative.
Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused by the 3. Make sure that all passengers have their body parts
6 use of non-Ssangyong genuine parts and accessories. such as hands inside the vehicle.
7 4. When closing the windows, be aware of safety condi-
Tire tions before operation.
8 1. Be sure to use the same size and type of tires from the
same manufacturer on all wheels. Otherwise, damage Glass Care
9 1. Be careful not to damage the rear heated when clean-
can be caused to the powertrain.
10 2. Keep the specified tire inflation pressure. ing the rear glass.
3. Make sure that the spare tire is ready for use at any 2. The rain and automatic light sensors are installed on
11 time. After installing the spare tire on a wheel, do not the upper middle front of the windshield (if equipped).
drive for a long distance. Instead, visit a nearby dealer If these sensors are contaminated or covered with vari-
12 or tire shop to replace the spare tire with a regular tire ous coating sprays, the automatic rain sensing wipers
for driving. and lights may not work properly.
13 4. Always check the tire surface for damage and uneven
wear before driving and replace it if needed.
14 5. Using tires of different specifications may cause high
fuel consumption, long stopping distance, vehicle body
15 vibration, heavy steering operation, and poor ABS
16 operation.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (III) 0
Child Restraint 1
WARNING
When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate • Children who have outgrown child restraint systems should 2
child restraint system should always be used. The child re- sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the seat belt. If child’s
straint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight seating position has a shoulder belt which is on or very close 3
and height and properly fit the car’s seat. Accident statistics to the face or neck, move the child close to the center of the
indicate that children are safer when properly restrained in vehicle, slightly inboard of the shoulder belt, or move the child 4
the rear seat rather than in the front seat.
• Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a 5
person who is taller than 140 cm.
WARNING 6
• Infants and small children should always be restrained in an
infant or child restraint. 7
• NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THE Warming Up the Engine
FRONT SEAT WITH FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG. 1. It is recommended to drive off after warming up the
8
• A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat engine. Driving immediately after starting the engine 9
can be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. may decrease the engine’s life expectancy. Warm up
Secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. the engine before moving your vehicle. 10
• A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear 2. Do not warm up the engine excessively. Warm up the
seat whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger engine just until the coolant temperature gauge begins 11
seat, adjust the seat as far back as it will go.
to move.
• When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions 12
provided by the manufacturer. 3. Excessive engine warming increases the fuel con-
• When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured
sumption and air pollution. An optimized warming up 13
with a seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. time is approx. 2 minutes.
• Do not hold a child while riding in a vehicle. Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up 14
period.
• Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat. 15
• Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (IV)
1 Driving the Automatic Transmission Equipped 3. While driving, do not depress the brake pedal when the
Vehicle accelerator pedal is depressed. Otherwise, the re-
2 sponse from the accelerator pedal may be delayed.
1. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift the gear se-
3 This symptom is the safety function to protect the
lection lever into the “D” position. Make sure that the vehicle’s drive system. This symptom can be elimi-
4 “D” light is on the instrument cluster. nated if you depress and release the accelerator pedal
Drive off the vehicle by releasing the brake pedal slowly. once when the brake pedal is not depressed.
5 2. To avoid any possible damage to the automatic 4. Do not operate the steering wheel abruptly. This will
transmission, do not abruptly drive off or accelerate the cause unstable driving situations and can end with an
6 vehicle after shifting the gear selection lever into the unexpected accident.
“D” position. Especially on a hill, move the lever to
7 the “D” position with the brake pedal depressed and Stopping and Parking the Vehicle
8 wait for a couple of seconds until the position indicator 1. Never leave infants and children unattended in the ve-
of “D” is on the instrument cluster. hicle with the doors locked. They can move the vehicle
9 3. Your vehicle may move backward on a steep hill even unexpectedly. They can be suffocated in especially hot
if the shift lever is engaged into the “D” position. weather.
10 Therefore, always depress the brake pedal when you 2. When parking the vehicle on a hilly road, apply the park-
need to stop on such a hill. ing brake and chock the blocks under the wheels.
11
Place the gear selector lever to the “P” position
Cautions While Driving
12 (automatic transmission equipped vehicle).
1. Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. 3. If possible, do not stop and park the vehicle on the steep
13 The power steering function and the brake assist func- road.
tion will be deactivated.
14 2. Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, rear view
4. Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags,
oil, or other easily inflammable materials are kept. While
mirrors, or steering wheel while driving. Adjustments
15 should be done before driving.
driving or after immediately driving, the muffler and ex-
haust pipe are hot; inflammable materials near the ve-
16 hicle might cause a fire.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (V) 0
Extinguisher Precautions for Power Window 1
Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to • When closing the front passenger's and rear windows 2
use it. For more information, read the label on the sur- from driver's seat, be aware of safety conditions before
face of the fire extinguisher. operation. Parts of the body can be trapped by the 3
window.
Precautions for Children or Elderly Car • When carrying children in the rear seat, press the win-
4
Passengers dow lock switch to make the rear window switches 5
• Do not leave infants, children or old people alone in the inoperative.
vehicle. An accident can take place if they misuse some • Do not stick any part of body out of window. 6
devices in the vehicle. In addition, the temperature inside
the car can rise when doors or windows are closed dur- 7
ing summer, placing passengers at risk for suffocation. When Sleeping in Your Vehicle
• Do not let children, infants, old people, or a pregnant
8
• Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In
woman sit in the front passenger seat with the airbag. 9
particular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine
The degree of shock of the airbag’s expansion can be
running and the air-conditioner or heater turned on, you
fatal or inflict serious injuries to such passengers.
can suffocate to death. 10
• Keep devices such as the ignition key out of children’s reach
• Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts 11
to avoid damaging the vehicle or prevent accidents.
you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts.
Do Not Stick Any Part of Your Body Out of • While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift 12
the Window lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident.
• While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you
13
Do not stick any part of your body out of the window and
may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby over- 14
sunroof while the car is running or while you are maneuver-
heating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire.
ing to park. You might be hurt by the passing vehicles or other
unseen obstacles. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (VI)
1 No Alchohol and Drugs! Take A Rest! Check for any Passing Vehicle when Getting
2 • Avoid driving for an extended period of time. Driving con- Off
tinuously without rest makes you prone to dozing off and When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for
3 thus causes an accident. For your safety, take a rest ev- passing vehicles or pedestrians. Vehicles or motorcycles
ery 2 hours. coming from the rear, if unchecked, might stumble on you
4 • Driving under the influence of alchohol or drugs is when you open the door.
5 prohibited. It impairs judgment, making driving highly
risky. Drunk driving is also a legal offense.
6 When Loading On Vehicle with 7-Seaters
If the third row seats are occupied by passengers, evenly
7 Do not drive with Tail Gate or Doors Open distribute the luggage in the vehicle inside.
8 • Do not drive with the tail gate open. Otherwise, you can
be suffocated by the exhaust gas.
9 • If you drive your vehicle with the tail gate open, loose Use Only Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
objects inside the vehicle may cause an accident. Authorized Service Operation
10 • Driving the vehicle with the doors open puts the pas- Have your vehicle checked up or repaired at Ssangyong
11 senger at risk of being thrown out, which can cause se- Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. Repair-
rious injury. ing your vehicle by other service stations will not be covered
12 • Always drive the vehicle with the doors and tailgate under the terms of our warranty. And the warranty is also not
closed. Doors can be accidentally opened and doors liable for the problems caused by such repair.
13 are opened by children touching knobs. Those may
cause a serious accident.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (I) 0

Direct Injection (DI) Type Diesel Engine 1
CAUTION
Compared to Indirect Injection (IDI) Type Diesel Engine For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex. 2
that uses a mechanical fuel injection system, a Direct In- Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer.
jection (DI) Type Diesel Engine controls the amount of in- 3
jected fuel and the fuel injection timing electronically. This
advanced engine enhances the output power and reduces System Safety Mode 4
the noxious exhaust gas (CO, HC, NOx....). Because the When the vehicle has a system error, the vehicle oper-
Direct Injection Diesel Engine is operated by high pres- 5
ates in safety mode to maintain minimum driving condi-
sure (1,600 bars), any removal, modification or service of
the engine may contaminate the inside of the system and
tions and to prevent the system from being damaged. In 6
this mode, the engine driving force may be decreased or
cause the system to malfunction. In that case, the mal- the engine may stall. When this happens, have the sys- 7
function and any related systems are not under warranty tem checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
of this company. thorized Service Center. 8
Warning for Using Low Quality Fuel or Bio Fuel 9
Supplementary Heating Device
The fuel system in a DI engine equipped vehicle has many
- PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) 10
precisely machined components. Using low quality fuel
could result in serious damage to the engine due to the This supplementary heater is an electrical air heating type
water or impurities in the fuel. and installed on the heater outlet port. This device im- 11
proves the heating effect by increasing the temperature of
Never use the low quality fuel.
flowing air into the passenger room. 12
Diesel Engine 13
14
Gasoline Engine
Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-igni- 15
tion (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for re-
sultant damage.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (II)
1
Check Engine Indicator
2 When flashing (for vehicles If the engine CHECK indicator
3 equipped with CDPF) flashes, drive the vehicle at over 50
When a particular amount of particu- km/h for 15 ~ 20 minutes to regen-
4 lates is collected in the Catalyst Die- erate the CDPF. When the amount of
sel Particulate Filter (CDPF), these particulates is lowered down to a
5 particulates are automatically com- certain limit, the engine CHECK in-
busted (regeneration process). dicator goes off.
6 The check engine indicator on the in- However, this regeneration may not be
strument cluster comes on when the Catalyst diesel particulate filter
7 performed due to several operating
fuel or major electronic systems of the (CDPF)
conditions. And in this case, the en-
engine are not working properly. As a gine CHECK indicator flashes. This The CDPF is a compound word for
8 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) and
result, the engine’s power output may flashing function is to inform the driver
9 decrease or the engine may stall. If to take action for the proper regenera- Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which
this happens, please visit the nearest tion of the filter. are exhaust gas after-treatment
10 Ssangyong dealer or authorized ser- devices.
vice operator.
11
12
WARNING
13
• When engine check warning light comes on, immediately stop driving and have the engine system checked at a
• Drain the water from fuel filter & water separator immediately after the water separator warning light comes on.
15 • The fuel system in the engine may get seriously damaged if you keep driving while the warning light is on.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (III) 0
1
Water Separator Warning Light Priming Pump Operating
Conditions 2
Can be performed when 3
engine oil is changed
4
5
When the water level inside of the wa- 6
ter drain in the fuel filter exceeds a
certain level, this warning light and an
7
alarming sound are activated. In Priming Pump
8
addition, the driving force of the vehicle
decreases. If this happens, immedi- 9
ately drain the water from the fuel filter.
Please refer to Chapter 5 “How to drain 10
the water from the fuel filter” in this 1. When completely consumed the
manual. fuel 11
2. After draining the water from the
fuel filter 12
3. After replacing the fuel filter 13
- If this happens, pump fuel until the 14
priming pump is fully filled. Then,
start the engine. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION
0 PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION (I)

1
Do not modify this vehicle.
2 In particular, modifying your vehicle into the LPG vehicle
If unauthorized modification is made on the vehicle, the
3 company is not liable for repairing the modified parts might bring serious damage to the vehicle's perfor-
even during the term of warranty. Other part problems mance and durability. Not only the engine but also the
4 caused by modification are also not covered. transmission and wheel alignment are excluded from
the warranty.
The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number
5 of precision parts that have passed through countless ex- If you install a wheel dust cover on the tires to enhance
periments and tests. These parts are deeply and system- the beauty of tire parts, the heat caused by friction in brak-
6 ing might bring serious problems in performance, caus-
atically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or al-
7 tered without authorization, said parts may be damaged ing Vapor Lock and Fade phenomena.
from the decrease in performance or overloading, which
8 can then cause critical damage to the vehicle and human Do not modify the car’s audio system and install other
life. additional electronic devices such as wireless commu-
9 nication equipment, rear view camera, LCD TV, and re-
Do not modify without authorization the driving gear mote starting device.
10 system, including the engine, just to upgrade the This vehicle’s electronic system contains electronic cir-
vehicle’s performance and beauty. cuits and fuses for the installation of standard electric and
11 electronic devices. If you add new devices or circuits us-
• Prohibition of using unauthorized modification of the en-
12 gine or parts for the exhaust ing the several existing devices and circuits at a time, elec-
tric and electronic devices can be damaged from overload-
Changing without authorization the preset value in the fuel
13 supply system and inlet, exhaust and electric systems, and
ing and may ignite. In addition, when you do drilling work
in installing devices such as an antenna may expose the
changing or adding unauthorized parts is illegal and may
14 cause serious problem with the vehicle’s durability.
vehicle to rusting.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION (II) 0
1
Do not use the nonstandard tires, wheels, and other re- Do not equip the vehicle with bumper guards sold in the
lated parts. market. 2
Installing nonstandard tires such as tires with greater Installing bumper guard or other guard bars that are be- 3
width than prescribed can wear out the power delivery sys- ing sold in the market may cause problems in parking and
tem or friction-damage related parts. In addition, other stopping due to the extended length of vehicle, and in- 4
problems such as increase of fuel consumption and brak- crease in fuel cost due to additional vehicle weight, and
ing distance, vehicle's shudder, and decrease of steering rusting may occur in the holes for equipping the guards. 5
power can all degrade the vehicle’s performance. The And because of the absence of shock absorber in the
speedometer and odometer can also become inaccurate. bumper guard, even accidents during low-speed driving 6
The vehicle with automatic transmission may have the will be much serious compared with the damage that un-
shock in changing the speed. modified cars might sustain. 7
Do not use duplicate key Do not modify or replace the vehicle flooring or the seats
8
A duplicate key might cause malfunction to the ignition key at your discretion. 9
cylinder and deter the ignition motor to return to the origi- • When replacing the interior flooring of vehicle with lami-
nal state. If so, electronic circuitry can be damaged and nated paper 10
may ignite from the ignition motor’s continuing rotation. To improve the comfort of cushion and to facilitate the
cleaning of the vehicle, some drivers replace the flooring
11
Do not equip the sunroof or color glasses at your with laminated paper after removing the seats. However,
discretion.
12
this may cause damage to the various electronic system
If you install a sunroof by cutting the vehicle’s roof, rust control units and wiring. This also may hinder the func- 13
and leakage may occur in the cut part. Installing color tion of the seat rail that enables for the seat to move for-
glasses to block ultraviolet rays and better appearance ward and backward. In this case, the locking system to fix 14
may cause leakage and other many problems. the location of seats may malfunction, which might lead
to a serious accident if the loose seats tilt forward or back- 15
ward during an uphill climb or downhill descent.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION (III)
1
• When exchanging the seats with new ones or equip- Do not install products that may decrease the driving
2 ping separate seat covers. resistance such as sticker, molding, air dam, or wind-
There are several types of seat covers according to role proofing products.
3
and function although with the same vehicle type. Replac- The sticker’s adhesives may damage the coated surface
4 ing the seats with new ones may alter the wiring system of the vehicle. If parts of the car are drilled to attach mold-
or over-use the wires because a seat has various electric ing and other functional parts, the area near the holes will
5 connections and wiring diagram. As mentioned earlier, this rust and other unfamiliar sound may occur while driving.
may damage the wiring and related equipment or cause Especially if the attached parts are not fixed well, it may
6 fire due to the overloading on the rated capacity. damage the vehicle or even cause a fatal accident.
In addition, replacing the seat cover may damage the elec-
7 tronic equipment caused by cut or pressured wire. Such In using audio in the vehicle, do not use illegally copied
a situation may also cause ventilation problems, fire, or CD and DVD, which violates relevant laws. Such discs
8 can also cause malfunction of the audio head unit and
noise.
9 changer. In addition, such discs may also not play
Do not equip with a separate accessory or assistant de- properly.
10 vice on the vehicle operational device. When installing the vehicle with unauthorized parts or
Making the selection lever longer or equipping with an ac- modifying it in ways including the cases mentioned
11 celerator pedal and brake pedal pad may make the driver previously, please keep in mind that the changed parts
prone to make a mistake while driving. and related problems with changed auto parts shall not
12 be covered by warranty.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ignition Key, Remote Control Key 2 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Remote Control Key* and Ignition Key ...... 2-2

5
6
Immobilizer System* ................................... 2-5
7
Key Functions .............................................. 2-7
8
Opening and Closing the Doors with
Ignition Key .................................................. 2-9 9
Theft Deterrent System ............................. 2-10 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOTE CONTROL KEY* AND IGNITION KEY
0 Door Lock Button
1 Lock (briefly press)

• If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are locked
2 and the theft deterrent mode is activated.
3 • When the theft deterrent mode is activated, the hazard warning

flashers blink twice.
4
5
6
7
8
9 Door Unlock/Panic Button
10 1. Unlock (briefly press)

• If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tail gate are
11 unlocked and the theft deterrent mode is deactivated.
12 • When the deterrent mode is deactivated, hazard warning

flashers blink once.
13 2. Panic function (press and hold)
• If you are in your vehicle and feel threatened while the igni-
PANIC BUTTON
14 tion key is inserted into the key switch, you may activate the (operative only when the ignition key is
15 alarm to call attention. If you press this button, the warning inserted)
siren will sound for approx. 27 seconds. Sounds intermittent buzzer for about 27 seconds
16 • The panic function will stop when any of the buttons on the
remote control key is pressed.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS OF FUNCTIONS OF IMMOBILIZER 0
ROOM LAMPS Immobilizer Function 1
The front and center room lamps come on for 30 seconds The immobilizer is designed to prevent the possibility of ve-
when the unlock button on the remote control is pressed. hicle theft by allowing only authorized keys to start the engine. 2
This function is available only when all doors are closed. The same code is encrypted in the transponder inside of
The lamps immediately go off when the remote lock button the key and in the Engine Control Unit (ECU). When the key 3
is pressed. is inserted and turned to the “ON” position, the ECU checks
the code from the key and allows the engine to start only
4
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING when the two codes are matched. 5
If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking CAUTION 6
the door with the remote control key, all the doors will be • The key and the immobilizer antenna coil should be avoided from
locked automatically. any electronic or magnetic equipment which may interfere with 7
the transponder. This may cause malfunctions of the immobilizer
CAUTION function of the key. 8
• Make sure that the doors and tailgate are completely locked af-
ter locking them by using the remote control key. If any of them 9
is not locked, you may lose your vehicle and personal property.
• The doors cannot be locked by remote control if they are not
10
closed.
11
• If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key set
to prevent from theft. 12
• Electronic system of remote control key is vulnerable to mois-
ture and heat. Do not put it in places where moisture and tem- 13
perature is high to avoid any defect.
14
NOTE 15
Standard key does not have the remote control function.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 WHEN A REMOTE CONTROL KEY IS LOST
1 When one of the remote control keys is lost and a new re- Battery Replacement
mote control key is purchased, bring the other old remote
2 control key (dual REKES type) to the nearest Ssangyong 1. Unscrew two screws from the rear cover.
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have it
3 recoded. Otherwise, the old key will not work.
4
BATTERY REPLACEMENT (For Model
5 with REKES)
6 When the operational distance noticeably decreases or the
remote control does not work occasionally, replace the bat-
7 tery with a new one.
8 Battery Specifications
9
Model CR 2032 2. Pry off the cover by using a small flat screwdriver.
10 Amount One
11 Model: CR2032
12
CAUTION
13 • Use only the specified battery.
• Make sure that the battery is installed in correct direction.
14
15
16 3. Remove the battery and insert a new one.
GETtheMANUALS.org
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM*
The Immobilizer System provides an additional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which it is installed and prevents it from being
started by unauthorized persons. The transponder integrated in the key and the engine control unit have the same code.
0
When the ignition key with the integrated transponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the 1
crypto code of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle to start the engine.
Immobilizer Indicator
2
This indicator comes on when the ig-

3
nition key is communicating with the 4
engine control unit (during engine
starting) and goes out after starting the 5
engine. If this indicator blinks, it may in-
dicate that there is something wrong in 6
the immobilizer system. Have the sys-
tem checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or 7
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
8
NOTE 9
The time needed for communication between the immobilizer key
and ECU can vary. When the time is very short, the immobilizer
10
11
Transponder (Diesel) 12
Transponder (Gasoline) 13
Immobilizer Key Battery
When the ignition key with the integrated tran- 14
sponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU
(Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code 15
of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle Key plate
to start the engine.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 • When the Transponder is Damaged
In the following cases, you may be unable to start the
When the transponder is damaged, you must replace it
1 vehicle with the immobilizer.
with a new one and register a new code on the engine
control unit at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- X When two or more immobilizer keys come into con-
2 rized Service Center. Otherwise, the engine cannot be tact with (each) other(s).
started.
3 X When the key is close to any device sending or re-
• When Your Key is Lost ceiving electromagnetic fields or waves.
4
When your key is lost, the encrypted code should be re- X When the key is close to any electronic or electric
5 moved from the Engine Control Unit to avoid any vehicle devices such as lighting equipment, security keys
theft. Please contact a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong or security cards.
6 Authorized Service Center. X When the key is close to a magnetic or metal ob-
7 ject or a battery.
WARNING
8 • In any case, the immobilizer system cannot be removed from
the vehicle. If you attempt to remove and damage the system,
9 it is impossible to start the engine. So never attempt to remove, CAUTION
damage or modify it. • If the indicator remains blinking, have the immobilizer system
10 • In addition, any remote engine starter cannot be installed to the checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
vehicle equipped with the immobilizer system. So never install vice Center.
11 any remote engine starter. • Avoid impact to the transponder inside of the key. The tran-
sponder can be damaged.
12 • With a damaged transponder, the engine cannot be started.
CAUTION
13 When you modify your vehicle and install a remote engine starter,
• The immobilizer system should be inspected, replaced,
serviced, or coded by only qualified service personnel in a
you may have some problems starting the engine or some fatal Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
14 accidents.
• When an old code should be replaced or another key is added,
15 please observe the process personally.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
KEY FUNCTIONS
ACC Position 0
• Allows operation of some electrical accessories with
ON Position 1
the engine off.
• The engine runs and all electri-
• Unlock the steering wheel.
cal accessories can be used. 2
• The ignition key cannot be removed.
• The steering wheel is unlocked.
3
LOCK Position
• The ignition key can only 4
be inserted or withdrawn.
START Position 5
• The steering wheel can be
• Engages the starter. After the
locked.
engine starts, release the key 6
and it will automatically return
to the “ON” position.
7
Unlocking the Steering Wheel
8
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the
key and gently turn it to the ACC or ON
Key Hole Illumination
9
position while slightly moving the steer-
ing wheel right and left. 10
Key Hole Illumination* 11
The illumination lamp comes on when 12
opening the door. This lamp goes out
about 10 seconds after closing the door. 13
From ACC to LOCK Position:
Key Reminder Turn the key to LOCK position from 14
The buzzer will sound if the driver’s door ACC position while pressing the key.
is opened while the key is left in the ig-
15
nition switch on the condition that the ig- 16
nition key is in the ACC or ON position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE
1
• To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and gently • A warning buzzer sounds when opening the driver’s door
2 turn it to the “ACC” position while slightly moving the with the key positioned at the “ACC” or “LOCK”
steering wheel right and left. position.
3
• The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle • Do not leave the key at the “ACC” or “ON” position
4 can only be started when the clutch pedal is fully when engine is not running. Otherwise, the battery could
depressed. run down.
5
• Diesel engine equipped vehicle: Turn the ignition key • Never press down the accelerator pedal while starting.
6 to the “ON” position and wait until the glow indicator
• Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at
goes out. After then, turn the ignition key to the
7 “START” position and hold it until the engine starts.
a time. (The starter motor may be damaged.)
But do not hold the ignition key at the “START” posi- • To prevent any damage to the starter, restart the en-
8
tion for more than 10 seconds. gine from the “LOCK” position after waiting at least
9 • The engine in an automatic transmission equipped ve-
10 seconds.
10 hicle can be started only when the selector lever is at • Never turn the key to the “LOCK” position or with-
the “P” or “N” position. draw the ignition key from the ignition switch while
11 driving. The steering wheel will be locked and you may
• Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the end up with serious injuries.
12 engine.
• Never use any duplicated key not provided from
• If the engine fails to start, even if the engine does not
13 Ssangyong.
start, turn the key back to the “LOCK” position and
14 wait for 10 seconds. Then try again, before any attempt The duplicated key might not turn back to the “ON”
to start the engine. position. It may cause a fire due to an overload in the
15 • After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes
electric circuit. In addition, the engine with the immobi-
lizer system cannot be started with the duplicated key.
at idle speed. Do not accelerate the engine during the
16 warming up period.
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS WITH IGNITION KEY
0
1
2
3
4
5
Unlocking the door and the tailgate 6
Locking the door and the tailgate
7
8
9
10
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING To Lock the Door:
Turn the key to the lock position (toward rear of the vehicle) 11
All doors will be automatically unlocked when the engine
is switched off. 12
gate will be locked.
13
To Unlock the Door:
Turn the key to the unlock position (toward front of the vehicle) 14
gate will be unlocked. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
0 ARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM ALARM

The theft deterrent system will be armed under the follow- STAGE
1 ing conditions: • The engine hood or the tailgate is opened from the out-
2 • When all doors are locked with the remote control key, the side while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will
theft deterrent mode will be activated. If the “UNLOCK” be activated.
3 button on the remote control key is pressed and no door • When the alarm is activated, warning sound and the emer-
is opened within approximately 30 seconds, all doors are gency hazard lights will be on and off every second for 27
4 automatically locked again and the theft deterrent mode seconds.
5 will be activated.
• When the theft deterrent system is armed, the emergency
6 hazard lights blink twice.
DISARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT
7 CAUTION SYSTEM
• To arm the theft deterrent system, the ignition key should be re-
8 moved from the ignition switch, all doors including the tailgate • Unlock the door by using the remote control key.
and the hood should be closed completely. • To deactivate the theft deterrent mode at the alarming
9 • Activation of the theft deterrent system can be confirmed by the stage, unlock the door by using the remote control key.
hazard light (blink twice).
10 • When the deterrent system is disarmed, the emergency
hazard lights blink once.
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Opening and Closing 3 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Opening and Closing Devices .................... 3-2

5
6
Doors ............................................................ 3-4
7
Windows ....................................................... 3-6
8
Sunroof* ....................................................... 3-8
9
Engine Hood .............................................. 3-10
10
Fuel Filler Door ........................................... 3-11
11
Roof Rack* .................................................. 3-12
12
Tailgate and Tailgate Window ................. 3-13
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
OPENING AND CLOSING DEVICES
0 Sunroof Switch
1 Fuel Filler Door
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 Engine Hood Safety
Latch Lever Door Opening Lever
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Tailgate/Window Opening Lever Driver’s Door Windows Switch, 0
Door Opening Lever
1
Tailgate
opening lever 2
3
Tailgate window 4
opening lever
5
Door Lock/Unlock Knob 6
7
8
9
10
Fuel Filler Door
Release Lever, Engine 11
Child Safety Door Lock Hood Opening Lever 12
Rear Door Fuel filler door
release lever 13
14
Unlock
15
Lock 16
Engine hood
opening lever
GETtheMANUALS.org
DOORS
0
1 Door Lock/Unlock
Knob
Unlock
2 All doors will be locked/un-
locked when moving the
3 knob to the respective lock/
Lock unlock direction (only avail-
4
able at driver’s and front
5 passenger’s door).
6 NOTE
• The passenger’s door lock/unlock knob and lever have the same
7 functions with those of the driver’s door.
• The door lock/unlock knob on the rear right or rear left door can
8 only lock or unlock its respective door.
9 • The door is unlocked again even when locking the door with the
door lock/unlock knob while the door is open.
Child Safety Door Lock
10
Child safety door lock helps
11 prevent from an accidental
Unlock door open, especially when
12 children are in the vehicle.
When the child-safe lever is in
13 Lock the “LOCK” position, the
rear door can be opened only
14 from the outside.
15
WARNING
16 Children in rear seats can open rear doors. Move the child-safe lever
to the “LOCK” position.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver’s side Passenger’s side Door Lock/Unlock Switch 0
Door opening lever 1
pressed while all doors including the
tailgate are locked, all doors will be
unlocked. When the switch is pressed 2
again, all doors will be locked.
3
This switch is not available when any of
doors are not fully closed and the ve- 4
Door lock/ hicle is in theft deterrent mode.
Door lock/
unlock switch
unlock switch
5
Door Opening Lever
Pull the door opening lever to open the door.
6
7
Automatic Door Unlocking Automatic Door Locking
When the airbag deploys while all doors are automatically All doors will be automatically locked when you drive over 8
locked by the Automatic Door Locking System, the doors will 50 km/h while the doors are unlocked.
9
automatically be unlocked.
CAUTION
10
When you drive at 50 km/h or a higher speed and try to unlock all
WARNING
When a door or body frame is damaged by an impact from an
doors with the door lock/unlock knob or switch, all doors are auto- 11
matically locked again.
accident, the automatic door unlocking system may not work.
12
Room Lamp Synchronized Operation
13
NOTE The room lamps are synchronized with the room lamp
When any door is open, all doors can not be locked by using the door switch. The front room lamp comes on when opening a front 14
lock knob, the door lock/unlock switch, or the remote control. door. The center room lamp comes on when opening a rear
door. The rear room lamp comes on when opening the 15
tailgate. The front room lamp dims down and goes out when
closing the front door. The center (rear) room lamp goes 16
out immediately when closing the door (tailgate).
GETtheMANUALS.org
WINDOWS
0 DRIVER’S DOOR WINDOW SWITCH

X When opening the window
1
• When the front of the switch is lightly pressed, the window will be lowered while the switch is pressed.
2 • When pressed to its end, the window will open automatically until it is fully open. If you want to stop the
window while automatic lowering, lightly press the switch again or pull the switch up.
3
X When closing the window
4 • When you lightly pull the switch up, the window will move up only while the switch is being operated.
5 • When pulling the switch up to its end, the window will be fully closed (auto-up operation (If equipped)).
If you want to stop the auto-up function, pull up or gently press the switch again.
6
Driver’s Door Window Switch Window Lock Switch
7
Rear Right If the window lock switch is pressed down, only
8 Window Switch
driver’s window is operative. Passenger’s and rear
windows cannot be operated by their switches.
9
WARNING
10 When carrying children in the rear seat, press the win-
dow lock switch to make the rear window switches
11 inoperative. Do not allow children to play with the power
window switch and rear door window switches.
12
CAUTION
13 When closing the passenger’s and rear windows from
driver’s seat, be aware of safety conditions before
14 operation. Parts of the body can be trapped by the window.
15 Passenger’s Door
Window Switch Central Door Lock/Unlock Switch
16
Rear Left Window Switch
GETtheMANUALS.org
ANTI-TRAP SYSTEM FOR DRIVER’S WINDOW Passenger’s and Rear Window Switch 0
The anti-trap system enables the driver’s window to auto-
matically reverse when something is caught in the window
Passenger’s seat 1
as it is closing. When the sensor detects an obstacle, the 2
window will be lowered immediately. Door Lock/
Unlock Switch 3
CAUTION
• The anti-trap system is operated only when the driver’s win- 4
dow is moving up automatically by the “AUTO” switch.
• The anti-trap system does not operate where the space between
5
the top of the glass and window frame is very close.
6
Window switch
7
TIME LAG OPERATION OF WINDOW
8
The power window can be operated for 30 seconds even To move windows up or
after the ignition key is turned to another position. However, Rear seat 9
down, pull up or press the
this function stops immediately when a front door is opened. corresponding switch for
the window. 10
11
12
13
WARNING
• Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing 14
can be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers) in the window.
• Make sure that passengers do not stick out their hands or heads
15
from the vehicle while driving.
16
• Do now allow children to play with any switch, door lever or
the gear shift lever.
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUNROOF* * For your safety, never operate the sunroof when the vehicle is moving.
0 SUNROOF SLIDING OPERATION

1 X Open: 2-Step Opening
The sunroof automatically opens if the sunroof open/close
2 switch is pushed shortly. However, this operation has two
steps; if you push the switch to its first stop, the sunroof
3 opens up to 5 cm ahead of end frame. If you push it again, Sliding Open/
the sunroof opens completely. When the switch is operated Tilt Down
4 while the sunroof is moving, the sunroof stops sliding.
5 (Manual sliding open: The sunroof is opened only while the
sunroof switch is pressed)
6
X Close
7 The sunroof automatically closes completely if the sunroof
open/close switch is pulled down shortly when the sunroof Sliding Close/Tilt Up
8 is open. To stop it during its operation, operate the switch
to any direction. (Manual sliding close: The sunroof is closed
9 only while the sunroof switch is pressed)
CAUTION
10
• Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key
11 SUNROOF TILTING OPERATION
is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the
sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the
12 battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.
X Tilt Up • When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the
13 The sunroof is tilted up if the sunroof open/close switch is
switch. If you keep the switch operating, it could cause a
malfunction.
14 pulled down when the sunroof is closed.
Especially in the winter, never operate the sunroof if moving ar-
eas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
15 X Tilt Down
• When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close
The sunroof is tilted down if the sunroof open/close switch the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or,
16 is pushed when the sunroof is tiled up. the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION BATTERY DISCHARGE OR POWER 0
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the auto- FAILURE WHILE OPERATING SUNROOF
closing sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens
1
If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery
the sunroof when an object is trapped. or power failure, you need to re-calibrate the starting point of 2
the sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the re-
CAUTION
calibration. 3
• This safety function is available for the sliding sunroof close. • The sunroof does not completely close or open by oper-
• The Anti-Pinch Function is deactivated just before the sunroof ating the switch once.
4
closes. • The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does 5
not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof.
• The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding 6
• When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions be- open or tilt up.
fore operation. Parts of the body can be trapped. • Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or 7
• Do not stick any part of your body out of the sunroof. work properly.
8
RE-CALIBRATING THE SUNROOF 9
WIND BUFFETING STARTING POINT
When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open 10
• Close the sunroof completely by using the sunroof open/
at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your
ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter.
close switch (sliding close). 11
• When the sunroof stops while the sunroof is partially
This happens because of an influx in air through the win- opened, completely tilt it up using the sunroof open/close 12
dow or sunroof and its resonance effect. If this happens, switch.
adjust by opening the window or sunroof. 13
NOTE
When the sunroof is completely opened with the sunroof switch
14
and the switch is operated to the “OPEN” direction for more than 5
seconds, the sunroof cannot completely be either closed or opened
15
by operating the switch once. The sunroof will be moving only when
the switch is being operated. When this happens, re-calibrate the 16
beginning point of the sunroof to reactivate the one touch button.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE HOOD
1. To open the engine hood, pull the release knob located
0 on the lower left side of the steering wheel to unlatch the
1 engine hood.
2. Slightly lift up the engine
2 hood and raise up the
safety latch lever with
3 your fingers. Then, com-
pletely lift up the engine
4 hood.
5
6
7
8
WARNING
9
• When you open the hood while the engine is running, extra cau-
10 tion is needed to avoid any injuries by the moving parts in the
engine compartment.
11 • Before driving, try to pull up the front edge of the hood to check
that the hood is securely latched.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILLER DOOR
1. Open the fuel filler door ( ) by pulling the release lever
0
( ) located on the lower left side of the steering wheel.
1
2. Open the fuel filler cap
( ) by turning it OPEN 2
counterclockwise.
3. After refueling, tighten 3
the fuel filler cap by
turning it clockwise until
CLOSE 4
you hear clicking 5
sounds. Then close the
fuel filler lid ( ) properly 6
until it latches.
7
CAUTION
8
WARNING • Fuel damages paintwork. If fuel spills onto paintwork, immedi-
• Always stop the engine when refueling. Use only the designated ately wash the affected area with cold water. 9
fuel and low sulfur diesel. • The fuel filler door may not open in cold weather. Gently tap the
• When refueling, • No smoking.
fuel filler door to open. 10
• Gasoline damages paintwork.
• No naked flame. • No sparking material. • If gasoline spills onto paintwork wash with cold water immediately. 11
• If you use inappropriate grade fuel or put improper fuel additives • For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.
into the fuel tank, the engine and catalytic converter may seri- Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer. 12
ously be damaged.
• Engine and exhaust system will be damaged.
• Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. 13
• It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries.
• When refueling,
• Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Num- 14
ber recommended for your country by Ssangyong.
• Switch off engine. It is not covered by warranty. 15
• No smoking.
• No naked flame. 16
• No sparking material.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ROOF RACK*
0
1 CAUTION
• In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads
2 that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.
• The following specification is maximum weight when loading
3 cargo or luggage.
ROOF RACK: 45 kg (100 lbs.) EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
4
• Loading cargo or luggage above specification on the roof rack
5 may damage your vehicle.
When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
6 or the sides of your vehicle.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check
7 frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
8 • Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
9 • Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack
may damage stability of your vehicle.
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load things on top of
10 your vehicle.
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
TAILGATE AND TAILGATE WINDOW
Unlock 0
1
2
Tailgate window 3
opening lever Lock
4
5
Tailgate 6
opening lever
7
WARNING 8
Exhaust gases are poisonous. Do not run the engine with
the tailgate or tailgate window open to avoid exhaust gas 9
in the cabin. Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while
the vehicle is in motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. 10
Do not travel with the tailgate or tailgate window open.
11
Opening the Tailgate Opening the Tailgate Window 12
To open the tailgate, unlock To unlock the tailgate 13
the tailgate and pull the window, unlock the tailgate
tailgate opening lever up. and pull the left lever up. 14
To close the tailgate, lower Open the tailgate window
it by holding the inside by pulling up the outer win- 15
handle to a certain level dow grip.
first, then close it. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 CAUTIONS WHEN OPENING/CLOSING DOORS
2
• Do not allow children to play with any switch, door lever and the gear shift.
3 • Before operating the power windows, doors, tailgate and fuel filler door, make sure that nothing can
4 be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers).
• Make sure that the doors, tailgate and fuel filler door are completely closed before driving.
5
• When a child is on rear seat, use the child safety functions to avoid any unwanted and dangerous
6 opening of doors.
7 • Parts of the human body can be trapped in the window or sunroof and can be struck by passing objects.
Do not stick hands, heads or anything else out of the openings.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior Switches 4 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Interior Switches ......................................... 4-2 Heated Glass Switch ................................. 4-24

5
Light Switch ................................................. 4-4 Hazard Warning Flasher Switch .............. 4-25
6
Wiper and Washer Switch .......................... 4-8 HDC (Hill Descent Control) Switch* .......... 4-26 7
Rain Sensing Wiper* ................................... 4-9 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) 8
Wiper and Washer Switch ........................ 4-10 Switch and ESP System* .......................... 4-28 9
Cruise Control Switch* .............................. 4-12 Remote Audio Controls & Gear Shift 10
Button (A/T) On Steering Wheel ............... 4-30
Switch Panel on Driver’s Door Trim ......... 4-16 11
Switches in Center Console ..................... 4-31
Outside Rearview Mirror Control Switch . 4-17 12
4-Wheel Drive System ............................... 4-32
Multi-Station* ............................................. 4-18 13
Switches in Overhead Console,
Time and Date Display .............................. 4-19 14
Room Lamp Switch ................................... 4-35
Audio Play Using the USB Flash Drive .... 4-20 15
Listening To Music with External Audio 16
Device ......................................................... 4-23
GETtheMANUALS.org
INTERIOR SWITCHES
0
Room lamp switch
1
2 Sunroof switch
3
Remote control switch on steering wheel
4
Light switch
5
6 Wiper and
USB jack washer switch
7 Stereo jack
8
9 Center switch panel Rear fog
light switch
10 Door lock/
unlock switch
11
Driver seat heating switch Auto cruise*
12 Passenger seat heating switch HLLD
13 4-wheel drive switch
Seat position
14 Aux jack
memory switch
15 Door lock/unlock switch
16 Winter mode switch Window control switches

0
Time, date mode setting button/mp3 file search button HDC switch
1
Time, date change/mp3 file play button (next music)
ESP OFF switch
2
Windshield heated glass switch
3
Tailgate and outside rearview mirror
heated glass switch
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Hazard switch
11
Time, date change/mp3 file play button (previous music)
12
Time, date item change/mp3 file play and stop
13
14
15
16

LIGHT SWITCH
0 Automatic Light &

1 Light Switch Rain Sensor*
2
3
4
5
6
You can turn the lights on and This senses the ambient illumina-
7 off (headlamps, tail lamps, li- tion intensity to determine the timing
cense plate lamp, turn signal for turning the headlamps and tail
8 lamps, fog lights) with this lamps on or off automatically when
switch. the light switch is set to “AUTO”
9 (including rain sensing function).
10 Headlamp
high beam High mounted stop lamp
11
License plate lamp
Headlamp low beam
12
Tail lamp/Stop lamp
13
Tail lamp
Turn signal lamp Turn signal lamp
14
Stop lamp or
15 Front fog light
rear fog light*
16
Back-up lamp

AUTOMATIC LIGHT* 0
AUTO 1
2
3
4
5
The auto light and rain sensor senses the ambient illumi- 6
nation intensity to determine the timing for turning the
headlamps and tail lamps on or off automatically when the 7
light switch is set to “AUTO”.
8
CAUTION
• Do not clean the area where the auto-light and rain sensor in 9
installed with detergent or wax.
• On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual 10
mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending
on the climate, season, or circumstances. 11
• Any aftermarket tanning film or spray may cause the lighting sys- Automatic Light & Rain Sensor*
tem to malfunction.
This senses the ambient illumination intensity to determine
12
• Ssangyong recommends you to use this device restrictively
the timing for turning the headlamps and tail lamps on or
around only a sunrise or sunset. 13
• Usually turn the headlamps or tail lights on or off manually. off automatically when the light switch is set to “AUTO”
• Turn on the headlamps manually when passing through a dark (integrated with rain sensor). 14
area such as a tunnel.
• On a gloomy day, do not rely on this automatic function. But turn CAUTION 15
the head or tail lights on or off manually.
• Do not shake and impact the sensor. It may not work properly.
• When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and
• The automatic light function may not operate properly when the
16
head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phe-
nomenon recognizing the automatic setting. vehicle is driving on the rugged road due to the vibration.

0 Battery Saver (Automatically turns off the lights) Headlight Leveling Switch
• To avoid discharging the battery, if the tail lamps are on after the ignition key
1 is removed, a buzzer will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is
opened. The tail lamps will automatically turn off when the door is closed.
2 (With the light switch on, if the ignition key is removed and all doors are
closed, the tail lamps are off due to the battery saver function. However, if you
3 open a door and turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then to the
4 “ON” position, the tail lamps will stay on after the door is closed.)
• To turn the tail lamps on again, insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.
5 Or, turn the light switch to the “OFF” position and then to the “ON” position.
6
7
With the low beam switched on, ad-
8 just the aiming angle of headlights to
9 suit the vehicle load.
• To lower the aiming angle, rotate the
10 switch downward.
Light Switch
• To raise the aiming angle, rotate the
11 switch upward.
(Headlamps ON) AUTO (Automatic light ON)
12 NOTE
Head-, side-marker, tail, license plate, Head- and tail lamps automatically turn According to load condition, adjust the
13 front fog (with front fog light switch ON), on or off based upon the intensity of the aiming angle of headlights.
and instrument cluster lamps come on. sunlight analyzed by the automatic light
14 sensor.
15 (Tail lamps ON)
OFF (Lights OFF)
Side-marker, tail, license plate, front fog
16 (with front fog light switch ON), and in- All lights are off.
strument cluster lamps come on.

Headlamp High Beam Right Turn Signal Switch 0
To turn on the headlamp high
NOTE
beam, push the lever towards the 1
While the turn signal lamp is turned on, the turn signal
instrument cluster with the
headlamp low beam on. The
indicator in the instrument cluster blinks. 2
headlamp high beam indicator Front Fog Light Switch
( ) in the instrument cluster
3
To turn on the fog lights, turn this switch to ON position
comes on when the headlamp 4
while the tail lamps or headlamps are turned on.
high beam is turned on.
5
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL):
DRL Regulation Region Only 6
For vehicles equipped with the DRL, the tail
lights automatically turn ON when turning the
7
starter key from ACC to ON. 8
The headlights turn on as the engine starts.
Passing Left Turn Signal Switch With the headlights automatically ON, turning 9
the light switch from OFF to on turns off the
Regardless of the position of the light
headlights but keeps the tail lights on.
10
switch, if you hold the lever toward the
steering wheel, the headlights are on (Turning the light switch immediately deacti- 11
high beam during the hold. The high vates the DRL function.)
beam indicator also illuminates on the Rear Fog Light Switch* 12
instrument cluster during the hold.
To turn on the rear fog light, push the rear fog light 13
WARNING switch while the front fog light switch is turned on.
Driving with high beam headlamps disturbs
To turn it off, push the switch again. The rear fog 14
the approaching vehicle’s visibility for safe lights are automatically turned off when turning off
driving. Use the high beam headlamp only the light switch or the front fog light switch. 15
during very dark situations when it is very Therefore, to turn on the rear fog lights, push the
hard to see the road. rear fog light switch again after turning on the light 16
switch and the front fog light switch.

0 Rear Wiper
1 Front Wiper
2 Wiper and Washer Switch

3
4
5
6
7
Washer Nozzle
8
9
10 Washer Fluid Reservoir
Wiper Blade Frequently check the washer fluid level and
11 If the windshield cannot be cleaned
add the specified product as needed.
In winter, use only the specified washer liq-
12 properly due to worn wiper blades, re-
uid for winter season.
place them with new ones. Refer to
13 “Service and Maintenance” section in
CAUTION
this manual.
• If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will
14 freeze during the winter and damage the
washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use only
15 the specified washer fluid.
• Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the en-
16 gine or body paint of your vehicle during re-
plenishment

RAIN SENSING WIPER*
When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, this sensor detects the 0
amount of rain, turns on the wiper, and controls the intermittent wiper intervals.
1
Rain and Auto Light Sensor Wiper AUTO Position
2
AUTO
3
4
5
6
It controls the wiping speed by detect- 7
ing the amount of rain drops.
8
CAUTION NOTE 9
• When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, the wiper will operate once if • When the light switche is in the “AUTO” position,
the initial engine start is made. This may wear the wiper blades prematurely head lights come on if the rain sensor detects any 10
(especially in winter). Therefore, other than rainy days, set the switch to the rain.
“OFF” position. In winter, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen and are • The speed of the wipers becomes a little faster 11
not stuck to the windshield. Otherwise, this may cause some damage to the when it is dark enough to turn on the automatic lights.
wiper motor. 12
• If you use only the wipers when the glass is dry, this could scratch the glass and wear • When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the
the wiper blades prematurely. Use the wiper with the washer when the glass is dry. wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper
• Turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position before any car wash to avoid un- switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” 13
wanted operation of the wipers. position. But the wiper will not operate again to
• When it does not rain, turn the wiper switch into the “OFF” position. prevent any damage to the window even though 14
the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” position
WARNING to the “AUTO” position. 15
When you clean the windshield over the sensor with damp clothes, the wiper may 16
operate suddenly. It could cause serious injury. Make sure to place the wiper switch
and ignition switch to the “OFF” position when not in use.

0
1 Front Wiper Switch
2 MIST
3 The windshield wipers can be operated only
when you hold the switch to the “MIST” position.
4 The lever will return to the “OFF” position when
released.
5
6 OFF
7 Stop the operation.
8
9 AUTO
10 Operates automatically according to

the vehicle speed or amount of rain.
11
12 LO
Front Automatic Wiping Speed Control Switch
13 Continuous wipe, slow operation
The interval of wiper swings can be adjusted by twisting
14 the control knob upward or downward when the windshield
HI wiper switch is in the AUTO position.
15 Fast: Fast interval
Continuous wipe, fast operation Slow: Slow interval
16

0
Rear Wiper Switch Front Auto Washer Switch
When the front wiper switch is off and this switch 1
is pressed, washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will automatically operate 4 times. Then, the 2
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid will be sprayed again and the wiper will au-
fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window tomatically operate 3 times.
3
glass and the wiper will also operate. 4
When the switch is released, it will stop
in the Rear Wiper Operation mode and 5
only the wiper will keep operating.
6
7
Rear wiper operation 8
OFF 9
Rear wiper stops 10
11
12
When the switch is fully turned, washer
fluid will be sprayed onto the rear win- Wiper and Washer Coupled Operation 13
dow glass and the wiper will also Pull the lever briefly (for less than 0.6 seconds):
operate. When the switch is released, it One wiping cycle with washer spray 14
will return to the “OFF” position and turn Pull and hold the lever for more than 0.6 seconds:
off the wiper and washer. Three wiping cycles with washer spray
15
While being held down, the wiper and washer will 16
keep working.

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH*
0 CRUISE CONTROL Setting a Desired Speed
1 TYPE A TYPE A
2
3
4
5 TYPE B
6
7
8 TYPE B
9
The cruise control is an automatic speed control system that main- 1. To operate the cruise control, accelerate to the de-
10 tains a desired driving speed without using the accelerator pedal. sired speed, which must be more than 36 km/h
The vehicle speed must be greater than 36 km/h to engage the (23 MPH) and less than 150 km/h (90 MPH).
11
cruise control. This feature is especially useful for motorway driving. 2. When the desired speed is reached, push up the
12 CAUTION
ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever or push
down the DECEL switch for 1 second per one
13 Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous. switching and then release the accelerator pedal
• Do not use on winding roads. slowly.
14 • Do not use in heavy traffic.
3. Now, the vehicle is cruised by this system with
• Do not use on slippery, wet roads. the set speed.
15 This could result in a loss of control, collision, and/or personal injuries.
4. And you can set to other vehicle speeds again
16 NOTE
with above steps after an accelerator pedal in-
tervention during the cruise control running.
The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road conditions.

Accelerating with the Cruise Control System Decelerating with the Cruise Control System 0
• While the cruise control system is running • While the cruise control system is running 1
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever 1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control le- 2
and hold it until the desired speed is reached without ver and hold it until the desired speed is reached with-
an accelerator pedal intervention. out a brake pedal intervention. But the cruise control 3
2. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. system cannot maintain the cruise function at less than
34 km/h. 4
• While the cruise control system is not running 2. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever.
5
1. Accelerate using the accelerator pedal over 36 km/h. • When the cruise control system is not running 6
2. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever
and hold it. 1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control le- 7
ver and hold it.
3. And then release the accelerator pedal slowly.
2. And then release the accelerator pedal slowly. 8
4. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever.
3. When the desired speed is reached, release the lever. 9
But the cruise control system cannot maintain the
• Tap-up while the cruise control system is running cruise function at less than 34 km/h. 10
1. Push up the ACCEL switch of the cruise control lever
less than 0.5 second per one switching while the cruise • Tap-down while the cruise control system is running
11
control system is running. This is a tap-up switching. 12
1. Push down the DECEL switch of the cruise control le-
2. When you operate a tap-up switching, the vehicle is ac-
ver less than 0.5 second per one switching while the
celerated for 1.3 km/h over the previous set speed. 13
cruise control system is running. This is a tap-down
3. If you want to accelerate for 13 km/h, operate the tap- switching.
up switching ten times without accelerating with the
14
2. When you operate a tap-down switching, the vehicle is
cruise control system. 15
decelerated for 1 km/h below the previous set speed.
3. If you want to decelerate for 10 km/h, operate the tap- 16
down switching ten times without the brake pedal
intervention.

0 Recovery of Set Speed Normal Cancellation of the Cruise Control
1 TYPE A TYPE A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TYPE B TYPE B
9
Even if the cruise control is cancelled, the previous set The cruise control system will be canceled when one or
10 cruise speed can be recovered by pushing (Type A) or pull- more items of the following conditions are applied;
ing (Type B) toward the cruise control lever when the cur- 1. When the brake pedal is depressed.
11 rent vehicle speed is over 36 km/h without an acceleration 2. When the cruising speed is downed less than 34 km/h.
intervention. But if you turn off the ignition switch, the memo- 3. When the OFF switch is operated by pulling the cruise
12 rized set speed is cleared and you cannot recover the pre- control lever (Type A) or by pushing the ON-OFF switch of
13 vious set speed. the cruise control lever (Type B).
4. When ESP is activated.
14 CAUTION 5. When applying the parking brake when driving.
The resume position should only be used if the driver is fully aware 6. When using the clutch in order to shift (M/T only).
15 of this speed and wishes to resume this particular speed. And the cruise control system can be operated again in driving state.
CAUTION
16
Keep the main cruise control switch in the neutral position when
not using the cruise control.

Abnormal Cancellation of the Cruise Control Using the Cruise Control on Hills 0
1. When the rapid deceleration is applied without braking. How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the 1
2. When the rapid acceleration is applied without accelera- speed, load, and the steepness of the hill.
tion pedal intervention. 2
When going up steep hills, you may have to press the ac-
3. When the cruise control lever is failed. celerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going 3
4. When the brake switch and the brake light switch input downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
signal are implausible. keep your speed down. 4
And the cruise control system cannot be operated again in driv- Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control. 5
ing state. In this case, you should stop the vehicle, and turn off
the ignition switch and then turn it on again. After you do that, 6
you can use the cruise control system again. But if the cruise
control system isn’t recovered, you should contact a Ssangyong 7
Dealer for diagnosis of the cruise control system.
8
CAUTION 9
Abnormal changes of the selector lever can damage the engine.
Do not move the shift lever to Neural while driving at the set speed. 10
Automatic transmission damage may result.
11
CAUTION 12
• The speed that has been set may not be maintained on uphill or 13
downhill slopes.
• The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill 14
grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain
that speed. 15
• The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off 16
the cruise control.

SWITCH PANEL ON DRIVER’S DOOR TRIM
0 Easy Access Button (Driver’s Seat)*

1 This system is designed to provide a driver suffi-
cient space to access and exit (driver’s door moves
2 rearward automatically).
Position Memory Position Memory Setting Button (SET)*
3 Button (1, 2, 3)* Position Memory Cancellation Button (STOP)*
4
5
6
7 Window Lock Switch
8 If the window lock switch is pressed down, only
dirver’s window is operative. Passenger’s and rear
9 windows cannot be operated by their switches.
Outside Rearview Mirror
10 Folding Switch
To fold the outside rearview
11 mirrors, press the switch.
To unfold the mirrors, press again
12
Window Switch
13
14 Outside Rearview Mirror Control Switch
Adjust the outside rearview mirror position by Central Door Lock/Unlock Switch
15 pushing the appropriate edge of this switch When the door lock/unlock switch is pressed while all doors
after selecting the desired outside mirror. including the tailgate are locked, all doors will be unlocked.
16 When the switch is pressed again, all doors will be locked.

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Outside Rearview Mirror Control 0

1. Select the driver side mirror (R) or the passenger side mir-
ror (L) with the mirror selection switch.
1
2. Adjust the outside rearview mirror by pushing the appro- 2
priate edge of the switch.
3
Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Switch 4
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, press the switch.
To unfold the mirrors, press again. 5
6
Mirror Selection Switch 7
“R”: Driver side mirror
8
“L”: Passenger side mirror
9
WARNING 10
Do not put any tinting film on the door glasses of the front seats.
Otherwise, your visibility will decrease. 11
12
CAUTION
• You can fold and unfold the mirrors within 30 seconds after the 13
ignition is turned to OFF. However, this function is overridden
when any of front doors is opened with the ignition switch OFF. 14
• Do not fold or unfold the outside rearview mirrors manually. It
Aiming Switch may cause a malfunction of the mirror folding system. 15
Adjust the selected mirror up, down, left, • If you directly spray high-pressured water to the electric remote-
or right by pressing the corresponding controlled outside mirrors, this may cause some malfunctions in 16
edges of the switch to get a desired view. the mirror system.

MULTI-STATION*
0 USB Flash Drive Port*

Multi-station display You can connect the external USB flash drive to this port to
USB flash drive port
1 play the music files (MP3, OGG, WMA).
2 Stereo Jack*
Stereo jack You can hear the music through the speakers on your ve-
3 hicle by connecting the external audio device (MP3 player,
CD player etc.) to this jack.
4 Storage bin for
portable electronic device Multi-Station Display
5 This display shows time/date or music file play screen accord-
ing to the current mode.
6
CAUTION
7 Multi-station switch
• Use only smooth cloth to clean this display window. Otherwise,
the display window could be scratched.
8 Music File Play Mode • When the room temperature is high or low, this display window
Searching the music file may be dimmed or discolored.
9 • Some USB flash drive may not be compatible with the multi-sta-
Time/Date Display Mode tion audio file play system.
10 Selecting the time/date adjustment mode
CAUTION
11 Cautions for Storage Bin (for Portable Electronic Device)
Music File Play
12 Mode
Playing the previous/next
13 music file, Forwarding
14 and Reversing
You can put your portable electronic device such as a cellular
Music File Play Mode Time/Date Display
15 phone or MP3 player into the storage bin. This location is conve-
Playing and stopping the music file Mode nient place to connect the electronic devices with the stereo jack
16 Time/Date Display Mode
Adjusting the time/date in the multi-station. However, some devices cannot put into the stor-
age bin due to the size or shape. Be careful not to damage the
Selecting the time or date surface of the device when you use this storage bin.

TIME AND DATE DISPLAY
The time and date are displayed in the multi-station display window.
0
Hour Minute
1
AM or PM DA
AM: Before noon
PM: After midday
%&.%&
&$$-#$%#&)GIB
2
3
4
Year Month Date Day
5
Adjusting the Time and Date Time Setting Using the Preset Function 6
1. Press and hold ( ) button on the multi-station switch 1. Press and hold ( ) button on the multi-station switch 7
panel with the time and date displayed. It is switched to panel with the time and date displayed.
the time and date adjustment mode and the selected item 8
2. Press ( ) button to move to the minutes section
is blinking.
(Minute section start to blink). 9
2. Press ( ) button to move to the desired position (hour,
minutes, month, date or year).
3. Press and hold any of ( ) and ( ) buttons. 10
4. If the minutes section displays 00~29, it is reset to “00”.
3. Press ( ) button or ( ) button to change the time
If the minutes section displays 30~59, the hour is in-
11
and date. creased by 1 and the minute is reset to “00”. 12
4. Press ( ) button after adjustment to finish the adjust- 5. The clock starts to run immediately after releasing the
ment mode. Now, the display shows the changed time/ button. 13
date. 6. Press ( ) button after adjustment to finish the adjust- 14
NOTE ment mode. Now, the display shows the changed time/
The display resumes Time/Date display mode if you do not press
date. 15
any button within few seconds in Time/Date adjustment mode.
16

AUDIO PLAY USING THE USB FLASH DRIVE
The multi-station can detect and play the music files (MP3, OGG, WMA) in the
0 USB flash drive when connecting it into the USB flash drive port.
1 USB flash drive
2 MULTI-STATION DISPLAY WINDOW

Current folder name Current play mode
3
4
5 Current file name
6
7
Time and date display Play time of current file
8
Current file number
9
CAUTION
10 USB Flash Drive
• Only MP3, WMA and OGG file formats can be played in the multi-
No Playing File Connected station audio file play system.
11 • The system may not recognize some audio files due to the infor-
mation error even though the file format is playable.
12 • If the message “INSERT MEMORY” is displayed even while the
USB flash drive is connected to the USB flash drive port, re-
13 move the USB flash drive and then connect it again.
This message is displayed This message is displayed in • Some USB flash drive may not be compatible with the multi-sta-
14 when there is no accessible the multi-station display win- tion audio file play system.
15 audio file in the USB flash dow when pressing ( ) • This system does not recognize the hard disc type USB flash
drive. drive.
button while the USB flash
16 drive is not connected to the
• The vehicle with AV system has a different operating instruc-
tions for playing the music file through the USB flash drive. Please
USB flash drive port. refer to the separate AV operating manual for detailed information.

0
Search the audio files (briefly press) 1
Play the next music (briefly press)
Set the playing sequence and repeat
function (press and hold) Go to the previous file (press and hold) 2
Play the previous music or go to the be- 3
Play/Stop the audio file
ginning of the current file (briefly press)
Move to other folder (file search mode) 4
Go to the next file (press and hold)
5
Playing Audio Files 6
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB flash drive port. 3. The multi-station display shows the message of USB 7
flash drive reading as below. (It takes longer time if the
memory capacity is big.) 8
9
10
11
2. Press the AUX button of the audio system to display “AUX 4. The system starts to play the audio file after reading the
IN” in the audio display window. USB flash drive. 12
5. The next file is played when pressing ( ) button briefly. 13
AUX button The current file is played from the beginning again or the
previous file is played when pressing ( ) button briefly. 14
AUX IN
6. While a file is played, press and hold the ( ) button 15
(fast forward) or ( ) button (fast back) to fast forward
16
or back to the desired file.

0
1 Selecting Audio File Setting Playing Sequence and Repeat Function
1. To go to file search mode while playing a music in USB 1. When you press and hold ( ) button while a file is
2 flash drive, press ( ) button briefly. The multi-station played, the system is switched to the playing sequence
display window is switched as below. and repeat setting mode.
3
4 Play mode Search mode
5
7 ( ) button or ( ) button to select the desired play-
ing sequence or repeat function.
2. Select the desired file by pressing ( ) button or ( )
8
button in the file search mode.
9
3. To move to the desired folder, press ( ) button when
10 the folder is highlighted. It moves to the parent folder if
you press and hold ( ) button. 3. In the playing sequence and repeat setting mode, press
11
( ) button or ( ) button to select the desired play-
12 4. Select a file and press ( ) button to play it. ing sequence or repeat function.
13 NORMAL (displayed “NOR”): Sequential play
RANDOM (displayed “RND”): Random play
14 REPEAT (displayed “RPT”): Repeat the currently played file
15 4. After selecting the desired playing sequence or repeat
16 function, press ( or ) button to apply the changed
setting.

LISTENING TO MUSIC WITH EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE
MODE CHANGE 0
1. Connect the external audio device to the stereo jack (AUX Press ( ) button to change the mode when the USB flash
jack).
1
drive or the external audio device is connected to the USB
flash drive port or to the stereo jack. 2
However, it cannot be switched to the external audio device
play mode while the audio file in the USB flash drive is be-
3
ing played. 4
It can be switched to the external audio device mode only
after stopping the operation of USB flash drive. 5
2. When you press AUX button on the audio system, “AUX 6
IN” is displayed on the audio display window and multi- By Pressing ( ) Button, the Mode Is Changed
station display window.
7
As Below
8
AUX button Searching the files in
the USB flash drive 9
AUX IN 10
11
Playing the music
“AUX IN” in multi-station through the external 12
display window audio device.
13
14
DA
3. When you operate the external audio device, you can hear
the music through the speakers on your vehicle.
Clock display
%&.%&
&$$-#$%#&)GIB
15
16

HEATED GLASS SWITCH
Indicator Indicator
0
1
2
3
4
5 Windshield Heated Glass Switch Tailgate and Outside Rearview Mirror Heated Glass Switch
6 • Press this switch to turn on the windshield • Press this switch to turn on the tailgate and outside rearview mirror
heated glass. It will operate for about 12 heated glasses. It will operate for about 12 minutes.
7 minutes. • Press the switch again to stop the operation.
• Press the switch again to stop the operation. • This switch is designed to defrost or defog the tailgate glass and out-
8
• Use this to prevent the windshield wiper side rearview mirrors.
9 blades from being frozen. • The heated glass will operate for about 6 minutes when the switch is
• The indicator in the switch comes on when pressed again within 12 minutes after completion of its first operation cycle.
10 in use. • The indicator in the switch comes on when in use.
11 Windshield
heated glass Tailgate
12 heated glass
Outside rearview
13 mirror heated glass
14
15
16

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
0
1
2
3
4
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch

5
WARNING
• To turn on the hazard warning flashers, push the hazard Do not leave the flashers on for an extended period of time. Bat- 6
warning flasher switch. tery could be discharged.
• Use the hazard warning flasher to warn other drivers when
7
you stop or park under emergency conditions. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

HDC (HILL DESCENT CONTROL) SWITCH*
HDC? HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low
0 speed without any depression of the brake pedal. This convenient function is for only driving down steep grades.
1 Therefore do not use this function for anything other than driving down steep hills.
2 HDC Switch
When this button is pressed once,
3 HDC is ready for use. The green HDC
4 indicator on the instrument cluster
comes on. When the button is pressed
5 again, HDC is deactivated and the in-
dicator goes off.
6
7
8
The HDC Indicator
9
Green light on: HDC is ready for use
10 (by pressing the HDC switch).
Green light blinking: HDC is being
11 applied.
12 Red light on: the HDC system is overheated or malfunctioning. Depressing the Accelerator or Brake Pedal
while HDC is Being Applied
13 If you depress the accelerator or brake pedal, the HDC func-
tion immediately stops and there will be more driving or brak-
14 When HDC is applied, the green HDC indicator blinks.
ing force accordingly.
15 heated or malfunctioning. WARNING
16 When the red HDC indicator is on, the HDC function does When driving down an extremely dangerous steep grade, HDC will
not work. still work even if the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed.

HDC Operational Conditions Operation of HDC 0
1. The HDC switch should be on (The green indicator on When all operational conditions are met, HDC is applied
the instrument cluster comes on). and the green HDC indicator blinks. HDC automatically de- 1
2. A certain steep grade. creases the vehicle speed to 7 km/h in the 2 wheel (2H) or
4 wheel high speed mode (4H) position. HDC automatically 2
3. Driving for about 7 ~ 50 km/h in the 2 wheel (2H) or
stops at speeds less than 7 km/h or when the slope de-
4 wheel high (4H) speed position. Or driving for about
scends slowly. It is normal to have strong vibrations and
3
3 ~ 25 km/h in the 4 wheel low position.
noise from the brake system when HDC is applied. 4
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in the “D” or “R” or “N”
position. In case of the manual transmission, the gear
shift is in the forwarding “1” or “Reverse” or “Neutral”
5
WARNING
position. • HDC is designed for driving on off-road steep grades. 6
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is not depressed. • Unnecessary usage of HDC can cause malfunctions in the brake
6. ESP (Electronic Stability Program, including BAS) is not system or ESP. Do not use HDC when driving on normal roads. 7
activated. • If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC
may be applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed 8
bump. Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal
Deactivation Conditions of HDC roads. 9
1. The HDC switch is off (The green indicator on the instru- • If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or
10
ment cluster is off too). malfunctioning. If the indicator is on even after the system has
cooled down enough, have the nearest authorized dealer or
2. Less than required steep grade. service center check the system.
11
3. Vehicle’s speed is out of the operational ranges. • It is normal to have strong vibrations and noise from the brake 12
4. The automatic gear shift lever is in or passes through system when HDC is applied.
the “N” position. Or the manual transmission shift lever • In case of a manual transmission vehicle, the gear shift is in 13
is engaged in or passes through the neutral position. the forwarding “1” or “Reverse” position. If HDC is attempted in
5. The accelerator or brake pedal is depressed.
the “2” position, the engine may turn off. 14
6. ESP (including BAS) is applied. 15
7. Because of extended operation of HDC, the system is
overheated (The red HDC indicator illuminates). 16

ESP (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM) SWITCH AND ESP SYSTEM*
0 ESP Warning Lamp
1
2 Blinking: When ESP is activated.
3 ON: When ESP is deactivated (by pressing the ESP OFF
switch).
4 When ESP system is defective.
When ESP is activated, the indicator light is blinking and
5
a warning buzzer sounds. If this indicator illuminates in
6 spite of an activated ESP, this means a malfunction of the
ESP system.
7
8 Stopping ESP Function With ESPOFF Switch
9 If the driving wheels are slipping on snowy or icy roads,
ESPOFF Switch the engine rpm may not increase even when you depress
10 the accelerator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be
If you press the ESPOFF switch,
able to move your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP func-
11 the ESP function stops and the
indicator lamp in the instru- tion by pressing the ESPOFF switch. When the ESPOFF switch
12 ment cluster comes on. is pressed, the ESP function stops and the vehicle is
driven independently from the sensor outputs.
Press this switch again to re-
13 sume the ESP function. At this
time, the indicator lamp goes
Resuming ESP Function With ESPOFF Switch
14
out. If you push the ESPOFF switch again when the ESP function
15 is deactivated (the ESP warning lamp is turned on), the sys-
tem will be resumed and the ESP warning lamp on the in-
16 strument cluster goes out by resuming the ESP system.

0
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) System CAUTION 1
The Electronic Vehicle Stability Control Program (ESP) is a • If the ESP warning light comes on, the ESP related system is
supplementary driving safety system when your vehicle is un- defective. Make sure to check the vehicle at the nearest 2
stably moving in a certain situation, such as during a sharp Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
corner. The ESP applies brakes on a certain wheel(s) or con- • The ESP system does not operate during reverse driving. 3
trols the engine torque to compensate vehicle stability. These • The ESP system activates when the vehicle is unstable to cor-
actions help your vehicle avoid dangerous situations. The ESP rect the vehicle stability. When the ESP warning lamp and the
4
functions automatically, working only in very unstable warning alarm turn on, reduce the speed and pay extra atten-
tion to the road.
5
conditions; it does not operate under normal driving conditions.
If the ESP is engaged, the ESP warning light will flicker on the • The ESP system is only a supplementary device for the vehicle. 6
instrument cluster and a warning alarm will sound. When the vehicle exceeds its physical limits, it cannot be
controlled. Do not rely on the system. Keep driving safely. 7
BAS (Brake Assist System) Function • When ESP is applied, you may feel some noise or vibration from
A certain driver such as a female driver, aged driver, or a
the brake pedal or other relevant systems. They are caused by 8
pressure changes in the relevant systems.
driver with a disability is unable to depress the brake pedal
as hard as necessary. When the ESP system recognizes
• Do not drive off immediately after starting the engine. If you drive 9
off your vehicle within 2 minutes after turning the ignition switch
any emergency situations requiring hard braking, it automati- to “ON” position, the ESP self-diagnosis function does not operate. 10
cally delivers an extra high braking pressure to the wheels. In this case, the abnormal symptoms such as blinking of ESP warn-
ing lamp, alarming the buzzer, or braking the wheels may appear. 11
ARP (Active Rollover Protection) Function
This function is a part of the ESP system. When your ve- Driving Impression when ESP is Working 12
hicle moves in an extremely unstable manner, this function
helps the vehicle maintain normal stability.
When ESP is applied in a certain situation (the indicator blinks 13
and a warning buzzer sounds), such as during a sharp turn,
CAUTION you may feel that ESP controls each wheel and different lev- 14
els of needed braking force are applied to wheels. You may
The ARP system more powerfully controls the engine and each 15
wheel than the ESP function. When the ARP is applied, a sudden hear some noise or feel some vibrations from the brake pedal
decrease of vehicle speed or powerful braking force can make or other systems. They are caused by pressure changes in
steering your vehicle a little difficult. relevant system. You may also notice the engine output de- 16
creases even when the accelerator pedal is being depressed.

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS & GEAR SHIFT BUTTON (A/T) ON STEERING WHEEL
0
D- D+
1
VOL Gear shift button Gear shift button
2 (Down-shift) (Up-shift)
VOL
3 MODE
Increases/decreases volume
4 Audio mode changes when
the button is pressed.
5
POWER
6
The Power ON/ MUTE
7 OFF switch of
audio system is Stops audio output from the
8 located at left audio system. To resume
side of the steering wheel. the audio output, press the
9 To turn on the audio system, button again.
press this switch. To turn it
10 off, press this switch again.
11
12 SEEK
13 SEEK
14 • In CD (DVD) player/Cassette tape mode

- Press: Replay the next/previous track.
15 • In radio mode
16 - Press briefly: Manual searching for a station. Move to a stored station.
- Press and hold: Automatic searching for a station.

SWITCHES IN CENTER CONSOLE
Driver’s Seat Heating Switch* 0

AV Outlet* Rotate the seat heating switch from 1
External audio and ‘0’ (OFF) to the desired position (1~5).
video device can be 2
connected to the AV
system in vehicle 3
through this outlet.
4
Gear Shift Button (Tip Switch)
You can manually shift up or 5
down by pushing or pulling
this button at M position.
6
Cigarette Lighter
7
To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all the 8
way down. When it becomes heated, it automati-
Passenger’s Seat Heating Switch* cally pops out and is ready for use. 9
Rotate the seat heating switch from ‘0’
(OFF) to the desired position (1~5). 10
11
12
13
14
Transmission Mode Switch
You can select ‘Winter’ or ‘Standard’ mode 15
with this switch.
16

4-WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
0 4-Wheel Drive System DRIVING MODE

1 Transfer case which allows you, in the case of part-time 2H : 2-Wheel Drive
four wheel drive, to switch between two-wheel drive and This is rear wheel drive with
2 four-wheel drive. Compared with two-wheel drive high speed. Use this position
vehicles, this system provides more stable driving for normal driving. This posi-
3 conditions. This system ensures a more stable drive tion gives greater fuel
on wet or slippery roads. In case the greater traction is economy, quieter ride and
4 needed, you can shift into 4 Wheel Drive Low (4L). least drive train wear.
5
Types of Four-Wheel Drive System
6 All-Wheel Drive (AWD)* 4H : 4-Wheel Drive, High
7 AWD stands for the full-time 4WD system. Use this position on wet or
AWD reduces wheel slipage and provides greater slippery roads such as sandy,
8 driver control over the vehicle. AWD automatically splits muddy or snow covered
the torque between the front (40%) and rear (60%) roads.
9 wheels. This system controls the vehicle traction force
along with the ESP system.
10 Torque On-Demand (TOD) *
11 TOD, which is based on the Four-Wheel Drive, enables
the control unit to adjust the proportion of the torque
between the front and rear wheels according to driv- 4L : 4-Wheel Drive, Low
12
ing conditions. In case the greater traction is needed, Use this position for maxi-
13 you can shift into 4 Wheel Drive Low (4L). mum traction.
Part-Time 4-Wheel Drive
14 Normally, the vehicle is driving in 2WD mode. But if
needed, it can be changed into 4WD High (4H), and 4WD
15 Low (4L) by pressing the switch. This is equipped with the
control unit that supports the mode transfer. In 4WD mode,
16 the system splits the torque between the front (50%)
and rear (50%) wheels.

Driving Mode Change 4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH 0
Part-Time
1
2H 4H
2
It is recommended to shift under a speed of 70 km while
the vehicle is being driven. 3
• When shifting the driving mode to “4H”, 4
this indicator comes on.
• This indicator blinks during the mode 5
TOD
change from “4L” to “4H”. After completion
of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
6
Select a proper driving mode
comes on. according to the road conditions. 7
2H, 4H 4L 8
• Automatic Transmission Equipped Vehicle
9
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the gear 10
selector lever into the “N” position. Turn the switch to
the desired position while depressing the brake pedal. 11
• Manual Transmission Equipped Vehicle 12
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the shift
lever into the “Neutral” position. Turn the switch to the 13
desired position while depressing the clutch pedal.
NOTE 14
• When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this • The vehicle equipped with TOD system does not have the 2H
indicator blinks until the shifting operation (2-wheel drive) function because it automatically controls the 15
is completed. After completion of the mode driving force at front and rear wheels.
• The vehicle with AWD system does not have the 4WD switch
16
change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
because it is driven in full-time 4WD mode.

0 WARNING LIGHTS/INDICATORS AND CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
1 4WD HIGH Indicator Tight Cornering
• When shifting the driving Cornering a curve in 4WD mode (4L or 4H) may shake up the ve-
2 mode from “2H” to “4H”, this hicle or cause skidding. Such phenomena indicate that the four-
indicator comes on. wheel drive is operated normally, because they can be caused by
3
• When shifting the driving the resistance of the internal power system according to the differ-
4 mode from “4L” to “4H”, this ence of rotation between the front and rear wheels. Please avoid
indicator blinks until the shift- excessive and tight cornering in four-wheel drive mode to prevent
5 ing operation is completed. the power train from being damaged.
After completion of the mode
6 change to 4H, the indicator
comes on.
CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
7
• There could be mechanical noises and shocks during mode changes.
8 However, these are normal conditions due to the mode changing operations.
4WD LOW Indicator • Use only the 2H mode on a normal paved surface. Do not drive your ve-
9 hicle in the “4H” or “4L” position on paved road surfaces. Doing so will
When shifting the driving mode result in damages to the drive train.
• Driving in a 4 wheel mode on a normal paved surface will cause unwanted
10 to “4L”, this indicator blinks un-
noises, premature wear of tires, or increased fuel consumption.
til the shifting operation is • To shift from “4L” into another mode or vice versa, stop the vehicle and
11 completed. After completion of depress the brake pedal before any shift.
the mode change to 4L, the in- • If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system checked
12 dicator comes on. by the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
• When cornering a curved road in a 4-wheel drive mode (4L or 4H), there
13 could be some mechanical shocks and resistances in vehicle’s drive train.
These are normal conditions due to internal resistance in the drive train
14 4WD CHECK Warning Indicator when the 4-wheel drive mode is properly working. To avoid damages to
the drive train, do not drive your vehicle at an excessively high speed on
If this warning light comes on
15 while driving, have the 4WD
a sharply curved road.
• This helps to make the mode changes easily.
system checked by Ssangyong • In case of TOD, cornering a curve in 4L mode may cause shock. It is oper-
16 Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- ated normally, because it is caused by non-allowable speed difference
rized Service Center. between front and rear wheels to achieve maximum traction in 4L mode.

SWITCHES IN OVERHEAD CONSOLE, ROOM LAMP SWITCH
Spot Lamp Switch (Driver’s) 0

The front room lamp (driver’s) turns on when 1
pressing in this switch.
2
Sunroof Switch
Front Door Coupled Room The sunroof is opened/closed 3
Lamp Switch by pulling up/down the sunroof
If you open a door when this switch open/close switch. For details, 4
is pressed the room lamp comes refer to “Sunroof” section in
this manual.
5
on. When you close the door, the
room lamp is dimmed out. 6
7
Spot Lamp Switch 8
(Passenger’s)
The front room lamp (passenger’s) 9
turns on when pressing in this switch.
10
Center and Rear Room Lamp Switch

11
OFF position: The lamp does not come on. CAUTION 12
ON position: The lamp stays on. If your vehicle is left unattended while the spot
ON or center room lamp switch is turned on, the bat-
13
DOOR position ( ): The lamp comes on
DOOR tery may be discharged.
when the door is opened. The lamp goes 14
out when closing the opened door. If a door is opened for an extended period of
OFF time when the door switch is pressed in, the bat- 15
tery may be discharged.
16

Instrument Cluster 5 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Instrument Cluster (D27DTP, D27DT) .......... 5-2 Seat Belt Reminder, Engine Oil Pressure
5
Instrument Cluster (G32D) ........................... 5-4 Warning Light, Air Bag Warning Light, 6
Battery Charge Warning Light ................. 5-15 7
Tachometer, Speedometer ......................... 5-6
Door Ajar Warning Light,
Fuel Gauge, Coolant Temperature Gauge 5-7 8
ABS Warning Light .................................... 5-16
Display .......................................................... 5-8 9
EBD Warning Light, HDC Indicator,
Adjusting the Instrument Cluster Illumination 10
Engine Check Warning Light,
(Black-Face Type) ........................................ 5-9
Front Fog Light Indicator .......................... 5-17 11
Water Separator Warning Light
High Beam Indicator, Turn Signal/Hazard 12
(DI Engine Only) ......................................... 5-10
Warning Indicator, 4WD Indicators .......... 5-18
ESP Warning Light, Immobilizer 13
Brake Warning Light, Cruise Control
Indicator, Winter Mode Indicator, 14
Indicator*, Engine Overheat Warning Light,
SSPS Warning Light ................................. 5-14
Low Fuel Level Warning Light ................. 5-19 15
Glow Indicator (For Diesel Engine) .......... 5-20 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (D27DTP, D27DT)
0 BLACK FACE TYPE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. ESP warning light 15. Engine check warning light 29. TPMS warning light
10 2. Left turn signal indicator 16. Engine oil pressure warning light 30. Global warning
3. Right turn signal indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 31. Low fuel level warning light
11 4. High beam indicator 18. SSPS warning light 32. Trip switch
12 5. Front fog light indicator 19. EAS level change indicator 33. Tire inflation pressure indicator
6. Winter mode indicator 20. EAS warning light 34. 4WD LOW indicator
13 7. Tachometer 21. EPB warning light 35. 4WD HIGH indicator
8. Speedometer 22. Automatic parking brake setting indicator 36. 4WD CHECK warning light
14 9. Fuel gauge 23. Brake warning light 37. Water separator warning light
15 10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 24. Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat) 38. Glow indicator
11. Immobilizer indicator 25. Air bag warning light 39. Engine overheat warning light
16 12. ABS warning light 26. Door ajar warning light 40. Hazard indicator
13. EBD warning light 27. Auto shift indicator 41. Auto cruise indicator
14. HDC indicator 28. Odometer/ Trip odometer
GETtheMANUALS.org
STANDARD TYPE 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. ESP warning light 13. EBD warning light 24. Odometer/ Trip odometer
2. Left turn signal indicator 14. HDC indicator 25. Low fuel level warning light 10
3. Right turn signal indicator 15. Engine check warning light 26. Trip switch
4. High beam indicator 16. Engine oil pressure warning light 27. 4WD LOW indicator
11
5. Front fog light indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 28. 4WD HIGH indicator 12
6. Winter mode indicator 18. SSPS warning light 29. 4WD CHECK warning light
7. Tachometer 19. Brake warning light 30. Water separator warning light 13
8. Speedometer 20. Seat belt reminder (driver’s seat) 31. Glow indicator
9. Fuel gauge 21. Air bag warning light 32. Engine overheat warning light 14
10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 22. Door ajar warning light 33. Hazard indicator 15
11. Immobilizer indicator 23. Auto shift indicator 34. Auto cruise indicator
12. ABS warning light 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (G32D)
0 BLACK FACE TYPE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 2. Left turn signal indicator 15. Engine check warning light 28. Odometer/ Trip odometer
11 4. High beam indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 30. Global warning
12 5. Front fog light indicator 18. SSPS warning light 31. Low fuel level warning light
13 7. Tachometer 20. EAS warning light 33. Tire inflation pressure indicator
14 9. Fuel gauge 22. Automatic parking brake setting indicator 35. 4WD HIGH indicator
15 10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 23. Brake warning light 36. 4WD CHECK warning light
16 12. ABS warning light 25. Air bag warning light 38. Hazard indicator
GETtheMANUALS.org
STANDARD TYPE 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2. Left turn signal indicator 15. Engine check warning light 28. Odometer/ Trip odometer 10
4. High beam indicator 17. Battery charge warning light 30. Global warning
11
5. Front fog light indicator 18. SSPS warning light 31. Low fuel level warning light 12
7. Tachometer 20. EAS warning light 33. Tire inflation pressure indicator 13
9. Fuel gauge 22. Automatic parking brake setting indicator 35. 4WD HIGH indicator 14
10. Engine coolant temperature gauge 23. Brake warning light 36. 4WD CHECK warning light 15
12. ABS warning light 25. Air bag warning light 38. Hazard indicator 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
1 Diesel Gasoline
RED ZONE RED ZONE
2
3
RED ZONE
4 (GCC ONLY)
5
6
7
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in kilometers
8 minute. Multiply 1,000 to the current number, then it will be per hour (km/h) or mile per hour (mph).
the current number of engine revolutions.
9 WARNING
WARNING Excessive speed can damage engine. Do not let engine reach ex-
10 cessive speed, indicated by pointer being in red zone.
Do not let engine reach excessive speed, indicated by the pointer
11 being in the red zone.
12 NOTE
13
14
15
16
Speedometer-KPH (MPH) Speedometer-MPH (KPH)
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL GAUGE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
This gauge indicates the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The temperature gauge indicates the temperature of the en-
Fill up the fuel tank before the needle reaches “E”. gine coolant. 10
CAUTION 11
The engine can overheat. 12
• If the pointer reaches the red zone, stop the vehicle.
• Allow engine to cool. 13
If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine. 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 DISPLAY
1 Auto Shift Indicator
This indicator shows the gear selector lever position and
2 currently selected gear.
3
4
5
6
7 Trip Switch
Gear selector lever position
8 (P, R, N, D, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1)
9
Odometer and Trip Odometer Display
10
Each time the TRIP/RESET switch on the center panel is pressed lightly, the
11 indicators are changed. To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.
12
13
14
15 Trip Trip A Trip B Illumination control
Unit: 0~999999km Unit: 0.0~999.9km Unit: 0.0~999.9km mode
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0
ILLUMINATION (BLACK-FACE TYPE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Trip Switch 7
8
9
When ILL appears in the trip display by pressing the trip switch
(Adjustment Mode for Instrument Cluster Illumination), keep 10
pressing the trip switch, then the instrument cluster illumina-
tion will be adjusted while ILL 6, ILL5, ILL4, ILL3, ILL2 and 11
ILL1 appear in the display. Stop pressing the switch when the
proper illumination is achieved.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR WARNING LIGHT (DI ENGINE ONLY)
0
Water Separator Warning Light (Without additional water separator)
1 When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level,
this warning light comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force of the vehicle
2 decreases. If these conditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter.
3 For the draining procedures, please refer to “How to drain the water from the fuel filter
(Without additional water separate)” on the next page.
5 Water Separator Warning Light (With additional water separator)

6 When the water level inside the water separator exceeds a certain level, this warning light
comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force of the vehicle decreases. If these con-
7 ditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter & water separator.
For the draining procedures, refer to “How to drain the water from the fuel filter (With additional
8 water separator)” on page 5-12.
10
11 CAUTIONS
12 • The fuel system in the engine may get serious damage if • When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel
you keep driving while the warning light is on. Prompt cor- filter exceeds a certain level, this warning light comes on
13 rection should be necessary. and a buzzer sounds. Also, the driving force of the ve-
• Using low quality fuel could result in serious damage hicle decreases. If these conditions occur, immediately
14 drain the water from fuel filter. If the above conditions still
to the engine due to the water or impurities in fuel. Never
15 use low quality fuel. exist after draining the water, have the system checked
by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
• After removing any water in the fuel filter, pump fuel until
16 the priming pump is fully filled before starting the engine.
Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DIESEL ENGINE
How to Drain the Water from the Fuel Filter (Without Additional Water Separator) 0
1. Locate the fuel filter in the engine compartment and place 4. Wait until a certain amount of fuel gets out from the port,
a water container under it. then turn the drain plug to the closing direction to tighten it.
1
2. Disconnect the connector under the drain plug of the water 5. Engage the connector under the drain plug and press the 2
separator. priming pump until it becomes rigid.
3. Turn the drain plug to the opening direction to drain the 6. Close the engine hood and start the engine. 3
water.
4
5
6
7
Priming pump
8
9
Fuel filter 10
11
WARNING 12
Closing line. It may cause a starting problem or fuel system problem. Make 13
Opening
Drain plug
14
Connector
CAUTION 15
ing procedures. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DIESEL ENGINE
How to Drain the Water from the Fuel Filter (With Additional Water Separator)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Fuel filter
12 CAUTION
Drain the water from the fuel filter & water separator immediately after the
13 warning light comes on. If you cannot do that by yourself, visit the nearest
14
15 WARNING Water
The fuel system in the engine may get serious damage if you keep driving Priming pump separator
16 while the warning light is on. Prompt correction should be necessary.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1. Locate the fuel filter ( ) & water separator ( ) in the en-
gine compartment.
1
2. Place the water container under the fuel filter & water 2
separator.
3. Disconnect the connector under the drain plug ( ) of the
3
water separator. 4
4. Turn two drain plugs to the “ ” direction to drain the water.
5. Press the priming pump until all water is drained. After 5
draining, turn the drain plug until the gasket contact to the
6
threaded plug hole, then tighten (“ ” direction) it 1/2 turns
by hand. 7
CAUTION 8
1. Fuel filter Be careful not to be injured by surrounding equipment during the work-
2. Priming pump ing procedures. 9
3. Water separator
4. Drain plug 10
6. Engage the connector under the drain plug and press the
5. Connector
A. Opening direction of drain plug
priming pump ( ) until it becomes rigid. 11
B. Closing direction of drain plug 7. Close the engine hood and start the engine.
12
WARNING
13
line. It may cause a starting problem or a fuel system problem. Make 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 ESP WARNING LIGHT WINTER MODE INDICATOR
If you press the ESPOFF switch, the The indicator comes on when the
1 ESP function stops and the indicator Winter mode (W) switch near the
2 lamp in the instrument cluster comes gear selector lever is pressed.
on. If the ESP function operates, the Use this mode to drive off smoothly
3 indicator lamp flickers. on an icy and slippery road.
If the ESP warning light is on without
4 any deactivation of the system, there are some malfunctions
in the system. Take the vehicle to an authorized dealer or
5 service operation. SSPS WARNING LIGHT
6 For more information about ESP (Electronic Stability
Program), refer to Chapter 4.
SSPS system is defective. When this
7 warning light comes on, the steerability
8 becomes heavier.
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR
9
This indicator comes on when the igni-
10 tion key is communicating with the en- What is SSPS?
gine control unit (during engine starting) Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS) is the device that pro-
11 for 0.5 seconds. vides good driving condition and steering stability by making
The time needed for communication the steerability heavier in high-speed driving, and lighter in stop
12 between the immobilizer key and or low-speed driving.
13 ECU can vary. When the time is very short, the immobilizer
CAUTION
14 If the SSPS warning light comes on or when you feel the steering
CAUTION wheel heavy, have the SSPS system checked by Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
15 If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that there is something wrong
in the immobilizer system. Have the system checked by a
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT REMINDER AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT 0
When the ignition switch is turned to When the ignition is switched on, this
the “ON” position and the driver’s warning light illuminates and then
1
seat belt is not fastened, the re- should go off, to confirm that the air 2
minder light will come on and the bag is operational.
seat belt warning chime will sound If it does not come on, or if it does 3
for 6 seconds. This reminding opera- not go off, or if it flashes or illumi-
tion stops when the driver fastens the nates continuously while driving, it means that there is a 4
seat belt even during its operation malfunction in the system. Have the air bag system checked
period. without delay by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- 5
6
NOTE 7
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT For more detailed information, refer to the “Seat Belt and Air Bag”
section. 8
ignition is switched on and should go
out when the engine is started.
9
10
BATTERY CHARGE WARNING LIGHT
11
CAUTION This warning light comes on when
If this light does not go off after engine starting or comes on while
the ignition switch is turned on and it 12
driving, it means there is a malfunction in the system. Running the
goes off when the engine is started.
engine with the oil pressure warning light on can cause serious dam- If this light doesn’t go off after engine 13
age to the engine. Have the lubricating system checked by a starting or comes on while driving, it
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. means there is a malfunction in the
14
system. Have the charging system checked by a Ssangyong 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 DOOR AJAR WARNING LIGHT ABS WARNING LIGHT
This light comes on when a door or the When the ignition switch is turned
1 tailgate is either opened or not closed “ON”, this warning light comes on and
2 completely. goes out if the system is normal.
3
4 WARNING
WARNING
5 • If this light doesn’t come on when the ignition is switched to “ON”
Driving with the door open can cause injury to people inside and out- or if this light doesn’t go out, contact your nearest Ssangyong Dealer
side the vehicle. or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. If this light illuminates
6 while driving, a malfunction of ABS is indicated. In this case the
• Before driving off, close all doors.
brake system performs its regular function but without the anti-lock-
7 • Check whether or not the light is off.
ing capability. Have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible if
8 this condition occurs.
9 • ABS is a device that prevents wheels from locking during braking
to allow steering. However, the ABS system does not shorten the
stopping distance.
10
11
CAUTION
12 When the engine starts and the vehicle starts to move, ABS performs
self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pressure to the braking units.
13 This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ABS is prop-
erly functioning.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD WARNING LIGHT ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT 0
When the ignition switch is turned to If the light stays on or comes on while
“ON”, this warning light comes on and driving, some of the engine control com-
1
goes out if the system is normal. If the ponents including sensors and devices 2
EBD system is abnormal, the EBD are defective.
warning light stays on. 3
WARNING WARNING 4
If the EBD warning light stays on, have the system checked by a If the engine halts due to a completely empty fuel tank and the en- 5
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. gine check light comes on even after refueling, the engine’s power
output may decrease within a certain driving distance (about 30 km).
6
CAUTION 7
HDC INDICATOR When this warning light comes on, the vehicle operates in safety
mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and to prevent the sys- 8
When the HDC switch is pressed tem from being damaged. In this mode, the engine driving force
once, HDC is ready for use. The may be decreased or the engine may stall. When this happens, 9
green HDC indicator in the instru- have the system checked at the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or
ment cluster comes on. When the Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. 10
button is pressed again, HDC is de-
activated and the indicator goes off. 11
When HDC is applied, the green HDC indicator blinks. 12
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
heated or malfunctioning. For more information, refer to When the tail or head lights are on, 13
Chapter 4, HDC Switch. the fog lights come on if the fog light
switch is turned to the “ON” position. 14
CAUTION Then, the fog light indicator in the in-
strument cluster comes on. 15
If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or
malfunctioning. If the indicator is on even after the system has 16
cooled down enough, have the nearest authorized dealer or ser-
vice center check the system.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 HIGH BEAM INDICATOR 4WD INDICATORS
This indicator illuminates when the high The vehicle with AWD (All Wheel Drive) system doesn’t have
1 beam headlamp is switched on. the 4WD indicators and 4WD switch.
2 4WD Low Indicator
3 When shifting the driving mode to “4L”,
this indicator blinks until the shifting
4 WARNING
operation is completed. After comple-
tion of the mode change to 4L, the in-
5 Driving with high beam headlamp disturbs the approaching vehicle’s
dicator comes on.
visibility. For safe driving, use the high beam headlamp only when it
is very hard to see the road.
6 4WD High Indicator
When shifting the driving mode from
7 “4L” to “4H”, this indicator blinks until
8 the shifting operation is completed. Af-
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD WARNING INDICATOR ter completion of the mode change to
9 Turn Signal Indicator 4H, the indicator comes on.
This indicator blinks when the turn
10 signal switch is turned on.
4WD Check Warning Light
11 Both indicators blink when the hazard ignition switch is turned to “ON” and
warning switch is turned on. should go out if the system is normal.
12 If the “4WD CHECK” warning light
Hazard Warning Indicator stays on, have the 4WD system
13
This indicator blinks when the hazard checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
14 warning switch is turned on. vice Center.
15 CAUTION
• If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the 4WD system
16 checked.
• Do not drive your vehicle over 80 km/h in 4H mode.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ENGINE OVERHEAT WARNING LIGHT 0
This warning light comes on when the When the engine coolant temperate is
parking brake is applied and/or the abnormally hot, the engine overheat
1
brake fluid level is lower than a speci- warning light blinks and a warning 2
fied level. buzzer sounds. When this happens,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and let 3
the engine cool down. For more
CAUTION information, refer to Chapter 12 “When the engine is 4
overheating.”
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds (over 10 km/h) while 5
the parking brake is applied, the parking brake warning light comes
CAUTION
on and a warning buzzer sounds. If it occurs, immediately stop
the vehicle and release the parking brake. If you keep driving the vehicle with the warning light and buzzer 6
on, the engine can be damaged. After completely cooling down
the engine have an authorized dealer or service center check the 7
WARNING vehicle.
Driving the vehicle with the brake fluid warning light on is dangerous.
8
If the parking brake light stays on, you must immediately have your 9
vehicle checked and serviced by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center. LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT 10
This warning light indicates that the fuel
will soon be exhausted. The time it
11
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR* takes to turn on, however, varies ac- 12
cording to the vehicle operation or road
This indicator comes on when the cruise conditions. Do not wait until this light is 13
control is switched on. on to refuel the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that fuel should be added as soon as this light comes on. 14
CAUTION 15
While driving on steep hills or rough roads, this warning light may
come on if the remaining fuel level is low. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 GLOW INDICATOR (FOR DIESEL ENGINE)
When the ignition switch is turned to
1 “ON”, this indicator comes on and
2 stays for a short time or may go off right
away. When the glow plugs are suffi-
3 ciently heated, the light will go out. In
the vehicle equipped with a direct in-
4 jection type engine, this indicator may come on very shortly or
may not even come on.
5
CAUTION
6 When the glow indicator comes on while driving or the engine cannot
be started properly, have the glow plug system checked by a
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Transmission and Brake System 6 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Manual Transmission ................................. 6-2

5
6
Gear Selector Lever in Automatic
Transmission ............................................... 6-4 7
Driving Tips For Automatic Transmission 6-6 8
Gear Selector Lever Positions ................. 6-7 9
Winter (W) / Standard Mode (S) .............. 6-13 10
Safety Mode (Automatic Transmission) . 6-14
11
Parking Aid System* ................................ 6-15

12
13
3.5° Aiming Down Of Outside Rearview
Mirror During Reverse Driving ............... 6-17 14
Brake System ............................................ 6-18 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The manual transmission in your vehicle has 5 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal.
0 Then, move the gearshift lever into a desire gear. After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
1
5th Gear
2
Position for very high speed driving on a
3 highway
3rd Gear Be careful to avoid any unwanted shift from
4 For low- or mid-speed driving. Be careful to the 5th gear into the 2nd gear, rather than
avoid any unwanted shift from the 2nd gear the 4th gear.
5
into the 5th gear, rather than the 3rd gear.
6
5th
7 3rd
8 1st Gear 1st Reverse Gear

Position for driving off and high traction Position for reverse driving
9 force Reverse
10 Depress the clutch pedal to its deepest 4th
point and move the shift lever to “1”. Neutral 4th Gear
2nd
11 Then, slowly release the clutch pedal
Position for normal and high speed
while gently depressing the accelerator
12 driving
pedal to drive off.
13 Neutral Position
14 Position for engine start, vehicle stop, 2nd Gear
and parking
Position for low speed driving
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
GEAR SHIFTING IN MANUAL TRANSMISSION 0
Starting CAUTION 1
The engine can be started only when the clutch pedal is • If the clutch pedal is frequently half-depressed, the clutch disk
depressed. will be easily worn out. Use only as needed. 2
• Do not put your foot on the clutch pedal if not shifting gears.
Driving Off • While your vehicle is moving, do not put your hand on the shift
3
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal. Then, move lever except to shift gears. Otherwise, the gear may be disen-
gaged from the transmission and the internal transmission com-
4
the gear selector lever into a desire gear (1st gear or reverse
ponents may be damaged.
gear). After shifting, release the clutch slowly. 5
Reversing WARNING 6
You should stop your vehicle and fully depress the clutch pedal • When shifting from a high gear into a lower gear, ensure that
before you shift into the reverse position. the RPM gauge pointer does not go into the red zone on the 7
gauge. Especially, when shifting from the 5th to the 4th gear,
moving the gear shift lever to the left too much may result in 8
NOTE shifting into the 2nd gear. This will cause a sudden increase of
• When the temperature of the transmission oil is very low on a
the engine speed and may damage the engine and the 9
transmission.
cold day, you may have some difficulty for shifting gears. This
is a normal phenomenon. • Do not shift into the second next higher gear from a lower gear. 10
Also, while the engine is rotating fast, do not shift into a lower
• When you have difficulty for shifting into the 1st or reserve gear,
gear. 11
put the gear shift lever into the neural position and release the
clutch pedal. Then, depress the pedal again and shift into the 12
intended gear.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER IN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
0
Tip Switch in “M” Position
1 Gear Position (Manual Gear Shift)
P: Parking The shiftable gear can be
2 R: Reverse adjusted by moving this switch to
3 N: Neutral forward and rearward when the
D: Driving gear selector lever is in “M”
4 position.
5
6 Mode Switch
7 • W : Winter mode
8 • S : Standard mode
Use the standard mode in normal
9 driving conditions. Shift Lock Release Button when
10 Locked in the “P” Position
If you cannot move the selector lever from the
11 “P” or “N” position, try to move the lever while
12 pushing down here with a sharp object such
as a ballpoint pen. For your safety, turn off
13 the engine and depress the brake pedal be-
Selection of Manual / fore the attempt.
14 Automatic Shift Function
To shift into any other positions from the “P”
15 D: Automatic shift according to the driving condition or “N” position after stopping the vehicle,
M: Manual shift you have to depress the brake pedal with
16 the ignition switch “ON”

BRAKE SYSTEM
Starting and Driving Off 0
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”
and the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid
CAUTION 1
starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so. ing into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Especially, 2
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal op- when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the “D”
erating range (below 1,000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal de- shift indicator comes on for several seconds with the brake pedal 3
depressed.
pressed and shift into “D” or “R”.
• When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If 4
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engage-
move the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a ment can damage the driving train. 5
while several seconds before driving off with the brake pedal • HDC is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is
depressed. applied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated. 6
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress • Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in
the accelerator pedal gradually. both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with
7
the selector lever in “P”.
8
WARNING • As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved
• For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving into the “P” or “R” position when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h. 9
the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped. • Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
• Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selec- 10
tor lever.
• If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal securely. 11
• When starting the engine with the accelerator depressed, your ve- 12
hicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
• When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at 13
a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
the engine speed becomes stable. 14
• To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
“P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion. 15
• When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a
higher to a lower gear can severely damage the vehicle. In addition, 16
your vehicle may lose its stability and be at a high risk.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING TIPS FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
0 Creep Phenomenon Engine Brake

Without any depression of the accelerator pedal, your ve- When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is
1 hicle can move slowly if the selector lever is in any position in motion, the engine speed decreases. This decreased en-
other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You gine speed creates an extra braking force. On a down hill,
2 engaging a lower gear can generate a slower engine speed
can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the
3 brake in heavy traffic or narrow areas. and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using this
engine brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed with-
4 CAUTION
out excessively using the brake system. The lower gear,
the more braking force.
5 • On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite
direction of the intended direction in spite of the creep effect. When
stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal. CAUTION
6
• Never move the selector lever to the “N” position while driving. By • Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long
7 doing so, the engine brake cannot be applied. This may result in hill. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or the
unwanted accidents. fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force.
8 • Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear se-
lector lever is in the “N” position.
9 Kickdown Function • Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires may
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator slip.
10
pedal completely to the floor. Then, a one- or two-lever gear
11 will automatically be engaged. This is called the Kickdown
function.
12
13 CAUTION
• Do not use the kickdown operation while driving on slippery or
14 sharply curved roads.
• If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability and
15 fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse.
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
GEAR SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS
P: PARK POSITION 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P: Park position Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or 9
R: Reverse position stay in a location for an extended length of time.
N: Neutral position To shift into any other position, depress the brake pedal. 10
D: Drive position WARNING 11
M: Mamual shift • Never shift into “P” when the vehicle is moving, or the transmis- 12
sion will be damaged.
• Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”. 13
• To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch 14
must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed.
Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without 15
the two procedures may damage the selector lever.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 R: REVERSE POSITION N: NEUTRAL POSITION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 • Use this position to reverse the vehicle. At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the
To shift into “R” from “P” or “N”, completely stop the wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However,
10 for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
vehicle and depress the brake pedal. When the shift lever
To shift into “D” or “R” position from “N” position after stop-
is in “R” , and parking aid system will be activated ping the vehicle, you have to depress the brake pedal with
11 (optional (If equipped)). the ignition switch “ON”.
12 WARNING
WARNING
13 • Warm up the engine for approx.3 minutes when the ambient tem-
• Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
perature is below -15°C. Otherwise, the gear selector lever may
• Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when the not be moved smoothly (N→R). It is designed for protecting the
14 selector lever is at “R”. vehicle and is not a fault.
• Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when
15 CAUTION the vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged.
• If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral
As a safety function, the gear selector lever cannot be moved into
16 “P” or “R” when the vehicle speed is about 8 km/h.
position, depress the brake pedal firmly.
• Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the
vehicle is in motion.

BRAKE SYSTEM
D: DRIVE POSITION 0
WARNING 1
ing into “D”, or the transmission will be damaged. Especially, when 2
you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle, wait for
a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake 3
pedal depressed.
• Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill 4
according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake pedal.
5
CAUTION 6
Please note that the vehicle may slowly move forward on level ground
when the selector lever is in “D”.
7
8
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmis- WARNING
9
sion is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 5th gears ac- • If you touch the selector lever unexpectedly while driving, the shift-
cording to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal. able gear may be changed. It can make the vehicle unstable. Be 10
careful not to touch the selector lever while driving (especially dur-
ing the winter season).
11
• Do not downshift abruptly (3, 2, or 1) when the vehicle speed is
high (D or 4). You could lose control and hit people or objects 12
(especially on a slippery road).
• If low-range maximum speeds are exceeded when the selector le- 13
ver is in low gears, the transmission can be damaged.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE
1 Shift Lock Function
2 This system locks the gear selector lever in the automatic
transmission according to the driving status and condi-
3 tions to prevent driver from making operational mistakes,
to protect the system, and to provide good driving stability.
4
5 Shift Lever Lock in “P” or “N” Position
6 To shift from “P”, the ignition switch must be turned to
ON and the brake pedal must be depressed. Shift lever lock
7 If you cannot shift out of “P”, check the followings: release
- The ignition key is in “ON”.
8
- The brake pedal is depressed.
9
Prohibition of Gear Shift from “N” to “R” If you cannot shift out of “P” with the ignition switch in
10 ON ,and the brake pedal depressed:
While Driving
11 1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off.
To maintain the vehicle stability and protect the drive train of
the vehicle, the gear shifting from “N” to “R” is not available 2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock re-
12 when the vehicle speed about 8 km/h. lease lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the lever
to other position.
13
WARNING
14 If this happens, have your vehicle repaired by the nearest Ssangyong
dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible.
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
MANUAL GEAR SHIFT BY TIP SWITCH 0
Adjustment for the Shiftable Gear Tip Switch on Steering Wheel 1
Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the tip switch af-
ter moving the gear selector lever from “D” to “M” position. 2
Selecting “M”: 3
Manual gear shift Shift Shift up 4
down
5
6
7
If the gear selector level is moved to “M” position while driving, 8
the gear is shifted down to the next lower gear.
9
NOTE Tip Switch in Gear Selector Lever
To prevent shift shock and to protect the system, in some cases, the 10
current gear may not be shifted to the lower gear even if the gear
selector lever is moved to “M” position. 11
Use of Engine Brake 12
Shiftup
To use the engine brake, change into the manual gear shift mode
first, then operate the tip switch to next lower shiftable gear. 13
CAUTION
Shift down 14
• Operate the tip switch only once. If you keep pressing the button,
the gear may be shifted through several steps in a series.
15
• Abruptly using the engine brake may make driving unstable. Do 16
not use the engine brake abruptly especially when driving on
roads covered with snow or ice.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 GEAR POSITION DISPLAY ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• In this position, you can only use the 1st gear Manual Gear Shift Position
1 in the transmission. Use this position on long
2 mountainous terrains, steep hills, and rough off-
road. This also provides the engine brake ef-
3 fect on steep downhills.
4 • The drive position prevents the transmission

5 from shifting into the third or fourth gear. Se-
lect drive range 2 for more power when climb-
6 ing hills, for the engine braking effects when
driving down steep hills.
7
• At this position, the transmission is automati-
8 cally shifted from the 1st gear up to the 3rd gear
9 according to the vehicle speed. You can get the
engine brake effect when using this position
CAUTION
10 during downhill driving.
• When pushing and holding the manual gear shift switch, the gear
11 • Select this position for normal forward driving on
may be shifted through several steps in series. Make sure to shift
one step at a time.
12 paved roads. In this position, the transmission • Please note that the gear may be upshifted if you fully depress the
is automatically shifted from the 1st gear up to accelerator pedal while driving with 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear.
13 the 4th gear according to the vehicle speed. • If you apply excessive force when moving the manual gear shift
switch, the gear may not be shifted into other gears. Soft and smooth
14 operation is recommended.
• In this position, the transmission is automati-
15 cally shifted from the 1st gear up to the 5th gear
according to the vehicle speed. Select this po-
16 sition for normal forward driving on paved roads.

BRAKE SYSTEM
WINTER (W) / STANDARD MODE (S)
0
Mode Switch 1
Winter Mode
In this mode, the vehicle can start off from the 2nd gear 2
(forward and reverse). Use this mode in the event of start-
ing-off on slippery roads. 3
Winter Mode (W) 4
• To select the winter mode, press “W” on the mode switch. The 5
“WINTER” indicator in the instrument cluster comes on. Use the standard mode in 6
• In this mode, the vehicle can start from the 2nd gear (forward normal driving conditions
and reverse). Use this mode in the event of starting-off on and use the winter mode 7
slippery roads. on slippery roads.
8
Standard Mode (S)
• Use the standard mode in normal driving conditions.
9
10
How to Start Off the Vehicle with 2nd
Forward/Reverse Gear
11
1. Press the “W” portion of the mode switch to select the 12
winter mode.
2. Place the selector lever to “D” and check if the shift lever
13
indicator shows “D”. 14
3. You can now start off the vehicle with the 2nd forward gear.
4. Place the selector lever to the “R” position to start off the
CAUTION 15
• Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill
vehicle with the 2nd reverse gear. according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake pedal. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SAFETY MODE (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
0 SYMPTOMS RESETTING THE SAFETY MODE WHEN

When the transmission has an electrical or mechanical fault, THE GEAR IS FIXED
1 the transmission operates in the safety mode to maintain mini-
2 mum driving conditions and to prevent the transmission from How to Reset the Safety Mode
being damaged.
1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to “P”.
3
When the transmission is defective, the symptoms that can 2. Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 seconds.
4 occur are as follows: 3. Start the engine.
5 • Decreased driving force while driving at high speed
6 • Fixed gear position during driving (cannot accelerate the Symptoms After Resetting the Safety Mode
vehicle) • If the vehicle operates normally after resetting, the problems
7 are corrected.
CAUTION
8 • If gear is fixed at the 2nd forward gear in the “D” position
• If you find any symptoms caused by mechanical or electrical de-
fects in the transmission, stop the vehicle immediately and reset
or the 2nd reverse gear in “R”. Have the system checked
9 the safety mode. by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.
10 • If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd for-
ward gear in “D” or 2nd reverse gear in “R”) still exists, have
11 the system checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Au-
12 • If the mechanical or electrical problem still exists, have the sys-
tem checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
13 Service Center.
14
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING AID SYSTEM*
When the gear selector lever is shifted into “R”, the parking aid system is
0
Distance Alarm interval
activated and the sensors in the rear bumper detect the distance to any 1
obstacle. You can figure out the distance from the obstacle to your vehicle over 1.2 m no alarm
by the alarming sound. The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle 2
approaches the object.
90 cm ~ 1.2 m approx. 2.6 sec 3
4
60 cm ~ 90 cm approx. 0.7 sec
5
25 cm ~ 60 cm alarm stays on 6
7
CAUTION 8
• The alarm does not sound if the distance
between sensor and obstacle is less than 9
25 cm. However, if the sensor detects
the obvious obstacle, the alarm may 10
sound.
• Do not rely on the parking aid system 11
while gear selector lever is in “R” position.
Drive backward while checking the rear 12
side of your vehicle.
Obstacle Detecting Sensor
• If the buzzer sounds abnormally or 13
When you move the gear selector sounds for over 3 seconds when plac-
lever to “R”, the alarm sounds ac- ing the gear selector lever to “R” position, 14
cording to the distance from obstacle the parking aid system is defective. Have
to vehicle. the system checked at Ssangyong Dealer 15
or Ssangyong Authorized Service center.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CAUTION
1 You should continue to utilize the mirrors or turning your The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle ap-
2 head. When reversing, adhere to the common proaches the obstacle.
precautions.
3 • The parking aid system is a supplementary system to help X Certain obstacles that sensors cannot detect
your parking. It is not intended to replace the driver’s • Thin and narrow objects, such as wires, ropes, or chains
4 attentiveness. • Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that absorb ultrasonic
5 • Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a waves.
high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could • Obstacles lower than the bumper: Drainage or puddle
6 be damaged.
• Normally, when you select the “R” position with the igni- X Sensor Cannot Detect
7 tion “ON”, the alarm sounds “beep” once. • When the sensing portion is frozen.
8 • When the sensing portion is covered by rain, water drops,
snow or mud.
9
X Weak Sensing Scopes
10 • When they are partially covered by snow or mud.
11 • When the ambient temperature is too high or too low.
12 X Not Defective But Improperly Working

• When driving on rough roads, gravel roads, hills, or grass.
13 In the parking lot as shown in the figure, the upper por-
• When the bumper height is changed due to a heavy load.
tion of the vehicle can be hit before the sensor operation,
14 so check with the outside rearview mirrors or by turning • When receiving other ultrasonic signals (metal sounds or
your head during parking. air braking noises from heavy commercial vehicles).
15
• When a high-power radio is turned on.
16 • When the sensor is hindered by improperly fitted accessories.

BRAKE SYSTEM
3.5° AIMING DOWN OF OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR DURING REVERSE DRIVING
0
3.5° Aiming Down 1. Select left (L) or right (R)
side mirror with the mirror
1
select switch. 2
3
4
5
2. The selected mirror aims
down 3.5° when the gear 6
selector lever is moved to
“R” position. 7
8
R 3. The outside rearview mir-
ror returns to the original 9
position when shifting out
from “R” position 10
11
CAUTION
12
• This function does not operate when the mirror selection switch is
at center position. 13
• This is a supplementary system to help your driving. It is not in-
tended to replace the driver’s attentiveness. 14
• If you need to operate the windows, complete it before shifting to
“R” position. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE SYSTEM
0 Warning Light & Indicator

1 Brake ABS EBD HDC ESP
warning light warning light warning light indicator warning light
2
3
4
5
HDC switch* ESPOFF switch*
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 Parking brake Brake pedal
(foot brake)
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE PEDAL (FOOT BRAKE) BRAKE WARNING LIGHT 0
The brake pedal (foot brake) is designed to decrease the ve-
hicle speed and stop the vehicle. Do not excessively apply
1
the brake pedal while going down a long hill. The brake sys- 2
tem will overheat causing the vapor lock or fade phenom-
enon thus losing braking force. Use the foot brake along with
Illuminating 3
the engine braking effects by selecting lower gears.
This warning light comes on when the parking brake is ap- 4
CAUTION plied and/or the brake fluid level is lower than a specified level.
Avoid abrupt engine braking on slippery roads or the tires may slip.
5
Flashing
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds (at a speed of 10
6
Fade? km/h or higher) while the parking brake is applied, the parking 7
brake warning light flickers and the warning buzzer sounds. If
Reduction or loss in braking force due to loss of friction be-
tween brake pads and disc.
it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and release the park- 8
ing brake.
Vapor Lock? 9
Brake Pads/Discs
When the brake system is overheated, the fluid in the brake 10
lines will boil and form bubbles. Only the bubbles will be Check the brake pads/discs for wear at every 10,000 km of
compressed when the brake pedal is depressed. So the driving and replace if necessary. 11
brakes cannot work properly due to loss of braking force. If a brake pad/disc squeaks, replace it with new one
immediately. 12
Engine Brake?
It indicates that they should be replaced. 13
A system that allows for the slowing of a vehicle that is
independent of the conventional braking systems. A driver
would normally down-shift to slow the driver’s descent of
CAUTION 14
The service interval is subject to driving style.
a hill, using engine compression. The engine brake in- 15
creases the effectiveness of this regarding force.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 ESP (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)*
1 ESP SYSTEM? ESPOFF Switch (Cancellation/Resume of ESP
The ESP system is an electronic vehicle stability control and
Function)
2 safe driving system and driving safety supplementary sys- If the driving wheels slip on snowy or icy roads, the engine
tem that helps to avoid dangerous situations by controlling rpm may not be increased even when you depress the accel-
3 erator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be able to move
the brakes on the wheels or the engine torque to compen-
4 sate vehicle stability when it is extremely unstable under con- your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP function by pressing
ditions such as sharp cornering. the ESPOFF switch. When the ESPOFF switch is pressed, the
5 ESP function stops and the vehicle is driven independently
from the sensor outputs.
6 ESP Warning Light
7 Turning on of ESP Warning Lamp
8 If you press the ESPOFF switch, the ESP
function stops and the indicator lamp in the
9 instrument cluster comes on. Press this
switch again to resume the ESP function. At
10 this time, the indicator lamp goes out.
11 ESP Warning Lamp Flickering

If the ESP function operates while driving,
12 the indicator lamp flickers and the alarm
sounds.
13
14 WARNING
If the ESP warning light comes on, the ESP related system is
15 defective. Make sure to check the vehicle at the nearest Ssangyong
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM)* EBD (ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE 0
DISTRIBUTION)*
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)? 1
When braking suddenly or braking on slippery roads, the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)?
vehicle keeps moving forward but the wheels are locking
2
and not rotating. If these happen, your vehicle may lose When the brake pedal is applied, it controls the braking
pressure electronically to effectively distribute the brak- 3
stability or rotate resulting in an accident. ABS helps to main-
tain directional stability and control of the vehicle. ing forces to the front wheels and rear wheels. EBD op-
erates when the speed differences between the most fast 4
front wheel and the rear wheel are over 1 km/h. If ABS is
ABS Warning Light engaged, it does not operate.
5
When the ignition switch is turned “ON”, this 6
warning light comes on and goes out if the sys-
tem is normal. EBD Warning Light 7
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”,
this warning light comes on and goes out if 8
WARNING
the system is normal.
• If this light doesn’t come on when the ignition is switched on or if 9
this light doesn’t go out, contact your nearest Ssangyong Dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. If this light illuminates while CAUTION 10
driving, a malfunction of ABS is indicated. If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is overheated or
• ABS is a device that prevents wheels from locking during braking malfunctioning. If the indicator is on even after the system has cooled
11
to allow steering. However, the ABS system does not shorten the down enough, have the nearest authorized dealer or service center
stopping distance. check the system.
12
• According to the road conditions, the stopping distance of the ve- 13
hicle with ABS may be longer or shorter than that of the vehicle
without ABS. 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 HDC (HILL DESCENT CONTROL)*
1 HDC (Hill Descent Control)? HDC Operation
HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down When this button is pressed once, HDC is ready for use. When
2 steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low speed all operational conditions are met, HDC is applied and the
without depressing the brake pedal. This convenient function green HDC indicator blinks. HDC automatically decreases the
3 is only for driving down steep grades. Therefore do not use vehicle speed to 7 km/h in the 2 wheel (2H) or 4 wheel high
this function for anything other than driving down steep hills. speed mode (4H) position or to 3 km/h in the 4 wheel low speed
4 position. HDC automatically stops at speeds less than 7 km/
5 h or 3 km/h. When the button is pressed again, HDC is deac-
HDC Indicator tivated and the indicator goes off.
6 Green light on: HDC is ready for use (by
pressing the HDC switch).
7
Green light blinking: HDC is being applied.
8 Red light on: the HDC system is overheated
or malfunctioning.
9
CAUTION
10
If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may be
11 applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump.
Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
12
13
14
15
16

BRAKE SYSTEM
HAND OPERATED PARKING BRAKE 0
Warning Light and Warning Sound When Driv- 1
ing While the Parking Brake is Engaged
Parking Brake Operation
2
If you drive the vehicle without releasing the
parking brake, the brake warning light blinks 3
and the buzzer sounds to warn the driver
when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h for 4
more than 2 seconds. When this happens,
stop the vehicle immediately and release the 5
Parking Brake parking brake.
Release Button 6
7
Parking Brake Release 8
9
Parking Brake Operation CAUTION
10
Park your vehicle at a safe place and pull up the parking brake • Before driving off, be sure to check that the brake warning light is
lever. Then, the parking brake warning light ( ) comes on.
turned off. 11
• Driving with the parking brake applied could damage the rear brake
system. Before driving, fully release the parking brake. 12
Parking Brake Release • If the brake warning light ( ) doesn’t go out after releasing the
Press the parking brake release button at the end of the lever parking brake, have the brake system checked by a Ssangyong 13
and lower the parking brake lever. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Seats 7 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Devices Related To Seat ............................. 7-2

5
6
Driver’s Seat ................................................ 7-4
7
Passenger’s Seat ......................................... 7-9
8
Second Row Seat ...................................... 7-10
9
Third Row Seat .......................................... 7-12
10
Seat Heating System* ............................... 7-14
11
Warning and Caution ................................ 7-15
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEVICES RELATED TO SEAT
0 Easy Access Switch & Driver Seat

Memory Setting Switch
Adjust Knob
2
Driver Seat
3 Control Switch Lumbar
Support Rear Seat
4 Lever Armrest
5 Driver Seat
Heating Switch
6
8 Adjust Knob
9
Passenger Seat
10 Heating Switch
11
12
13
14
15 Seat Folding Lever Seatback Reclining
Passenger Seat (Rear Seat)
16 Lever (Rear Seat)
Control Switch
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-2 SEATS
1
WARNING CAUTION
• All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before • Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
2
any driving. turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery
discharge, operate your seats when the engine is running.
3
• Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort while • Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultaneously. 4
vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when the pas- It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric seat
senger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is button one by one. 5
reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt • When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents such
and getting injured are increased. as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will cause dis- 6
• Never press the driver’s seat & outside rearview mirror posi- coloration and dull the surface of the seats.
tion switch while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat 7
• Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on comes in contact with other object and cannot be adjusted
the seat. anymore. 8
• Front seats and rear seats are equipped with heated lines. If • If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
the following types of persons sit on the heated seats, they checked and fixed before any driving. 9
might receive minor burns. Extra caution is needed for them:
children, elderly persons, ill persons, persons with sensitive
10
skin, excessively fatigued persons, persons under the influ-
ence of alcohol or sleep-inducing medication such as cold medi- 11
cine or sleeping pills.
• Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a
12
blanket, cushion or seat cover.
13
• Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in
serious head and neck injuries in case if a collision. Make sure 14
that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving.
15
16

DRIVER’S SEAT
0 POWER SEAT*
1 Height Adjustment and Tilt Operation of Head
Restraint
2 To raise the head restraint, pull
3 it up without pressing the re-
lease button. To lower the head
4 restraint, press the release but-
ton on top of the seatback and
5 push the head restraint down. 1
Seat Heater*
6 WARNING By operating the seat
7 Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in seri- heater switch, you can
ous head and neck injuries in case of a collision. heat the seat cushion
8 and seatback.
9
10 Lumbar Support (Driver’s Seat)
11
Seat Position Control Switches
12
13 WARNING
14 Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the vehicle is
moving. Control of the vehicle can be lost.
15 Turn the lever forward to increase the amount of lumbar
support. To decrease it, turn the lever backward.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-4 SEATS
Seat Slide Adjustment Seatback Reclining Adjustment 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Seat Height Adjustment Seat Tilt Adjustment 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0 EASY ACCESS SYSTEM (DRIVER’S SEAT)*
This system is designed to provide the driver sufficient space to access and exit.
1
2
Easy Access Button
3
4
5
6
To operate
7
To use this function, press the Easy Access button located at
8 driver’s window switch panel.
To exit: The seat moves rearward and downward when removing
9 CAUTION
the ignition key only while the parking brake warning light in the in-
• The moving distance of the seat is based on when the strument cluster is ON or the gear selector lever is in “P” position
10 seat is located at its front end. It varies according to the
before turning off the ignition switch. However, the gear position re-
initial position.
quirement is not applied to the manual transmission equipped ve-
11 • There could be some differences when the seat moves
hicle since it does not have the “P” position. Therefore, manual trans-
back to its original position. The differences of the pas-
12 senger weights and electrical loads can cause the dif- mission equipped vehicle is only applied parking brake.
ferences in its distance, and this is normal, not defective. To access : The seat moves back to its original position when turn-
13 • Operation of easy access while the parking brake is not ing the ignition key to “ON” position while the gear selector lever is
securely applied may cause an accident. Make sure that in “P” position or the parking brake is applied. However, the gear
14 the gear selector lever is in “P” position and the parking position requirement is not applied to the manual transmission
brake is securely applied. equipped vehicle since it does not have the “P” position. Therefore,
15 • The easy access system may not operate properly when manual transmission equipped vehicle is only applied parking brake.
operating the seat memory switch or any other switches
16 during the easy access operation. To release
To release this function, press the Easy Access button again.
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-6 SEATS
POSITION MEMORY SETTING* 0
The position memory is available for up to three drivers. Each driver can set his/ her own driver’s seat and outside rearview
mirror positions. The information will individually be stored in the integrated computer. If somebody has moved the seat, the
1
memory positions can be recalled automatically by pressing the position button. 2
3
4
SET button
5
STOP button
6
Position button
(1, 2, 3) 7
CAUTION 8
• The automatic positioning operation stops when operating any seat
adjusting switch or the outside rearview mirror adjusting switch dur- 9
ing its operation. To erase the memorized seat and outside rear-
To Store the Memory Settings view mirror positions, press the “STOP” button. 10
• If you do not press any position button within 5 seconds after press-
1. Position the transmission shift lever to “P” with the igni- ing “SET” switch, the memory setting is cancelled.
11
tion switch “ON” (for your safety, do not start the engine).
In case of a manual transmission vehicle, you must ap-
12
To Recall the Memory Settings
ply the parking brake too. 13
1. Press and hold one of the position buttons ( ), ( ), ( )
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirrors to
you want until the buzzer sounds.
the desired positions. 14
2. The driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors start to move to
3. Press the (SET) switch. The indicator on the switch comes on. the stored positions. If you drive off during this recalling process, 15
4. Within 5 seconds, press and hold one of the position but- this automatic memory setting stops operating.
tons ( ), ( ), ( ) you want to set. When the 3. Wait until they stop moving. 16
memory setting is completed, a buzzer sounds twice. 4. When the process is completed, a buzzer sounds twice.

0 DRIVER’S SEAT (MANUAL SEAT)
1
Height Adjustment and Tilt
2
Operation of Head Restraint
3 Same as that of the power seat
4
Seat Heater*
5 Same as that of the power seat
6 Lumbar Support
To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly and raise Same as that of the
7 the lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release power seat
the lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to
8 its original position and the seatback is locked.
9
Seat Height Adjustment
10 Seat Slide Adjustment
11
12
13
14
15 You can adjust the angle and height of the front or rear sec-
tion of the seat cushion by rotating the adjustment knob on
16 the side of the seat clockwise or counterclockwise.
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat
slide lever up and move the seat as desired. Then, release
the lever.
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-8 SEATS
PASSENGER’S SEAT
Power Seat* Manual Seat 0
1
Head Restraint 2
Head Restraint
Same as that of driver’s seat
Same as that of 3
driver’s seat Seat Heater*
4
Seat Heater*
5
6
7
8
9
Seat Slide Seatback Reclining Seat Slide Seatback Reclining
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

SECOND ROW SEAT

2 1 ton ( ) on top of seatback and push the
4 WARNING
6
7 Pull up the lever and adjust the seatback angle to the desired
8 position. After adjustment, release the lever and make sure that
the lever is returned to its original position and the setback is
9 securely locked.
Armrest Seat Backboard
10
The middle of the second Release the backboard lock
11 row seat is equipped with after folding the second and
an armrest. third row seats. Then let the
Backboard
12 backboard tilt toward the third
row seat. The second and Lock Lever
13 third row seats will be flat.
14
15 Seat Folding Lever
To access to the third row seats easily, make the second row
16 seat upright. Raise the second row seat while pulling up the
seat folding lever with the second row seatback folded down.
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-10 SEATS
FOLDING THE SECOND ROW SEAT (WHEN ACCESSING TO THIRD ROW SEAT) 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Position the headrest to the lowest level. 3. Press the upper portion of the seatback 4. Pull up the seat folding lever and make
2. Pull up the seatback reclining lever and until it is engaged with seat cushion. the seat upright. 8
fold down the seatback. 9
5. Fix the folded seat to the front seat with 6. Unfold the seat in 10
a fixing strap from the case under the the reverse order of
floor. folding. Make sure 11
that the seat is se-
CAUTION curely locked. If the 12
• If the headrest is not adjusted to the lowest seat is not locked,
level, the seat can be reached to the front the seat may be 13
seat while making it upright. folded forward.
14
• After folding the seatback, ensure to press
the upper seatback to set the seat upright. WARNING 15
If the seat is made upright without fixing the When returning the second row seat to its
seat, the seat can be damaged by conflict-
ing with the front seat.
original position, be careful not to hit the feet 16
and leg of the passenger in third row seat.

THIRD ROW SEAT

2 ton ( ) on top of seatback and push the
3
4 WARNING
6
Folding Lever
7
Pull up the folding lever to fold down the third row seat.
8
9 SEAT FOLDING (MAKING A LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT)
10 1. Position the headrest to the lowest level.
2. Pull up the folding loop of the third row seat, 3. Fold the seatback of the third row seat to make the lug-
11 and fold the seatback forward. gage compartment.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-12 SEATS
MAKING A BED 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Fold down the third row seats. (refer to “Folding the third WARNING
row seat” section) 10
• When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that
2. Fold down the second row seats. (refer to “Folding the sec- the luggage is placed firm enough to avoid being shaken while 11
ond row seat” section) driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver
3. Lock the seatback of second row seats by pressing the up- or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not ob- 12
struct the field of the rearview.
per portion of it.
4. Release the locks on backboard of the second row seat.
• Do not sit on the folded seat because the seatbelt and other safety 13
devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious
5. Make a bed by unfolding the backboard. injury in case of accident. 14
15
16

SEAT HEATING SYSTEM*
0 Front Seat Heating Switch

1 Heated cushions and seatbacks create a pleasant driving
environment by expelling chilliness on the surface of the seats.
2
3
4 Passenger
side Driver side
5
6
To operate seat heater
7
1. Start the engine.
8 2. Turn the seat heating switch from 0 (OFF) to the
desired position (1 ~ 5).
9
3. The seat cushion and seatback will be warmed up.
10 The seat heater indicator on the switch comes on
during its operation.
11
NOTE Second row heating switch (for both sides)
12 The seat heater is turned off when you turn the ignition switch
The heating switches for
off while the seat heater is operating. If you want to oper-
13 ate the seat heater again, turn the seat heating switch to the rear seats are located
other position and then select the desired position. on the rear door trims.
14 During heating the seats,
the seat heater indicator
15 comes on.
16 Second row seat
GETtheMANUALS.org
7-14 SEATS
WARNING AND CAUTION

1
WARNING WARNING
• Do not operate the seat heater for a long time when the passen- • Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a 2
ger is an infant, child, old or handicapped person, person with blanket, cushion or seat cover.
sensitive skin, person under the influence of alcohol, or exces- • Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in
3
sively fatigued person. They might receive minor burns. serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make sure
• If your skin is in contact with the heated seat for a long time, you that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving. 4
might get low temperature burns. Be careful. • Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort while
• Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective when the
5
blanket, cushion or seat cover. passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback
is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt
6
• If the temperature continues to rise, turn the switch off and have
and getting injured are increased.
the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au- 7
• In the case of the driver’s seat, an excessive usage of the heated CAUTION 8
seat might make you sleepy and could negatively affect your safety. • Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
• Do not place anything sharp on the seat. This may cause dam- turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery 9
age to the seat heater. discharge, operate your seats when the engine is running.
• All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before • Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultaneously. 10
any driving. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric seat
button one by one. 11
• When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents such
• Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will cause dis- 12
the seat. coloration and dull the surface of the seats.
• Front seats are equipped with heated lines. If the following types • Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat
13
of persons sit on the heated seats, they might receive minor comes in contact with other object and cannot be adjusted
burns. Extra caution is needed for them: children, elderly persons, anymore.
14
ill persons, persons with sensitive skin, excessively fatigued
persons, persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep-induc- • If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be 15
ing medication such as cold medicine or sleeping pills. checked and fixed before any driving.
16

Seat Belt and Air Bag 8 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Seat Belt and Air Bag ................................. 8-2

5
6
Seat Belt ....................................................... 8-4
7
How to Fasten the Three Point Seat Belt .. 8-5
8
How To Fasten the Seat Belts in Second Row
Seat .............................................................. 8-6 9
Child Restraints and Pregnant Woman ..... 8-8 10
Warnings for Seat Belt .............................. 8-12
11
Air Bag ....................................................... 8-14

12
13
Airbag Non-Inflation Conditions ............... 8-18
14
Warnings for Air Bag ................................. 8-22
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT AND AIR BAG
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by
0 all occupants inside of your vehicle.
1
Air Bag Warning Light Front air bag (Driver’s) Three point
2 seat belt Three point seat belt
3
4 Side air bag (Driver’s)
5 Seat Belt Reminder
Three point
6 seat belt
Front air bag
7 (Passenger’s)
Lap belt or
Three point
8 seat belt
Three point Three point
9 seat belt seat belt
10
Side air bag Three point seat belt
11 (Passenger’s)
12
13 The Restraint Systems Include:
When seat belts are not used or improperly worn, they may
• Air bags
14 not work and can cause serious injury. In addition, air bags
• Seat belts can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their
15 • Seat belt pretensioners (For front seat) seat belts. Air bags may cause injuries to occupants if they
As independent systems, their protective functions do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
16 complement one another.

BAG
AIR BAG 0
WARNING 1
• Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If
not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sud- 2
den maneuvering of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time. 3
• Seat belts and air bags can significantly minimize possible injury
Side air bag
to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from
4
(Driver’s) fatal collisions or injury.
Front air bag
(Driver’s)
5
• Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems
Front air bag
could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat 6
(Passenger’s) belts should be checked and repaired by only a Ssangyong
Side air bag • An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant
(Passenger’s) or child restraint. 8
9
When a strong frontal impact occurs, the front air bags are
inflated. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEAT BELT
0 SEAT BELT IN FRONT SEATS

1 Seat Belt Height Adjustment
2
A
3
4
5
6 • To raise the seat belt, slide the seat
belt height adjuster up.
7 • To lower the seat belt, press the
button ( )and slide it down.
8
WARNING
9
• Adjust the seat belt height before
10 driving.
• Shoulder belt should be positioned mid-
11 way over the shoulder, never across
the neck.
12 B
13
14
15 • Insert the metal latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
16 • To unfasten the seat belt, press the
button ( ) on the buckle.

BAG
HOW TO FASTEN THE THREE POINT SEAT BELT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Pull out the latch plate from the 2. Position the shoulder belt across the 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
retractor. If the seat belt is locked body and the lap belt as low as pos- is securely locked. A slack belt will
7
when being pulled out, rewind it com- sible across the hips. Insert the greatly reduce the protection af- 8
pletely in the retractor, then pull it out latch plate into the buckle until it forded to the wearer.
to the desired length. clicks. 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the 9
3. Adjust the seat belt height as red button on the buckle.
needed. 10
WARNING
CAUTION 11
Improperly worn seat belts could cause
Sit back in the seat with the seatback in serious injury or death. 12
an upright position and wear the seat belt. • Put the lap belt as low as possible
across the hips. Do not put it across the 13
waist. In an accident, the belt may apply
WARNING pressure to your abdomen. This may 14
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is cause internal injuries.
not twisted. • The shoulder belt should be positioned 15
midway over the shoulder, never across
the neck. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO FASTEN THE SEAT BELTS IN SECOND ROW SEAT
1. Pull out the latch plate at the right of the seat.
0
WARNING
1
Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it
2 across waist. In an accident, the belt may apply pressure to your
abdomen. This may cause serious internal injuries.
3
To lengthen, hold the
4 metal latch plate at a
right angle to the belt
5 and pull the belt. To
shorten, pull the free
6 end of the belt away
7 from the latch plate,
then pull the belt clip to
8 take up the slack.
9 2. Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the belt as low as possible across your hips,
10 not across your abdomen.
11 3. If the belt is too tight or slack
on your hips, readjust the belt.
12
4. To unfasten the seat belt,
13 press the red button on the
buckle.
14
15
16

BAG
REAR CENTER SEAT BELT (3-POINT TYPE)* 0
1. Pull out the smaller latch plate (B) from up-
per retractor (1).
1
2. Insert it into the black buckle (2) until it clicks. 2
3. Pull out the bigger latch plate (A) and posi-
tion the seat belt across your shoulder, chest 3
and hips.
4
4. Insert it into the buckle (3) until it clicks.
5
WARNING
• Make sure to fasten the seat belt according to the 6
order as described so that it functions properly.
• To prevent the seat belt from bumping against the
7
rear glass, unfasten the seat belt while holding it.
8
• This seat belt is designed only for a passenger
who sits on the center seat in the rear seat. 9
• Tug on the seat belt to make sure that the latch
plate is securely locked. 10
• Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
• Improper wearing of seat belts increases the
11
chance of injury or death in case of a collision.
12
• Position the seat belt away from your neck and
abdomen. 13
CAUTION 14
Stow the seat belt into the console when it is not in use. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHILD RESTRAINTS AND PREGNANT WOMAN
0 PREGNANT WOMEN CHILD RESTRAINTS

We recommend that pregnant women When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate child restraint
1 use the seat belts throughout their system should always be used. The child restraint system should be ap-
2 pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is propriate for your child’s weight and height and properly fit the car’s seat.
the best way to keep the baby safe. Accident statistics indicate that children are safer when properly restrained
3 in the rear seat rather than in the front seat.
WARNING
4 WARNING
• Pregnant women should wear the lap
5 part of the belt across the thighs and • Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint.
as sung across the hips as possible. • NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THE FRONT SEAT WITH
6 • Keep the belt low so that it does not FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG.
come across the abdomen. That way • A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can be seriously
7 the strong bones of the hips will take injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
the force if there is a collision. in the rear seat.
8 • A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat whenever possible.
If installed in the front passenger seat, adjust the seat as far back as it will go.
9 • When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer.
10
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
11 or remove it from the vehicle.
• In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a missile inside
12 the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
13 • Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center
14 of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
15 • Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a person who is taller
than 140 cm.
16

BAG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
TYPE A TYPE B
7
Rear-facing child seat Forward-facing child seat Booster seat
8
Rear Rear 9
Front
Mass Group Restraint Device Figure center side Mounting Method of Vehicle
seat
seat seat
10
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 month) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing 11
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 year) Rear facing child seat X X U 3-point belt rear-facing 12
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 month ~ 4 year) Forward facing child seat UF UF U 2-or 3-point belt
13
II & III ~ 15 to 36 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat UF UF U 2-or 3-point
14
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
15
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories. 16
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 ANCHORAGE LOCATIONS CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
1
Rear
2
3
Front
4
5
6
7
8
9
Child restraint anchor fittings have been installed to coin- Your vehicle has been designed to accommodate a child re-
10 cide with the rear seating positions as follows. straint on the rear seat. When using a child restraint, read the
installation instructions supplied with the child restraint and
11 WARNING follow the directions for fitment carefully. When installing the
Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured. child restraint, use the correct anchor bolt (5/16" bolt). The an-
12 chor bolt must be engaged at least 5 full threads in the
• Never transport them unless they are properly restrained.
13 • Use restraint system which meet safety standard. anchorage.
• Follow directions provided by the manufacturer. The child restraint system should be secured in conjunction
14 with the vehicle’s seat belt. After installation, push and pull
the child restraint to be sure it is secure. Secure the child in
15 NOTE the restraint in accordance with the manufacturer’s
Use the child restraint anchorage for designed purpose only. instructions.
16
If you have any queries regarding the installation of a child
restraint, consult a Ssangyong Dealer.
BAG
INSTALLATION OF THE ATTACHING CLIP 0
Child restraint attaching clip WARNING 1
Child restraint system placed in the front seat could cause more
serious injury or death 2
• NEVER INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN FRONT
SEAT WITH FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG. 3
A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat
can be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. 4
Secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat 5
whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger seat, ad-
just the seat as far back as it will go. 6
Positive engagement of the child restraint attaching clip is
achieved by depressing retainer spring and then opening WARNING 7
of the anchor fitting as shown in the illustration. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.
8
Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts
or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 9
10
WARNING
• When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions 11
provided by the manufacturer.
• When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with 12
a seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
• Do not hold a child while riding in a vehicle. 13
• Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat.
• Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. 14
• Children who have outgrown child restraint systems should sit
in the rear seat and be restrained with the seat belt. 15
If child’s seating position has a shoulder belt which is on or very
close to the face or neck, move the child close to the center of 16
the vehicle, slightly inboard of the shoulder belt, or move the child
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT
0 WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT

1 • Always put on your shoulder belt over the shoulder and • Periodically check that the seat belt and its components
2 across the chest. Do not put the shoulder belt across work properly. A damaged seat belt can cause serious
your neck. injuries. Repair or replace the damaged seat belt im-
3 • Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do mediately at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
not put it across the waist. In an accident, the belt may rized Service Center.
4 apply pressure to your abdomen. • The warning light comes on whenever the ignition is
• Do not wear the shoulder belt under the arm. It increases switched on. The light goes out when the driver’s seat
5 the danger of sliding out of the belt and can cause seri- belt is securely fastened. If the light does not go off af-
ous injury or even death. The belt may also tighten the ter fastening the seat belt, it means that there is a mal-
6 function in the system. Have the seat belt system
chest which is not as strong as the shoulders. This may
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
7 also result in serious internal injuries.
• Do not lock the seat belt with a clip or a clamp. If the
8 seat belt is too loose, it may not protect your body from • Additional devices or accessories on the seat belt may
injury or death in an accident. result in improper operation. Do not add any adjusting
9 devices which restrict the seat belt operation.
• Before driving, all occupants should wear the seat belts.
Otherwise, occupants could be seriously injured in col- • Periodically inspect all parts of the belt and have the
10 damaged parts replaced. The belt that has been over-
lisions or sudden maneuvers. In many countries, there
11 are regulations regarding the use of the seat belts. stretched in an accident must be replaced with a new
Please observe local laws and regulations. one. Ssangyong recommends replacing all component
12 parts of the seat belt after a collision. No replacement
• Do not buck up two or more persons with one seat belt.
is required after a minor collision if a Ssangyong Dealer
13 • Do not wear the seat belt over any hard or breakable or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center finds that no
objects in pockets or on clothes. damage has occurred and everything is in proper work-
14 • An infant and tiny child must be restrained in a child re- ing order. The seat belt components that were not used
straint system. Note that the three point seat belt is de- during a collision must also be inspected and replaced
15 signed for a person who is taller than 140 cm. if they show signs of damage or faulty operation.
• Replace the entire seat belt assembly after a severe im-
16 pact even if the damage is not obvious.

BAG
WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT 0
• Never modify the seat belt. • Keep the buckle clean.

1
• Always keep the seat belts clean and dry. Care should • Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony struc- 2
be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with ture of the body, and should be worn low across the front
polishes, oil and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. of the pelvis or the hips, chest and shoulders, as 3
Use mild soap and water for cleaning. The seat belt applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across
must be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contami- the abdominal area must be avoided. 4
nated or damaged. • Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, con- 5
• Adjust the seat properly before wearing the seat belt. sistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which
• Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an upright posi- they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce 6
tion and wear the seat belt. If the seat belt is positioned the protection afforded to the wearer.
too high or fastened too loose, it may not protect your body • Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the web- 7
from an injury or death in the event of a collision. bing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly
battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using
8
• Do not recline the seatback more than needed for com-
fort while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effec- mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if 9
tive when the passenger sits back and straight up in webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
the seat. If the seatback is reclined too much, then the • It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has 10
risks of sliding under the lap belt and getting injured are been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the as-
increased. sembly is not obvious. 11
• If the latch plate is inserted into a wrong buckle, the belt • Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. 12
may exert pressure on your abdomen instead of your • Each belt assembly must only be used by one
pelvis. This may cause serious internal injury. occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child 13
• If the seat belt is twisted, there will not be enough con- being carried on the occupant’s lap.
tact of the belt to spread the impact pressure. • No modifications or additions should be made by the
14
• Make sure that the latch plate is securely locked. user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting de- 15
• When pregnant women use the seat belt, consult with vices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat
a doctor for specific recommendations. belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
The air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) can provide additional protection for the driver
AIR BAG and passenger in the event of a collision.
0 Air Bag Warning Light Driver’s Air Bag

If this lamp does When a severe frontal impact
1 not go out after occurs, sensors will cause the
engine starting or airbag to be deployed so that
2 comes on while driving, it driver’s and front passenger’s
means that there is a mal- head and chest will be pillowed
3 by the air bag instead of hit-
function in the system. Have
4 the air bag system checked ting the steering wheel or
immediately by a Ssangyong dashboard.
5 Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- Driver’s Side Air Bag
6 The side air bags are inte-
grated into the side wall
7 Front Air Bag (window side) of both front
(Passenger’s) seats. The side air bag is de-
8 signed to inflate only in cer-
tain side collision and protect
9 Side Air Bag occupants’ head and chest.
10 (Passenger’s)
11 Seat Belt Pretensioner

12 (for front seats)
Operation of Operation of
When a severe frontal impact
13 load limiter pretensioner
occurs, seat belt pretensioners
After frontal collision, the When a severe frontal rewind the seat belts immediately
14 load limiters releases impact occurs, seat belt to restrain the occupants to their
the seat belt to prevent pretensioners rewind seats. It helps the effective opera-
15 the occupant from being the seat belts immedi- tion of the seat belts and air bags.
injured due to belt force. ately to restrain the oc- The load limiter is integrated into
16 cupants to their seats. each seat belt pretensioner.

BAG
Australia Only
SRS AIR BAG : I/P inside panel 0
The Supplemental Restraint System air bag is designed
to supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and
1
front passenger with protection against head, chest, and 2
other injuries in the event of a collision. For maximum
protection, seat belts should always be worn by all 3
occupants.
4
WARNING 5
• The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. 6
Locations of Air Bag
Make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts
properly, even if air bags are installed in the vehicle. Warning Labels
7
• Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the air bag
may not deploy. 8
• The driver’s and front passenger’s air bags simultaneously
deploy. 9
Locations of Locations of
side air bag side air bag 10
CAUTION warning labels warning labels
If you see “SRS” on a certain area, the air bag is contained un- 11
derneath it. Therefore, do not apply any impact upon it and never
place any accessories or objects on the area. And avoid any 12
direct contact with the area.
WARNING STATEMENT
13
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a 14
seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
15
WARNING
As a reminder of possible dangers of the air bag, air bag warning 16
labels are affixed on the driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 FRONT AIR BAGS
1 Air Bag Operation
X The air bag inflates when:
2
• In response to a severe frontal impact, the driver’s and
3 front passenger’s air bags deploy at the same time to
supplement the seat belts to prevent or reduce any per-
4 sonal injuries.
X The air bag can inflate when:
5 • Underbody impact from the road surface; impact against
6 the curb at a very high speed; dropping impact onto the
road surface with a large angle
7 X The air bag does not inflate when:
8 • Rollover, side impact or rear impact
Passenger’s Air Bag* Driver’s Air Bag • If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant.
9 The front passenger’s air The driver’s air bag is X The air bag seldom inflates when:
bag is located on the located at center of the
10 dashboard. steering wheel.
• Oblique impact, rollover
• Weak impact in which the sensor is unable to detect (under
11 the inflation requirements)
Pretensioner (for Front Seat) • Impact against narrow objects such as a utility pole or a tree
12
When front air bags deploy, the seat belt pretensioners si- • The vehicle falls into a drainage or a puddle
13 multaneously work too. • The front of the vehicle crashes into a high impact point
1st operation: When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat vehicle such as a truck
14 belt pretensioners rewind the seat belts immediately to re- • Impact on the hood by falling stones
strain the occupants to their seats. • The air bag warning lamp is on
15
2nd operation: After frontal collision, the load limiters re- • Moderate or severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
16 leases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being in- body’s side structure. In that case, only the side air bags
jured due to belt force. deploy.

BAG
SIDE AIR BAG* 0
Side Air Bag Operation 1
Driver’s seat Passenger’s seat
X The air bag inflates when: 2
• A moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
body’s side structure. 3
X The air bag can inflate when: 4
Side air Side air • Vehicle rolls onto its side and causes a severe side
bag bag impact. 5
X The air bag does not inflate when: 6
• Frontal collision while vehicle stops or is moving at a low
speed. 7
Impact sensor Impact sensor • Rear end collision 8
• If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant.
9
X The air bag seldom inflates when:
WARNING
• Oblique impact (diagonal direction) 10
• Do not apply any impact on the installation area of impact sensor.
• Frontal impact or rear impact
The air bag might deploy. 11
• Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the side air • Rollover but without a severe impact
bag may not deploy. • The air bag warning lamp is on 12
• Do not bang the door. The side air bag might deploy.
• Driver's and passenger's air bags are inflated simultaneously.
13
At the same time, the pretentioners for seatbelts are also
AIR BAG INSPECTION
activated. The side air bags, however, are inflated individually in
14
The air bag system should be inspected 10 years from
case of side impact. its installation regardless of its appearance and other 15
conditions.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
AIRBAG NON-INFLATION CONDITIONS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• In collisions, the vehicle safety belts are sufficient to pro- • Airbags may not inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
10 tect the vehicle occupants and the airbags may not deploy. pants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In
In some cases, deploying airbags in low-speed collisions this case, the airbags do not provide proper protection.
11 can cause a secondary impact to the occupants (light
abrasions, cuts, burns, etc.), or loss of vehicle control.
12
13
14
15
16

BAG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Front airbags may not inflate in side impact collision, be- • In a slant impact or collision, the force delivered will be
cause occupants move to the direction of the collision, and relatively weaker than that of frontal collision. So, the 10
thus front airbag deployment does not provide proper airbags may not inflate.
protection. 11
However, side or curtain airbags(if equipped) may inflate 12
depending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact. 13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• At the moment of an accident, drivers brake heavily with • Airbags may not inflate in rollover accidents because
10 reflex. In such heavy braking, the front portion of the ve- airbag deployment would not provide proper protection to
hicle is lowered by the force of the braking and the ve- the occupants.
11 hicle can go under a vehicle with a higher ground However, side airbags may inflate when the vehicle is
clearance. Airbags may not inflate in this situation because
12 impacts may not be delivered or may be delivered with
rolled over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is
equipped with side airbags and/or curtain airbags.
13 less intensity.
14
15
16

BAG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects
such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is 10
concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact
is not delivered to the sensors. 11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG
0 WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (I)

1 • Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not • Do not move your seat too close to the steering wheel
2 attempt to modify any air bag components including the or dashboard. If you lower your head, the air bag can hit
steering wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness. your head during inflation and can cause severe injury
3 • Incorrect air bag inspection can be dangerous and or even death.
cause injuries. The air bag system must be disposed • Do not impact any air bag components including the
4 only by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized steering wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness by
Service Center. hand or tools. You may get injured by sudden deployment.
5
• Replace the steering wheel with only Ssangyong genu- • The air bag contains explosive materials, so contact a
6 ine parts. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
• When the engine starts, the air bag warning lamp Center when trashing or replacing it.
7 comes on for a system check. It goes out after 6 sec- • The air bag components will be very hot after
onds when the system is normal. If this warning lamp deployment. Do not touch them.
8 stays on then the system may be defective. Have the air • Once the air bag system is triggered, the triggered air
9 bag system checked immediately by a Ssangyong bag assembly should be removed from the vehicle and
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. replaced with a new one.
10 • Never let small children or infants sit in the front pas- • Do not attach any objects such as a sticker, scent bottle,
senger seat or be held in your arms. When the front air or phone holder on the steering wheel pad and to the
11 bags deploy, they could be seriously injured or killed. dashboard.
12 • The child restraint system should be installed in the • Do not lean against the window or door or do not stretch
rear seat. your arm through the window frame. If the side air bag
13 • The child restraint system must not be placed on the deploys, you will be at great risk.
front seat. The infant or child can severely be injured • Do not place any objects between the side air bags and
14 by an air bag inflation in case of an accident. occupants. The object may prevent the air bag from de-
15 • The seat belt and air bags are the most effective when ploying or can be shot at you.
you sit well back and upright in the seat.
16

BAG
WARNINGS FOR AIR BAG (II) 0
• Do not bang the door. The side air bags might deploy. • The windshield glass may be broken when the
1
• Hold only the outer rim of the steering so that the air passenger’s air bag deploys. 2
bag can inflate without any hindrance. • When any repairs are needed for the steering wheel, or
• Do not hold and operate the steering wheel by cross- when an accident occurred without the air bag 3
ing your arms. You could get seriously injured when the deployment, have the air bag system checked by a
air bag deploys. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service 4
Center.
• Do not place your face or chest near the steering wheel 5
and dashboard. Also, do not allow anyone to place their • You could suffer secondary injuries caused by an in-
hands, leg or face on the dashboard. The air bag can- flated air bag such as an abrasion, a burn or injuries by 6
not work properly. broken glass. Non-toxic gas will come out when the air
• When the air bag inflates, it makes a loud noise and
bag is inflated. 7
smoke. However, the smoke is a non-toxic nitrogen gas. • If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant
and the seat belts are enough to protect occupants, the
8
• When the air bag deploys, non-toxic gas will come out.
air bags do not deploy to prevent any secondary inju- 9
This gas may cause skin, eyes or nose irritation. Wash
ries such as cuts, abrasions, or burns.
it out with cold and clean water and consult your doctor
if irritation continues. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ventilation, Heating, Air Conditioning
and Air Purification System 9 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Heater/Air Conditioner System ................... 9-2

5
6
Warnings and Cautions ............................... 9-4
7
Supplementary Heating Device ................. 9-5
8
Automatic Heater / Air Conditioner ............ 9-6
9
Rear Air Conditioner* (Dual A/C) .............. 9-12
10
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 9-13
11
Replacing Air Conditioner Filter .............. 9-14
12
AQS (Air Quality System) .......................... 9-16
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
0
1
2 Rear Air Conditioner Switch/Vent*
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 Sun Sensor
Heater/AC Control Panel
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Center Vent Front Side Vent 0
1
2
Flow Direction
Control Lever 3
4
Flow Volume
Control Dial 5
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving 6
the knob horizontally or vertically. the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet.
7
flow volume control dial. 8
Rear Vents in Center Console (Upper) Rear Vents in Center Console (Lower) 9
Flow Direction 10
Control Lever
11
12
13
Flow Volume 14
Control Dial
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving The airglow is delivered through the vents when oper- 15
the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet. ating A/C and heater.
16
flow volume control dial.

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
0 Refrigerant Specification & Capacity
1 Item CAUTION
• If your vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight, open all windows to
2 Specification R134a extract heat before turning on the air conditioning (A/C).
Capacity Single A/C 720 ± 30g • Operating the air conditioning (A/C) for a long time while the vehicle is
3 parked may cause the engine to overheat.
Dual A/C 1,120 ± 30g • When driving up a long hill for an extended period of time, turn on and
4 off the air conditioner every 3 to 5 minutes.
5 WARNING • To prevent battery discharge, do not run the fan for an extended period
• If you sleep while the air conditioner or heater is on, of time when the engine is not running.
6 with all windows closed, you may suffocate to death. • To maintain the system at its optimum state and to keep the lubrication of
• Continued operation in the recirculation mode may cause the air conditioner compressor and related components, run the air con-
7 the interior to become stuffy and windows to fog. Do ditioner at low speed once a week even during the season than summer.
not use the recirculation mode for a long period of time. • Do not stop the engine when the air conditioner is operating. It may
8 • If exhaust gas comes in, there is danger of carbon mon- produce an unpleasant odor trapped in the duct. Turn the A/C off and
oxide poisoning. Be sure to switch back to fresh air mode wait for a few minutes in the fresh air mode before stopping the engine.
9 after passing through an area of smoke or fumes. • If you start the engine with the air conditioner on, the engine may not
• Never leave a child or a handicapped person alone in start easily and the engine idling can be unstable causing the vehicle to
10 vibrate. Be sure to turn off electrical systems such as the fan.
the vehicle with the air conditioner or heater on in hot
or cold weather. The child or handicapped person can • When the air conditioner is not used in periods, odors will come out.
11 be in serious danger by the heat and lack of oxygen. Run the air conditioner for 20 ~ 30 minutes with the windows opened
and you could remove the odors.
12
• During the winter when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run the
13 air conditioner once or twice every month for 5 ~ 10 minutes.
• If the air conditioner is not used regularly, the lubricant in the A/C com-
14 pressor will not circulate causing the A/C to malfunction. Be sure to
turn the air conditioner at low speed.
15 • When sharply accelerating the vehicle while the air conditioner is
operating, you may hear a “click” sound from the magnetic clutch in
16 compressor. This is a normal operation to protect the air conditioner
system (by lowering the excessively high refrigerant pressure).
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUPPLEMENTARY HEATING DEVICE
• The vehicle equiped with the DI engine has the supplementary heating
devices to increase the heating effect before the engine coolant fully
0
warms up. The supplementary heating devices are as follows: 1
- PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
2
3
PTC
4
This supplementary heater is an electrical air heating X Operational Condition
type and installed on the heater outlet port. This device
5
This device is activated when the blower switch is at
improves the heating effect by increasing the tempera- any position other than the “OFF” position and the cool- 6
ture of flowing air into the passenger room. ant temperature and the ambient temperature is within
This device is operational/non-operational when the en- a specified range. 7
gine control unit supplies/cuts off the voltage to the PTC
according to the coolant temperature and the ambient X Non-operational Condition 8
temperature. • The blower switch is at the “OFF” position
• Defective intake air temperature sensor
9
• During engine cranking 10
• Battery voltage is too low
• During pre-glowing process ( indicator ON) 11
12
13
14
15
16

AUTOMATIC HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER
If the Auto button is pressed, the temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set
0 temperature. By operating the relevant switch of the automatic air conditioner, you may also manually control the air condi-
1 tioner operation, air flow direction, fan speed and air source. To turn off the air conditioner and heater, press the “OFF” button.
The desired room temperate can be set up by turning the temperature control switch.
2
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
3
1. Temperature display (ambient
1 4
4 2
temperature, set temperature)
2. Defroster indicator
5 3 5 3. Air flow indicator
6 7
6 4. A/C ON indicator
5. Fan speed indicator
7
6. Ambient temperature display
8 7. Auto mode indicator
9
Air conditioner switch Air source selection switch / AQS switch
10 Mode switch Defroster switch
11
12
13 Rear air conditioner
AUTO switch
14 switch*
Temperature Fan speed control button
15 control button
16 OFF switch Ambient temperature
display button
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO OPERATION MODE (AUTO INDICA- MANUAL OPERATION MODE (AUTO 0
TOR ON) INDICATOR OFF)
1
1. Press the AUTO button. When you use the fan speed control switch, air conditioner
switch, recirculation switch or mode switch during the auto 2
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the VFD. operation mode, the “AUTO” indicator on the VFD goes out
and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually. 3
In manual mode, the “AUTO” indicator on display does not 4
come on and you have to adjust the airflow direction, air-
AUTO switch flow volume, and temperature you want. 5
NOTE 6
AUTO indicator ON To resume the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
7
8
3. Set the desired room temperature with the temperature 9
control button.
10
4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is auto-
matically maintained according to the set temperature. 11
12
13
Temperature 14
control button
15
Set temperature
16

0 Auto Switch Fan Speed Control Button
When you press the Auto Switch, the “AUTO” indicator is dis- To control the fan speed, press the switch as needed. When
1 played on the VFD and the temperature of the passenger pressing the switch in the Auto mode, the “AUTO” indicator
compartment is automatically maintained according to the goes out and the system is changed to the manual mode.
2
set temperature. When you press the Auto Switch during CAUTION
3 manual operation mode, the system is changed to the auto If the air conditioner switch is turned off, the air conditioner does
operation mode. not work even when the fan is running. However, the air flows
4 due to fan operation.
5
6
7
8 Rear Air Conditioner
9 Switch*
To operate the rear air conditioner,
10 this switch should be pressed
before turning the rear air flow
11 control dial.
12
Temperature Control Button OFF Switch Ambient Temperature Display Button
13 To adjust the temperature and fan To stop the air conditioner / When you press this button, the “AMB” indicator
speed, press the switch as needed. heater operation, press this appears and the ambient temperature is dis-
14 switch. played on the VFD for about 5 seconds.
15
CAUTION
16 The actual ambient temperature may not be displayed
correctly due to engine heat or ground heat.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Air Conditioner Switch Air Source Selection Switch / AQS Switch 0
When you press this switch, the A/C indicator ( ) To switch over the air conditioner mode to a specific mode
comes on and the air conditioner starts to operate.
(air recirculation, fresh air intake, AQS ON or OFF), use this 1
switch. For detailed information of switch functions and AQS
When you press the switch again, the air conditioner 2
system, refer to AQS system in this section.
stops operation and the indicator goes out.
CAUTION 3
To change the air source selection mode in auto operation mode, 4
press the air source selection switch after changing to the manual
operation mode.
5
Air conditioner
indicator 6
7
8
9
10
11
Air Source Selection and AQS Operation 12
AQS 13
AQS automatically adjusts from the
fresh air intake mode to the recircu- 14
lation mode when polluted air is de-
tected by the AQS sensor. 15
- AQS ON - AQS ON - AQS OFF - AQS OFF
16

0
1 Defroster Switch
Use this switch for quick defrosting.
2
When you press this switch, the airflow direction will be
3 changed to the windshield and door glasses, the air con-
ditioner operates automatically, and outside air comes in.
4 If you press the switch again during its operation, the indi-
cator ( AUTO ) goes off. When the defrosting is complete,
5 press the switch to return to normal operations.
6
7 A/C ON indicator
8 Defroster indicator
9
Automatic Selection of the Fresh or Air Recir-
10 culation Mode
11 1. When the defroster switch ( ) is pressed, outside air
automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed
12 again, the previous mode will be restored.
13 2. If the AQS system is operating (AQS indicator ON), AQS
automatically adjusts from the fresh air mode to the re-
14 circulation mode when polluted air is detected by the AQS
sensor.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Switch 0
When you press this switch each time, the air flow mode will be changed to another mode and
displayed as shown in the figure. 1
When you press this switch in the auto air conditioner operation (“AUTO” indicator ON), the system
is changed to the manual air conditioner mode (“AUTO” indicator OFF).
2
3
4
5
6
Vent Defroster and
Floor 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Bi-level Floor
14
15
16

REAR AIR CONDITIONER* (DUAL A/C)
0 Operation of Rear Air Conditioner
1
2
Air Flow
3 Direction
4 Control Lever
Rear Air Flow (B)
5 Rear A/C switch
Control Dial (A)
6
7 1. Press the rear air conditioner switch.
8 2. Turn the rear air flow control dial (A) to any position (1 ~ 3)
from “0” position.
9
3. Adjust the air flow direction with the flow direction control
10 lever (B).
11
CAUTION
12 • If the rear air conditioner switch in front control panel is turned
off, the rear air conditioner does not work even when the rear
13 air flow control dial is operated. However, the air flows due to
fan operation.
14 • The rear air conditioner is only for air cooling. It does not include
the air heating function.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEFOGGING AND DEFROSTING
Inside of the Windshield Automatic Heater & Air Conditioner 0
2. Adjust the fan speed with the fan speed control. 1
3. To quickly remove the moisture on the glass, set the fan 2
speed button at a high speed position.
4. To prevent fog from forming on the glass, setting the air 3
source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode is
recommended. 4
Defroster switch 5
Outside of the Windshield 6
1. Press the defroster switch. CAUTION 7
2. Adjust the fan speed with the fan speed control. • An extended air conditioner operation in the bi-level mode or
3. To quickly remove the frost on the glass, set the fan speed defrost mode may cause the outside glass to fog due to the 8
button at a high speed position. high temperature difference between the inside and the out-
4. Set the temperature control switch to a hot position.

side of the vehicle. In this case, change the air flow to the 9
fresh air intake mode and set the fan at a low speed.
• Especially in winter or summer, to avoid glass fogging, remove 10
WARNING any obstacles such as snow or leaves on the air inlets.
• When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the wind-
11
shield and windows. The fog will block your view through all
windows and can create a dangerous situation. To prevent any
12
fog on the glass, setting the air source selection switch to the
fresh air intake mode is recommended. 13
14
NOTE
• When you press this defrost switch, the air conditioner turns on
15
automatically and the system selects the fresh air intake mode.
16

REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
0 Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When

• Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period.
1 • Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
2
CAUTION CAUTION
3 • Do not apply excessive force to the holders when removing • Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10,000 km of driving.
the glove box. It may cause a deformation of holders and re- However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions,
4 sults in a loose installation. such as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air condi-
• Replace both air conditioner filters at the same time while pay- tioner or heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.
5 ing attention to the installing direction. • When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or
heating capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.
6
7
Replacement of A/C Filter
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 1. Open the glove box. 2. Remove the glove box from the dash 3. Unscrew the bolts and remove the air
panel by moving the glove box hold- conditioner filter cover.
16 ers at both sides in the direction of
the arrow.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4. Pull out the first filter. 5. Lift up the second filter and remove 6. Install new filter while the protruding
it. section (arrow) of the filter faces 8
upward.
9
10
A/C filter
11
12
13
14
15
16
2 filters as a set

AQS (AIR QUALITY SYSTEM)
0 AQS System?
1 AQS automatically adjusts from the fresh air intake mode
to the recirculation mode when polluted air is detected
2 by the AQS sensor. The air source selection returns back
to the fresh air intake mode if a certain time passes or
3 the polluted air has disappeared.
4
In Auto Mode (AUTO indicator ON)
5 Whenever you press the AQS switch, the AQS switches over
between ON and OFF. When the AQS is turned on, the air
6
AQS Sensor Air Source Selection Switch/ source selection is changed to air recirculation mode
7 AQS Switch automatically. It cannot be changed to the fresh air intake
mode manually.
8
In Manual Mode (AUTO indicator OFF)
9 Whenever you press the Air source selection switch / AQS
switch, the system is switched to fresh air intake, air
10 recirculation, and AQS ON mode in order.
11 Indications of AQS Switch
12 CAUTION
To change the air source selection mode
13 in auto operation mode, press the air
source selection switch after changing
14 to the manual operation mode.
15 - AQS ON - AQS ON - AQS OFF - AQS OFF
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Turbocharger System 10 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Cautions in Using the Turbocharger ........ 10-2

5
6
Preventive Maintenance ........................... 10-3
7
Turbocharger Inspection ........................... 10-4
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS IN USING THE TURBOCHARGER
0 WHAT IS THE TURBOCHARGER?

Turbochargers are based on the gas turbine
1 engine technology, but operate under consid-
2 erably greater pressure. The turbocharger
consists of two turbo elements, a turbine and
3 a compressor, both of which are driven from
the main center shaft. The turbine rotates be-
4 tween 50,000 ~ 160,000 spins per minute
and uses the energy of the exhaust gas to
5 drive the compressor. The compressor, in
turn, draws in fresh air which it supplies to
6 the cylinders in the form of compressed air.
As more fuel is drawn into the engine, out-
7 put performance is boosted between 15 ~
8 30% in comparison to a non-turbocharged
engine.
9
Advantages of a turbocharger
10
Turbocharger helps the engine operate more
11 smoothly and with greater efficiency.
• Increase specific power
12
• Compensate for power loss at high altitude
13 • Reduce emissions
14 What is the intercooler?

15 The intercooler cools down the compressed
air temperature to increase the engine power
16 by increasing the air density.
GETtheMANUALS.org
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
0
The vehicle owner should be encouraged to observe the
following precautions to ensure maximum turbocharger ser-
CAUTION 1
• At low ambient temperature, or when ever the vehicle has
vice life. not been used for a long period, normal engine oil pressure 2
and flow is affected. Under these conditions the engine should
CAUTION be started and allowed to idle for a few minutes before oper- 3
ating at higher rpm.
• Operate the engine over the idling speed only after normal en-
gine oil pressure has been established. Forcing the turbocharger • Avoid long periods of engine idling. The combination of low- 4
to operate before the bearings are adequately lubricated cre- pressures in the turbine and compressor may allow oil to
ates unnecessary friction. seep past the seal into the turbine or the compressor. 5
• Take steps to reduce temperature and speeds from their maxi- • The turbocharger may need to be pre-oiled after oil change
mum before shutting down the engine. or any service that involves oil draining. Crank the engine a 6
few times before allowing start, then start the engine and al-
The engine equipped with turbocharger develops much more
low it to idle for a period to establish full oil circulation and 7
heats than a normal engine, so when the engine is stopped
pressure before operating at higher rpm.
abruptly, the oil in the bearings may evaporate due to heats and 8
can be stuck.
• Use only the specified engine oil and observe inspection and 9
replacement intervals.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
TURBO CHARGER SYSTEM 10-3
TURBOCHARGER INSPECTION
0
Good maintenance practices should be observed, particu-
1 larly regarding air filtration, oil quality and filtration.
WARNING
Operating the turbocharger system without the intake and exhaust
2 These areas are important because of a turbocharger’s op- manifold mounting can result in severe engine damage.
erating speed. The turbocharger should be operated when every device is nor-
3 Proper operating procedures and preventive maintenance mally installed.
practices enhance good turbocharger’s service life and
4 performance.
5 The contaminated air cleaner can damage the turbo- NOTE
charger seriously, so frequently check the air cleaner and The most defectives in turbocharger are turbine blade damages or
6 observe the replacement intervals. compressor bearing sticks due to lack of oil supply, contaminated
engine oil or external materials.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Convenience Devices 11 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Storage Boxes and Convenience Device Sun Visors ................................................. 11-13

5
..................................................................... 11-2 Front Room Lamps/Sunglasses Storage 6
Tiltable Steering Wheel and Horn ............ 11-4 ................................................................... 11-14 7
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................... 11-5 Center and Rear Room Lamps/ 8
Storage Bin for Portable Electronic Device/ Assist Grip ................................................. 11-15
9
Ticket Holder/AV Jack ................................ 11-6 Storage Box in Luggage Compartment/
Luggage Net ............................................. 11-16 10
Front Cup Holder/Cigarette Lighter .......... 11-7
Center Console ........................................... 11-8 Rear Heated Glass / Removable Ashtray 11
................................................................... 11-18 12
Power Outlet ............................................... 11-9
AV* & Navigation System* ........................ 11-19 13
Glove Box/Courtesy Lamp ....................... 11-10
Rear Cup Holder/Jack Storage/ 14
DVD Changer/Navigation Unit Storage ... 11-11 15
Seatback Pocket/Map Pocket .................. 11-12
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BOXES AND CONVENIENCE DEVICE
0 Sunglasses box
1
2 Passenger’s sun visor Driver’s sun visor
3 Inside rearview mirror

(ECM*)
4
5 Digital clock
6
7
8
9
10 Horn
11
Glove box Cigarette lighter
12
13
Center console
14 Power outlet Driver’s door
Passenger’s door
15 map pocket
map pocket
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING 0
• Driving with any storage box open can cause injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop. Keep all the storage boxes closed while driving.
• Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire. 1
• When vehicle is in motion, liquid may spill out. Spilled liquid can damage the vehicle and cause burns if it is hot. Do not use the cup holder
while vehicle is in motion. Therefore, do not put any cup with hot liquid into the cup holder.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Seatback Seatback 10
pocket pocket
11
Center console 12
AV components* Rear cup holder
13
14
Rear power outlet
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
TILTABLE STEERING WHEEL AND HORN
0
1 Tiltable Steering Wheel Horn
Press the horn pad on the steer-
2 ing wheel to sound the horn.
3 CAUTION
4 The sound of the horn can startle

pedestrians. Use only when needed.
5
6
7
8 To adjust the steering wheel, push the con-
trol lever to right, adjust the wheel up or
9 down to the proper position, release the
control lever to lock the wheel in place.
10 After adjustment, make sure that the steer-
ing wheel is securely fixed.
11
12
13
14
15 WARNING
• Do not adjust the steering wheel while your vehicle is moving.
16 Otherwise, control of your vehicle can be lost.
• Before driving, make sure that the steering wheel is locked.
GETtheMANUALS.org
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side ways
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR to obtain the best rear view.
ECM (ANTI-GLARE AUTO ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION)* MANUAL TYPE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR 0
1
2
Anti-glare auto adjustment switch
3
Brightness
Indicator detecting
4
sensor 5
6
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be au- Manual Day/Night Adjustment 7
tomatically adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle be-
You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or
hind you by pressing the anti-glare auto adjustment switch. 8
While pressing the switch, its corresponding indicator pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to
comes on. Pressing the switch once more turns off the in- other vehicles behind you.
9
dicator and deactivates the function.
CAUTION
CAUTION 10
When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night,
Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function may
not operate properly.
adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing 11
or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear
• When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to the
inside rearview mirror’s sensor.
view. 12
• When the rear window has a dark tinted glass.
• When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic anti- WARNING 13
glare function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview. For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
• For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. 14
WARNING 15
• The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not
allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in 16
your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor.
• For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BIN FOR PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE/TICKET HOLDER/AV JACK
0 STORAGE BIN FOR PORTABLE

ELECTRONIC DEVICE TICKET HOLDER/AV JACK*
1
2
3
4 Ticket Holder
5
AV Jack
6
7
8
9
10
The storage bin for portable electronic device is located on Ticket Holder
11 the center instrument cluster. Keep your cellular phone or
Tickets and cards can be stored.
MP3 player in the storage bin as shown in figure. Some mod-
12 els may not be inserted into the storage bin due to the size. AV Jack
13 CAUTION External audio and video device (camcorder, digital camera
Make sure that any button on the electronic device is not pressed etc.) can be connected to the AV system in vehicle through
14 in the holder. Also, be careful not to damage the surface of the this jack.
electronic device.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT CUP HOLDER/CIGARETTE LIGHTER
FRONT CUP HOLDER CIGARETTE LIGHTER 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Front cup holders are installed at the front side of center To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in all the way down.
console. When it becomes heated, it automatically pops out and is 10
ready for use.
CAUTION 11
• When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, liquid may spill. WARNING
• Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup holder. • When the cigarette lighter does not automatically pop up after 30 seconds, 12
there is a danger of overheating. If this happens, pull it out and have the
problem corrected by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. 13
• Inserting your finger into the cigarette lighter outlet can cause burns or
To hold a smaller cup and can,
use the additional pad (A) as
electric shock. 14
• The barrel of the cigarette lighter becomes very hot when it is fully charged.
shown in figure. When touched by or dropped on bare skin, this may cause burns. Drop-
ping the hot lighter can cause damage to a car seat or even start a fire.
15
CAUTION 16
Do not tap the cigarette lighter strongly to clean up. That may damage the coil.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER CONSOLE
0 CUP HOLDER STORAGE BIN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To use the cup holder, push the outer surface. Push the button and lift the cover lid to open in order to store
10 Push it in when not in use. small items.
11 CAUTION CAUTION
12 • When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, liquid may spill. Do not store any flammables including disposable lighters in the
• Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup holder. console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode
and cause a fire.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER OUTLET
FRONT POWER OUTLET REAR POWER OUTLET 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The front power outlet is installed at the left side of The rear power outlet is installed at the right side of stor-
passenger’s footwall. age box in luggage compartment. 10
WARNING 11
An auxiliary power outlet for extra electrical devices is
• For the extra electrical devices, you must use this power outlet. 12
installed. This power outlet supplies power when the igni-
If you alter the vehicle's wire lines and leave the wires to
tion key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. hang freely, it could cause an accident like a fire.
13
CAUTION • Abide by the nominal capacity of 120W.
Keep the power outlet cover closed if not in use. Electrical de-
• Do not put a finger into the outlet. It may cause an electric 14
shock.
fects can occur if objects other than power outlet plugs or wa-
ter gets in. This will prevent the socket from becoming clogged • The battery can be discharged if the power outlet is used 15
or short circuiting. excessively when the engine is not running.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOVE BOX / COURTESY LAMP
0 GLOVE BOX COURTESY LAMP

1
2
3
Courtesy lamp
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pull up on the lever to open the glove box. Items can be The courtesy lamp comes on when opening the door and
10 stored. goes out when closing it.
11 When the tail lights are on and the glove box is open, the
glove box inner lamp comes on.
12
CAUTION
13 • Driving with the glove box lid open can cause injury in case
of an accident or a sudden stop. Keep glove box lid closed
14 when driving.
• Do not store any flammables including a disposable lighter in
15 the console box or glove box. In hot weather, it may explode
and cause a fire.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR CUP HOLDER/JACK STORAGE/DVD CHANGER/NAVIGATION UNIT STORAGE
REAR CUP HOLDER DVD CHANGER* / NAVIGATION UNIT* 0
STORAGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DVD changer/
Navigation unit 8
storage
9
The rear cup holder is located at the rear side of center The jack storage and the navigation unit/DVD changer stor-
10
console. age are located at the left side of luggage compartment. 11
To use it, pull the cover down while pulling down the lever.
Close it when not in use. 12
CAUTION 13
• When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, the liquid may spill. 14
• Danger of burning! Do not store a hot beverage in the cup holder.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SEATBACK POCKET / MAP POCKET
0 SEATBACK POCKET MAP POCKET

1
2
3
4 Map pocket
5
6
7
8
9
Storage pocket is installed at the rear side of front seat. Use The map pocket is located on each front door. Maps,
10 it to put personal belongings. magazines, newspapers, and other items can be stored.
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS TICKET HOLDER/VANITY MIRROR AND LAMP 0
1
2
Ticket holder
(only for driver’s)
3
4
5
Lamp
Ticket holder 6
7
Vanity mirror
8
9
Sun visors are installed on the roof trim above the driver’s The driver’s sun visor has a ticket holder on its back side.
and passenger’s seat. Swing the sun visor down or to the Swing the sun visor down and open the cover to reveal the
10
left (right), if necessary. mirror. 11
The vanity mirror comes on only when opening the cover.
12
CAUTION
Do not operate the sun visor, vanity mirror or ticket holder while
13
driving. It may cause an unexpected accident.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FRONT ROOM LAMPS / SUNGLASSES STORAGE
0 FRONT ROOM LAMP SUNGLASSES STORAGE

1
2
3 Room lamp switch
(driver side)
4
5
6
7
Room lamp switch
8 (passenger side)
9
When the switch is pressed, the appropriate front room Sunglasses storage is located in the overhead console.
10 lamp is turned on. When pressed it again, the lamp goes Press the top side of the cover to open it. To close it, push
out. the cover up until you hear the “click” sound.
11
12 CAUTION CAUTION
Do not turn on the room lamp for a long period of time with the • If glasses falls down, it may be damaged. Fix it firmly.
13 engine stopped. Otherwise, the battery may be discharged. • The unclosed console can block your rearview. Also, the con-
sole can injure you in an accident or a sudden stop. Therefore,
14 close the console before driving off your vehicle.
• Do not store any item that can be deformed in a hot temperature.
15 • Do not store any heavy items inside the console. When it falls
out of the console, occupants may get injuries.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS/ASSIST GRIP
CENTER AND REAR ROOM LAMPS ASSIST GRIP 0
1
OFF 2
3
Door
4
5
ON
Coat hook 6
7
8
9
The room lamps are operated by room lamp switch. Your vehicle has assist grips above the front passenger’s
If the center room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the cen- door and the rear doors. The coat hook is installed only on 10
ter room lamp is turned on when opening a rear door. It the grip above rear light door.
11
goes out when closing the door.
If the rear room lamp switch is at “Door” position; the rear 12
room lamp is turned on when opening the tailgate. It goes
out when closing the tailgate. 13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/LUGGAGE NET
0 STORAGE BOX IN LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LUGGAGE NET

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To use the storage box in luggage compartment, release Any possibly moving objects during driving can be stored in
10 the lock on the cover and open the cover. the luggage net.
11 Hook the net up to the luggage compartment.
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE COVER (EXCEPT FOR 7-SEATER) 0
NOTE 1
Store the luggage cover separately to use the luggage room of the
vehicle wide. 2
3
CAUTION
Don’t put anything on the luggage cover. 4
5
6
7
8
9
When Unrolling the Luggage Cover
10
Pull the handle of the luggage cover at the center, and fix it
into the grooves at left and right sides of quarter trim inner 11
panels.
12
When Rolling the Luggage Cover
Take the luggage cover out of the grooves by pulling the
13
handle and let go the grasp slightly to roll the luggage cover. 14
When Removing the Luggage Cover 15
After tearing off the edge of luggage cover at the back of rear
seat, remove the luggage cover assembly by raising up it 16
from the fixing holder’s grooves.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR HEATED GLASS / REMOVABLE ASHTRAY
0 REAR DEFOGGER REMOVABLE ASHTRAY

1
Heating grids
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 General Ashtray
9
The heating grids are installed on the tailgate glass. If you open the lid at night or in a dark area, the ashtray light
10 Be careful not to damage the heating grids while cleaning will light up inside the ashtray.
the inside of the window. On the other hand, the general removable ashtray’s battery
11 should be replaced with a new one when the battery’s
power is used up.
12 CAUTION
Battery type: CR2032
Do not coat the tailgate window and side windows with any af-
13 termarket products, especially a metal anti-glare film or a two-tone WARNING
film. When it is used on the windows, the sensitivity of the heating
14 grids can be deteriorated.
To avoid danger of fire, do not accumulate inflammable materials,
such as garbage or cigarette butts, in your ashtray and make sure
the cigarettes are full extinguished.
15
CAUTION
16
The LED illuminator inside of the ashtray has an electronic circuit and
is not water-proof. Any impact on it or water will damage the unit.
GETtheMANUALS.org
AV* & NAVIGATION SYSTEM*
AUDIO OUTLET AND ANTENNA 0
You can hear the music
through the speakers on your AV monitor* (touch panel type)* 1
vehicle by connecting the exter- 2
nal audio device (MP3 player,
CD player etc.) to this jack. 3
Stereo jack
4
You can use the digital camera, 5
camcorder, or external audio AV outlet*
device by connecting them to 6
the AV outlet (only for the ve-
hicle with AV system). Audio switch in 7
steering wheel
8
9
Navigation, TV and radio antenna* 10
11
12
13
CAUTION 14
If any transmitter or receiver is close to the antenna, it can inter-
fere with the communication of the antenna, causing operating or
15
receiving errors in the navigation system, TV and radio.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 CHANGER* / NAVIGATION UNIT*
1
2 Changer
3
4
5
6
7 Navigation Unit
8
9
Changer and navigation unit is installed in the left bottom CAUTION
10 on the rear of the vehicle. To access the changer and navi-
Insert only the MAP DVD to operate the navigation system.
gation unit, open the storage cover and unlock the two lock-
11 ing devices. The navigation unit can be used by inserting Inserting other types of discs such as music CD, MP3 CD, or other
DVD may cause defects to the navigation unit.
the MAP disc.
12
For further detailed information, refer to the navigation op-
13 erating manual.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN USING AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 0
1
• An illegal copy of a CD/DVD may cause a malfunction
Usable Discs
in the audio/video head unit and abnormal replay. Use 2
only original CD/DVDs.
Navigation Unit* 3
• Incompatible discs may cause a malfunction in the
system. Use only compatible discs. • Navigation map DVD
4
• The back of the front monitor is very hot. Do not touch Head Unit
the back when opening the monitor.
• DVD player*: DVD/VCD/Audio CD/MP3 CD
5
• Do not use the audio/video/navigation system for a long
time when the engine is not running. The battery could • CD player: Audio CD 6
discharge.
Changer 7
• Be careful not to spill water on the unit or to let any for-
• DVD/VCD/Audio CD/ MP3 CD
eign objects into the system through the opened 8
monitor.
• Do not apply excessive force to adjust, open, and close 9
the monitor. Do not impede the automatic movement Please refer to a separately provided operating manual
of the unit. It may cause a malfunction.
10
to check disk compatibility.
• Do not apply any impacts and pressure to the monitor 11
screen. The LCD panel or touch screen panel can be
damaged. 12
• When cleaning the touch screen, turn off the system 13
and clean the surface with a dry and soft cloth. Never
use a coarse cloth, hard cloth, chemical agent, or vola- 14
tile cleaning solvent (alcohol, benzene, thinner) for
cleaning the touch screen. The screen surface can be 15
damaged and discolored.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
In Case of Emergency 12 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Starting the Engine with Jumper Cables . 12-2 Shift Lever Lock Release and Safety Mode
5
Reset .......................................................... 12-17 6
Cautions When a Tire Is Flat .................... 12-4
Towing a Disabled Vehicle ...................... 12-18 7
Warning Triangle* ..................................... 12-5
Emergency Towing ................................... 12-19 8
OVM Tools .................................................. 12-6
Trailer Towing ........................................... 12-21 9
Removing the Spare Tire ......................... 12-7
Accident or Fire ........................................ 12-26 10
Changing a Spare Tire .............................. 12-8
Emission Reduction Device ..................... 12-27
11
Cautions When Changing the Tire .......... 12-13
12
When the Engine Is Overheating ............ 12-14
13
Water Separator Warning Light and
14
Engine Check Warning Light ................... 12-16
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
STARTING THE ENGINE WITH JUMPER CABLES
If the batter is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6 The positive (+) cable to the positive
Booster battery (+) terminal.
7 The minus (–) cable to the minus (–)
terminal.
8
9
Discharged battery
10
11
12 1. Prepare a set of jumper cables.
2. Place another vehicle that has the same 12 V of power
13 Connecting Order: near to the discharged vehicle.
(1) The + terminal of the discharged battery 3. Switch off all electrical accessories for the discharged
14
(2) The + terminal of the booster battery vehicle.
15 (3) The - terminal of the booster battery 4. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission to the
(4) Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the body P position (automatic transmission) or neutral (N) posi-
16 of the discharged vehicle, such as the engine block or tion (manual transmission).
a front towing hook. 5. Connect the jumper cables.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
WARNING 1
• Connecting the jumper cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery
could result in arcing and possibly a battery explosion. Serious personal injury or 2
vehicle damage can result.
• Make sure that the jumper leads are securely connected. Otherwise, an abrupt dis- 3
connection due to vibration during engine starting may cause an electrical short re-
sulting in severe damage to electric components. 4
• A battery generates the gas which is flammable and explosive. This gas could be
exploded due to the spark when connecting the jump cables. Make sure that the
5
booster battery has the same voltage rate with the discharged battery.
6
• While connecting the jumper cables, make sure that the negative (–) and positive
(+) cables never touch each other. Otherwise sparks might cause an explosion 7
of the battery.
• Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact 8
eyes, skin, or painted surfaces. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and contact your doctor. 9
• While being transported in an ambulance, gently wipe out the contacted area
with a water-wet cloth or sponge. 10
11
CAUTION
• When starting your vehicle with jumper cable, turn off the engine of the boost
12
vehicle and connect the jumper cables
13
• Ensure that the jumper cables are clear away fan blades before starting the engine.
14
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, and let the
engine idle for a few minutes. 15
7. Attempt to start the engine with the discharged battery.
16
8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the jumper cables in the
reverse sequence of connection.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN A TIRE IS FLAT
0
If one of the tires becomes flat while driving, grab the steer-
1 ing wheel firmly and remove your foot from the accelerator
2 pedal. Gradually slow down and park your vehicle in a safe
place. Replace the flat tire with a spare tire. For the process,
3 refer to sections about the spare tire.
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING WARNING
10
• Don’t panic! Improper operation of the steering wheel or abrupt • Stop the engine and set up the warning triangle behind your ve-
11 braking may cause a consequential accident on the road. Stop hicle (daytime: 100 m, night time: 200 m - on express way).
your vehicle in a safe place and turn on the hazard flasher and • Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
12 then apply the parking brake. wheel being changed.
• Do not drive with a flat tire for even a very short distance. In • Have all passengers get out of vehicle and move in a safe place.
13 addition to damages to the rim of the tire, abnormal driving con-
ditions can cause a very danger situation.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING TRIANGLE*
0
When the vehicle has a serious problem dur- 1
ing driving
1. Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of 2
traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind
your vehicle (days: 100 m, nights: 200 m) to warn other
3
vehicles. 4
2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away
from the traffic. When your safety is secured, contact your 5
Ssangyong dealer for your emergency service.
6
7
8
9
When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe CAUTION
place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. 10
• Set up a warning triangle on a place where it can be very visible
(Daytime: 100 meters behind, Night: 200 meters behind) while paying attention to traffic conditions. 11
• On a highway or vehicle-designated road, evacuate yourself to
a safe place after pulling over your vehicle. 12
• At night time, set up a blinking emergency triangle behind your
vehicle (over 200 meters) to warn others. 13
• On a curved road, provide a emergency hand signal with a warn-
ing light to others at the point over 200 meters behind your vehicle.
14
• If your vehicle is operational or the problem is fixed, resume driving 15
paying extra attention to traffic conditions.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM TOOLS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 OVM tools box
1. Jack 4. Screwdriver (+ and -)
10 Open Close
2. Jack connection 5. Spanner
11 3. Wheel nut wrench
12
13 CAUTION
• Put out the OVM tools after fixing the upright seat with a strap.
14 Do not put out the tools without fixing the seat using a strap. In
that case, the second row seat may fall and cause injury.
15 You can find a jack, jack extension, wheel nut wrench, and • After using the OVM tools, return them to the original locations.
other OVM tools under the second row seat behind driver’s
16 seat.
GETtheMANUALS.org
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
0
WARNING 1
The emergency spare tire is only for emergency situations.
Never use it for normal driving. After installing the spare tire 2
on a wheel, take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized ser-
vice center or a tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new 3
regular tire.
4
CAUTION 5
• When reinstalling the spare tire to the carrier, be sure to se-
curely lock it to the carrier holder. 6
• While your vehicle is being raised up with the jack, avoid any
impact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured. 7
8
9
1. Insert the connection rod in the hole located in the upper
center of the bumper after opening the tailgate, and then 10
connect the wheel nut wrench to it.
11
2. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-clockwise to lower the
spare tire. 12
3. When the spare tire is on the ground, remove the tire by
prying off the lift plate. 13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHANGING A SPARE TIRE
0
2. Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns by turning them
1 counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
2
WARNING
3 • Do not remove the nuts yet from the wheel. If they are removed,
the wheel could slip off from the vehicle. Then, the body of the
4 vehicle will fall down on you and you may get seriously injured.
• Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns.
5
6
7
8
9
1. Install the chocks under the front side and rear side of
10 the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being
replaced.
11
WARNING
12 • The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
When Replacing a Front Tire When Replacing a Rear Tire 0
Front jack up point Rear jack up point 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3. Place the jack directly under the jack-up points so that the
top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. 10
WARNING 11
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is set up at the
jack up point. Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Make 12
sure that the jack securely contacts the jacking point of the ve-
hicle and the ground. Otherwise, there could be a personal injury 13
or damage to your vehicle.
14
CAUTION
Do not set the jack at any other position on the vehicle other than
15
those specified. If the jack is set at the wrong position, the body of
the vehicle could be dented or damaged. The top of the jack should
16
<Jack up points>
contact the jacking point.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4. Combine the jack, jack extension and the wheel nut 6. Take the wheel off and place the wheel under the vehicle
10 wrench as shown in the figure. Raise up the vehicle by body. This helps to minimize any danger if the jack slip
rotating the combined wrench clockwise until the tire is off position.
11 off from the ground about 3 cm.
12 5. Remove the wheel nuts by hands while the vehicle is
stationary. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
13
WARNING
14 Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is in the proper
position, and secure both to the vehicle and the ground. It may
15 cause a personal injury or vehicle damage.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the combined wrench
Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with counter-clockwise until the tire touches the ground. Re-
1
the sequence as shown in the figure. move the jack. 2
WARNING 3
While the jack is supporting your vehicle, do not use too much force
to tighten the nuts. Otherwise, the vehicle may slip off and you 4
may get injured.
5
9. Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with the sequence 6
as shown in the figure.
7
10. When done with mounting the spare tire, place the flat
tire in the luggage room. Store the jack and other emer- 8
gency tools in their storages.
9
7. Then mount the spare tire and temporarily tighten the
wheel nuts until the spare tire wheel is no longer loose. 10
WARNING 11
By tightening up the spare tire until it is not loose any more, you 12
can avoid any tilting of the tire on the wheel hub when the tire
touches the ground.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 WARNING
• With the emergency spare tire, do not drive any faster than
2 60 km/h.
• The temporary spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
3 use it for normal driving. After installing the spare tire on a wheel,
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or
4 a tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
• Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
5 loose and even come off or any malfunctioning in the steering
and braking system.
6
• This could lead to an accident. Be sure to tighten the wheel nuts
7 as specified. If the wheel comes off due to a loose wheel nut,
you may have a fatal accident.
8 • Using different tires could cause you to lose control while driving.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires from the same manu-
9 facturer on all wheels.
If over tightened, the wheel nuts could be damaged. Do not
10 overtighten the wheel nuts by pressing the wheel nut wrench
by foot or using an assist pipe. CAUTION
11 After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 1000 km, re-
tighten the wheel nuts.
12 - Wheel nut tightening torque: 120 ~ 140 Nm
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN CHANGING THE TIRE
CAUTIONS WHEN CHANGING THE TIRE 0

1
X Before Changing the Tire 2
• Turn on hazard flashers and move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park on a firm and level
ground. 3
• Set up the jack at the specified position. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. While 4
the vehicle is on the jack, never start or run the engine or push the vehicle.
5
• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay in a place away from traffic.
6
X During Changing the Tire
7
• Do not completely tighten the wheel nuts at a time. Tighten the wheel nuts in the diagonal sequence in 2 or 3
steps. 8
• Never apply oil or grease to either wheel studs or nuts as it will cause them to overtighten.
9
X After Changing the Tire 10
• Check, repair, and retighten the replaced tire at the nearest Ssangyong Authorized Service Center or a quali-
fied tire shop after an emergency change.
11
• Securely fix the tire in its carrier. Check to see if the spare tire is securely locked into the carrier without any 12
looseness. Otherwise, it may make some abnormal noises or fall out from the carrier on the road while the
vehicle is moving. This may cause an accident or hit a pedestrian. 13
• If this happens, the fallen tire can be a great danger to other vehicles or people. Check the tightness of the 14
wheel nuts and tire pressure before driving.
• The spare tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do not exceed 60 km/h speed when the spare tire
15
is installed on the vehicle. 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE IS OVERHEATING
0
1
2 Coolant temperature gauge
3
4 Engine overheat warning lamp
5
6
7
When the engine overheats, steam or spray may come
8 out the engine compartment. Or, the coolant temperature
gauge is closed to “H”. If this happens, the engine over-
9 heat warning lamp comes on and a buzzer will sound.
Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe place.
10
11 Symptoms:
12 • The engine overheat warning lamp blinks (Buzzer
sounds)
13 • The gauge indicates over the normal range (or in the
red zone),
14 • Steam or spray from the engine compartment.
15 • Reduced engine output.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE ENGINE OVERHEATS 0
1. Move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park
on a firm and level ground. Apply the parking brake and
CAUTION 1
• When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level,
shift the transmission to the P position (automatic immediately turn off the engine and let it cool down. 2
transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission). • Opening the reserve tank cap should be performed when the
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the engine is off and has cooled down. 3
engine hood to ventilate the engine compartment. • Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pressure,
which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant re-
4
3. If you see steam under the hood, stop the engine
serve tank cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
immediately. 5
• The engine may be damaged if you add cold water abruptly when
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine the engine is still hot.
running in idling speed. 6
• Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal 7
• If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
range even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If it is too low, 8
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections.
9
6. Add coolant into the reserve tank if necessary.
7. If necessary, cover the tank cap with a cloth and turn the 10
cap a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing
the pressure, remove the cap and fill up the tank. Then, 11
put the cap back on the tank.
12
8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized 13
Service Center.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR WARNING LIGHT AND ENGINE CHECK WARNING LIGHT
0
1 Engine Check Warning Light
2 If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, some of the engine control compo-
3 nents including sensors and other devices
are defective. Have the system checked by
4 a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
5
WARNING
6 • The fuel system in the engine may get serious damages if you Water Separator Warning Light
keep driving while the warning light is on. Prompt correction
7 should be necessary. When the water level inside the water sepa-
• Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of the rator in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level,
8 priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel pump with this warning light comes on and a buzzer
fuel. sounds. If these conditions occur, immedi-
9 ately drain the water from the fuel filter & the
10 CAUTION water separator. For the draining procedures, please refer to
“How to drain the water from fuel filter” section in this manual.
When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter
11 exceeds a certain level, this warning light comes on and a buzzer
sounds. Also, the driving force of the vehicle decreases. If these CAUTION
12 conditions occur, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter & When this warning light comes on, the engine driving force may
the water separator. If the above conditions are still existing after be decreased or the engine may stall.
13 draining the water, have the system checked by a Ssangyong
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SHIFT LEVER LOCK RELEASE AND SAFETY MODE RESET
HOW TO RELEASE THE SHIFT LEVER LOCK 0
Symptoms after Resetting of the Safety Mode 1
2
• Decreased driving force while driving at a high speed
• Fixed gear position during driving 3
• If the safety mode is activated, the shift indicator dis- 4
plays “D”.
If one of these symptoms happens, reset the automatic 5
transmission safe mode.
6
How to Reset the Safety Mode
7
1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to the “P”
position. 8
2. Stop the engine and wait for over 10 seconds.
9
1. Apply the parking brake firmly and turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal and push down the shift lock
10
release lever with a stick such as a pen. Then, shift the WARNING
If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the 2nd forward
11
lever to other position.
gear in the “D” position or the 2nd reverse gear in the “R” position) 12
3. Start the engine, release the parking brake, and place the
still exists, have the system check by a Ssangyong Dealer or
selector lever to the “D” position. Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. 13
WARNING
• If the automatic gear selector does not move out of “P”, take the
14
steps mentioned above and take the vehicle to a Ssangyong
dealer or authorized service center. Have the vehicle checked 15
and repaired.
• The brake pedal must be depressed when you try to move the
16
selector.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 Flat-bed equipment is the best method of moving a disabled If not available to use a car carrier, tow the vehicle as
vehicle to avoid any damages. illustrated.
9
The vehicle equipped with the full-time four wheel drive Choose an appropriate towing method based upon vehicle
10 (TOD, AWD) system should be towed by this way. damage.
11 WARNING WARNING
• If you tow the vehicle equipped with the full-time four wheel • The propeller shaft for the grounded wheels should be discon-
12 drive (TOD, AWD) system while front or rear tires are rolling nected before towing.
on the road, the drive system in the vehicle should be severely • Because their oil pumps are off during towing, towing the ve-
13 damaged. hicle with the propeller shaft connected can cause internal damage
or burning of the transmission or the transfer casing.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY TOWING
0
• When towing your vehicle with the towing rope:
1
1. Securely tie up the towing rope to the towing hooks. Se-
cure the rope to both of the towing hooks under the front 2
of the vehicle as tight as possible.
2. To make the rope conspicuously visible, bind a white col- 3
ored cloth on the center of the rope.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position and re-
4
lease the parking brake. 5
4. Switch on the hazard warning flashers of both vehicles.
Within 5 m
5. Maintain the towing distance. Apply more force to depress 6
the brake pedal of the vehicle that will be towed.
6. Set the ignition in the ON position. 7
7. Total length of the towing and towed vehicle and the tow- 8
ing rope should be less than 25 meters. And tow the ve-
hicle within 25 km with 5 km/h of the towing speed. The 9
length of the rope should be less than 5 m.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 LOCATION OF TOWING HOOKS
1 Front towing hook Rear towing hook CAUTION
• If you cannot use a professional towing service, the driver of
2 the towed vehicle should stay behind the steering wheel. But,
never use this emergency towing when the electrical system,
3 steering system, or brake system is not operative.
• Ensure that only horizontal tension is applied to the front or rear
4 towing hook.
• If there are steep hills or sharp turns in your towing path, do not
5 use this method.
6 • Depress the brake pedal stronger than normal condition when
the engine is not running.
7 • When your electrical systems operate properly, turn on the haz-
ard warning lamps or turn signal lamps according to the towing
8 vehicle’s signals.
• Avoid overloaded towing and do not tow a heavier vehicle than
9 yours.
WARNING • Position the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” so that the steering
10 wheel is not locked.
• The towing hook should be used only for temporary and short-
11 distance recovery or towing in an emergency situation. Avoid
using it all the time. Misusing can have serious consequences.
12 • Special cares should be taken when towing. Avoid an abrupt start-
off or reckless driving because it could over-tighten the towing hook,
13 towing rope or chain with excessive force. To prevent damage, do
not take up slack in the towing rope or chain too quickly.
14 • If the towing hook is required for towing as the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow, mud or sand or it can't get out by itself due to
15 poor traction, make sure no excessive force is applied to the
towing hook. Otherwise, the towing hook, towing rope or chain
16 may be broken, resulting in an injury or damage to the vehicle.
For safe towing, it is recommended to contact Ssangyong au-
thorized serviceshop or a professional towing company.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TRAILER TOWING
TRAILER LOADING 0
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger vehicle To load your trailer properly, you must know how to mea-
therefore handling, braking, durability and economy will be sure gross trailer weight and trailer ball weight. Gross trailer
1
affected by towing a trailer. weight is the weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it. 2
Your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of cor- You can measure gross trailer weight by putting the fully
rect equipment. Also, you should avoid overloading and other loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. 3
abusive use. Trailer ball weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch
The maximum loaded trailer weight you can pull with your by the trailer coupler at its normal towing height. This weight
4
vehicle depends on your intended use and what special can be measured using a bathroom scale. 5
equipment has been installed on it. Before attempting any The weight of your loaded trailer (gross trailer weight)
towing, ensure that the correct equipment is fitted to your should never exceed the specified values. 6
vehicle.
The maximum permissible trailer ball weight is 128 kg.
Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and install towing 7
equipment to suit your requirement. The permissible trailer loads are valid for several gradients
from 6.8% to 12.6% according to engine power applied. 8
When the trailer has been coupled, the permissible rear axle
load for the fully loaded towing vehicle (including occupants)
9
must not be exceeded. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg)
Maximum permissible
Maximum
2 Engine Type
Trailer
static vertical load on
the coupling device
3 with brake 3,200
G32D A T
4 without brake 750
with brake 3,200
5 D27DTP A T
without brake 750 128
6 MT 3,200
with brake
D27DT A T 3,200
7
without brake 750
8 723.65 mm 75 mm
The above dimensions are certified data to meet the follow-
9 ing conditions.
On a 12% of uphill: Capable of 5 starts within 5 minutes
10 (with trailer)
11 On a 18% of uphill: Capable of 5 starts within 5 minutes
(without trailer)
12
13 1,060 mm
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING TRAILER BRAKES 0
In higher elevations the engine output and gradability may drop so
If the trailer brakes are used, you should follow all instruc-
that it may not be possible for the permissible trailer loads to be
tions provided by the manufacturer. Never modify the brake
1
fully utilized in mountainous territory.
system of your vehicle. 2
So, the permissible trailer loads should be reduced by 10% at
every 1,000 m after reached at 1,000 m of altitude.
TRAILER LIGHTS 3
WARNING Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights which meet 4
Never exceed the maximum load limits of trailer or trailer towing country and local requirements.
equipment and be aware that due to the higher load overheating
Always check for the proper operation of all trailer lights be-
5
might occur in hot days or during continuous uphill driving.
fore you start to tow. 6
WARNING
TIRES 7
Incorrect loading and crosswinds, large trucks passing or road
roughness can cause swaying or trailer separation. When towing trailers, be sure your tires are properly inflated 8
• Adjust ball load by distribution of load in trailer. to the inflation pressure.
• Check by weighing loaded trailer and ball load separately. 9
• Check the relevant state or territory registration authorities for SAFETY CHAINS 10
the legal maximum towing weight capacities.
Always attach safety chains between your vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer 11
so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch. Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
12
mendation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just 13
enough slack to permit full turning. Never allow safety chains
to drag on the road. 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE FLUID • Allow adequate stopping distance.
0
Stopping distance is increased when you tow a trailer.
Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) un-
1 der the following conditions. • Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too
frequently, which will cause the brakes to overheat and
2 - Towing a trailer frequently. result in reduced brake efficiency.
- Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain. • Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when
3
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID • Parking on a steep slope is not recommended.
More frequent maintenance is required if your vehicle tows You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
5 trailer frequently. attached, on a hill.
6 If something goes wrong, such as the trailer/caravan hitch
TOWING TIPS becoming disengaged, people can be injured and both
7 When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently the vehicle and trailer can be damaged.
8 compared with normal driving condition. • If someone removing the blocks stands directly behind the
trailer, he could be injured. If your brakes or the hitch
For safety, observe the following precautions:
9 • Practice turning, stopping, and reversing before you be-
slipped, the trailer could roll backward. Make sure anyone
removing blocks from your wheels stands to one side.
10 gin towing in traffic.
• Take note of trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not tow in traffic until you are confident that you can
11 handle the vehicle and trailer safely.
DRIVING ON HILL
12 • Before driving, make sure that the lighting system of the
trailer works properly. Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
13 • Do not drive faster than 90 km/h. down a long or sleep downgrade. If you don’t shift down,
you might have to use your brakes so much that they would
• Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and
14 avoid sudden maneuvers.
get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed
15 • Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. to a level which minimizes the possibility of engine and trans-
• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. mission overheating.
16 • Always have someone guide you when reversing.
GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING ON HILLS WHEN YOU ARE READY TO LEAVE 0
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, AFTER PARKING ON A HILL
on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to
1
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while
move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the you: 2
trailer can be damaged.
• Start your engine
3
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to • Shift into a gear and
do it: • Release the parking brake. 4
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
for automatic transmission yet, or into a gear for a manual
5
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
transmission. 6
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular 7
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
MAINTENANCE WHEN TOWING TRAILER
8
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re tow-
brake, and then shift to PARK (P) for automatic ing a trailer. See the maintenance Schedule for more on 9
transmission, or First or Reverse gear for a manual trans- this. Things that are especially important in trailer opera-
mission. tion are engine oil, brake pads & discs, automatic transmis- 10
sion fluid. Each of these is covered in this manual and the
5. Release the regular brakes.
index will help you find them quickly. If you want to tow a 11
trailer, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you
start your trip. 12
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are 13
tight.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
ACCIDENT OR FIRE
0
1
2
3
4 If your vehicle catches on fire, don’t panic.
Evacuate any occupants and use the extinguisher.
5
6
7
8
9
10 ACCIDENT
Turn on the emergency hazard warning switch. If possible, WARNING
11 move your vehicle to a safe place to avoid any secondary
• In an accident, fuel can be released from the vehicle. Therefore,
accidents. If anyone is injured, call an ambulance and con-
12 tact the nearest police station.
stop the engine and avoid any sparks or flames.
• If you have even a minor burn, see your doctor.
13
FIRE
14
Stop immediately in a safe place. Turn off the engine. Use
15 fire extinguishers to put out the fire. If it is impossible to
extinguish the fire, contact the nearest fire or police station.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
EMISSION REDUCTION DEVICE
CAUTION 0
The presence of an excessive amount of particulates in the CDPF
may reduce the engine power. 1
2
DOC DPF When the engine CHECK indicator flashes
Regeneration may not be performed 3
CDPF due to several operating conditions. And
in this case, the engine CHECK indica-
4
tor flashes. This flashing function is to 5
inform the driver to take action for the
This vehicle is equipped with the Diesel Oxidation Cata- proper regeneration of the filter. 6
lyst (DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) for emission If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at
reduction devices. over 50 km/h for 15–20 minutes to regenerate the CDPF. 7
The DOC converts HC and CO2 in the fuel to H2O and re- When the amount of particulates is lowered down to a cer-
moves 80% of the Soluble Organic Fraction (SOF) among tain limit, the engine CHECK indicator goes off.
8
particulate materials, thereby reducing 25% or more of par-
ticulate materials.
9
WARNING
The DPF collects particulate materials to the filter and re- • An excessive amount of accumulated particulates can damage 10
moves them by combustion. This device removes 95% or the CDPF. Therefore, make sure to drive the vehicle at 50 km/h or
more of particulate materials. more for 15–20 minutes if the engine CHECK indicator is flashing. 11
• The regeneration process of the CDPF produces so much heat,
Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF) so never drive or stop the vehicle near flammable materials to 12
The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Cata- avoid causing fire. Also, be sure to stay away from the exhaust
lyst (DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are ex- pipe and the CDPF to avoid getting burned. 13
haust gas after-treatment devices.
CAUTION
14
Regeneration process
“Regeneration” is the process of combusting particulates
When the engine CHECK indicator comes on, it means that a sen- 15
sor related to the engine control or an electric device is
when a certain amount of particulates is collected in the filter.
In this process, the temperature of exhaust gas rises to approx.
malfunctioning. In this case, have your vehicle checked by a 16
600°C by fuel control and particulates are effectively incinerated.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Service and Maintenance 13 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Daily Check List ......................................... 13-2 Parking Brake/Catalytic Converter ......... 13-20
5
6
Locations in Engine Compartment .......... 13-3 Brake and Clutch Fluid (With M/T) .......... 13-21
7
Engine Oil .................................................. 13-6 Transfercase Oil ........................................ 13-22
8
Engine Coolant .......................................... 13-9 Washer Fluid ............................................. 13-23
9
Air Cleaner ................................................ 13-11 Battery ....................................................... 13-24
10
Power Steering Fluid ............................... 13-13 Spark Plugs ............................................... 13-26
11
Fuel Filter and Priming Pump Fuse and Relay Box ................................. 13-27
(Without Additional Water Separator) .... 13-14
12
Tire ............................................................ 13-32
13
Fuel Filter and Water Separator*
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................... 13-36
(With Additional Water Separator) ......... 13-15 14
Do-It-Yourself Operation ........................... 13-37
Fuel Filter/Drive Belt ................................ 13-18 15
Scheduled Maintenance Services .......... 13-38
Brake & Clutch Pedal ............................... 13-19 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAILY CHECK LIST
0 Exterior Interior
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 1. Check for the steering wheel’s free play and looseness.
9 2. Check the parking brake lever.
The following checks are recommended before driving to 3. Check the operation of the horn, windshield wipers and
10 maintain safe and dependable vehicle operation. turn signals.
1. Check the tires for inflation pressure and damage. 4. Check the operation of the instrument cluster and indi-
11 2. Check the wheel bolts for looseness. cator warning lights.
5. Check the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
12 3. Check the operation of the lights. 6. Check the position of the rearview mirrors.
4. Check for any oil, water, fuel and fluid leaks. 7. Check the operation of the door and window locking
13 mechanism.
8. Check the brake’s and clutch pedal’s free play, height and
14 function.
15 9. Check the seat belts.
CAUTION
16 If in doubt about driving and operating conditions, have your vehicle
checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LOCATIONS IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT
D27DT DIESEL ENGINE 0
CAUTION 1
Do not work on the engine compartment while the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, muffler or cata-
lytic converter is hot. Always turn the engine off and allow it to cool before starting the maintenance. 2
Always keep your hands and tools away from the moving parts when the engine is running. Front washer
fluid reservoir
3
Coolant surge tank
4
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir Relay and
(for manual transmission) fuse box 5
Engine oil filler cap 7
8
Air cleaner
Battery
9
10
11
Without Additional With Additional 12
Water Separator Water Separator
3 13
Power steering 14
1 3 fluid reservoir
2
15
1 16
1. Priming pump 2. Water separator 3. Fuel filter
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 D27DTP DIESEL ENGINE
1
2
3
4 Coolant surge tank Front washer
fluid reservoir
5 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
(for manual transmission)
6
Engine oil filler cap
7 Engine oil
dipstick Relay and fuse box
8
9
10 Air cleaner
11 Battery
12 Without Additional With Additional

13 Water Separator Water Separator
3
14 1 3
15 2
1 Power steering fluid reservoir
16
1. Priming pump 2. Water separator 3. Fuel filter
GETtheMANUALS.org
G32D GASOLINE ENGINE 0
1
2
3
Coolant surge tank
Front washer 4
fluid reservoir
5
Engine oil filler cap 6
Relay and 8
fuse box
9
Air cleaner
Battery 10
11
12
13
14
15
Power steering
fluid reservoir 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OIL
0 Diesel Engine Level Check

Park the vehicle on a level ground and apply the parking
1 brake. Stop the engine and wait more than 5 minutes.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Rein-
2 sert it all the way.
2. Pull out it again and check the oil level.
3
3. The oil level should be between the maximum (Max)
4 mark and minimum (Min) markson the oil dipstick. Oil
Engine oil cap should be replenished before the level goes below the
5 Engine oil minimum mark.
dipstick
6 Replenishment
1. If the level gets to the lower point, open the filler cap on
7 top of the cylinder block and add the genuine oil without
exceeding the level of the upper mark.
8
2. Recheck the oil level after 5 minutes.
9 Gasoline Engine
10 SPECIFICATION AND CAPACITY

Specification Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
11 (Approved by MB Sheet 229.1 or 229.3 or 229.31
for DSL/GSL ENG without CDPF)
12 (Approved by MB Sheet 229.31 for DSL ENG with CDPF)
13 Viscosity: MB sheet No. 224.
Capacity D27DT 8.5L
14 Engine oil Engine oil
D27DTP 8.5L
cap dipstick
15 G32D 9.0L
16 WARNING
Use only Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filters. Use of non-rec-
ommended products could cause damage to the engine.
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUNCTION OF ENGINE OIL 0
Engine oil’s major function is to lubricate and cool the parts • Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are
inside of the engine, which enables engine to work properly. being used
1
• Repeated driving in short-distance 2
Consumption of Engine Oil
• Driving with the excessive idling
The consumption of engine oil is depending on the viscosity
and quality of the oil, and the driving habit. More oil may be
• High load driving such as trailing 3
required under the following conditions;
CHANGE INTERVAL 4
- When the Vehicle is New
A new engine usually consumes more oil because its pistons, • The engine oil filter element should be changed at the 5
piston ring and cylinder walls are not yet adjusted with an opti- same time with the engine oil.
mal condition. • Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filter. 6
Oil Consumption : Max. 0.8 Liter per 1,000 km
Accordingly, it is necessary for the driver to check frequently Engine oil 7
the oil level and to replenish oil if needed. SYMC recommends Diesel Engine
that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle
8
Service interval
or you drive the long distance until the first 5,000 km. EU Initial check: 5,000 km, and replenish if necessary, 9
- When driving at High Engine Speeds change every 15,000 km or 12 months (But, shorten
As long as you keep the followings with sufficient care in your
the service interval under severe condition) 10
first running the vehicle, it will guarantee you to get excellent GENERAL Initial change: 5,000 km, change every 10,000 km
and comfortable performance for a long with your vehicle. or 12 months (But, shorten the service interval un- 11
der severe conditions)
• Remember to check the engine oil level and shorten the cycle 12
to refuel the engine oil under severe driving conditions. Gasoline Engine
• Avoid subjecting to engine to heavy loads by driving at full Service interval 13
throttle, especially be careful when the outside temperature Initial change: 10,000 km, change every 15,000 km or 12 months
remains below freezing for the first 1,000 km. (But, shorten the service interval under severe condition) 14
• Do not use the trailing in the first 1,000 km driving
Engine Oil Filter
15
* What’s Severe Driving Condition?
• Driving at the high engine speed or at high-speed Item Service interval 16
• Driving for consecutive two hours at high speed
Engine oil filter Same interval with the engine oil
• Driving the rough road, off-road, dirt-laden road, and muddy roads
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS SAE VISCOSITY CLASSES
1 WHEN CHECKING The SAE classes (viscosity) should be selected in accordance with
the average seasonal air temperature.
2 WARNING Applying the SAE classes exactly on the basis of the outside air tem-
• Clean the dipstick with a clean cloth so that any peratures would necessitate frequently changing the engine oil. The
3 foreign materials cannot get into the engine. temperature limits for the SAE classes should therefore be regarded
• Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil. as reference temperatures and the actual air temperature may be
4 higher or lower for a short period of time.
• The oil should not go above the upper mark on
5 the dipstick.
• Operating with insufficient or too much amount Engine
6 of oil can damage the engine. The viscosity should be selected according to outside temperature. Do
not switch to a different viscosity in the event of brief temperature
7 CAUTION fluctuations.
Regularly check the engine oil level and add the

8 Ssangyong genuine engine oil if necessary.
9
10 * How to check engine oil specification
11 Example:
0W, 5W, 10W, 15W, 20W, 25W 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
12
Summer oil viscosity
13 Winter oil viscosity (W: Winter)
14 • The numerical, for example SAE 10W, relates

to viscosity at particular temperature and the
15 alphabet “W” indicates the oil’s suitability for
colder temperature. For summer oil viscosity,
16 higher numbers mean higher viscosities.
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE COOLANT
1
2
Coolant surge tank 3
Coolant surge tank
4
5
6
7
8
9
Level Check Service Interval
Park the vehicle on level ground and apply the parking brake. • Replacement: Every 5 years or every 200,000 km
10
Stop the engine and wait until it cools. 11
Diesel Engine (D27DT) 11.0 ~ 11.5 Ssangyong genuine coolant
1. The coolant level should be between the MAX and MIN
Diesel Engine (D27DTP) 11.0 ~ 11.5 Anti-Freeze:SYC-1025 12
mark on the coolant surge tank.
Gasoline Engine (G32D) 11.5 ~ 12.0 Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
2. Check the coolant level. If the level is below the “MIN”
mark, immediately add coolant.
13
• Check: Everyday, before driving off
• Replenishment: Replenish as necessary 14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
1 Replenishment WARNING
Use only the 50/50 mixture of soft water and antifreeze as When the coolant level is too low, the engine can overheat. If the
2 specified. coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster goes up
abnormally, immediately check the coolant level. Use only the
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly when the engine
3 is cold. At this time, you can hear a “hissing” sound.
Ssangyong genuine coolant and anti-freeze. If different types of
coolants or unapproved coolants are used to refill, chemical reac-
4 2. When there is no more “hissing” sound, remove the cap tions can be caused and block the flow of the coolant. This may
from the surge tank. cause the engine to overheat or burning inside the engine.
5 3. Add the 50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze to the cool-
ant reservoir tank. WARNING
6
4. If no unusual things happen, tighten the coolant reser- • Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under
7 voir cap. pressure, which could cause serious injury. Never remove the
coolant surge tank cap when the engine and radiator are hot.
8 CAUTION • Use only the SSangyoug genuine coolant and anti-freeze.
• Avoid any direct contact of the coolant to the painted body of
9 the vehicle.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
AIR CLEANER
Diesel Engine Cleaning 0
Blow the compressed air through the element in the opposite direction to
normal air flow to clean the element. 1
Diesel EU: Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 15,000 km, replace 2
every 30,000 km (But, shorten the service interval under
severe condition)
3
GENERAL: Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 10,000 km, 4
replace every 30,000 km (But, shorten the service interval
Air cleaner under severe conditions) 5
Gasoline Clean every 15,000 km, replace every 60,000 km (But, shorten 6
the service interval under severe conditions)
7
Gasoline Engine
WARNING 8
• Do not drive your vehicle with an improperly installed air cleaner element or without it. 9
It may damage the engine or may cause a fire.
• Do not let any object enter the housing when cleaning the air cleaner. It may dam-
age the engine or may cause an engine to stall.
10
11
CAUTION
• If you blow the compressed air to normal air flow, the engine will be damaged due 12
to foreign materials entering.
Air cleaner • Be careful with the direction of the compressed air on the air cleaner. 13
14
CAUTION
If vehicle is operated under severe condition 15
• Pollutant area or off-road driving
• Driving in dusty condition or sandy condition 16
frequently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 DI Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
1
2
3
4
5
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, replace more often than at Blow the compressed air through the
6 the usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty, shake the element to remove dust. element in the opposite direction to
7 Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing and cover with a damp cloth. normal air flow to clean the element as
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing compressed air through it in the oppo- shown above.
8 site direction to normal air flow.
9 WARNING
Engine can be damaged.
10 Do not operate the vehicle without air cleaner element.
11
12 Change
1. Unscrew the cover bolts and remove the cover.
13
2. Replace the air cleaner element with a new one. Make
14 sure that the element is correctly installed in the air
cleaner housing.
15 3. Close the cover and tighten the bolts.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER STEERING FLUID
1
2
3
Power steering
fluid reservoir 4
5
Power steering
fluid reservoir 6
7
8
9
Check the fluid level on a level ground with the engine turned
off. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks 10
on the reservoir cap gauge. If it drops to or below the MIN
mark, refill the reservoir with the specified fluid. Only use 11
the specified fluid. The difference between the MIN and MAX
marks shows fluctuations of the steering fluid between when
12
it is hot and when it is cold. 13
A zone
B zone Specification and Capacity 14
Specification ATF DEXRON II or III 15
Capacity (L) Approx. 1.0
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
D27DTP, D27DT
FUEL FILTER AND PRIMING PUMP (Without Additional Water Separator) DIESEL ENGINE
0 • Change the fuel filter at every 30,000 km (EU) or 25,000 km

(General) of driving.
1 • Drain water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the engine oil.
• After changing the fuel filter, perform the pumping operation of Plug opening direction
2
the priming pump until it becomes rigid. Plug closing direction
3 CAUTION Fuel filter
• Change the fuel filter according to the specified service interval. Water drain plug
4
• Drain water from the fuel filter whenever changing the engine oil. Connector
5 • After changing the fuel filter or draining the water, perform the pumping
Priming pump
operation of priming the pump until it becomes rigid.
6
7
8
9
10 Fuel filter
11
12
Water Separating Function Priming Pump Operating Conditions
13 If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuel system, it may 1. when completely consumed the fuel
cause serious damage to the fuel system. The fuel filter pro- 2. after draining the water from the fuel filter
14 vides the water separating function to block the inflow of water.
3. after replacing the fuel filter
15 When the water level inside the water separator in the fuel
filter exceeds a certain level, the warning light comes on and Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of
the priming pump until it becomes rigid to fill up the fuel
16 the buzzer sounds. If it occurs, immediately drain water from
pump with fuel.
the fuel filter. For draining procedures, refer to “How to drain
the water from fuel filter” section in this manual.
GETtheMANUALS.org
D27DTP, D27DT
FUEL FILTER AND WATER SEPARATOR* (With Additional Water Separator) DIESEL ENGINE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fuel filter 10
11
Priming Pump Operating Conditions
12
1. If the vehicle has been run out of fuel
2. After draining water from the fuel filter. 13
3. After replacing the fuel filter Priming Water 14
Before starting the engine, perform the pumping operation of pump separator
the priming pump until it becomes rigid so that the fuel pump 15
fills up with fuel.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 FUEL FILTER
1
EU Replace every 30,000 km (Draining water from fuel
2 filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)
3 General Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from fuel

4
5 Water Separating Function
If the water in fuel gets into the engine and the fuel system,
6 it may cause serious damage in the fuel system. The fuel
filter offers the water separating function to block the inflow
7 of water.
8 CAUTION
1. Fuel filter A. Opening direction of drain plug
• Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintenance
9 2. Drain plug B. Closing direction of drain plug
schedule.
10 If particles in fuel get into the engine and fuel-related devices, • Drain the water from the fuel filter whenever replacing the en-
it may cause serious damage in affected components. Make gine oil.
11 sure to replace the fuel filter according to the specified main- • After replacing the fuel filter or draining the water, press the
tenance schedule. priming pump until it becomes rigid.
12 Make sure that the foreign materials get into the fuel filter
while changing the fuel filter, and clean around it to prevent
13 particles from flowing into the filter.
14 Press the priming pump until it becomes rigid.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WATER SEPARATOR 0
Change every 150,000 km or 5 year
1
Location:
2
Behind the fuel filter (between the fuel filter and the dash 3
panel) in the engine compartment (engine intake side)
4
Draining the Water from Water Separator
5
Drain the water from the water separator whenever replac-
ing the engine oil. 6
After draining the water, press the priming pump until it be-
comes rigid. Do not crank the engine before doing this 7
procedure. For the detailed draining procedures, please re-
fer to “How to drain the water from the fuel filter” in the wa- 8
1. Water separator A. Opening direction of drain plug
ter separator warning light section.
2. Drain plug B. Closing direction of drain plug 9
3. Connector CAUTION
4. Priming pump 10
• Replace the water separator according to the specified main-
The water separator is used in the fuel supplying system in

tenance schedule. 11
• Drain the water from the water separator whenever replacing
order to reduce the water content in the fuel provided to the
FIE system. It gives additional water volume storage. A wa-
the engine oil. 12
• After replacing the water separator or draining the water, press
ter sensor is fitted to the water separator in order to warn 13
the priming pump until it becomes rigid.
the driver that the water separator has to be drained.
When the water level in the water separator reaches a cer- 14
tain point, the water separator warning light in the instru-
ment cluster comes on. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUEL FILTER/DRIVE BELT GASOLINE ENGINE
0 FUEL FILTER DRIVE BELT

1 Gasoline Engine
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
If the filter is contaminated, the supplied fuel will be reduced, You do not need extra tension adjustment, but check belt
10 main components will be damaged due to entering the con- for wear or tension by pushing the belt and replace if neces-
taminated materials and the performance of catalytic con- sary.
11 verter will be deteriorated.
12 Replace the fuel filter according to the specified maintemamce Belt Replacement: Gasoline Engine
schedule. Install a device onto the tension adjuster and rotate clock-
13 Service Interval wise to release the tension and take off the belt.
14 Replacement Every 100,000 km (if using poor quality WARNING
of fuel, replace every 30,000 km)
15 The engine could inadvertently start while checking the belt and
cause moving parts to crush or cut. Remove key from ignition
16 CAUTION switch.
Replace with a Ssangyong genuine part with specified intervals.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE & CLUTCH PEDAL
BRAKE PEDAL CLUTCH PEDAL 0
Checking Pedal Free Play Checking Pedal Free Play 1
Turn off the engine and depress the brake pedal several Depress the pedal by hand until clutch resistance is felt; en-
times to deplete the vacuum in the brake system. Gently de- sure free play is within specification. 2
press the brake pedal by hand and measure the distance it If the free play is more or less than specified, have the clutch
moves until slight resistance is felt. If the free play is more 3
or linkage adjusted by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
or less than specified, have the brakes adjusted by a thorized Service Operation.
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Opera-
4
tion. Clutch pedal free play 5 ~ 10 mm 5
Brake pedal free play 1 ~ 4 mm 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
PARKING BRAKE/CATALYTIC CONVERTER
0 PARKING BRAKE
Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the num- Damage to the catalytic converter or the vehicle may re-
1 ber of notch clicks heard while fully applying it from the result if the following points are not observed :
2 leased position. Consult a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the ve- vice Operation as Quickly as possible in the event of misfiring,
3 hicle on a fairly steep grade. If the number of clicks is more irregular engine running following a cold start, a significant
or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions which
4 a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service may indicate a fault in the ignition system.
Operation. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a
5
low speed and with low engine revolutions.
6 Stroke 4 ~ 7 notches at a force of 20 kg
You should therefore avoid :
7 • Frequent repeated cold starts.
• Actuation of the starter for an unnecessarily long time dur-
8 CATALYTIC CONVERTER ing starting (fuel is injected during the starting procedure).
9 The catalytic converter is located between exhaust manifold • Allowing the tank to become empty (an irregular fuel sup-
and center muffler. The catalytic converter consists of mono- ply leads to overheating)
10 liths with honeycomb shaped structure of ceramic material • Starting the engine by pushing or towing (unburned fuel
which are elastically mounted in a wire mesh structure. may enter the catalytic converter) : use jump leads.
11
This precious metal coating on the monoliths accelerate the
Have all maintenance work carried out by a Ssangyong
12 reduction and/or oxidation of toxic components.
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation. You can
On vehicles with a catalytic converter for unleaded fuel, lead then be certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical,
13 fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the elec- injection and ignition system will be operating correctly, that
tronic system, thereby rendering them inoperative.
14 your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that
the catalytic converter system will have a long life.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID (WITH M/T)
Diesel Engine Specification and Replacement 0
Specification DOT 4 1
Service interval Every 2 years
2
Level Check and Replenishment 3
• The fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” 4
levels on the reservoir.
• Check the level on a level surface. If it drops to or below 5
the MIN mark, refill the tank with the specified fluid. Only
use the specified fluid. 6
CAUTION 7
• Be careful not to let any foreign materials enter the tank when 8
adding the fluid.
Gasoline Engine • Do not add the fluid above the “MAX” level. 9
• Do not allow the fluid to make contact with the body paintwork.
• After adding the fluid, tighten the cap securely. 10
• If frequent refills are required, have the system checked by a 11
12
WARNING
• Use only the Ssangyong genuine brake fluid. 13
• Do not allow the fluid to make contact with skin or eyes. If con-
tact happens, rinse affected areas immediately with plenty of 14
water. If irritation persists, consult a doctor.
• The fluid gradually decreases according to brake pad wear. A
15
sudden drop of the fluid level may indicate a leak in the system.
In this case, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer
16
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TRANSFERCASE OIL
0 TRANSFERCASE OIL
1 Service Interval, Specification and Capacity
2 Inspect every 15,000 km

Service interval Change every 60,000 km
3 (frequent check of oil leak)
4 Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)

Specification
5
Part time
6 Direct Injection 1.4 L
Capacity Diesel Engine, Full time (TOD)
7 Gasoline Engine
AWD 1.1 L
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WASHER FLUID
TOP UP WASHER FLUID 0
Diesel Engine Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the speci-
fied product as needed.
1
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter 2
Washer Reservoir season.
3
WARNING
• The washer fluid includes flammable materials to prevent
4
freezing. It could cause a fire when directly contacted with
flames. When checking the washer fluid, avoid the flames
5
near the washer fluid tank.
6
• If engine oil or antifreeze is used as the washer fluid, it will
decrease your visibility through the windshield and may 7
cause an accident.
8
Gasoline Engine
CAUTION 9
• If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze during the
winter and damage the washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use 10
only the specified washer fluid.
Washer Reservoir • If you operate the washer switch without washer fluid, the mo- 11
tor could be damaged due to overloads. Therefore, if there is no
washer fluid, do not operate the washer motor. 12
• Operating the wipers on a dry surface on the windshield or rear
window without any washer fluid may cause damage to the glass.
13
Operate the wipers after sufficiently spraying the washer fluid.
14
• Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body paint of
your vehicle during replenishment. If washer fluid spills onto your 15
hand or other body part, wash it away under a clean water flow.
• There is no independent washer reservoir for the tailgate window. 16
The front washer reservoir is also for the tailgate window.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY
0
1 Diesel Engine When the battery charge warning light ( ) on the instru-
ment cluster comes on, the battery is not normally charging.
2 If the warning light comes on while driving, turn off all unnec-
essary electrical devices and have the system checked by a
4
Battery Maintenance
5 • Make sure the terminal connections are securely
tightened.
6
• If the terminals are corroded, clean them with a wire
7 brush or sand paper.
• The battery terminal should be disconnected only when
8 the ignition key is removed from the key cylinder. Discon-
necting the terminal with the key in the “ON” or “ACC” po-
9 Gasoline Engine sition may cause a sudden change in voltage and dam-
age various electrical systems.
10
• Check the battery for any cracks, damages or leaks. Re-
11 place it if necessary. To remove any battery fluid on the
battery surface, wear rubber gloves and wipe the fluid out
12 with a wet-soapy cloth.
13 Specification
14 Specification DC 12V
15 Capacity 90AH
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0
WARNING CAUTION 1
• The battery has acid that can burn you. And its gas can explode. • If you disconnect the battery terminal when the engine is
You can get serious injuries if you are not careful. Keep naked running, electrical systems could be damaged. 2
flames, sparks and smoking items away from the battery. • To remove the battery cable, disconnect the negative cable
• Loosely connected batter terminals can set up sparks. These first.And be careful on the battery terminal polarity when you 3
sparks can cause a fire with flammable gas. Therefore, tightly connect the cables. The negative and the positive should not
connect the terminals. be confused. 4
• At night, if you need to check the engine room, do not use a • The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for positive
lighter, but only use a battery-powered flashlight. and negative cables, must not be interchanged. Never short-
5
• Because the battery electrolyte is very strong acid, avoid any circuit the battery.
6
direct contact of the battery electrolyte on your skin or • When the ambient temperature is too low, the battery capac-
vehicle’s body. If the acid contacts your skin, thoroughly wash ity will drop and can be frozen. 7
your skin with fresh water and see your doctor. Do the same • Keep the battery electrolyte at its specified level. If the elec-
on your vehicle. trolyte level is higher than the MAX level, it can overflow during 8
• Wear eye protection when working with a battery. If working battery charging and if the electrolyte is overcharged, the bat-
in a closed area, keep good ventilation. tery can explode. 9
• Only use a battery with the approved voltage and capacity.
Otherwise, an incompatible battery can catch fire. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
SPARK PLUGS GASOLINE ENGINE
0 SPARK PLUGS
1 Service Interval
2 Replacement (G32D) Change every 60,000 km
3 NGK: BKUR5ETZ-10
(G32D)
4 Specification Gap 1 ± 0.1 mm
5
CAUTION
6 • When replacing the spark plugs, disconnect the negative termi-
nal of the battery and turn off all the switches.
7 • It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when chang-
ing the spark plugs (you could burn yourself).
8 • Do not use non-recommended spark plugs.
9 • Do not allow contaminants to enter spark plug hole.

Spark plugs should be inspected periodically for carbon
10 deposits. When carbon accumulates on a spark plug, a WARNING
strong spark may not be produced. Spark plugs may be very hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
11
If necessary, clean the electrodes with a fine wire brush and
12 carefully scrape the carbon off the insulator with a small file.
The spark plugs should then be blown clean with com-
13 pressed air and the upper insulator wiped clean. And ad-
just the spark plug gap.
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
If any of the electrical system components do not operate, check its corresponding fuse. If the fuse is blown, replace it with
the same capacity.
0
1
Interior Fuse Box
2
Interior fuse box
3
4
5
6
Relay box 7
Interior fuse box is located at the left side of the instrument 8
panel and relay box is located on the floor under left instru-
ment panel.
9
Engine Room Relay and Fuse Box, PTC Fuse Box
10
CAUTION
• When an electrical system does not operate, check its fuse first. 11
If a fuse is blown, check its capacity and replace it with the
same capacity. 12
• If you remove an electric system’s fuse while the system is
operating, the electrical equipment could be damaged. Always 13
remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and turn off all
electric devices. 14
PTC fuse box Engine Compartment
• Always replace a specified fuse with the same rating.
• If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have
Fuse and Relay Box 15
the electrical system checked and repaired by a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. Engine room fuse box is located at the right side in engine 16
compartment and PTC fuse box is installed on the battery.
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 HOW TO CHECK AND REPLACE FUSE
1
2
3
4
Higher amperage Specified amperage
5
6
7 Normal Open
8
9
1. Turn off all electrical systems and remove the ignition key WARNING
10 from the key cylinder.
• The use of anything other than the specified fuse could cause
11 2. Open the fuse and relay box cover. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire.
3. Locate the defective fuse. • The use of different types or different rating fuses could cause
12 4. Pull out the relevant fuse by using the fuse puller. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire. Always
replace a fuse with the one with the same rating.
13 5. Visually check whether it is blown or not.
6. If normal, insert it to its original position.
14 7. If blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same
NOTE
The underhood fuse and relay box has some spare fuses. Refill
15 capacity.
the fuses immediately as you use them. The fuse rating is indi-
cated on the upper surface of the fuse.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
30A 10A
B+
ABS/ESP TAIL LP
30A
**
PWM MOTOR RLY 12
60A
FUSE 15A FRT FOG LP
PULLER FRT FOG LP
RLY 15
10A
SPARE H/LP(RH)
30A ENG MAIN 10A
10A
FRT WIPER(LO)
I.M.V
RLY 4 H/LP(LH)
(5P)
SPARE 10A COMPRESSOR RLY 14
20A 20A
COMPRESSOR RLY 10
DRL UNIT CABIN F/BOX
SPARE (B+ POWER2)
ENG MAIN
15A 40A
30A H/LP(LOW)
***
10A FOLDING MRR
H/LP(HI) 40A
RLY 3 30A
ENGINE ROOM FUSE BOX LABEL (D27DT)
IGN KEY1
HORN RLY 8 30A 30A
P/WINDOW(FRT)
**
C/FAN(LOW)
30A 20A
*** HORN P/SEAT(DRIVER)
15A
RLY 2 DEICER
30A 15A
** DEICER FRT BLOWER HAZARD LP
C/FAN(HI)
140A *(120A)
ALTERNATOR
30A
GETtheMANUALS.org
RLY 6 30A 10A
***
SERVICE AND
GGGGG C/FAN P/WINDOW DEFOGGER

MAINTENANCE
- * : FFH, ** : PWM, *** : VISCO

13-29
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
16
15
14
13
12
10
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13-30
30A 10A
B+
ABS/ESP TAIL LP
30A 15A
RLY 12 **
WOOFER AMP
FUSE 15A FRT FOG LP
PULLER FRT FOG LP
*** SW. ENG.MOUNT RLY 15
10A
SPARE 2nd A/Pump RLY 11 H/LP(RH)
30A * 10A
10A
FRT WIPER(LO)
ENG MAIN *I.M.V (5P)
H/LP(LH)
SPARE RLY 4 10A COMPRESSOR RLY 14
20A 20A
COMPRESSOR RLY 10
SW ENG MOUNT DRL UNIT CABIN F/BOX
SPARE ***
2nd A/Pump (B+ POWER2)
15A 50A
*ENG MAIN 40A
30A H/LP(LOW)
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

10A FOLDING MRR
H/LP(HI) 40A
RLY 3 30A
IGN KEY1
HORN RLY 8 30A 30A
P/WINDOW(FRT)
C/FAN(LOW)
30A 20A
HORN P/SEAT(DRIVER)
ENGINE ROOM FUSE BOX LABEL (D27DTP, GSL)

15A
RLY 2 DEICER
30A 15A
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEICER FRT BLOWER HAZARD LP
C/FAN(HI)
D27DTP+PTC=140A
ALTERNATOR
30A RLY 6 30A 10A

D27DTP+FFH/GSL=120A
C/FAN P/WINDOW DEFOGGER


- * : D27DTP, ** : GSL(EU-III), *** : GSL(EU-IV)
- PLEASE USE THE DESIGNATED RELAYS.
- OPTION : *(EXP) , **(GSL)
HAZARD FRT WIPER(HI) FRT BLOWER
** **
REAR RR SEAT
INJECTOR
SENSOR WARMER FLASHER UNIT
WIPER IGNITION COIL
(LH)
INTERIOR RELAY BOX LABEL
* ** *
RR RR SEAT
HDC DRL FUEL RR FOG LAMP
BLOWER WARMER
PUMP
(RH)
BLOWER MOTOR SEAT UNIT

NO.36 NO.32 NO.24 NO.16 NO.8 NAVIGATION
START MOTOR SPARE MEMORY A/CON EAS, EPB
10A - 7.5A 7.5A DEFOGGER 7.5A FRT SEAT WARMER
NO.35 C/LIGHT NO.31 RR SEAT NO.23 DOOR LOCK NO.15 RR WIPER NO.7
CLUSTER
20A P/OUTLET(FRT) 15A WARMER 15A RR FOG LAMP 15A RR WASHER 7.5A
GETtheMANUALS.org
NO.34 O/SIDE MRR NO.30 NAVIGATION NO.22 IMMOBILIZER NO.14 FRT WIPER NO.6 ENG PREHEAT'G
TUNER UNIT IMMOBILIZER
- "*" DSL OPTION
7.5A M/STATION 15A DVD CHANGER 10A **GSL ECU 15A FRT WASHER 7.5A PTC, STOP LAMP
TUNER UNIT ECM MRR
SERVICE AND
NO.33 AUDIO
NAVIGATION NO.29 NO.21 NO.13 S/ROOF NO.5 B/UP LAMP
RR BLOWER RR WIPER SSPS
10A DVDDSP&AMP
CHANGER 15A 10A 7.5A STICS 15A T/SIG LAMP
DIAGNOSIS
NO.28 BUZZER, C/BELL, SIREN NO.20 **INJECTOR & IGN.COIL NO.12 * HEATING VALVE NO.4
(SEAT) UNIT ABS/ESP
10A FOLDINGEAS 20A FFH 15A ** ENG SENSOR 10A
NO.27 RR POWER NO.19 NO.11 NO.3 TCU, TGS
PASS SEAT ** FUEL PUMP
- PLEASE USE DESIGNATED FUSES.
15A OUTLET 20A 20A 10A TCCU, TOD

NO.10 NO.2 H/LAMP, DRL
INTERIOR FUSE BOX LABEL
NO.26 STOP LAMP NO.18

AUDIO STICS R/SNSR & A/LIGHT
-"**" GSL OPTION
15A HDC 15A 7.5A 10A COMP, ENG MOUNT

MAINTENANCE
ENG ECU
NO.25 INTERIOR NO.17 NO.9 **FUEL PUMP NO.1
SUN ROOF **INJECTOR COIL AIR BAG
10A LAMP 15A 7.5A **ENG SENSOR 10A
13-31
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
TIRE
0 TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

1
2
3
4 Under Proper Over
inflation inflation inflation
5
6
7
8
9
Tire Inflation Pressure CAUTION
10
• Maintaining the specified tire pressure is essential for comfort-
Tire Inflation
11 Type
Pressure
Tire Wheel able riding, driving safety, and long tire life. Incorrect inflation
pressures will increase tire wear and will impair safety, vehicle
12 Driving tire 30 psi (2.06 bar) 235/75R 16 7.0J x 16
handling, comfortable driving and fuel economy. Always make
sure that the tire inflation pressure is correct.
13 255/70R 16 7.0J x 16 • Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
wheel, prior to any long journey (before the tire is heated up).
255/60R 18 7.5J x 18
14 • Even the temporarily installed spare tire should be inflated properly.
Emergency tire 60 psi (4.13 bar) 175/90R 16 5.5J x 16
15 NOTE
The tires should be checked before they are heated up using an
16 tire pressure gauge.
GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE WEAR CHECK TIRE ROTATION 0
1
2
3
4
5
Tire tread
6
7
Wear limit
8
9
The tires on your vehicle have built-in tread wear indicators To avoid uneven wear of tires and to prolong tire life, inspect
that appear between the tread grooves. The tire should be and rotate your tires every 5,000 km. 10
replaced when the wear indicators appear in two or more
adjacent grooves. 11
12
WARNING WARNING
• Driving on worn or damaged tires is very dangerous and may • Be sure to replace and rotate the tires at a Ssangyong Autho- 13
cause an accident. Also, a damaged tire could burst. rized Service Center or professional tire shops.
• Check tires regularly for any damage (foreign objects, punctures, • Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be 14
cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls) and replace if necessary. sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufac-
turer on all wheels. 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
0 SPARE TIRE WINTER TIRE
The temporary spare tire is only for an emergency. Do not Use snow tires when driving on snowy or icy roads.
1 use it for normal driving. The spare tire should be replaced If winter tires are used, they must be installed to all 4 wheels.
2 with a regular tire as soon as possible.
Check the tire conditions and pressure as needed and al- WARNING
3 ways keep it available. For replacing procedures, refer to “In • Drive very slowly with extra caution on snowy or icy roads.
Case of Emergency” section in this manual. • The snow tire with arrow direction markings on its side wall
4 should be installed according to the arrow direction.
CAUTION
5 • After replacing the tire, be sure to adjust the pressure to the
• The snow tires cannot guarantee your safety on icy and slip-
pery road. Drive with extra caution, avoiding sudden
specified pressure of the tire. Otherwise, the suspension sys- acceleration, braking or movements of the steering wheel.
6 tem and driving system may be damaged.
• When the snow tires are not needed anymore, replace them with
7 • Keep the vehicle speed below 60 km/h if the spare tire is fitted. ordinary tires. Keep the removed snow tires in a cool and shady
place. Be careful not to contact them with any oil, grease, or fuel.
8
9
10 TIRE CHAIN
Chains must be installed on the rear wheels only.
11
CAUTION
12 • If you have to install the chains on the front wheels, drive cau-
tiously and avoid severe turns to prevent the surrounding parts from
13 being damaged.
14 • In part time transfer case equipped vehicle, do not use 4WD mode
when the snow chain is installed only on the rear tire. It may dam-
15 age the driving system. If you want to use the 4WD mode, install
the snow chains on all tires.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN CHECKING THE WHEEL AND TIRE 0
1
• Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. • Be sure to check the tires and wheels before driving. If a
Be sure to use the same size and type of tires of the wheel is damaged, the tire inflation pressure can be de- 2
same manufacturer on all wheels. If you do not use the creased and the tire can be damaged.
same tires on the vehicle equipped with the TOD (4 wheel 3
• If a tire has been impacted by a stone or any other ob-
drive), it may cause a serious damage to the vehicle’s
drive system.
jects during driving, have it checked by a Ssangyong 4
• Check the inflation pressure, cracks and tearing of tires • The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may 5
before driving. cause abnormal operation of the steering wheel, in-
• Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to creased fuel consumption, damage to the powertrain or 6
become loose and even come off. This could lead to an the braking system, vibration, or uneven tire wear. Always
accident. Be sure to check and tighten the wheel nuts use the specified tires from the same manufacturer.
7
as specified before any long journey. 8
• Do not use non-genuine wheel and tire. Non-genuine
wheel and tire may have inferior performance and func- 9
tion and dangerous for safe driving. Also, any defects due
to using them cannot be covered by warranty. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Turn the wiper switch to “OFF” 3. Press the safety button ( ). 4. Slide the blade down and remove
7 position. it from the arm.
8 2. Lift the wiper arm up from the 5. Install a new blade.
windshield. 6. Put the wiper arm down.
9
NOTE
CAUTION
10 The tailgate wiper blade can be replaced
in the same manner. • Do not open the hood when the wiper arm is lifted up. The wiper and hood may be damaged.
11 • Do not operate the wiper when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.
• Be certain not to apply any fluid polish containing oil to the windshield of your vehicle
12 Wiper Blade since this will result in streaks which impair vision. Contamination of either the window or
Front Wiper Rear Wiper the wiper blades with foreign materials can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield
13 wipers. Never clean up the windshield with a waxed or oil-saturated cloth.
20" 14"
14
WARNING
15
• Malfunctioning wipers on a raining or snowing day may be detrimental to your driving
16 safety. Never drive your vehicle with malfunctioning wipers on a raining or snowing day.
• Do not touch the running wipers. It may cause a personal injury.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury
to yourself or damage to the vehicle.
0
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION 2
WARNING CAUTION 3
• Be careful not to touch any hot components such as the engine, • Check the level of the engine oil and every fluid including coolant 4
radiator, exhaust manifold, catalytic converter, or muffler when daily. If you drive while the fluid levels are low, your vehicle can
the engine is just stopped. They may burn you badly. Let the be damaged and such damages will not be covered by warranty.
engine cool down before any service.
5
• Use only the genuine Ssangyong oils and fluids.
• When working with the battery or fuel related components, • Do not allow oils and coolant to make contact with skin or painted 6
always stop the engine and do not smoke. Also, remove all surfaces during inspection or refill of them. They can also dam-
flames or sparks near the vehicle. age paint finish. If skin contact happens, rinse affected areas 7
• Do not connect and disconnect the battery terminals when immediately with plenty of water and then consult a doctor.
the ignition key is in the “ON” position. • Do not overfill the oil or coolant, otherwise the engine and 8
• The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for the posi- transmission may be damaged. Maintain the specified level.
tive and negative cables, must not be interchanged. • The performance of oils and coolant may be deteriorated when
9
• The battery cables and wires transfer high voltage and current. they are exposed to dust and moisture. Be careful not to al-
Avoid any short circuit. low contact with dust while refilling. 10
• Make sure that the ignition key is “OFF” when performing any • In spite of very limited driving of your vehicle, oils and other 11
work in an enclosed space such as a garage. fluids can disappear over the time. Therefore, check their lev-
els frequently.
• Keep the used oil and coolant out of reach of children. (For a 12
proper disposal of them, contact a professional service.) • Improperly disposed engine oil and/or other fluids can pollute
• When checking your vehicle, you must turn off the engine first. the environment. Dispose used fluids in accordance with lo- 13
Then, put the shift lever into the “P” (automatic transmission) or cal environmental regulations.
"Neutral" (manual transmission) position and apply the parking brake. 14
• The electrical cooling fan can start to operate unexpectedly even
when the engine is stopped. Disconnect the negative battery 15
cable before you check the radiator, cooling fan or nearby parts.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (DIESEL ENGINE) Ssangyong genuine parts.
0 has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service chart.
1 * EU Countries: Only countries that belong to EU. (It does not apply to all countries in EU.)
2 INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
3 ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
4 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
5 * Engine oil & filter *1
EU Initial check: 5,000 km, and replenish if necessary, change every 15,000 km or 12 months
(1)* (3)* (4)* (But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
6 General Initial change: 5,000 km, change every 10,000 km or 12 months
7 Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant (3)* (4)* Change every 200,000 km or 5 years. And, inspect and replenish if necessary.
8 * Fuel filter Direct Injection EU I R* I R* I R* I R*
(Diesel Engine) General Replace every 25,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter: whenever replacing the engine oil)
9 Additional water separator (if equipped) Replace every 150,000 km or 5 years (Drain the water whenever replacing the engine oil)
10 Air cleaner (2)* EU Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 15,000 km, replace every 30,000 km
11 General Initial clean: 5,000 km, clean every 10,000 km, replace every 30,000 km
12 Injection timing (See NOTE 1) I I I I I I I I
NOTE 1: Adjust as required; - When excessive smoke is visible (black or white) - Driving in a hilly or mountainous terrain, sandy, or dusty area
13 Chart Symbols:
- Poor performance/economy - High load driving such as trailer towing
- Taxi, patrol service or delivery service (extended idling and
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, excessive driving with low speed)
14 replenish, adjust or replace. (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, driving in dusty con-
*1 Check the engine oil level and leak every 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or dition or sandy condition, pollutant area or off-road driving, fre-
15 before starting a long trip.
quently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
(3)* More frequent maintenance is required if under dusty driving
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: condition.
16 Shorten the service interval. (4)* Refer to “Recommended fluids, coolant and lubricants”.
- Frequent stop-and-go traffic, extended idling, short driving distance below 6 km, * Water separator: When replace the engine oil, also drain the water from
driving distance below 16 km when the outside temperature remains below freezing the fuel filter.
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
0
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 1
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 2
CHASSIS AND BODY
Exhaust pipes & mountings I I I I I I I I
3
Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* Change every: 2 years (inspect frequently) 4
Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary. 5
Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I R I I I R 6
Front & Rear Front Non IOP Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
7
differential IOP EU Periodic check: every 15,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary. 8
Rear Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km 9
General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary. 10
Automatic transmission fluid (6)* Inspect every 30,000 km or 12 month (But change every 60,000 km under severe condition)
11
Chart Symbols:
12
(4)* More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km 14
32°C (90°F) or higher, or
15
- When doing frequent trailer towing, or 16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
MAINTENANCE
1 MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
2 ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY
3 Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
4 Tire condition & inflation pressure Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
5 Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I
6 Drive shaft boots (8)* I I I I I I I I
7 Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
8 Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I
9 General Inspect every 10,000 km
10 (But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions)
Chart Symbols:
11 I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace.
12 (3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”.
13 (7)* If necessary, rotate and balance wheels.
(8)* After completion of off-road operation, the drive shaft boots should be inspected.
14 - In off-road or dusty road, or
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
15 - In hilly or moutainous terrain.
Severe Conditions in Air Conditioner Filter
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES (GASOLINE ENGINE) Ssangyong genuine parts.
has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service chart.
0
* EU Countries: Only countries that belong to EU. (It does not apply to all countries in EU.) 1
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 2
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
MAINTENANCE ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
3
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 4
Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)* (3)* (Initial change: 10,000 km) R** R R R R R R R 5
Cooling system hose & connections I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant (3)* Change every 200,000 km or 5 years. And, inspect replenish if necessary.
6
Fuel filter (2)* Replace every 100,000 km (if using poor quality of fuel, replace every 30,000 km) 7
Air cleaner (2)* I I I R I I I R 8
Ignition timing I I I I I I I I
Spark plugs - - - R - - - R 9
Charcoal canister & vapor lines - - I - - I - -
Chart Symbols:
10
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace.
** - In order to secure engine long life and effective break-in, first oil (factory filled) would be recommended to drain with in 10,000 km.
(1)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition: short distance driving, (2)* If vehicle is operated under severe condition, pollutant area or off-road 12
extensive idling or driving in dusty condition, shorten the service driving, driving in dusty condition or sandy condition, frequently inspect
interval. the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air cleaner.
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
MAINTENANCE
1 MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
2 ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
CHASSIS AND BODY
3 Exhaust pipes & mountings I I I I I I I I
4 Brake / Clutch fluid (3)* Change every: 2 years (inspect frequently)
5 Brake pads (Front & Rear) (4)* General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
6 Manual transmission oil (5)* I I I R I I I R
7 Front & Rear Front Non IOP Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
8 differential IOP EU Periodic check: every 15,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
9 Rear Rigid Inspect frequently, change every 30,000 km
10 General Periodic check: every 10,000 km, adjust or replace if necessary.
11 Automatic transmission fluid (6)* Inspect every 30,000 km or 12 month (But change every 60,000 km under severe condition)
12 Chart Symbols:
14 (4)* More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under of fluid at any time,occasionally), then change every 60,000 km
15 32°C (90°F) or higher, or
16 - When doing frequent trailer towing, or
GETtheMANUALS.org
* Use only approved
0
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
INTERVAL x1,000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 1
x1,000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ITEM Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 2
CHASSIS AND BODY
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts tight / Secure (6)* Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
3
Tire condition & inflation pressure Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary 4
Steering wheel & linkage I I I I I I I I 5
Drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I 6
Lubricate locks, hinges & bonnet latch Check frequntly and adjust or replace if necessary
7
Wheel bearing grease I I I I I I I I 8
General Inspect every 10,000 km 9
(But, shorten the service interval under severe conditions) 10
Chart Symbols:
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, replenish, adjust or replace. 11
(3)* Refer to “Recommended fluids and lubricants”. 12
(7)* If necessary, rotate and balance wheels.
13
- In off-road or dusty road, or
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 32°C (90°F) or higher, or 14
- In hilly or moutainous terrain.
Severe Conditions in Air Conditioner Filter 15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
Lamp 14 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Bulb Specifications and

5
Functional Check ....................................... 14-2 6
Location of Exterior Lamps ...................... 14-3 7
Interior Lamp ............................................ 14-10 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
BULB SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONAL CHECK
0 BULB SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONAL CHECK

1. Check whether the lamp comes on or off by turning its
1 Description Amount
Specification Specification
switch.
(EU) (General)
2 ←
2. Check the corresponding fuse when the lamp doesn’t
Exterior Headlamp High beam 2 55W come on.
3 lamp Low beam 2 55W ←
3. If the fuse is blown, replace it with a new one.
Turn signal lamp 2 PY21W P21
4 For replacing procedures, refer to the “In Case of Emer-
Position lamp 2 W5W ← gency” section in this manual.
5 Front fog light 2 H27W/2 ← 4. If the fuse is not blown, check the bulb and replace it with
LED a new one if needed.
6 Side repeater 2 LED
← 5. If the bulb is not defective, have the system checked by a
Rear combina- Stop (tail) lamp 6 (EU: 4) P21/5W
7 tion lamp Turn signal lamp ←
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
2 PY21W Center.
8 Back-up lamp 2 W16W ←
CAUTION
Rear fog light* 2 P21W _
9 • Use only a specified capacity bulb for replacement.
License plate lamp 2 W5W 5W • Disconnect the negative cable on the battery before replacing
10 High mounted stop lamp _ LED type the bulb. Remove the ignition key.
← • Do not apply excessive force to remove the bulb cover.
11 Front room lamp 2 10W
• Make sure that the corresponding switch and the ignition switch
Interior Glove box lamp 1 10W ←
12 are turned off before replacing a bulb.
lamp Center room lamp 1 10W ← • Do not touch a bulb with bare hands immediately after turning
13 Luggage lamp 1 10W ← off the lamp.
Door courtesy lamp 4 5W ← • Do not touch a bulb with bare hands. Fingerprints, dust, or mois-
14 ture stuck to the bulb may shorten its life or cause it to explode.
If you accidentally touch the bulb, wipe the bulb glass with a
15 soft cloth.
• Never try to adjust the headlamp aiming angle. It should be done
16 by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-2 LAMP
LOCATION OF EXTERIOR LAMPS
High mounted stop lamp 0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Side repeater
Front fog light 9
10
Headlamp Rear Combination Lamp 11
12
Tail/Stop lamp 13
Low beam Tail lamp
Turn signal lamp
14
High beam
Stop lamp or 15
rear fog light*
16
Turn signal lamp Back-up lamp

0 REMOVING HEADLAMP HOUSING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Turn off the light switch and remove 3. Remove the tire and unscrew the 4. Separate the headlamp housing
8 the ignition key from the key cylinder. mounting nut in the wheelhouse. from the vehicle body and discon-
2. Open the engine hood and remove nect two electric connectors.
9
two mounting bolts.
10
Headlamp low beam
11
WARNING
12 For safe driving, do not adjust the headlamp aiming screw. It should
be done by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Headlamp high beam
13 Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
14
15
16 Turn signal lamp/
position lamp
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-4 LAMP
HEADLAMP TURN SIGNAL LAMP 0
Low beam
1
2
3
4
5
6
High beam 7
8
9
1. Remove the headlamp cover from the removed 1. Turn the turn signal lamp connector to remove it from the
headlamp housing. removed headlamp housing. 10
2. Release the fixing clip. 2. Push down and turn the bulb to remove it. 11
3. Replace the bulb with new one. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 12
13
14
High beam Low beam 15
bulb bulb
16

0 FRONT FOG LIGHT
1. Turn off the light switch and remove
1 the ignition key from the key cylinder.
2
2. Disconnect the connector by releas-
3 ing the locks at both sides.
4
5
6
7 Front fog light
3. Remove the bulb by turning it.
8
10 5. Install in the reverse order of

11 removal.
12
13
CAUTION
14 The front fog lights can be accessed only
under the vehicle body. Replacing the front
15 fog light bulb should be done by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
16 rized Service Center.
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-6 LAMP
SIDE REPEATER 0
1. Remove the ignition key from the
key cylinder.
1
2
2. Pull the lamp housing out while
pushing it rearward. 3
4
Side repeater
5
6
3. Disconnect the connector. 7
8
9
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0 REAR COMBINATION LAMP
1 cylinder.
2
2. Remove two mounting bolts on the
3 rear combination lamp housing.
4
5
6 Rear combination
3. Disconnect the main connector and lamp
7 remove the rear combination lamp
housing.
8
9
10
11
4. Remove the defective bulb.
12 Tail lamp/Stop lamp, Tail lamp, Turn signal lamp:
13 Push down and turn the bulb to remove it.
Back-up lamp: Pull the bulb out.
14
16 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-8 LAMP
LICENSE PLATE LAMP 0
cylinder.
1
2
2. Remove the license plate lamp as-
sembly by pushing it inward. 3
4
5
6
3. Remove the lamp housing by turn- License plate lamp
7
ing the connector.
8
9
10
11
12
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it. 13
14
15
6. Install in the reverse order of
removal. 16

INTERIOR LAMP
0 FRONT ROOM LAMP

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Replace the bulb with new one.
10
11 2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
12 CAUTION
13 The cover should be removed from the rear section (arrow).
Otherwise, the cover may be damaged.
14 Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-10 LAMP
CENTER ROOM AND LUGGAGE ROOM DOOR COURTESY LAMP 0
LAMPS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 10
11
2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver. 2. Pry off the lamp cover with a flat blade screwdriver.
12
3. Replace the bulb with new one. 3. Replace the bulb with new one. 13
4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing. 4. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.
14
15
CAUTION CAUTION
16
Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it. Be carefule not to damage the lamp cover when removing it.

0 GLOVE BOX LAMP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder. 3. Push both sides of the lamp cover to separate the glove
10 box lamp assembly.
11 2. Open the glove box.
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp assembly.
12
14 6. Snap in the lamp cover on the lamp housing.

15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
14-12 LAMP
Vehicle Care 15 0
1
2
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
Vehicle Care .............................................. 15-2

5
Running-In Period .......................................... 15-2 6
Cleaning Agents ............................................. 15-2 7
Vehicle Washing ............................................. 15-3
Care and Cleaning Of the Interior .................. 15-4 8
Glass Surfaces ............................................... 15-5 9
Care and Cleaning Of the Exterior ................. 15-5
Corrosion Protection ...................................... 15-6 10
Caring For Your Vehicle under 0°C (32°F) 15-8 11
Starting the Engine and Driving in the winter . 15-9 12
Parking In the winter ....................................... 15-9
Other Maintenance Tips ............................... 15-10
13
Important Safety Instructions ................... 15-11 14
Before Driving ................................................ 15-11 15
On The Road ................................................ 15-13
16
Prohibition of Unauthorized Modifications ... 15-18
GETtheMANUALS.org
VEHICLE CARE
0 RUNNING-IN PERIOD CLEANING AGENTS

Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever cleaning agents
1 or other chemicals are used for the inside or the outside of
2 the vehicle. Some cleaners may be poisonous or
flammable, and improper use may cause personal injury
3 or damage. When cleaning the inside or outside of the
vehicle, do not use volatile cleaning solvents such as:
4 acetone, lacquer thinners, enamel reducers, nail polish
removers; or cleaning materials such as laundry soaps,
5 bleaches or reducing agents, except as noted in the fabric
cleaning advice on stain removal. Never use carbon
6 tetrachloride, petrol, benzene, or naphtha for any cleaning
purpose. Open all vehicle doors for ventilation when any
7 cleaning agents or other chemicals are used in the interior.
8 Overexposure to some vapors may result in a health prob-
lem which is more likely to occur in small, unventilated
9 spaces. To avoid possible permanent discoloration of light
There are no particular running-in rules for your new vehicle. colored seats, do not let materials with non-fast colors
10 However, following a few simple precautions for the first 1, come in contact with seat trim materials until these materi-
000 km can add to good future performance, fuel economy als are totally dry. This includes certain types of casual
11 and long life of your vehicle. clothing, such as colored denims, corduroys, leathers and
suedes; also, decorative paper, etc.
12 • Allow the engine to warm up after starting.
13 • Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt fast starts, sud-
den acceleration and prolonged high speed driving.
14 • Do not race the engine.
15 • Drive at proper speeds, trying not to “strain” the engine.
• Avoid overload when climbing.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-2 VEHICLE CARE
VEHICLE WASHING 0
To avoid corrosion, wash your vehicle as soon as possible Bumper Washing 1
after driving on a coastal road (salted road), on a road 1. Remove the dirt or dust first with water and a sponge.
where the snow removal chemicals (calcium chloride etc.) 2
has been spreaded, in the area where the atmospheric fall- 2. If the bumper is contaminated by engine oil or any
lubricants, wipe it off using mild soapy water.
out/industrial pollutants are exist, or on a muddy or dusty 3
road. Also, immediately wash your vehicle when things such
CAUTION
as tree sap or bird droppings get on the painted surface. 4
Do not use abrasive wax and strong cleaning materials such as
Do not wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade. If your vehicle has been parked
steel wool which will scratch the vehicle body and bumper. 5
under direct sunlight for a long period, let it cool sufficiently 6
before washing.
7
How To Wash:
1. Rinse the vehicle throughly with cool water to remove dust 8
and loose dirt.
9
2. Clean the vehicle throughly using a mild soap or deter-
gent mixed with clean and lukewarm water. Start at the 10
top and work your way down.
3. Check whether the vehicle is smeared with tree sap, coal 11
tar or other foreign materials. Rinse them off while pay-
ing particular attention not to damage the painted surface. 12
4. Remove the moisture using a soft cloth. If you detect any 13
stone chips or scratches in the painted surface, to pre-
vent corrosion, touch them up immediately. 14
CAUTION 15
Be careful not to damage the air spoiler when cleaning the vehicle
in an automatic car wash. 16

0 CARE AND CLEANING OF THE INTERIOR
1 Seat Belt Care
• Keep belts clean and dry.
2 • Clean seat belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
3 • Do not bleach or dye belts since this may severely weaken
them.
4
5 Interior Care
6 Use a dry cloth for normal cleaning.
• To wash synthetic resin like plastics, use lukewarm wa-
7 ter and soap, then wipe off using a damp cloth that does
not contain soapy water.
8
• Wipe off the moisture using a dry cloth.
9 • To remove the dust on the mats and seats, use a vacuum
With the use of modern trim materials, it is very important cleaner.
10 that you use proper cleaning techniques and cleaners. Fail- • In case the mat is seriously contaminated, use a cloth and
ing to do this on the first cleaning may result in water spots, mild detergent for cleaning.
11 spot rings, or setting of stains or soils. All of which are more
difficult to remove in a second cleaning. CAUTION
12
Dust and loose dirt that are accumulated on interior fabrics • Chemicals may cause the discoloration or deformation of the in-
13 should be frequently removed with a vacuum cleaner or soft terior trim.
bristle brush. Wipe vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean • When cleaning the interior trim, never use chemicals such as
14 damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains can be acetone, enamel or bleaching agent.
cleaned with cleaners.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-4 VEHICLE CARE
GLASS SURFACES CARE AND CLEANING OF THE EXTERIOR 0
Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis. The Exterior Finish
use of a glass cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner
1
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films. 2
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle glass, as they
may cause scratches. If abrasive cleaners are used on the Washing your Vehicle 3
inside of the rear window, any electric demister element may
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it 4
be damaged. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
clean by frequent washing.
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm or cold water. 5
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle under direct
sunlight. Do not use a strong soap or chemical detergent.
6
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield All cleaning agents should be washed promptly from the 7
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or surface and not allowed to dry on the finish.
another material may be on the blade or windshield, clean Ssangyong vehicles are designed to operate under normal 8
the outside of the windshield with cleaning powder or an environmental conditions and to withstand the natural
equivalent non abrasive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if elements. However, unusual conditions, such as high pres-
9
beads do not form when rinsing with water. sure car washers, may cause water to enter the inside of 10
your vehicle.
CAUTION 11
Do not clean the windshield with oily or waxy cloth. It may cause
Polishing and Waxing
noise or vibration while operating the wipers, poor front view, and Periodic polishing and waxing is recommended to remove 12
light reflection at night time. In addition, the windshield may not be surface residue from your paint finish. Approved products
wiped off completely when it rains. are supplied through your Ssangyong Distributor.
13
14
CAUTION
Do not use wax that contains an abrasive agent. The painted sur- 15
face (including the bumper surface) may be damaged.
16

0 Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts CORROSION PROTECTION
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their Your car was designed to resist corrosion. When it was built,
1 luster. special and protective finishes were used on most parts of
Special care should be taken when cleaning the aluminum your car to help maintain a good appearance, strength and
2 trim. To avoid damaging the protective trim, never use au- reliable operation. Some parts which normally are not vis-
3 tomotive or chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean ible (such as certain parts located in the engine compart-
the aluminum trim. A coating of wax is recommended for all ment and the underbody of the vehicle) are such that sur-
4 bright metal parts. face rust will not affect their reliability. Therefore, corrosion
protection is not needed or used on these parts.
5 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels, Alloy Wheels, and
Wheel Covers
6 Sheet Metal Damage
Preserve the original appearance of wheels or wheel cov-
7 ers by keeping them clean and free from build-up of road If your car is damaged and requires body panel repair or
dirt and/or road salt. Wash the parts regularly. Do not use replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies
8 abrasive cleaners or cleaning brushes, as they could dam- proper anticorrosion material to the parts repaired or re-
age the finish. placed so that corrosion protection is restored. (Also refer
9 All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome to “Finish Damage” on the next page).
plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap
10 and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil, se-
11 lect a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring Foreign Material Deposits
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Avoid Calcium chloride and other salts, deicing agents, road oil
12 automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish. chimneys and other foreign materials may damage vehicle
13 Clean the wheels after driving on a coastal road or on a finishes if left on painted surface. Prompt washing may not
road where the snow removal chemicals (calcium chloride completely remove all of these deposits. Other cleaners may
14 etc.) has been spreaded. be needed. When using chemical cleaners, be sure they
15 CAUTION
are safe for use on painted surfaces.
16 Never clean the aluminum wheel or alloy wheel with acidic or alkalic
detergents. Otherwise, wheel’s protective finish could be damaged.
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-6 VEHICLE CARE
Finish Damage CAUTION 0
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish • When the engine is washed, fuel, grease or oil residues are
should be repaired promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly washed off. Therefore you should use only a filling station or 1
and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips a Ssangyong Distributor who has oil separator equipment in
and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials. the car wash bay. 2
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your • Used engine oil, brake fluid, transmission fluid, antifreeze,
Distributor’s body and paint shop. batteries, and tires should be disposed by using the local au- 3
thorized waste disposal facilities, or have them disposed of
by the vendor who is under a statutory obligation to do so 4
when you replace them.
Underbody Maintenance • None of these items should be placed in the household recy- 5
Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and cling bins or poured into the sewage system.
dust control can accumulate on the underbody. If these ma- • Everyone should be concerned about environmental protection.
6
terials are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can • Help by doing your share. 7
occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor
pan, and the exhaust system even though they have been 8
provided with corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush
these materials from the underbody with plain water. Take 9
care to clean any area where mud and other debris can
accumulate. 10
Sediment packed in closed areas of the frame should be
loosened before being flushed. If desired, your Ssangyong
11
Distributor can do this service for you. 12
13
14
15
16

CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE UNDER 0°C (32°F)
0 CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE UNDER

0°C (32°F) Engine Oil
1
During the winter, undesirable road conditions frequently When the vehicle is shipped, the engine is filled with four-
2 happen. Therefore, appropriate preparations for emergen- season engine oil.
cies should occur.
3 Before driving in suburban or rural areas, or on a snowing Tires
4 day, have bags of sand, snow chains, a shovel, gloves, and Snow tires are more desirable on an icy or snow-covered
old clothes in your vehicle. road. Have snow tires installed on your vehicle before driv-
5 Coolant
ing on such a road.
6 Before it gets cold, check the coolant level. CAUTION

The conventional coolant is the 50:50 mixture of water and • When snow tires are installed, drive your vehicle at a lower
7 antifreeze. speed than normal.
• Install snow chains correctly. Otherwise, the chains may dam-
8 If only water has been added into the coolant reservoir, the
age the wheelhouses or the body of your vehicle.
engine and the cooling system of your vehicle may seriously
9 be damaged when the water freezes as it gets below the
freezing point. Air Conditioner
10
CAUTION When the air conditioner has not been used for an extended
11 • When the vehicle is shipped, the cooling system is filled with a period of time, internal packing systems may become hard
four-season coolant. because the lubricating system has not worked for a pro-
12 • Before adding or refilling coolant, ensure that the coolant is a
longed amount of time. As a result, the refrigerant may leak
50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze. or rusting may happen to the system. Malfunction of the air
13 conditioner may result.
• Use only Ssangyong genuine coolant.
14 To maintain its optimal operating condition, it is recom-
Washer Fluid mended that the air conditioner be turned on for approxi-
15 Use a genuine coolant that does not freeze on a cold day.
mately 5 to 10 minutes every week throughout all seasons.
CAUTION
16 When non-recommended washer liquid is used, the liquid
may form an ice. This will damage the wiper motor and Do not remove the refrigerant in the winter, even though you do
not use the air conditioner.
hinder your safe driving.
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-8 VEHICLE CARE
STARTING THE ENGINE AND DRIVING IN PARKING IN THE WINTER 0
THE WINTER When the parking brake is applied in cold weather, ice may
form on the brake system and cause some difficulty mov-
1
Starting the Engine in the Winter ing the vehicle. When parking on a hill, first, apply the park-
During the winter, the engine experiences increased resis-
2
ing brake. Put the shift lever into the “1” or “R” position
tance from the powertrain; the battery and the starter show (Manual Transmission) or into the “P” position (Automatic 3
decreased capacity. Therefore, start the engine in an ap- Transmission). Put a chock behind a tire and release the
propriate way. parking brake. 4
After starting the engine, allow time to warm it up before
driving the vehicle. Warming up the engine will increase its WARNING 5
life expectancy and help you drive safely. When ice forms on the parking brake system, an attempt to move
the vehicle without removing the ice may damage your vehicle.
6
CAUTION Wait until the ice melts away and gently move your vehicle.
7
The glow plugs of the diesel engine should sufficiently be warmed
up before the engine starts. 8
Driving in the Winter

9
Maintain at least twice as long of a normal driving distance 10
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. When
stopping, shift into a lower gear to use the engine brake. 11
Avoid speeding, abrupt acceleration, sudden braking, or 12
drastic maneuvering of the steering wheel.
13
14
15
16

0 OTHER MAINTENANCE TIPS
1 After driving on a calcium chloride (salt) spayed road, wash Diesel Fuel in the Winter
the bottom of your vehicle as soon as possible to avoid any On an extremely cold day, paraffin, one of the chemicals in
2 rust. diesel fuel, may separate from the diesel fuel. This sepa-
When parking on a snow-covered road, the brake system ration makes starting the engine difficult. During the winter
3 may begin to have some ice on it. The ice will decrease season, Kerosene is added to diesel in the domestic mar-
your vehicle’s braking ability. If this happens, drive at a low ket to prevent the paraffin separation and secure stable flow
4 speed and use the brake frequently to remove the ice. After of the fuel through the fuel filter. The amount of added Kero-
regaining the braking ability, drive your vehicle at a normal sene into diesel can vary by location and their average win-
5 speed. ter temperatures. Therefore, to ensure an easy start on a
6 cold day, park your vehicle inside of a garage. If possible,
WARNING fill up the fuel tank after each driving to prevent ice from form-
7 • When there is ice on the wiper blades, turning on the wiper ing inside of the fuel system.
switch may put an extra burden on the wiper motor and dam-
8 age it. Avoid using the wipers when ice is on the blades. CAUTION
• When driving on a snow-covered road, a large amount of snow • Change engine oil and the fuel filter as scheduled. Contaminated
9 may build up under each wheelhouse. This buildup prevents the engine oil will lose its liquidity, clog the fuel filter and oil filter and
steering wheel from moving freely. Therefore, remove the snow cause difficulties starting the engine.
10 buildup frequently. • Do not add any additive other than Kerosene or alcohol into the
fuel tank to improve starting of the engine. The additive may de-
11 crease the lubricating ability of the internal fuel system; the ad-
ditive may have a different flashing point. This will damage the
12 fuel system or produce an excessive exhaust fume.
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-10 VEHICLE CARE
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE DRIVING 0
For safe and comfortable driving, check each part of the ve- Checking the Driving Conditions: 1
hicle before driving your vehicle. • Adjustment of the rearview mirror
• Applying the brake and releasing the parking brake 2
CAUTION
To inspect your vehicle effectively, park it on a level surface and
• All warning lights and indicator lights 3
check it in the following order. • All lighting devices
• The adjustment of driver’s seat
4
• Make sure that headlights, tail lights, rear lights, license 5
Checking Problematic Parts plate lights, backup lights, directional signals, and stop
lights work properly. 6
Check those parts that you felt they were problematic to see
if they would be a hindrance on the road.
CAUTION 7
When checking the lights, look for the reflections on walls and in 8
the mirrors, or get someone to help you.
Checking the External Appearance of Your
Vehicle
9
• Check for flat tires and check the air pressure. 10
Checking Engine Compartment
• Check the side mirrors and the license plate for dirt or
damage. Check the following: 11
• Check all lights for damage or dirt. • Engine oil 12
• Check for oil stains under a parked car. • Power steering fluid
• Brake fluid 13
• Cooling system 14
• Drive belt
15
16

0
1 Always Using Seat belt Do Not Leave a Child Alone in the Vehicle
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all When left alone in the car, a child might unintentionally start
2 times. the engine, cause a fire, or cause another accident.
3 WARNING WARNING
4 • Children, pregnant or nursing women who fail to fasten their • During the summer, the temperature in your vehicle rises due to
seat belts properly might suffer from an accident. Always use direct sunlight, and a child who is unable to adjust vehicle de-
seat belts as directed. vices is in danger of suffocation.
5
• Please carefully read the seats, seat belts and air bags • Do not leave a child alone in the car.
6 sections.
7
8 Taking Care of Children
9 Children should sit in the rear seat

To prevent children from interfering with your driving by ac-
10 cidental movements or misusing of devices, children should
sit in the rear seat.
11
Do not allow children to adjust comport and safety
12 devices
13 When a child gets in the vehicle, an adult should take care

of doors, windows, seat belts, or seats making sure not to
14 hurt the child’s hands, feet or neck.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-12 VEHICLE CARE
ON THE ROAD 0
If a Problem Occurs On the Road Parking in a Safe Place 1
• If a warning light comes on, immediately stop the vehicle Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags, oil,
in a safe place and take emergency measures. or other easily inflammable materials are kept. 2
• If your vehicle suffered a serious blow to the bottom, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and check for a CAUTION 3
fuel leak, brake fluid spill, or others and for damages to While driving or after immediately driving, the muffler and ex- 4
the underbody of your vehicle. haust pipe are hot; inflammable materials near the vehicle might
cause a fire.
• If you have a sudden puncture or blowout on the road, 5
keep your composure, grip the steering wheel firmly, brake
gently to reduce your speed, and then stop in a safe place. 6
Turning The Engine Off When Taking A Nap
WARNING 7
You might cause an accident by unconsciously shifting the
If the front axle and tires were severely hit on the road and transmission or stepping on the accelerator pedal, so turn 8
you notice steering problems (steering wheel shakes up and the engine off.
down / right and left / in circular motion), immediately visit the
nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
9
Center to check and repair steering and suspension parts. CAUTION
Continuous application of the accelerator pedal overheats the engine
10
and exhaust pipe and might cause a fire.
11
Avoiding Unnecessary Movements While Driving
12
• While driving, do not turn off the ignition key under any
Turning The Engine Off When Leaving Your Car
circumstances. Brakes and power steering will not work. 13
• Turn the engine off and lock the doors.
• While driving, do not put your hands through the steering
wheel to manipulate various switches. It might interfere • Do not leave valuables inside the car. Do not leave a child 14
with operating the steering wheel and cause an accident. alone in the vehicle.
15
16

0 Moving Your Vehicle Only After Starting the Engine When Parking or Stopping in An Enclosed Place
Move your vehicle only after having started the engine. When parking or stopping in an enclosed place, turn off the
1 engine.
WARNING
2 Driving the vehicle on a downhill using the downgrade slope with- WARNING
out running the engine might cause an accident. Leaving the engine running in an enclosed place, in a garage or
3 indoors or in other areas with no air ventilation, might result in death
from carbon monoxide poisoning.
4
Parking Downhill
5
After firmly applying the park brake, set the gearshift lever in Re-
6 verse for vehicles with the manual transmission or set the gear- Things To Watch For When Reversing
shift lever in P for vehicles with the automatic transmission. When reversing your vehicle, always make sure that there
7 are no children or other obstacles behind the vehicle.
CAUTION
8 Driving in the Rain
Place wheel chocks under the wheels.
9 When it is raining, the road surface becomes slippery and
your tire-to-road traction is reduced, so you should drive
10 Parking Uphill
more carefully than usual.
11 After firmly applying the park brake, set the gearshift lever in first CAUTION
gear for vehicles with the manual transmission or set the gear- If you travel at a high speed on a wet road, your tires might not be in
12 shift lever in P for vehicles with the automatic transmission. constant contact with the road; if your tires float, your vehicle starts
hydroplaning. You might lose control of your steering and brakes.
13
CAUTION
14 Place wheel chocks under the wheels. After driving through a puddle of water, or after a car wash,
apply your brake pedal lightly several times while moving
15 slowly to confirm that your brakes work normally before get-
ting on the road.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-14 VEHICLE CARE
Putting Away Things That Interfere With Driving Being Careful With Accessories 0
Do not attach accessories or other unnecessary things to
WARNING your car’s windows as they might interfere with your driving. 1
• Do not leave inflammable materials, such as disposable lighters or
Attached accessories can work as a convex lens and cause
sprays, inside the vehicle. They might cause a fire or an explosion.
a fire or cause an accident.
2
• Do not place objects under the driver’s feet or cover the car
bottom with a very thick carpet as it might interfere with apply- 3
Being Careful While Checking Your Coolant
ing your brake, clutch or accelerator pedals.
When the engine is hot, never open the cap of the coolant 4
tank.
Using Engine Brakes On Long Downgrades Hot steam or liquid might surge upwards and cause burns
5
If you repeatedly apply the brake pedal, the brakes overheat to your face or body. 6
and the braking effectiveness can deteriorate. When on a
long downgrade, shift to a low gear and apply your brake Always Using Ssangyong Genuine Parts 7
pedal together with the engine brake. • You can maintain the safety and performance of your car
by using only specified parts or Ssangyong genuine parts. 8
NOTE
• You can distinguish specified parts by their part numbers 9
The engine brake slows down your vehicle while the accelerator
pedal is not applied; down-shifting increases the effectiveness of
and seal.
this retarding force. 10
CAUTION
• The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non- 11
Always Putting Out Cigarettes Ssangyong genuine parts.
• Make sure you have put out all cigarettes and matches • You can distinguish an authentic Ssangyong genuine part by its 12
hologram.
completely before throwing them into your ashtray. 13
• Do not put many cigarette butts or materials that easily
catch fire into your ashtray. 14
CAUTION 15
For safer driving, refrain from smoking while on the road.
16

0 Driving on a Snowy or Icy Road Driving on Unpaved and Mountain Roads
• Shift to the lowest possible gear and drive slowly. • Before driving, check road conditions such as if the road
1 • Since your braking distance is longer than usual, allow a suddenly ends, or if there is enough space for a U-turn
longer following distance. in the middle of the road.
2 • It’s easy to slide in a road covered with much sand or
• If you accelerate or brake too fast, your vehicle will slide
3 and you might get in an accident, so drive with caution. with much dry dirt. Keep your speed low and steady.
When braking, use the engine brake; apply your brakes • There is a danger of collapse on the outside of a mountain
4 only after you have slowed down considerably. road.
• When going down a slippery downhill, use the engine • When coasting downhill, do not change gears; go down
5 brake and drive slowly. slowly by applying the engine brake.
6
CAUTION Going Through Water
7 When traveling on a snowy or icy road, use snow tires for safer • If water gets into the electric system or engine, it might
driving. cause irreparable damage to your vehicle. Please refrain
8 from underwater driving.
9 Driving on a Sandy or Muddy Road • If going through water is unavoidable, choose a shallow
• Keep your speed steady as low as possible. spot where the exhaust outlet wouldn’t get submerged in
10 • While driving, be careful not to accelerate or stop too
water and proceed slowly at a steady speed.
quickly because you might get stuck in sand or mud. • Before going through water, get out of your vehicle and
11 check the bottom of the river. Do not go through water if
• If your vehicle gets stuck in sand or mud, insert a rock or a the bottom is sandy or covered with big rocks.
12 piece of wood under the stuck wheel, lightly apply the accel-
erator pedal and gently shift back and forth between the re- • If several vehicles are going through water together, the
13 verse and forward gear to allow inertia to get your vehicle out. first vehicle might burrow into the bottom, so be careful
and cross in a different place if possible.
14 CAUTION
15 • If your vehicle is stuck in snow, sand or mud and you cannot

get out, do not repeatedly depress the accelerator pedal. If
possible, with the aid of other vehicle, rescue your vehicle.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-16 VEHICLE CARE
Important things to remember when going through Driving On Hill Roads
water
0
Position the gearshift lever in accordance with the road
• If the engine stops while you are going through water, do conditions. 1
not try to restart. Get your vehicle towed.
• Be particularly careful not to allow water to enter into the en- WARNING 2
gine through the air cleaner. If you suddenly use the engine brake on an icy or slippery road,
the vehicle might slide and get in an accident. Use the engine brakes
3
• Never change speeds while going through water.
after fully reducing your vehicle speed.
4
WARNING
If water gets into the brake system, the effectiveness of the • On a steep downgrade, shift to the lowest gear to get the 5
brakes decreases. After going through water, move slowly and biggest effect of the engine brake.
gently applying the brakes several times so that frictional heat 6
dries the brake pads and disks. Check if the brakes work prop-
erly before continuing driving. WARNING 7
If you repeatedly apply your brakes on a long downgrade, they
may overheat, their effectiveness decreases and an accident might 8
Checking your vehicle after going through water occur. When on a long downgrade, use the engine brake together
• Check the front, rear, right and left sides, transmission, with your brakes. 9
axle hubs, propeller shaft, oil and fluid levels, and 10
underbody; if you discover problems, get your vehicle
CAUTION
checked immediately.
If you suddenly apply the engine brake while traveling at a high
11
• Check all lamps and other electrical devices. If necessary, speed, the engine may get damaged. Slow down the vehicle speed
replace damaged components and get your vehicle and then downshift the gear.
12
checked.
13
• Check for damages to the vehicle body and underbody; if
you discover problems, get your vehicle checked 14
immediately.
• If the vehicle body is very dirty, wash your car to protect it. 15
16

0 PROHIBITION OF UNAUTHORIZED MODI-
Freeway Driving FICATIONS
1
• Before getting on a freeway, listen to the weather forecast, This vehicle contains various advanced electronic and con-
2 prepare thoroughly and check the fuel level, brake system, trol devices. Do not modify them without authorization.
cooling system, and tires.
3 • Always respect the speed limit and refrain from speeding. Modification of Fuses and Circuits
4 • Allow for a safe following distance, avoid sudden steer- Always use the Ssangyong genuine fuses of the specified
ing movements. capacity and do not alter or modify your vehicle’s circuits. It
5 • When it rains or snows and the whether conditions are
might cause a fire.
adverse, double the distance between your vehicle and
6 the vehicle running in front of you. And reduce your speed
Prohibition of Window Tinting
by half. Modification such as coloring windows might cause leaks.
7 The dark tinted glass may obstruct the driver’s field of vision.
8 CAUTION Thus, it may cause an accident.
Do not idle the engine for a long time; it wastes fuel and causes
9 environmental pollution. Using Non-Specified Tires and Wheels
• Drive at a slow speed for the first 2 km if possible. If using non-specified parts, the steering wheel feels heavier,
10 • Do not load your vehicle with unnecessary stuff. fuel consumption increases, brake performance decreases
and the steering wheel might shake, wearing out tires when
11 • Refrain from quick accelerating and abrupt braking, travel at a
you are traveling at a high speed.
steady speed.
12 • When you park or stop for a long time, turn the engine off.
Performing Regular Checks
• Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
13 • Keep your vehicle in the best possible condition by periodi-
Always check your vehicle as specified in the inspection
schedule, replace parts when necessary and record in your
cally checking it and perform maintenance.
14 vehicle diary which parts were replaced.
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
15-18 VEHICLE CARE
Index 16 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
3.5° aiming down of outside rearview C E
0 mirror during reverse driving .......... 6-17
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F) EBD warning light, HDC indicator, engine
4-wheel drive system ........................ 4-32
....................................................... 15-8 check warning light, front fog light
1 Cautions in using the turbocharger .... 10-2 indicator .......................................... 5-17
A
Cautions when a tire is flat ............... 12-4 Emergency towing ............................ 12-19
2 Accident or fire ................................ 12-26 Cautions when changing the tire ..... 12-13 Emission reduction device ................ 12-27
Adjusting the instrument cluster
3 illumination (black-face type) ............ 5-9
Center and rear room lamps/assist grip Engine coolant .................................... 13-9
..................................................... 11-15 Engine hood ........................................ 3-10
4 Air bag ............................................... 8-14 Center console ................................... 11-8 Engine oil ............................................ 13-6
Air cleaner ........................................ 13-11 Changing a spare tire ......................... 12-8 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) switch
5 Airbag non-inflation conditions ........... 8-18 Checks before starting a journey ........ 1-2 and ESP system* ............................ 4-28
AQS (Air Quality System) .................. 9-16 Child restraints and pregnant woman .. 8-8 ESP warning light, immobilizer indicator,
6 Audio play using the USB flash drive Cruise control switch* ........................ 4-12 winter mode indicator,
....................................................... 4-20 SSPS warning light ......................... 5-14
7 Automatic heater / air conditioner ........ 9-6 D
8 AV* & navigation system* ................ 11-19
Daily check list ................................... 13-2 F
Defogging and defrosting ................... 9-13 Front cup holder/cigarette lighter ....... 11-7
9 B
Devices related to seat ........................ 7-2 Front room lamps/sunglasses storage
Battery .............................................. 13-24 Dimensions ........................................... 0-3 ..................................................... 11-14
10 Brake & clutch pedal ........................ 13-19 Direct injection type diesel engine ...... 1-13 Fuel filler door .................................... 3-11
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T) ..... 13-21 Display .................................................. 5-8 Fuel filter and priming pump (without
11 Brake system ..................................... 6-18 Do-it-yourself operation .................... 13-37 additional water separator) .......... 13-14
Brake warning light, cruise control
12 indicator*, engine overheat warning
Door ajar warning light, ABS warning Fuel filter and water separator* (with
light ................................................. 5-16 additional water separator) .......... 13-15
13 light, low fuel level warning light .... 5-19 Doors .................................................... 3-4 Fuel filter/drive belt ........................... 13-18
Bulb specifications and functional check Driver's seat ......................................... 7-4 Fuel gauge, coolant temperature gauge
14 ....................................................... 14-2 Driving tips for automatic transmission ... 6-6 ......................................................... 5-7
Fuse and relay box .......................... 13-27
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
16-2 INDEX
G L R
Gear selector lever in automatic Light switch .......................................... 4-4 Rain sensing wiper* ............................. 4-9 0
transmission ...................................... 6-4 Listening to music with external audio Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C) ......... 9-12
Gear selector lever positions ............... 6-7 device ............................................. 4-23 Rear cup holder/jack storage/DVD 1
Glove box/courtesy lamp ................. 11-10 Location of exterior lamps .................. 14-3 changer/navigation unit storage ... 11-11
2
Glow indicator (for diesel engine) ..... 5-20 Locations in engine compartment ....... 13-3 Rear heated glass / removable ashtray
..................................................... 11-18 3
H M Recommended fluids and lubricants ..... 0-2
Hazard warning flasher switch ......... 4-25 Manual transmission ............................. 6-2 Remote audio controls & gear shift 4
HDC (Hill Descent Control) switch* .... 4-26 Multi-station* ....................................... 4-18 button (A/T) on steering wheel ...... 4-30
Heated glass switch .......................... 4-24 Remote control key* and ignition key ... 2-2 5
Heater/air conditioner system .............. 9-2 O Removing the spare tire ..................... 12-7
6
High beam indicator, turn signal/hazard Replacing air conditioner filter ............ 9-14
Opening and closing devices ............... 3-2
Roof rack* .......................................... 3-12
warning indicator, 4WD indicators .. 5-18 Opening and closing the doors with 7
How to fasten the seat belts in second ignition key ........................................ 2-9
row seat ........................................... 8-6 S 8
Outside rearview mirror control switch
How to fasten the three point seat belt ....................................................... 4-17 Safety mode
......................................................... 8-5 OVM tools .......................................... 12-6 (automatic transmission) ................. 6-14 9
Safety precautions ............................... 1-7
I Scheduled maintenance services .... 13-38 10
Immobilizer system* .............................. 2-5 P Seat belt and air bag ............................ 8-2
11
Important safety instructions ............ 15-11 Seat belt reminder, engine oil pressure
Parking aid system* ............................ 6-15
Inside rearview mirror ........................ 11-5 Parking brake/catalytic converter ..... 13-20
warning light, air bag warning light, 12
Instrument cluster (D27DTP, D27DT) .... 5-2 battery charge warning light .......... 5-15
Passenger's seat .................................. 7-9
Instrument cluster (G32D) .................... 5-4 Power outlet ....................................... 11-9
Seat belt ............................................... 8-4 13
Interior lamp ...................................... 14-10 Seat heating system* ......................... 7-14
Power steering fluid ......................... 13-13 14
Interior switches .................................. 4-2 Seatback pocket/map pocket ............ 11-12
Precautions regarding unauthorized
Second row seat ............................... 7-10
K
modification & alteration .................. 1-16
Shift lever lock release and safety mode 15
Preventive maintenance ..................... 10-3
reset ............................................. 12-17
Key functions ....................................... 2-7 16
GETtheMANUALS.org INDEX 16-3

Spark plugs ...................................... 13-26 T W
0 Specifications ....................................... 0-4
Tachometer, speedometer .................... 5-6 Warning and caution .......................... 7-15
Starting the engine and driving off the
Tailgate and tailgate window ............. 3-13 Warning triangle* ................................ 12-5
1 vehicle .............................................. 1-5
Theft deterrent system ....................... 2-10 Warnings and cautions ........................ 9-4
Starting the engine with jumper cables
Third row seat ................................... 7-12 Warnings for air bag .......................... 8-22
2 ....................................................... 12-2
Tiltable steering wheel and horn ........ 11-4 Warnings for seat belt ....................... 8-12
Storage bin for portable electronic device/
3 ticket holder/AV jack ....................... 11-6
Time and date display ........................ 4-19 Washer fluid ..................................... 13-23
Tire ................................................... 13-32 Water separator warning light
Storage box in luggage compartment/
4 luggage net ................................... 11-16
Towing a disabled vehicle ................ 12-18 (DI engine only) ............................... 5-10
Trailer towing ................................... 12-21 Water separator warning light and
5 Storage boxes and convenience device
Transfercase oil ............................... 13-22 engine check warning light ........... 12-16
....................................................... 11-2
Turbocharger inspection .................... 10-4 When the engine is overheating ...... 12-14
6 Sun visors ........................................ 11-13
Windows .............................................. 3-6
Sunroof* ............................................... 3-8 V Winter (W) / standard mode (S) ........ 6-13
7 Supplementary heating device ............. 9-5
Wiper and washer switch ................. 4-10
Switch panel on driver's door trim ..... 4-16 Vehicle care ....................................... 15-2
8 Switches in center console ............... 4-31 Vehicle identification ............................. 0-8 Wiper and washer switch ................... 4-8
Wiper blade replacement .................. 13-36
Switches in overhead console, room lamp
9 switch ............................................. 4-35
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
16-4 INDEX
No. PART NO. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL NAME REMARKS
1 Y285OM0807ER RRX1-8OM0E-8G-500A July. 2008 Y285 09 M/Y
REXTON II (RHD)
OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
OVERSEAS A/S TEAM
SSANGYONG MOTOR CO., LTD.
150-3, CHILGOI-DONG, PYUNGTAEK-SI

GYEONGGI-DO, 459-711 KOREA
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE:All rights reserved. Printed in SSANGYONG Motor Co., Ltd.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of Overseas Service Team.
GETtheMANUALS.org

2008-2009 Ssang Yong Rexton Y285 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008-2009 Ssang Yong Rexton Y285 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

General 0 0

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 0-2

0 Descriptions Capacity Specifications

4 Engine Coolant D27DTP 11.0 ~ 11.5 Ssangyong genuine coolant

15 WARNING D27DTP: Diesel 2.7 Power-Up

Top View Front View 0

0 Descriptions D27DTP D27DT G32D

Idle speed 750 ± 20 rpm ← 700 ± 50 rpm

Descriptions D27DTP D27DT G32D 0

0 Descriptions D27DTP D27DT G32D

Disc type _ Dry single diaphragm type _

13 Brake typ Front wheels Disc type ← ←

Descriptions D27DTP D27DT G32D 0

0 1. Engine Number 2. Chassis Number

Checks before Starting a Journey .............. 1-2

0 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY (I)

5. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the danger

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (I) 0

CAUTIONS FOR DIRECT INJECTION TYPE DIESEL ENGINE (I) 0

0 PRECAUTIONS REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION & ALTERATION (I)

Remote Control Key* and Ignition Key ...... 2-2

0 Door Lock Button

1 Lock (briefly press)

3 • When the theft deterrent mode is activated, the hazard warning

10 1. Unlock (briefly press)

12 • When the deterrent mode is deactivated, hazard warning

This indicator comes on when the ig-

0 ARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM ALARM

Opening and Closing Devices .................... 3-2

0 Sunroof Switch Fuel Filler Door

0 DRIVER’S DOOR WINDOW SWITCH

0 SUNROOF SLIDING OPERATION

Interior Switches ......................................... 4-2 Heated Glass Switch ................................. 4-24

4-2 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-3

0 Automatic Light &

4-4 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-5

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-7

1 Front Wiper Wiper and Washer Switch

4-8 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-9

10 Operates automatically according to

4-10 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-11

0 CRUISE CONTROL Setting a Desired Speed

4-12 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-13

4-14 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-15

0 Easy Access Button (Driver’s Seat)*

4-16 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

Outside Rearview Mirror Control 0

Mirror Selection Switch

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-17

0 USB flash drive port

2 Stereo jack Stereo Jack*

4-18 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-19

2 MULTI-STATION DISPLAY WINDOW

4-20 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org

GETtheMANUALS.orgINTERIOR SWITCHES 4-21

4-22 INTERIOR SWITCHESGETtheMANUALS.org